Home

BBEdit 8.2 User Manual

1. 090e EB Wrap Music as z l elma 5 Last Saved 08 22 04 15 41 44 Pg a4 f i Ne Ma n Me File Path Users Sh Wrap Music Dio lt Wrap Music This is a short line of text This is a much longer line of text much longer than 65 characters In fact it s And this is another short line l 3 32 no symbol selected OB j This is what happens when you wrap to 65 characters with Paragraph Fill off eee Wrap Music l ele Last Saved 08 22 04 15 42 02 bi I 5 z z z a File Path Users Sh Wrap Music Pio lt L Wrap Music ox This is a short line of text This is a much longer Line of text much longer than 65 characters In fact it s so long it goes off the right edge of the window And this is another short Line 5 32 no symbol selected B j gt BBEdit breaks the long line at a width of 65 characters twice because the line was so long and leaves the short lines alone This is what happens to the same text when you wrap with Paragraph Fill on eee Wrap Music oO sm oO Last Saved 08 22 04 15 42 32 ip 2 f ait at i File Path Users Sh Wrap Music gt B lt C Wrap Music This is a short Line of text This is a much longer line of text much longer than 65 characters In fact it s so long it goes off the right e
2. HTML Tool Descriptions 217 Position The Position dialog allows you to edit the positioning properties of a selector Position Selector td th Position Default E A a Size amp Constraints The Size amp Constraints dialog allows you to edit the size and constraint properties of a selector Size amp Constraints Selector td th II Effects The Effects dialog allows you to edit the z index overflow and visibility properties of a selector Effects Selector body zme O Overflow Default E Visibility Default zs 218 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Clipping The Clipping dialog allows you to edit the clipping properties of a selector Clipping Selector td th Clipping Default Ea L aaae8 Cane aD Background The Background dialog allows you to edit background image background color background repeat background position and background attachment properties The Image field allows you to select an image file by clicking the File button or by using drag and drop from the Finder Background Selector BODY Addressing Full J Root Color B Repeat Defaut FA Left TY B Attach Default F Tp fj Relative HTML Tool Descriptions 219 220 Font The Font dialog allows you to edit values for the following font prop
3. new_window or separate_windows which have the following effect e front_window All files in aFileList are opened in the frontmost text window If there is no text window open BBEdit will create a new one e new_window All files in aFileList are opened into a new text window e separate_windows Each file in aFileList is opened into its own text window Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Moving Documents The move command can be used to move text documents between text windows For example tell application TextWrangler if count of text windows gt 0 then select text window 1 repeat while count of text windows gt 1 set ct to count documents of text window 2 repeat with i from 1 to ct move document 1 of text window 2 to text window 1 end repeat end repeat else beep end if end tell Referencing Documents Previously documents were indexed inside of multi document windows by their display order in the documents drawer This meant that document 1 of the application might not be the active document which in turn required scripts to make special provisions to deal with the presence of multiple documents in a single window In order to handle this BBEdit 8 introduced the active document property which you could always use to specify the currently active document of a given text window For example active document of text window 1 of application BBEdit Although BBEdit still support
4. Find amp Replace All Matches O Leave Open Save to Disk Confirm Saves Cancel M Show Results Proceed This is what each of the options does Replaces all occurrences of the search string This OPH x with the replace string and Leave Open Leaves all the files open so that you can inspect the replacements If there are many files that contain the search string BBEdit may run out of memory Save to Disk Saves each file with the changes When the Confirm Saves setting is active you will have an opportunity to approve the changes before BBEdit saves them to disk You should not turn this off unless you are sure that the replace operation being done is what you want Show Results Opens a results browser listing each of the files which was changed and the number of changes in each file Chapter 7 Searching Quick Search The Quick Search command performs an incremental search In other words it shows the matching text as you type the search string so you only have to type until you find the text you want To use Quick Search 1 Choose Quick Search from the Search menu 2 Type the string you are looking for in the Quick Search window eoo Quick Search Search For F M Case Sensitive Q Search Backwards As you type BBEdit selects the first occurrence of what you have typed so far 3 To find the next occurrence of the matching text click Find Again or press the Return or
5. HTML Tools Preferences The HTML Tools preferences set options for the HTML Tools HTML Preview Preferences 179 180 HTML Updater Mark the Preserve File Dates checkbox to have modification dates remain unchanged when updating HTML files using the Update Tool Syntax Checker Warnings You can have the HTML Syntax Checker warn you when an HTML element is implicitly closed Examples of these sorts of tags are lt P gt and lt LI gt The closing tags for these elements are optional in some HTML specifications You can likewise have the Syntax Checker warn you about missing spaces before the closure for empty XML elements You can also configure the Syntax Checker to skip specifically marked blocks which begin with the comment lt bbpragma ignore_errors on gt and end with the comment lt bbpragma ignore_errors off gt Among other things this option may be useful in preventing known warnings where you must include non standard markup for compatibility with old browsers Link Checker Warnings Choose the type of warnings to be issued by the HTML link checker Remote Links flags each offsite link so that it can be checked for validity manually Incorrect Pathname Case flags situations where the name of a file as specified in an HTML document does not exactly match the name of the file on disk which can cause problems when files are uploaded to servers with a case sensitive file system Folder Aliases in URL P
6. Tag Maker Markup gt Tag Maker Edit Tag Markup gt Edit Tag Close Current Tag Markup gt Close Current Tag Balance Tags Markup gt Balance Tags Document Type Character Set Markup gt Document Type Markup gt Character Set CSS Markup gt CSS submenu Body Properties Markup gt Head Elements gt Body Properties Head Elements Markup gt Head Elements submenu Anchor Markup gt Inline Elements gt Anchor Image Markup gt Inline Elements gt Image Break Markup gt Inline Elements gt Break Font Markup gt Inline Elements gt Font Paragraph Markup gt Block Elements gt Paragraph Div Markup gt Block Elements gt Div Heading Markup gt Block Elements submenu Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Tool Menu Based Equivalent Dreamweaver Markup gt Misc gt Dreamweaver Block Elements Markup gt Block Elements submenu Inline Elements Markup gt Inline Elements submenu List Markup gt Lists gt List Markup gt Lists submenu Table Markup gt Tables gt Table Markup gt Tables submenu Forms Markup gt Forms submenu Phrase Elements Markup gt Phrase Elements submenu Font Style Elements Markup gt Font Style Elements submenu Frames Markup gt Frames submenu Check Syntax Markup gt Check gt Document Syntax Check Links Markup gt Check gt Document Links Update Document
7. m By default BBEdit s grep engine will match the and metacharacters after and before returns respectively If you turn this option off with m will only match at the beginning of the document and will only match at the end of the document If that is what you want however you should consider using the new A Z and z metacharacters instead of and s By default the magic dot metacharacter matches any character except return r If you turn this option on with s however dot will match any character Thus the pattern s will match an entire document x When turned on this option changes the meaning of most whitespace characters notably tabs and spaces and Literal whitespace characters are ignored and the character starts a comment that extends until a literal return or the r escape sequence is encountered Ostensibly this option intends to let you write more readable patterns Advanced Grep Topics 149 150 Perl programmers should already be familiar with these options as they correspond directly to the imsx options for Perl s m and s operators Unadorned these options turn their corresponding behavior on when preceded by a hyphen they turn the behavior off Setting and unsetting options can occur in the same set of parentheses Example Effect imsx Turn all four options on imsx Turn all four options off i msx Turn i
8. 0 00 c cece eee eee eee International Text in BBEdit 31 Unicode 31 Saving Unicode Files 31 Opening Unicode Files 32 Accessing FIP SFTP Servers 0 0 0c cece eee eee eee Opening Files from FTP SFTP Servers 33 Saving Files to FTP SFTP Servers 35 Using FTP SFTP Browsers 36 Using BBEdit from the Command Line 06 Using Fil Groups iesnas ce kere tales A Sess elie a cee aed Creating a File Group 38 Using File Groups 39 Removing Files from a File Group 39 Using Stationery oeie keie seed ed eG Aaa ene R G Hex Dump for Files and Documents 06 66 000 c eee eee Making Backups sssri spirets cee eens Automatic Backups 41 Manual Backups 41 Printing orere reee eg tae tae tee haces E E cel a eas edna Text Printing Options 42 Editing Text with BBEdit Basic BOWS tached Sues ine dee abe tds e iE Aig lie E 4 htt m a Moving Text 46 Multiple Clipboards 47 Drag and Drop 48 Multiple Undo eree eeaeee ieee A We oe Oa aE VE S Window Anatomy 6666 The Status Bar 49 The Split Bar 51 The Navigation Bar 52 The Documents Drawer 53 The View Menu 54 Table of Contents Cursor Movement and Text Selection 0 0 cee eee 55 Clicking and Dragging 55 Arrow Keys 56 Rectangular Selections 57 Working with Rectangular Selections 57 Scrolling the View 59 The Delete Key 60 The Numeric Keypad 60 Go
9. Once you have configured Perforce you can work with files and folders in client spaces using the commands on BBEdit s P4 menu You can apply many commands to the current document You can also select one or more files from a results browser window such as a search results browser or the results browser for the Show Opened command and apply commands If you have an open document which BBEdit does not recognize as being associated with any defined Source Control configuration BBEdit will look for P4CONFIG in its environment If BBEdit finds such a value and finds a config file in an appropriate directory then it will honor that configuration In any such case you must first open a document associated with the configuration so that BBEdit knows where to set the working directory before any commands on the Perforce menu even non file specific commands will become enabled Perforce Menu Commands BBEdit s Perforce menu contains the following commands Edit Performs a p4 edit on the frontmost document or the selected files Revert Performs a p4 revert on the frontmost document or the selected files Revert amp Sync To Head Performs a p4 revert followed by a p4 sync on the frontmost document or the selected files Sync To Head Performs a p4 sync passing the file path of the frontmost document or of the selected files in a results browser to the command Sync To Revision Displays
10. 123 Go to Center Line 123 Go to Previous Next Error 123 Go to Previous Next Placeholder 123 Find Differences 124 Apply to New 124 Apply to Old 124 Compare Again 124 Find Definition 124 107 Basic Searching and Replacing This section describes the basic steps for searching and replacing text in a document Later sections in this chapter cover more advanced techniques To search and replace text in the front document follow these steps 1 Choose Find from the Search menu BBEdit opens the Find amp Replace dialog box Find amp Replace Search For CH Use Grep Patterns 3 C Fid BBEdit 8 0 kA Replace O Start at To Search Selection Only p 2 arcn gt Cc 1On Replace All Wrap Around _ Extend Selection l C Search Backward Don t Find searc ackwards Don t Find _ J Case Sensitive Match Entire Words Cancel Replace With O BBEdit 8 1 Multi File Search Saved Search Sources i Front Document foo 4 Other Options For now disregard the bottom part of the dialog the Multi File Search checkbox and everything below it The section Multi File Searching later in this chapter discusses this part of the dialog box 2 Type the string you are looking for in the Search For text field You can use special characters in the Search For text field to search for tabs line breaks or
11. 24 Note e Macintosh line breaks ASCII 13 if you will be using the file with Classic Macintosh applications or will be sending it to another Macintosh user e DOS line breaks ASCII 13 10 if the file resides on a DOS or Windows file server or if you will be sending it to someone who uses a DOS or Windows system e Unicode line breaks for a file saved in any Unicode format See Saving Unicode Files on page 31 Setting the Encoding BBEdit lets you save documents using any character set encoding supported by Mac OS X including a variety of Unicode formats see Saving Unicode Files on page 31 To select an encoding choose its name from the Encoding pop up menu The list of available encodings is controlled by your preference settings see Text Encodings Preferences on page 188 When you select an encoding that requires a Unicode file format you can also choose Unicode as an option from the Line Breaks pop up menu in this dialog Unicode has its own line ending standard Files saved as Unicode from BBEdit are given a type of utxt the standard for Unicode text files on the Mac UTF 8 files are given a type of TEXT for compatibility with other applications however BBEdit will also recognize such files with type UTF8 You can choose which encodings appear in the Encoding pop up menu in the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window File State You can control whether BBEdit sa
12. 32 Chapter 3 Working with Files If you know that a file you are trying to open is in Unicode but it displays as gibberish on your screen close its window without saving Then try reopening the file using the Open As pop up menu in the Open dialog to specify whether to treat the file as Unicode byte swapped little endian Unicode or UTF 8 When opening a malformed UTF 8 document BBEdit will present an alert to warn you When such a file is encountered during multi file searching a warning will be logged Accessing FTP SFTP Servers BBEdit can open files directly from and save them to any available FTP server It can also open and save files directly via SFTP SSH File Transfer Protocol In order to access a server via SFTP that server must be running a compatible version of sshd A great many machines including Mac OS X systems for which Remote Login is turned on in the Sharing preferences satisfy these criteria Aside from choosing the SFTP checkbox in the Open from Save to dialogs or the FTP SFTP Browser opening and saving files via SFTP works just like it does when using ordinary FTP A file opened via SFTP will appear in the Open Recent submenu with an sftp URL and you can send a get URL event to BBEdit with an sftp URL as well Opening Files from FTP SFTP Servers To directly open a file from an FTP or SFTP server choose Open from FTP SFTP Server from the File menu The following dialog
13. Additionally if the Use Unicode Line Breaks option is selected BBEdit will use Unicode line breaks by default for newly created or converted Unicode documents instead of the chosen platform specific line breaks Default Text Encoding This menu determines which character set encoding BBEdit will save a document with if the document does not contain an encoding specification Make Backups Before Saving Select this checkbox to tell BBEdit to make automatic backup copies of every file as you save it This preference setting establishes the defaults for newly created documents and for documents in which there are no saved backup settings Text Files Saving Preferences 191 192 If you prefer that BBEdit create backup files in the same folders that your documents are already saved in choose the option for Use Document s Folder This is the default setting If you prefer to save backups in a different folder choose the Use Folder setting instead You can click the Choose button to select the desired backup folder using a dialog or just drag the folder to the box Even if you do not set BBEdit to perform general backups here you can still set backup options for individual files by using the Backup Options command in the File menu Save Document State Select this option to have BBEdit store document state information A document s state information includes various display properties such as window position font settings etc
14. Cluster only parens with modifiers Positive lookahead assertion 71 Negative lookahead assertion lt Positive lookbehind assertion lt Negative lookbehind assertion 20 1 Match with if then else 20 Match with if then Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Extension Meaning gt Match non backtracking subpattern once only R Recursive pattern Comments The sequence marks the start of a comment which continues up to the next closing parenthesis Nested parentheses are not permitted The characters that make up a comment play no part in the pattern matching at all Search for foo Hello this is a comment bar Will match foobar Pattern Modifiers The settings for case sensitivity multi line matching whether the dot character can match returns and extended syntax can be turned on and off within a pattern by including sequences of letters between and Modifier Meaning Default i case insensitive according to Case Sensitive checkbox in Find amp Replace dialog m allow and to match at r on s allow to match r off x ignore most white space and allow off inline comments in grep patterns i By default BBEdit obeys the Case Sensitive checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog or the corresponding property of the search options when using the scripting interface The i option overrides this setting
15. Show Working Copy Status Compare Revisions Compare Arbitrary Revisions Compare with Base Compare with Previous Compare with Head Resolved Show Annotation Show Revision History Add Delete Revert amp Delete Shift Go to Previous Conflict Go to Next Conflict Appendix A Command Reference Compiler CodeWarrior IDE Absoft Tools Compile Cmd K Check Syntax Cmd Y Debug Cmd l Set Breakpoint Cmd Shift I Set Breakpoint amp Go Cmd Opt Shift Add Add amp Compile Precompile Preprocess Bring Up To Date Cmd U Make Debug Cmd R Run Cmd Opt R Scripts Open Script Editor Open Scripting Dictionary Open Scripts Folder Start Stop Recording Installed scripts Text Factories Open Text Factories Folder Installed text factories Markup Tag Maker Edit Tag Close Current Tag Balance Tags Document Type Character Set CSS Body Properties Head Elements Block Elements Lists Tables Forms Inline Phrase Elements Font Style Elements Frames Check Update Includes Utilities Misc Preview in BBEdit Cmd M Cmd Opt M Cmd Opt B see below see below see next column see next column see page 316 see page 316 see page 316 see page 316 see page 316 see page 316 see page 316 see page 317 see page 317 see page 317 see page 317 Preview in lt Default Browser gt Cmd Ctl P Preview With Markup gt CSS import
16. Text Options Printing Options Special Characters Edit gt Insert File Contents File Path Folder Listing Folder Path Page Break Cmd N Cmd Ctl N Cmd Shift N Cmd Opt N Cmd Z Cmad Shift Z Cmd Ctl Z Cmd X Cmad Shift X Cmd C Cmad Shift C Cmd V Cmad Shift V Cmd Ctl V Cmd A Cmd Shift A Cmd L Cmd Opt L see below Ctl Ctl Cmd Opt Cmd Shift Listing by Menu and Command Name 311 Text Show Fonts Balance Exchange Characters Exchange Words Change Case Change Case Shift Left Shift Left One Space Shift Right Shift Right One Space Un Comment Selection Hard Wrap Hard Wrap Add Line Breaks Remove Line Breaks Apply Text Factory Educate Quotes Straighten Quotes Add Remove Line Numbers Prefix Suffix Lines Sort Lines Process Duplicate Lines Process Lines Containing Rewrap Quoted Text Rewrap Quoted Text Increase Quote Level Decrease Quote Level Strip Quotes Zap Gremlins Zap Gremlins Entab Entab Detab Detab Normalize Line Endings Find Next Misspelled Word Find All Misspelled Words Show Spelling Panel View Cmd B Cmd gt Cmd Opt gt Opt Cmd Cmd Shift Cmad Cmd Shift Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Cmd Opt Opt Opt Opt Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Shift see next column Appendix A Command Reference Search Find Quick Search Find Again Find Again reverse Find Selecti
17. User Manual BBEdit 8 Professional HTML and Text Editor for the Macintosh Bare Bones Software Inc BBEdit 8 2 Product Design Product Engineering Engineers Emeritus Documentation Additional Engineering Icon amp Packaging Design Exuberant Ctags PCRE Library Package PopupFuncs Technology Visibone color arrangements HTML Tidy technology Rich Siegel Patrick Woolsey Jim Correia Steve Kalkwarf Jim Correia Jon Hueras Steve Kalkwarf Rich Siegel Chris Borton Tom Emerson Pete Gontier Jamie McCarthy John Norstad Jon Pugh Mark Romano Rob Vaterlaus Stephen Chernicoff Caroline Rose Jerry Kindall John Gruber Jeff Mattson Philip Borenstein Simon Jester Rich Siegel Patrick Woolsey Polaschek Computing http www polaschek computing com Ultra Maroon Design http www ultramaroon com 1996 2004 Darren Hiebert http ctags sourceforge net written by Philip Hazel and 1997 2000 University of Cambridge England Eric Slosser 1999 2000 VisiBone http www visibone com 1998 2003 World Wide Web Consortium http tidy sourceforge net BBEdit and the BBEdit User s Guide are copyright 1992 2005 Bare Bones Software Inc All rights reserved Produced published in USA Bare Bones Software Inc P O Box 1048 Bedford MA 01730 01048 781 687 0700 781 687 0711 fax http www barebones com Sales amp customer service sales barebones com Technical
18. Using Development Environments Once you have set up BBEdit for the development environments you plan to use the development tools communicate with BBEdit to report errors and changes in files You use the commands in the appropriate menu the Compiler menu or the Shebang menu to send instructions to the development environment To switch to a development environment or to launch it if it is not running choose it from the appropriate menu When you choose the Compile command or any other command that causes files in the project to be recompiled the development environment temporarily becomes the active application If there are any compilation errors BBEdit creates a Compile Errors browser that you can use to examine the errors BBEdit and the Unix Command Line This section describes BBEdit s facilities for interacting with the Unix command line shell worksheets for issuing commands to the Unix shell and the bbedit and bbdiff command line tools for invoking BBEdit from the command line Shell Worksheets BBEdit allows you to store and execute Unix command lines by means of a shell worksheet The New submenu of the File menu contains two commands for opening a shell worksheet The first Shell Worksheet path opens a worksheet for the default Unix shell that you have designated in the Tools preference panel where path is the pathname of that shell The second simply called Shell Worksheet displays a
19. Web Safe Colors The Web Safe Colors palette displays the 216 colors that display properly in Web browsers on all computers running in 256 color mode The colors are based on a 6 x 6 x 6 color cube that adds red green and blue in 20 increments 3 Web Safe Colors Click or drag to insert the HTML color code Use a color from this palette for Web page backgrounds and text to reduce the chance that the incorrect color possibly dithered will be used instead of a pure color There are four layouts available horizontal vertical and VisiBone and VisiBone 2 You can choose a layout in the HTML Colors preference panel Click a color swatch to insert the color s RGB value in HTML format that is RRGGBB at the insertion point You can also drag a color swatch into a document window to place the color value The Web Safe Color palette is CSS aware and will insert color values in CSS format that is unquoted and minimized when appropriate Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools HTML Translation The following options are available in the Translate tool available in the Utilities submenu of the Markup menu Remove Tags When converting HTML to TEXT the Translate tool will remove all HTML tags and comments Paragraphs When converting TEXT to HTML the Translate tool finds paragraphs in the same way the Paragraph tool does and then adds opening and closing paragraph tags around them When converting HTML to TEX
20. bJane b Jane s Tell Jane about the monkey Afoo foobar Will not match This is good foo Writing Search Patterns 131 132 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters The character class construct lets you specify a set or a range of characters to match or to ignore A character class is constructed by placing a pair of square brackets around the group or range of characters you wish to include To exclude or ignore all characters specified by a character class add a caret character just after the opening bracket For example Character Class Matches xyz any one of the characters x y z xyz any character except x y Z a z any character in the range a to z You can use any number of characters or ranges between the brackets Here are some examples Character Class Matches aeiou any vowel aeiou any character that is not a vowel a zA Z0 9 any character from a z A Z or 0 9 aeiou0 9 any character that is neither a vowel nor a digit A character class matches when the search encounters any one of the characters in the pattern However the contents of a set are only treated as separate characters not as words For example if your search pattern is beans and the text in the window is lima beans BBEdit will report a match at the a of the word lima To include the character in a set or a range place it immediately after the op
21. www w3 org Cancel _ lt html gt lt head gt lt titleWelcome to Bare Bones Software lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and publishes best OA lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mailsmith superge Type the number of the line you want to move to and click Go To Note The Go To Line command honors the Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views option in the Text Editing preferences panel Cursor Movement and Text Selection 61 62 Note Note Function Keys If your keyboard has function keys you can use the following key equivalents for cutting and pasting to scroll and to move the insertion point No Modifier Option Command Shift F1 Undo Redo F2 Cut Cut amp Append F3 Copy Copy amp Append F4 Paste del forward delete delete to delete to end of word end of line Home scroll to top of move insertion document point to start of document End scroll to end of move insertion document point to end of document Pg Up scroll page up Pg Dn scroll page down Holding down the Command and Option keys as you press the forward delete key deletes to the end of the document Resolving URLs To resolve a URL Uniform Resource Locator you can Command click anyw
22. you can use a file filter Mark the Use File Filter checkbox in the search options sheet and then choose the desired file filter from the Filters pop up menu If none of the filters you have already defined meets your needs you can define a new one or create a temporary filter New Filter To define a new saved file filter select New Filter from the pop up menu BBEdit will ask you for a filter name then the Edit File Filter dialog below appears You can also define new file filters in the File Filters preferences panel see page 174 Edit File Filter Search Criteria Every AND More Criteria Fewer Criteria Any OR File Name Y Contains Vv html Revert Close Save If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add filters in the Find amp Replace dialog To work around this close the Preferences window before using the Find amp Replace dialog to add new filters The Edit File Filter dialog lets you specify multiple criteria that determine whether a given file is selected by the filter You can choose whether these criteria are exclusive that is whether a file must meet every listed test to be selected or inclusive that is whether a file that meets any of the tests is selected using the Every AND and Any OR radio buttons at the top of the dialog Multi File Searching 117 118 Note Tip To add a test click More Criteria A new row appears in the dialog as shown b
23. Allow Menu Key Equivalents to Autorepeat 166 When Dragging Show 166 List Display Font 166 Verify Open Files After 166 Remember the N most recently used items 166 Browser Display Preferences 066s c cece ees 167 Results Lists 167 Disk Browsers 167 Contextual Menu Preferences 6 666 c cece eee ees 167 Differences Preferences 0 167 Arrange Windows on 167 Differences Window Placement 167 Arrange Windows 168 Multi File Differences 168 Options 168 Documents Preferences 0 eee eens 168 New amp Opened Documents 168 Documents Opened from Other Applications 168 Warn Before Closing a Window Containing Multiple Documents 168 Documents Drawer Preferences 0 0 c cece cece eens 169 Open the Documents Drawer 169 Open the Documents Drawer on the 169 Next Document and Previous Document Navigate in 169 Allow Documents Drawer to Acquire Keyboard Focus 169 Editing General Preferences 6 0666 c cece 169 Allow Single Click Line Selection 169 Double Click to Balance 169 Confirm Non Undoable Editing Actions 170 Include Delimiter Characters when Balancing 170 Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views 170 Extra Space in Text Views 170 Turn Off Text Smoothing 170 Editing Keyboard Preferences 6060 c cece eens 170 Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete 170 Use Numeric Keypad
24. BBEdit will open an error results browser to display any errors generated by the command BBEdit will also open an error results browser to list compilation errors generated by commands issued to CodeWarrior from the Compiler menu or errors generated by Perl scripts e088 HTML Syntax Errors M 7 Errors _ 0 Warning Notes Open Error File index copy html Line 10 Value description for id attribute of element lt meta gt must be unique already in use near line 8 Error File index y html Line Document type doesn t permit attribute idd within element lt ul gt Error File index copy html Line 323 Value of attribute href for element lt a gt is invalid URL path needs encoding http validator w3 ord Error File index copy html Line 323 Document type doesn t permit empty XML element lt img gt Error File index copy html Line 324 Document type doesn t permit empty XML element lt img gt 4 a F if lin lio fo a gt Last Saved 08 22 04 22 33 19 z z a a L File Path Users Shared doc_examples index copy html eat lt div id menuBox gt a lt ul id menubar gt lt li class R lt a href company id companyActuator class menuhead gt Company lt a gt fes lt ul idd compangMenu gt lt li gt j lt a href company history shtml class menui tem History lt a gt lt li gt lt li gt v 48 17 no symbol selected j gt Eac
25. Default By O Cr O Oer O Deru m aaaea m 216 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Padding Margins These similar dialogs allow you to edit the padding and margin properties In both cases the icons on the left in the dialogs represent the entire box top right bottom and left respectively Padding Padding Selector BODY Selector BODY O _ Je O e m A E O im 18 m Cy em Leal B U tem fs m g H tem g Cay C ay When you are working with the individual margin fields in these dialogs as opposed to the overall value they behave the same way CSS value replication does e If right is missing it takes on the value of top e If bottom is missing it takes on the value of top e If left is missing it takes on the value of right so an empty field has special meaning it means replicate the related value If you want to specify a value for any given side you must enter it explicitly Layout The Layout dialog allows you to edit the page layout properties of a selector Layout Selector td th H 2px 3 Float Default RA E px 3 Clear Default Y Display Default ka
26. Disk Browser 21 Disk Browsers Show File Icons 167 disk browsers 15 20 21 25 158 file list panel 160 status bar 159 text panel 160 DIV division tag 223 DOCTYPE 206 document proxy icon 51 54 documents comparing 74 creating 21 editing text 46 inserting text 72 modification indicator 50 saving 21 22 window anatomy 49 Documents Opened from Other Applications 168 Documents Preferences 168 Don t Translate PDFs 165 DOS line breaks 24 double clicking 25 drag and drop in document windows 48 to BBEdit application icon 25 to Windows floating window 25 with HTML Tools 240 Dreamweaver 236 DT tag 224 dynamic menus 3 Edit Tag command 212 Editing General Preferences 169 Keyboard Preferences 170 editing text 46 shortcuts 323 Editor Defaults Preferences 172 EM tag 231 Emacs Key Bindings 171 325 encoding 24 25 31 188 End key 62 Entab command 90 Enter key 4 Enter Search String command 122 error browser 281 escape codes 129 Escape key 4 Exchange with Next command 104 exclude matches 112 expanding tabs 63 extending the selection 56 61 extensions see plug ins external spell checker 79 exuberant ctags 278 F keys 62 Favorites 17 FIELDSET tag 226 file filters 117 File Filters Preferences 174 File Group creating 21 file groups 21 37 file list panel 160 file placeholder 248 File Search Preferences 174 file_extension placeholder 248 File pop up menu 50 Filters 288 filters file 117 Find amp Mark
27. However sometimes you will need to include an exact or literal instance of these characters in your grep pattern In this case you must use the backslash character before that special character to have it be treated literally this is known as escaping the special character To search for a backslash character itself double it so that its first appearance will escape the second For example perhaps the most common special character in grep is the dot In grep a dot character will match any character except a return But what if you only want to match a literal dot If you escape the dot it will only match another literal dot character in your text So most characters match themselves and even the special characters will match themselves if they are preceded by a backslash BBEdit s grep syntax coloring helps make this clear When passing grep patterns to BBEdit via AppleScript be aware that both the backslash and double quote characters have special meaning to AppleScript In order to pass these through correctly you must escape them in your script Thus to pass r for a carriage return to BBEdit you must write r in your AppleScript string Writing Search Patterns 129 Note WARNING Wildcards Match Types of Characters These special characters or metacharacters are used to match certain types of other characters Wildcard Matches any character except a line break that
28. If you invoke the Document tool while working on an existing document you will see a Create New Window checkbox next to the Template menu Normally this option will be on but if you deactivate it the specified template and other applicable Document values will be inserted into the currently open document so as to enclose the document s contents within the template s lt BODY gt tags The contents of the document are inserted at the template s BODYTEXT placeholder so each template to be used in this manner must contain this placeholder Regardless of whether you use a template to create a new document or to impose HTML markup on an existing document the template file itself is never changed Rather its contents are simply copied into the document that the template has been used on Templates can make full use of placeholders and include files which are fully documented in Appendix C Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools CHAPTER Using the Glossary This chapter describes BBEdit s powerful Glossary command The Glossary provides an easy way to store and access frequently used text of any sort whether sections of program code HTML markup or just about anything else The Glossary s language sensitive set selection and its ability to perform keyword substitution combined with an option to run scripts and insert their results further extends its flexibility and usefulness In this chapter The Glossary Command 6 ee
29. If you open a file which contains a mixture of Mac Unix and DOS Windows line endings the Translate Line Breaks option may not suffice to properly convert the document for viewing and editing After conversion the document may appear to not have any line breaks at all this usually happens if the first line break in the file is a Mac line break and all the rest are Unix or to have an invisible character at the beginning of each line Should this happen use Normalize Line Breaks to convert the remaining line endings and save the document Once you have done this the document s line endings will be consistent and BBEdit s line break translation will suffice when you next open it Chapter 5 Text Transformations Note Text Factories A text factory document enables you to apply BBEdit s powerful text transformation commands in the order and fashion that you decide to whatever collection of files you choose So for example if you routinely need to process a folder full of server logs by reducing them to lines containing www apple com prefixing each line with a line number and converting the file s line endings to Macintosh you can assemble and save a text factory to do that work for you and apply it at any time eoe My new factory Creating and Configuring Text Factories To create a new text factory choose the Text Factory command from the New submenu of the File menu BBEdit will create a text factory do
30. See How BBEdit Wraps Text on page 66 for more information Add Line Breaks This command inserts a hard line break at the end of each line of text as displayed See How BBEdit Wraps Text on page 66 for more information Remove Line Breaks This command removes carriage returns and spaces from sections of text Use this command to turn text that has hard line breaks into text that can be soft wrapped See How BBEdit Wraps Text on page 66 for more information Text Menu Commands 83 84 Note Apply Text Factory This command presents a submenu listing the text factories stored in BBEdit s application support folder You can apply a text factory to the current document by choosing it from the submenu See Text Factories on page 91 for more information on creating and using Text Factories Apply Text Factory lt recent gt This command applies the listed text factory to the current document If you have not previously applied any text factory during the current launch of the application this menu item will be disabled until you do so Convert to ASCII This command will convert certain eight bit Mac Roman characters characters whose decimal values are greater than 128 and less than 255 to 7 bit printable ASCII range equivalents Converted characters include umlauted and accented vowels ligatures typographer s quotes and various specialized punctuation forms This conversion may entail expansion to mult
31. Set Key button at the top of their palettes Select a filter or script from the list and click this button to set a keyboard shortcut for the selected item Manually Sorting the Filter and Script Lists By default items in the Perl Filters List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Foo would sort before 01 Bar For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Canceling Perl Operations You can press the Cancel button in the progress dialog to cancel a task directly from within BBEdit Since BBEdit must kill the spawned Perl or Python or shell process with a SIGINT any unflushed data in open filehandles including STDOUT and STDERR will be lost unless the script takes measures to prevent this Perl Python and Shell Scripting 289 IMPORTANT Working with CVS BBEdit offers integrated support for CVS the Concurrent Versions System source control package CVS Information http www cvshome org Quick Start for SSH accessed Repositories If you already have a CVS working c
32. This preference option also controls the order in which documents appear in the navigation bar s pop up menu and the Documents submenus of the Window menu See Windows Preferences on page 198 The document drawer also contains an action menu much like the Finder s which you can use to rearrange documents epe index html as g F amp AIEA Last Saved 08 22 04 D f PEER ES B File Path Users x html 40 ES f gt 5 index html 1 New lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C 0TD HTML 4 61 Transitional EN http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd gt Open in New Window lt html gt i lt head gt Open in Separate Window lt titleWelcome to Bare Bones Software lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt Clo lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset iso 8859 1 se lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and publ Close Others lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mailsmit b Save E no symbol selected lt 8 Compare Selected To close a document you can choose Close Document from the File menu click on the close box next to its name in the drawer select it in the drawer and apply the Close command from the drawer s action menu or Control click on it in the drawer and select Close from the contextual menu You can also choose
33. amp Find Again command 109 123 Replace All 109 113 120 123 Replace command 122 replacing text 46 see also searching Return key 4 rubber stamp 43 S SAMP tag 231 Save a Copy command 23 Save a Copy to FTP Server command 36 Save As command 22 Save As options line breaks 23 Options button 23 Save As Stationery 23 Save command 22 Save Selection command 23 Save to FTP Server command 35 script placeholder 249 251 script systems 81 SCRIPT tag 222 229 Scripts 289 Scripts menu 14 Scripts palette 4 14 309 scrolling synchronized 104 search results window 113 161 searching 108 all open documents 115 backward 110 121 case sensitive 110 121 exclude matches 112 extending selection 110 for non printing characters 111 for whole words 110 grep 110 see also grep in a folder 115 in multiple files 111 in results of a previous search 115 in selection only 110 menu reference 121 multiple files 110 non printing characters 133 on a Web site 115 replacing in multiple files 120 results window 113 161 search set 114 wrap around 110 Select All command 4 46 Select Line command 46 Select Paragraph command 46 select placeholder 249 SELECT tag 226 selected text 46 selecting text 46 55 by clicking 55 extending the selection 56 rectangular selection 57 selend placeholder 249 selstart placeholder 249 Send to Back command 104 Services menu 22 Set Breakpoint command 301 Set Key button 305 Set Marker command 50 70 S
34. dialog below appears Set Menu Keys gt BBEdit a gt File gt Edit gt Text gt View gt Search gt Tools gt Markup gt Window gt 1 Y P4 Edit Revert Sync To Head Revert amp Sync To Head Sync To Revision Sync All Submit Compare Revisions Reset All Clear To set the key equivalent for a menu command find it in the Set Menu Keys dialog click the Set button and type the desired keystroke To remove the key equivalent from the selected menu command click the Clear button Click the Reset All button to restore all key equivalents to their default values as listed in this Appendix Available Key Combinations All menu key combinations must include either the Command key or the Control key or both except function keys which may be used unmodified The Help Home End Page Up and Page Down keys can be used in menu key combinations as well The Help key can be assigned without modifiers the others must be used in combination with at least either the Command or Control key If the Auto Assign Shortcut Keys option in the Windows panel of the Preferences is turned on the key combinations Command 0 through Command 9 will be reserved for file entries on the Window menu There may also be other key combinations which the operating system preempts such as Command Tab Appendix A Command Reference Listing by Menu and Command Name BBEdit Menu About BBEdit Plug In Info Prefe
35. king Sometimes however parentheses are needed only for clustering not capturing BBEdit now supports non capturing parentheses using the syntax PATTERN That is if an open parenthesis is followed by the subpattern matched by that pair of parentheses is not counted when computing the backreferences For example if the text red king is matched against the pattern xed white king queen the backreferences will be set as follows l red 2 king Perl Style Pattern Extensions BBEdit s grep engine supports several extended sequences which provide grep patterns with super powers from another universe Their syntax is in the form 2KEY in other words an open parenthesis followed by a question mark followed by a KEY for the particular grep extension followed by the rest of the subpattern and a closing parenthesis This syntax specifically an open parenthesis followed by a question mark was not valid in older versions of BBEdit thus none of these extensions will conflict with old patterns We have already seen one such extension in the previous section of this document non capturing parentheses The remainder are listed in the chart below and discussed in detail afterward Extension Meaning Gas Cluster only parentheses no capturing QH Comment discard all text between the parentheses imsx imsx Enable disable pattern modifiers imsx imsx
36. most recent used items option in the Application panel of the Preferences BBEdit will attempt to open the specified file as described above for Open Selection As with Open Selection you can specify an optional line number and can enclose the file name in angle brackets to limit the search to the default directory specified in the File Search preference panel When specifying a file in the Open File by Name dialog on Mac OS X you can use the shorthand user notation to refer to an arbitrary user s home directory for example admin Documents bigfile c If you select the Match Wildcards checkbox in the Open File by Name dialog you can use the following wildcards in the file name Wildcard Meaning Any single character z Any number of characters Any numeric character Escapes one of the above for example enters a question mark To enter a literal backslash use An International Text Primer Mac OS X includes extensive support for working with international text including Unicode If you have enabled additional text input methods in the International section of the System Preferences you will see the Input menu on the right hand side of the menu bar This menu allows you to change keyboard layouts or script systems as you work Actually even if you have never used a non Roman script system before you may still have used this menu if you have ever chosen an alternate keyboard layo
37. on turn m s and x off The scope of these option changes depends on where in the pattern the setting occurs For settings that are outside any subpattern the effect is the same as if the options were set or unset at the start of matching The following patterns all behave in exactly the same way i abc a i be ab i c abc i In other words all four of the above patterns will match without regard to case Such top level settings apply to the whole pattern unless there are other changes inside subpatterns If there is more than one setting of the same option at the top level the right most setting is used If an option change occurs inside a subpattern the effect is different An option change inside a subpattern affects only that part of the subpattern that follows it so if the Case Sensitive checkbox is turned on Search for a i b c Will match abc or aBc and will not match anything else But if Case Sensitive is turned off the i in the above pattern is superfluous and has no effect By this means options can be made to have different settings in different parts of the pattern Any changes made in one alternative do carry on into subsequent branches within the same subpattern For example Search for a i b c matches ab aB c and C even though when matching C the first branch is abandoned before the option setting Chapter 8
38. otherwise it will not work import URL E File Addressing Full M Use url Notation Relative Media E A Cancel media The media directive allows you to control which stylesheet should be used for different output media e g screen versus printer You can use this dialog to add media rules or given an existing media rule you can use the CSS editing dialogs Edit Tag or Tag Maker to edit the rulesets within media Media projection a S S SA C Cancel Ape 214 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools For example media print body font size 10pt media screen body font size 13px media screen print body line height 1 2 Format The CSS Format command will reformat your CSS markup for easier reading In stand alone CSS files if there is a selection range only the selected text is formatted If there is no selection range the whole file will be formatted In HTML files with embedded CSS if there is a selection range only the selected text will be formatted If there is no selection range BBEdit will format all CSS in the lt style gt lt style gt tag pair that encloses the insertion point If the insertion point is outside a lt style gt lt style gt tag pair or if the selection range spans a lt style gt lt style gt tag pair the formatter will simply beep When formatting CSS embedded into HTML BBEdit will indent the CSS based on the indent level of the ope
39. point consisting of a special separator line and a listing of the files which are about to be committed and their status This separator line and all lines below it will be removed and will not appear as part of the commit message Update Working Copy Updates all the files contained in a working copy folder tree to the HEAD revision BBEdit will display a dialog in which you can select the desired working copy by either dragging and dropping a folder to the folder well or by using the pop up menu on the right which allows you to select any defined Subversion config or any recently accessed folder which is under Subversion s control Update Working Copy Root Sandbox SubversionQA Commit Working Copy Commits all changed files in a working copy to the Subversion repository Uses a working copy selection dialog like that for the Update Working Copy command above Working with Subversion 299 300 Show Working Copy Status Shows pending changes status of the selected working copy If you choose to show updates BBEdit will query the server and also display files for which there are newer revisions on the server Uses a working copy selection dialog like that for the Update Working Copy command above Compare Revisions Displays a dialog which allows you to select any previous future revision of the current file in the repository and perform a Find Differences between that revision and the local rev
40. tags which specify the number and sizes of the desired browser window subdivisions and indicate the URLs of the files to be loaded into each Frame Set This defines a frame set a series of one or more frames You indicate whether the frame set divides the browser window vertically ROWS or horizontally COLS and then indicate the size of each frame in a comma separated list using to tell the browser to use whatever space is left over from the other specified frames Frame sets can be nested For example if you want to create a framed Web page with three rows with the middle row divided into two independent columns you would first define a frame set consisting of three rows Instead of defining the second row with a lt FRAME gt tag however you would open another lt FRAMESET gt tag there this time to specify the two columns for the middle frame which would then be specified by lt FRAME gt tags Frame This defines a frame in a frame set document You will need to specify the URL of the file to be displayed in this frame either using the button or by drag and drop If the frame will be targeted by links in another frame you will also need to give the frame a name You can optionally specify a long description for the frame choose whether the frame can be scrolled and indicate whether the user should be able to resize the frame You can also set margins and borders for the frame Borders are the visible lines between frame
41. this is not their primary function Rather scripts talk directly to a application s internals bypassing its user interface and interacting directly with its data and capabilities If you want to insert some text into a document emulating a user typing into an editing window is not the most efficient way of accomplishing this With AppleScript you just tell the application to insert the text directly If you want the application to save the frontmost document you need not mime choosing Save from the File menu but rather just tell the application to save its frontmost document AppleScript is actually a specific language which resides atop the general Open Scripting Architecture OSA provided by Mac OS X Although AppleScript is by far the most popular OSA language there are others including UserLand Frontier and a JavaScript version All OSA languages are capable of accomplishing similar things although the actual commands you would use differ from one language to the next In this chapter we will focus exclusively on AppleScript since it is the standard scripting language but you should bear in mind that there are other options Scriptable Applications and Apple Events Since AppleScripts must have direct access to an application s internal data structures any application that will be used in an AppleScript must be designed to allow this access We say such applications are scriptable BBEdit is scriptable as are many many other
42. upper lower or normalized which is either upper or lower depending on your HTML Markup preference settings Misc The Misc submenu contains a motley assortment of commands that simply did not seem to fit anywhere else in the command hierarchy including commands related to using BBEdit with other HTML editors Dreamweaver Choose Dreamweaver to open the current HTML document in Macromedia Dreamweaver or to return to Dreamweaver if you opened a page in BBEdit from there Document Size This command displays a report about the document s size and the amount of time it will require to download at various connection speeds Index Document This command generates a list of links to all the lt A gt anchor tags in the current document that have a NAME attribute providing a clickable index of all these anchors If you have used the lt A gt tag to mark your main topics for example all lt H2 gt headers this produces an instant topic level index of the current document The index is placed after the lt BODY gt tag unless the insertion point is in an already existing index in which case the old index is replaced with the new one Do not remove the comment markers around the index if you want to be able to update it in the future Index Document also adds lt A name gt tags to all heading tags that do not already have them Index Folder This command works like Index Document but produces an index of the HTML files within a sp
43. without moving the insertion point Cursor Movement and Text Selection 59 60 Note Accelerated Scrolling When clicking the arrows in a scroll bar you can use the Command and Option keys to accelerate the scrolling These shortcuts also apply if you use a mouse with a built in scroll wheel Modifier Scroll Speed none Normal Command 2x accelerated Option 3x accelerated Command Option 6x accelerated The Delete Key The Delete key deletes the character to the left of the insertion point If you have selected text the Delete key deletes all the text in the selection You can use the Command and Option keys to modify the way the Delete key works Modifier Action none Deletes character to the left of the insertion point Option Deletes to the beginning of the word to the left of the insertion point Command Deletes to the beginning of the line Command Option Deletes to the beginning of the document Holding down the Shift key with the Delete key makes the Delete key work the same way as the Forward Delete key on extended keyboards This feature is particularly useful on PowerBooks To enable this feature 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu 2 Select Text Editing from the list on the left in the Preferences window 3 Select Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete If you have activated Horizontally for Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior as descr
44. 0 c cece eee eee About AppleScript 254 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events 254 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary 255 Recordable Applications 260 Saving Scripts 261 Using Scripts with Applications 261 Scripting Resources 262 Using AppleScripts in BBEdit 20 Recording Scripts in BBEdit 263 The Scripts Menu 264 The Scripts Palette 265 Organizing Scripts 265 Attaching Scripts to Menu Items 266 BBkEdit s Scripting Model 06 00 c eee eee Script Compatibility 268 Getting and Setting Properties 270 Performing Actions 271 Arranging Documents and Windows 274 Common AppleScript Pitfalls 276 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments Syntax Coloring 278 Exuberant Ctags 278 Switching Between Source and Header Files 281 Using Development Environments 281 BBEdit and the Unix Command Line Shell Worksheets 281 The bbedit Command Line Tool 283 The bbdiff Command Line Tool 284 Table of Contents Chapter 15 Appendix A Perl Python and Shell Scripting Using Unix Scripts 284 Language Resources 285 Line Endings and Unix Scripts 286 Configuring Perl 286 Configuring Python 286 Shebang Menu 286 Filters and Scripts 288 Filters 288 Scripts 289 Additi
45. 50 Perl 284 Perl scripts 284 Perl Unix Filters palette 4 309 Perl Unix Scripts palette 4 309 persistent includes 332 Philip Bar 194 Phrase Elements submenu 230 placeholders 327 RELATIVE 330 AppleScript 251 in glossaries 248 Plug In Info command 305 Plug In Tools palette 4 309 plug ins 305 POSIX Style Character Classes 147 PRE tag 224 Precompile command 302 Preferences 164 Application 165 Browser Display 167 Differences 167 Editor 60 278 File Filters 174 File Search 174 FTP Settings 175 Function Popup 281 HTML Colors 177 HTML Markup 177 HTML Palette 178 HTML Preview 179 HTML Tools 179 HTML Web Site 181 Languages 183 Printing 42 Spelling 186 350 Index Startup 186 Text Colors 187 Text Editing 188 Text Encodings 188 Text Files Opening 189 Saving 191 Text Printing 192 Text Search 193 Tools 196 Windows 198 Prefix Suffix Lines plug in 85 preformatted text 224 Preprocess command 302 Print One Copy command 42 printing 42 Printing Options command 43 Process Lines Containing plug in 87 pull down menus 3 Python configuration 286 Python scripts 284 Q QuickTime Playback 165 QUOTATION tag 230 recording scripts 266 rectangular selection 57 Redo command 48 reflowing paragraphs 68 reformatting HTML 234 regular expressions see grep RELATIVE placeholder 330 Remember Bookmark Passwords 175 Remove Line Breaks command 66 removing comments 235 repetition metacharacters 134 Replace 109 Replace
46. 55632400 container application BBEdit bounds 31 44 543 964 closeable true collapsed false index 1 modal false file alias Hard Disk Users Shared doc_examples index copy html modified false name index copy html position 31 44 resizable true selection contents Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Conversely to set one or more properties at once is very easy set properties of text window 1 to show invisibles true show spaces true soft wrap text true Only the properties specified will be changed The rest will not be modified It is important to note that when setting properties in this fashion you can only set modifiable properties If you attempt to set any read only properties a scripting error will result set properties of text window 1 to show invisibles true modal false expand tabs true The above script command will turn on Show Invisibles and then report a scripting error since modal is a read only property Performing Actions The following sections provide basic information on how to perform various common actions via AppleScript Scripting Searches The ability to script searches presents you with a very powerful tool since you can prepare a script which instructs BBEdit to perform a whole series of search or search and replace operations Consider the scripting command below tell application BBEdit find BBEdit searching in document of text window 1 7 optio
47. 6 0 e cece eee eee Arrow and Delete Keys 0000 e cece eee ee Emacs Key Bindings 6 0 cece eee eee Using universal argument 326 Placeholders and Include Files Placeholders 00 00 cc ccc cece eens Time Formats 330 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder 330 Include Files 0 0 0 0 cc cee eens Include File Locations 331 Simple Includes 331 Persistent Includes 332 Inline versus Block Includes 333 Include Files with Variables 333 Including AppleScripts 334 Including Perl or Python Scripts 335 Other Include Notes 336 Codeless Language Modules Creating a Module 2 nananana eens Required Elements 337 Starting from a Template 338 Language Keys and Properties 0 Index xviii Table of Contents CHAPTER Welcome to BBEdit This chapter introduces you to BBEdit a high performance HTML and text editor for the Macintosh In this chapter Getting Startede sea acs a sks eos is eae aaa toe Ta esa TL arses Tal grasa we 1 What Is BBEdit 6 dre suora re a E Tae a cece eee ene n eee SE 1 How Can I Use BBEdit 0 0 ccc cc ce eee eee E a 2 Development Environments 2 Writing HTML Documents 2 Human Interface Notes 0 6 cece eee teen eens 3 Dynamic Menus 3 Bypassing Options Dialogs 3 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands 3 Contextual Menus 4 Snappy Palettes 4 Dialog Box and
48. BASENAME The name of the file stripped of its rightmost period delimited portion For example if the file is named test html the base name is test while if the file is named test foo html the base name is test foo CLIPBOARD Contents of the current clipboard DATE Current date formatted according to your Format settings in the International panel of the System Preferences FILE File name of the document into which the item is inserted FILE_EXTENSION The filename extension for the file determined as the rightmost period delimited portion of the filename without the period For example whether the file is named test html or test foo html the filename extension is html FUNCTION If the item is being inserted into a source file the name of the current function GMTIME XXX The current GMT time formatted according to the parameters XXX see Time Formats below INDENT When used in a glossary item with multiple lines causes every line after the first to be indented to the same whitespace level as the line in which the item was inserted see the supplied WML glossary for examples Chapter 12 Using the Glossary Placeholder Replaced by INLINE Strips all trailing vertical white space from the item before insertion see also the Glossary preference panel INSERTION Marks the place where BBEdit will place the insertion point af
49. Chapter 8 Searching with Grep The replacement string would look like this const int l 2 The sequence 1 is replaced by the name of the constant the first subpattern from the search pattern and the sequence 2 is replaced by the value of the constant from the second subpattern Our example throws out any comment that may follow the C style constant declaration As an exercise try rewriting the search and replace patterns so they preserve the comment enclosing it in style Pascal comment markers Here are some more examples Data Search for Replace Result 4 2 d d 2 1 2 4 123445829 d d 14 1 123441234 2152 B C d 4 t JB C VI A D 2152 A D 1 234 56 0 9 d 1 dollars and 2 1 234 dollars and cents 56 cents 4 296 459 19 0 9 d 1 dollars and 2 4 296 459 dollars cents and 19 cents 3 5 6 4 00000 0 9 d 1 dollars and 2 3 5 6 4 dollars cents and 00000 cents VY Case Transformations Replace patterns can also change the case of the original text when using subpattern replacements The syntax is similar to Perl s specifically Modifier Effect u Make the next character uppercase U Make all following characters uppercase until reaching another case specifier u L 1 or E l Make the next character lowercase L Make all following characters lowercase until reaching anothe
50. Contextual Menu Preferences The Contextual Menu preferences control which commands BBEdit will present on its contextual menu You can show or remove commands in any category by enabling or disabling the appropriate option Differences Preferences The Differences preferences control the way the Find Differences command places its windows Arrange Windows on The Arrange Windows radio buttons let you choose which screen BBEdit uses to display Differences windows You can choose the main screen the largest screen or the smallest screen When you mark the Use Two Screens checkbox BBEdit displays the Differences window on the second screen This option gives you the largest view of the items you are comparing Keep Windows Arranged provides control over whether BBEdit rearranges the windows being compared when you click a difference item Differences Window Placement The two Above Beneath Compared Files radio buttons let you choose whether the differences window should be above or below the windows of the items you are comparing Browser Display Preferences 167 168 Arrange Windows You can specify whether differences windows are arranged left to right or top to bottom using the Arrange Windows radio buttons Multi File Differences When comparing multiple files the Show File Icons checkbox determines whether the files Finder icons are shown in the Differences window Options The Keep Windows Arranged option controls
51. Current Folder B Scheme B Href indexshtml File gt Addressing Full Relative The URL can be expressed in any of three ways selected by radio buttons below the text field e Full addressing specifies the complete URL including the scheme http the server s domain name and the complete directory path leading to the file within that server Using the HTML Tools 207 208 e Root addressing specifies just the file s location within its host server e Relative addressing specifies the file s location relative to that of the HTML document referring to it For example if the web site resides on a server named www example com in directory foo bar and you are creating a document in that directory named index html with a link to file target html in subdirectory flapdoodle the full address would be http www example com foo bar flapdoodle target html the root address would be 00 bar flapdoodle target html and the relative address would be flapdoodle target html If you have designated a folder on your local disk as the site root for your web site in the HTML Web Sites preference panel the HTML tools will recognize files within that folder and substitute the server domain and site path in its place For instance if your local site root for the web site above is the folder HD HTML Documents Main Site the tools will automatically convert the file path HD
52. Differences dialog You can also select recently opened files from the Recent Files item on the pop up menu The terms new and old are used for convenience since most often you will want to find changes in the same file across time However the Find Differences command can be used to compare any two files or folders 74 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit 4 Select the Compare options that apply When the Case Sensitive option is selected BBEdit distinguishes uppercase from lowercase letters deselect this option if you want BBEdit to consider uppercase and lowercase letters the same When Ignore Curly Quotes is selected BBEdit treats typographers quotes the same as straight quotes When one of the Ignore Spaces options is selected BBEdit ignores any tabs and spaces at the beginning or end of lines Leading or Trailing respectively or runs of more than one space 5 Click Compare to perform the comparison Alternatively you can use the bbdiff command line tool to specify two files or folders and have BBEdit perform a Find Differences on them If the two files are different BBEdit tiles the documents according to your Differences preference settings and opens a Differences window below them OOO cal index_alt shtml o y als Last Saved 08 20 04 19 00 4 FSI MIB LOM sD g z x z l t 2 File Path Users Shared _alt shtm lt gt index_alt shtml F lt php 4 require_once
53. Factories 16 Unix Support 16 Preference Files and Folders 2 0 0c cece cece nec ee nen ee nene 16 BBEdit Preferences File 16 BBEdit Preferences Folder 16 Basic Installation BBEdit is supplied as a single application file Specific system requirements and installation instructions are described below and the organization of BBEdit s supporting files is described in subsequent sections System Requirements BBEdit 8 requires Mac OS X 10 3 5 or later Mac OS X 10 4 or later is required for Automator support The software will not run on Mac OS 9 or any earlier versions of Mac OS X Installing BBEdit Depending on how you obtained BBEdit you will receive either a disk image a dmg file or a CD ROM To install BBEdit just drag the BBEdit application file from the disk image or CD ROM to the Applications folder or other desired location on your hard drive Updating an Existing Copy IMPORTANT In order to update BBEdit when future versions become available you need only quit the BBEdit application and replace it with the updated version The first time you launch a newer version of the software BBEdit will prompt you should any further actions such as updating the command line tools be needed Upgrading from a Previous Version IMPORTANT In addition to installing the BBEdit 8 application if you are upgrading from a previous version you will need to manually copy across any items you added
54. Folder O Other none selected Set C Cancel GROEN 2 Specify the folder in which you want BBEdit to save the backups You can choose the document folder the preferred backup folder set in BBEdit s preferences or some other folder In the latter case click Set or drag a folder icon from the Finder to the path box 3 Select the Make Backup Before Saving option BBEdit will make a backup before you save the file The backup will contain the previously saved version of the file 4 Click OK Manual Backups To make backups manually follow the same steps as above but do not select the Make Backup Before Saving option To make a backup at any point choose the Make Backup Now command from the File menu BBEdit opens a standard directory dialog box so that you can change the location and the name of the backup file The default folder is the folder you specified in the Backup Options dialog box and the default name is the standard backup name as described at the beginning of this section Making Backups 41 e e Printing To print a document choose the Print command from the File menu BBEdit will display a standard print sheet in that document s window Printer HP Laserjet 5Si By Presets Standard wy Copies amp Pages HJ Copies M Collated Pages All OFrom 1 to 9999 Preview Save As PDF Fax Print To print one copy of the active doc
55. HTML Documents Main Site flapdoodle target html to http www example com foo bar flapdoodle target html If you have defined multiple web sites in the HTML Web Sites preference panel the HTML tools will recognize and convert file paths lying in any of their site root folders This will work even when the source and target files are on different sites the tools will convert the target file s pathname to a full URL within the target web site When the source and target files are both on the same site all three address styles full root and relative are available when the files are on different sites root addressing is disabled its radio button is dimmed For files residing in local site root folders on the same disk relative addressing from one file to the other is always available Checking Syntax You can use BBEdit s Check Syntax command see page 232 to validate your HTML documents to the specification defined in their lt DOCTYPE gt SGML prolog BBEdit will apply HTML 4 0 1 Transitional rules when checking any document that does not contain a lt DOCTYPE gt specification Note that an HTML document can display the way you expect it to in a browser and still contain invalid HTML Browsers are designed to be lenient in the markup they accept so you can get away with a certain amount of sloppy markup However producing well formed syntactically correct HTML documents is the best way to assure that your document will di
56. Inc are provided as is and without warranty express and implied including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose In no event will Bare Bones Software Inc be liable for any damages including lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages even if Bare Bones Software Inc is advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by you or any third party General Terms This Agreement can only be modified by a written agreement signed by you and Bare Bones Software Inc and changes from the terms and conditions of this Agreement made in any other manner will be of no effect If any portion of this Agreement shall be held invalid illegal or unenforceable the validity legality and enforceability of the remainder of the Agreement shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts without giving effect to conflict of laws provisions thereof As required by United States export regulations you shall not permit export of the program or any direct products thereof to any country to which export is then controlled by the United States Office of Export Administration unless you have that agency s prior written approval Use duplication and disclosure by the United States Government of the program or any part thereof is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivis
57. Markup Tools palette is a comprehensive listing of BBEdit s numerous HTML markup commands See HTML Tools Palette on page 240 in Chapter 11 for details on what these commands do You can choose which commands appear on the main HTML Tools Palette in the HTML Palette panel of the Preferences window Several other HTML palettes are available each with a specific focus These include Block CSS Entities Font Style Forms Inline Phrase Tables Utilities and Web Safe Colors For more information on these tools please see Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Unix Scripting Tools Unix Filters and Unix Scripts BBEdit integrates directly with any Unix scripting language including Perl shell scripts and any other scripting languages you install such as Python or Ruby The Unix Scripting Tools palette contains a subset of the commands available in the Shebang menu The Unix Filters palette displays shell scripts that read the selection of the current document window as STDIN and replace the selection with STDOUT For more information on these tools see Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Workspace The Workspace submenu gives you the ability to save and reopen sets of palettes You can choose the Save Workspace command to create a named workspace the Delete Workspace command to delete a named workspace If you choose a named workspace from this submenu BBEdit will restore all persistent windows all palettes and the
58. New Document in Chapter 11 Web Server Name Enter the URL of your web server here such as http www example com in the figure BBEdit uses this information to determine which links are on local to your server Site Path on Server Enter the server path of your site s main page here For example if your web site is at http www example com foo bar you would enter http www example com for the Web Server Name as noted above and foo bar for the Site Path on Server Chapter 10 Preferences Note Default Page Name Specify the default name used by your server for the document that is sent to a web browser when a browser accesses a directory without specifying a file name Most servers use index html default html main html or home html Local Site Root Use the Set button to select the folder that is the root of your web site on your local hard disk or on a mounted server volume You can also drag the folder s icon onto the box to the left of the Set button Look for Templates and Include Files In Use the Set button to select the folder that contains your HTML document templates and include files You can also drag the folder s icon onto the box to the left of the Set button Use Local Preview Server If you have a web server running locally you can preview HTML pages through it by activating this option and entering the base URL for your preview server
59. Pages 210 HTML Tool Descriptions 6 cece 211 Tag Maker 211 Edit Tag 212 Close Current Tag 213 Balance Tags 213 Document Type 213 Character Set 213 CSS Submenu 214 Body Properties 221 Head Elements 221 Block Elements 222 Lists 224 Tables 224 Forms 225 Inline Elements 227 Phrase Elements 230 Font Style Elements 231 Frames 232 Check 232 Update 233 Includes 234 Utilities 234 Misc 236 Tidy 237 Preview 238 The HTML Tools Palette 0 239 HTML Tools Palette Tips 240 HTML Tools Palette 240 Other Palettes 241 HTML Translation issic 0 243 Remove Tags 243 Paragraphs 243 HTML Entities 243 Templates iesma en Suet esa Bt eg A etait 243 Template Setup 243 Using a Template 244 Table of Contents xv xvi Chapter 12 Using the Glossary The Glossary Command 6 6 cece eee eee Language Sensitivity of the Glossary Manually Sorting the Glossary 000005 Inserting Glossary Items 0666 c eee eee eee Assigning Key Equivalents to Glossary Items Glossary Substitution Placeholders Selection and Insertion Placeholders 249 Temporary Placeholder Formats 250 Time Formats 250 Using Scripts with the Glossary 0005 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit AppleScript Overview 0
60. Perl Style Pattern Extensions 148 e Comments 149 Pattern Modifiers 149 Positional Assertions 151 Conditional Subpatterns 153 Once Only Subpatterns 154 Recursive Patterns 156 127 Note Tech Note What Is Grep or Pattern Searching Grep patterns offer a powerful way to make changes to your data that plain text searches simply cannot For example suppose you have a list of people s names that you want to alphabetize If the names appear last name first you can easily put these names in a BBEdit window and use the Sort tool But if the list is arranged first name first a simple grep pattern can be used to put the names in the proper order for sorting A grep pattern also known as a regular expression describes the text that you are looking for For instance a pattern can describe words that begin with C and end inl A pattern like this would match Call Cornwall and Criminal as well as hundreds of other words In fact you have probably already used pattern searching without realizing it The Find amp Replace dialog s Match Case and Entire Word options turn on special searching patterns Suppose that you are looking for corn With the Match Case option turned off you are actually looking for a pattern that says look for a C or c O or o R or r and N or n With the Entire Word option on you are looking for the string corn only if it is
61. Saving Documents 6 6 6 6 cece cece cece eee eens 21 Saving a Copy of a File 23 File Saving Options 23 e File State 24 Long File Names 24 Saving with Authentication 24 Opening Existing Documents 6 6 cee eee eee eens 25 Choosing the Encoding for a Document 25 Using the Open Command 27 Using the Open Hidden Command 28 Using the Open Recent Command 28 Using the Reopen using Encoding Command 29 Using the Open Selection Command 29 An International Text Primer 6 0 0 6 cece cence eens 30 International Text in BBEdit 31 Unicode 31 Saving Unicode Files 31 Opening Unicode Files 32 Accessing FTP SFTP Servers 0 cece eee eee eee cence eee 33 Opening Files from FTP SFTP Servers 33 Saving Files to FTP SFTP Servers 35 Using FTP SFTP Browsers 36 Using BBEdit from the Command Line 6 6 eee cee eens 37 Using File Groups 1 ce cece ccc nee ee cnet nen eens 37 Creating a File Group 38 Using File Groups 39 Removing Files from a File Group 39 Using Stationery 6 cece ene ee eet een n eee 39 Hex Dump for Files and Documents 1 666 ce cece cence eens 40 Making Backups 6 cece cece eee eee e ene een e nee 40 Automatic Backups 41 Manual Backups 41 Peg ELT p ae aoto aeea rake O Maun E aE ssi OA E aE NEA ices 42 Text Printing Options 42 19 20 Launching BBEdit To launch BBEdit double click the BBEdit
62. See Look for Templates and Include Files In on page 183 If you plan to maintain multiple sets of templates for different projects you may find this option very useful HTML Translation 243 244 Note Using a Template A template is a simple text file that contains boilerplate text or HTML content that will form the foundation for the document you are creating Template files must have the file name suffix tmpl in order to be recognized When creating a template file you can convert or reuse an existing document or you can write one from scratch Simply rename the file by adding the suffix tmpl to it and then move or copy it into your active HTML Templates folder Templates are always invoked using the New Document tool Even if you want to impose a template on an existing document you still do it through New Document The Template option appears as a pop up menu at the bottom left of the New Document dialog All template files in the Templates folder appear in this menu The Default setting is not a template per se but rather a directive to create a blank HTML document framework containing whatever Title Base Meta Link SGML Prologue and so on values you specify It is always available regardless of the contents in your Templates folder Once you have specified the appropriate settings and chosen Create BBEdit will open an new Untitled window containing the full text of the selected template file
63. Sheet Key Equivalents 4 Feature Highlights 25 52 aise 4 o i aaia Wi ghee area WE Aw Eg EEG 6 Info on New Features 7 SUPPOLt Ser Vices ri a a E Sg Gisele te dee ae tas R a Sew ele diets EEE 7 Getting Started Thank you for selecting BBEdit the premier HTML and text editor for the Macintosh If you are new to BBEdit we recommend that you read at least Chapters 1 through 4 of this manual to familiarize yourself with the installation and basic operation of BBEdit You may also wish to read or preview any other chapters that cover features you frequently use After you have installed BBEdit the best way to learn it is to use it Complete online assistance is available from the Help menu If you have used earlier versions of BBEdit we recommend that you read at least Chapter 1 for an overview of significant changes in this version and Chapter 2 for information relevant to installation and upgrading What Is BBEdit BBEdit is a high performance HTML and text editor Unlike a word processor which is designed for preparing printed pages a text editor focuses on providing a means of producing and changing content Thus BBEdit does not offer fancy formatting capabilities headers and footers graphics tools a thesaurus or similar staples of feature laden office software Instead it focuses on helping you manipulate text in ways that word processors generally cannot In service of this goal BBEdit offers powerful regula
64. This option displays the Function pop up menu which lists the functions for source code files or named anchors for HTML files in the document allowing you to jump directly to any function or anchor Text Options This option displays the Text Options pop up menu which allows you to set wrapping display and editing preferences for the current window as with the Text Options command in the Edit menu Markers This option displays the Mark pop up menu which lets you define and locate named markers in a document File Options This option displays the File pop up menu which lets you set end of line and other compatibility options Insert Menu This option displays the Insert pop up menu which lets you insert the contents of another text file or a toolbox call template into the current document File Path This option displays the Path pop up menu which shows the location of the file being edited within the folder hierarchy You can choose any folder from this menu to open it in the Finder Get Info Icon This option displays the Info button which opens an Info window showing the file s path along with character word line and page counts for the file and the selection Text Status Display Preferences 195 196 Super Get Info Icon This option displays the Super Get Info button which asks Super Get Info to display file information pertaining to the current document This option is available only if you have Super
65. To Line Command 61 Function Keys 62 Resolving URLs 62 TOXtOPTOMs sieccc ates E eae ia EE wens E aed EA E ate ad 62 Editing Options 63 Display Options 64 SHOW PONS scores a ea y ena E T tanh Pae P wat tivtela E EE 65 How BBEdit Wraps Text usaauansranannsa rannan 66 Soft Wrapping 67 Hard Wrapping 67 The Mark Submenu serar e i E E EE 70 Setting Markers 70 Clearing Markers 71 Using Grep to Set Markers 71 The Insert Submenu 6 eee 72 Inserting File Contents 72 Inserting a Folder Listing 72 Inserting File amp Folder Paths 72 Inserting a Page Break 73 Comparing Text Files 2 0 2 0 a Aaea EEEE nee 74 Compare Against Disk File 76 Multi File Compare Options 76 Spell Checking Documents ssssssasasrsn ran nrrr eee 77 Using the Built in Spelling Checker 77 The Spelling Panel 78 Using an External Spelling Checker 79 Table of Contents vii viii Chapter 5 Text Transformations Text Menu Commands 0 00 e cece eens Balance 82 Exchange Characters 82 Change Case 82 Shift Left Shift Right 83 Un Comment Selection 83 Hard Wrap 83 Add Line Breaks 83 Remove Line Breaks 83 Apply Text Factory 84 Apply Text Factory lt recent gt 84 Convert to ASCII 84 Educate Quotes 84 Straighten Quotes 84 Add Remove Line Numbers 84 Prefix Suffix Lines 85 Sort Lines 85 Process Duplicate Line
66. To add a new Subversion project 1 Click Add Subversion The Configure Subversion Working Copy dialog appears 2 Enter the project name and a username and passwor d as appropriate and choose your working copy by clicking the folder button next to the Root display field 3 Click OK to save the project settings To change the configuration of an existing project 1 Select a project from the list 2 Click Change The Configure CVS Repository Configure Perforce Repository or Configure Subversion Repository dialog will appear as appropriate 3 Make the desired changes to the configuration settings and press OK to save the changes or Cancel to dismiss the dialog without saving them Source Control Preferences 185 186 Note To delete an existing project 1 Select a project from the list 2 Click Remove To set the options which will be applied when performing diff operations 1 Click Diff Options 2 Choose the desired options and press Save to save them or Cancel to dismiss the dialog without saving You can override the client root inherited from BBEdit s environment for any P4 configuration by checking the Override option in the Configure Perforce Repository dialog and dragging your desired root folder into the path region below the checkbox Perforce passwords are stored in the current user s Keychain Spelling Preferences The Spelling preferences control whether BBEdit uses the Mac OS
67. X system spelling checker or an external spelling checker Built In This option specifies that BBEdit should use the Mac OS X system spelling checker when you choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu You can set the highlight underline color that BBEdit uses to identify questioned words by clicking on the color button and choosing a color via the standard OS color pickers Click the Reset to Factory Color button to restore the default setting You may find it useful to change the highlight color if you have defined a nonstandard color scheme via the Text Colors preferences Word Services When this option is selected BBEdit uses an external spelling checker when you choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu The external spelling checker must support Apple s Word Services Suite To set the external spelling checker click the Set button and select the application s icon You can also drag the spelling checker icon to the path box to the left of the Set button Startup Preferences The Startup preferences control what BBEdit does when you launch it or when you click on BBEdit s Dock icon or double click its icon in the Finder and there are no open windows even if the application is already running Chapter 10 Preferences Do Nothing This option specifies that BBEdit should not open any windows or perform any other actions New Text Document This option specifies that BBEdit should open a new
68. You can set the properties using the set event like so tell application BBEdit to set display font of text window 1 to Geneva Let s go back to the window class for a moment Most of the properties of this class are marked with the abbreviation r o That stands for Read Only In other words you can only get these properties not set them Recordable Applications Once an application accepts Apple Events it actually makes a good deal of sense for an application to be designed in two parts the user interface that you see and the engine that does all the work An application designed this way is sometimes said to be factored The user interface then communicates with the engine via Apple Events The design of the Apple Event system makes it possible to record events into a script This feature not only lets you automate frequently performed tasks with little hassle it also can be an enormous aid in writing larger and more complicated scripts because the application tells you what events and objects to use for the kind of task you record Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Because of the important recording functionality they enable applications that have been factored and use Apple Events to let the two halves communicate are said to be recordable It is important to note that not all scriptable applications are recordable Saving Scripts Any AppleScript can be saved in what s called a compiled script file A compiled
69. a BBEdit window The Run a Script File dialog appears You can select a file by clicking the File button or by dragging a file to the path box at the top of the dialog from the Finder The options are the same as the ones described above for the Run a Script dialog Find in Reference Looks up the selected text using the appropriate reference application perldoc for Perl pydoc for Python If there is no selection a dialog will open in which you can enter a search string The Find in Reference command is not available for languages other than Perl and Python Show POD Show Module Documentation When the frontmost document is a Perl file and you invoke the Show POD command BBEdit will process the document contents using by the command line pod2text tool and display the result in a new text window POD stands for Plain Old Documentation and is the standard Perl documentation format When the frontmost document is a Python file the name of this command will change to Show Module Documentation and if you invoke it BBEdit will display the module documentation Filters and Scripts Before you begin using Unix scripts with BBEdit you should locate and familiarize yourself with the Unix Support folder both of which reside in the BBEdit folder See Chapter 2 for details about the BBEdit folder Inside these folders are subfolders for storing Filters Scripts and other files used for Unix shell scripting integration The contents of these
70. a snapshot of a document at any time to make it easier to revert to previous versions BBEdit names backup files with the same name as the original file and appends the date and a sequence number For example the first backup made on June 10 2004 of My Text File would be named My Text File 6 10 04 1 The name of the original file may be shortened if adding the date and sequence number would make the name of the backup file longer than 255 characters The Text Files Saving panel of the Preferences window includes an option that allows you to specify the default backup options for new files and for files that do not have state information See Chapter 10 for more details You can override this default on a file by file basis or manually back up a file at any time A document must be saved and named before you can set its backup options or make a backup manually Chapter 3 Working with Files If an error occurs during the backup process BBEdit will now report a descriptive error rather than just an OS result code The usual cause of such an error is that the defined backup directory has been deleted Automatic Backups To make automatic backups of a document follow these steps 1 Choose the Backup Options command from the File menu BBEdit opens the Backup Options dialog box Backup Options Options for update_ctags py _ Make Backup Before Saving Back Up To O Document s Folder Preferred Backup
71. accessed folder from the pop up menu or choose the Other entry to bring up an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any desired folder to commit You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box Show Working Copy Status none selected Other EJ Cancel Compare Revisions When working with a file that is in a CVS repository you can use this command to access a dialog listing all available revisions of the file When you choose a revision from the list BBEdit will check that revision out into a temporary file and automatically perform a Find Differences between it and the current file Compare Arbitrary Revisions When working with a file that is in a CVS repository hold down the Shift key and Compare Revisions becomes Compare Arbitrary Revisions You can use this command to bring up a dialog which contains two lists each of which shows all available revisions of the file Choose a revision from each list to have BBEdit check them out into temporary files and automatically perform a Find Differences between them Compare with Base When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will check out the base revision of this file as a temporary file and compare that to the current document Compare with Head When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will check out the head revision of this file into a temporary file a
72. and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 59600 036 7 HTML for the World Wide Web with XHTML and CSS Visual QuickStart Guide 5th Edition Elizabeth Castro Peachpit Press 2002 ISBN 0 32113 007 3 Teach Yourself Web Publishing with HTML and XHTML in 21 Days 3rd Edition Laura Lemay Denise Tyler Rafe Colburn Sams 2001 ISBN 0 67232 077 0 Cascading Style Sheets The Definitive Guide Eric A Meyer O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 1 56592 622 6 HTML amp XHTML The Definitive Guide 4th Edition Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 0 59600 026 X HTML Stylesheet Sourcebook Ian Graham Wiley and Sons 1997 ISBN 0 47119 664 9 Recommended Online Resources HTML Help by The Web Design Group http www htmlhelp com Apple Internet Developer info http developer apple com internet The Yale C AIM WWW Style Manual http info med yale edu caim manual contents html The Bare Bones Guide to HTML by Kevin Werbach no relation to Bare Bones Software http werbach com barebones The W3 Consortium site http www w3 org evolt org Browser Archive http browsers evolt org WebReference com by Mecklermedia http www webreference com WebMonkey by Wired Digital http www webmonkey com DevEdge by Netscape http developer netscape com Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools SGML Resources HTML is an application of SGML and shares many concepts and characteristics with it You do
73. and articles about AppleScript Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit AppleScript Primer http www maccentral com columns briggs shtml MacCentral columnist Bill Briggs offers an ongoing series of lessons for beginning scripters Quite a range of topics covered increasing in difficulty as time goes on Note that the oldest columns are on the bottom MacScripter Net http macscripter net and http osaxen com A good selection of AppleScript related news and topics including MacScripter s Magazine a stand alone multimedia tutorial for AS beginners and a very comprehensive list of scripting additions on its related site ScriptWeb http www scriptweb com This site covers all scripting languages not just AppleScript Also it has an extensive directory of scripting additions Software Script Debugger http www latenightsw com Despite the name it is more than a debugger it is actually an enhanced replacement for Apple s Script Editor featuring variable monitoring step trace debugging an object browser for an application s objects and much more Using AppleScripts in BBEdit BBEdit has been scriptable for years and we have continually worked to refine its level of scripting support In addition to providing extensive script access to its commands and data BBEdit is both attachable and recordable This section describes how you can create and employ AppleScripts within BBEdit via recording and BBEdit s
74. and function browsing will be available for the language s supported by that module To verify that a language module is active or to modify or add file suffix mappings for the language s it provides use the Languages preferences panel see page 183 Codeless Language Modules A codeless language module is a specially formatted text file which allows you to describe the properties of a source code language via a set of basic parameters BBEdit will then use these parameters to perform syntax coloring and function navigation for the specified language Codeless language modules are written as property lists or plists which is an XML format that Mac OS X uses for many purposes You can create or edit codeless language module files with BBEdit itself with the Mac OS X Property List Editor located in Developer Applications Utilities if you have installed the Apple Developer Tools package or with a third party editor such as PlistEdit Pro http homepage mac com bwebster plisteditpro html You can find complete specifications for creating codeless language modules in Appendix D of this manual Language Module Compatibility You will not be able to use any third party language modules which do not support Unicode text If BBEdit encounters such a module it will not load that module and will log a message to the system console Contact the developers of such a module or visit the Bare Bones Software web site see abov
75. application icon or a BBEdit document Holding down the following keys at launch has the indicated effects overriding any options set in the Startup panel of the Preferences window When one of these keys is held down BBEdit will beep after it finishes launching Modifier Function Option Suppress startup items only Shift Disable all plug ins tools external services and startup items Startup Items When launched BBEdit will look for a folder named Startup Items in the its application support folder see BBEdit s Application Support Folders on page 12 If this folder is found BBEdit will open any items it finds in the folder If the items present are documents of a type that BBEdit knows how to handle such as text files or file groups BBEdit will open them directly If you place a compiled AppleScript in this folder BBEdit will execute the script If you place a folder alias here BBEdit will open a disk browser window based at that folder If you place other types of items in this folder BBEdit will ask the Finder to open them If you often edit HTML files for instance you may want to place an alias to your Web browser or your visual HTML editor in the BBEdit Startup Items folder so that it will start up automatically whenever you run BBEdit If you wish you may place the actual Startup Items folder in any convenient location create an alias to it and place the resulting alias in BBEdit s application supp
76. apply the actions in the order you ve specified to each file in the target set This processing happens in the background so you can keep using BBEdit while it s going on similar to a multi file search operation You can also access and use stored text factories by several other means e the Apply Text Factory commands on the Text menu applies the selected text factory to the current document e the Text Factory menu runs the selected text factory against its configured sources e the Text Factories palette applies the selected text factory to the current document Automator Actions Automator is a feature of Mac OS X which enables you to create and reuse actions to easily perform common or time consuming tasks Apple s web site offers a good overview of Automator http www apple com macosx features automator In order to use Automator you must have BBEdit 8 2 or later and be running Mac OS X 10 4 or later Using BBEdit with Automator BBEdit offers Automator actions which correspond to most of the text transformation commands on the Text menu In order to use any of BBEdit s actions BBEdit must be running Chapter 5 Text Transformations After you launch Automator it will create an Untitled workflow as shown below Choose any application in the Library section to see what actions it offers To add an action to your workflow document you can double click on the action or drag it into the right hand panel Af
77. are enclosed in parentheses Chapter 3 Working with Files Note When adding a folder to a file group with the Add button you can choose whether to add all of the folder s contents By choosing not to add a folder s contents you can create a file group that consists only of folders which can be handy for navigating and searching project roots without worrying about keeping in sync with the folders contents Once you have added items to a file group you can save the file group to disk for later use Using File Groups To open a item in a file group double click it or select it and click the Open button If the item is a BBEdit document BBEdit opens it If it is a folder it is opened in a disk browser If it is an FTP URL clipping BBEdit will open the remote file or open an FTP Browser if the clipping points to a directory Otherwise BBEdit tells the Finder to open the file If you added nested folders they appear in the file group with disclosure triangles as in a Finder list view Click the triangle to reveal the files and folders inside that folder You can use a file group as the basis of a multi file search See Chapter 7 Searching for more information Removing Files from a File Group To remove a file from a file group drag it from the file group into the Trash in the Finder or select the items you want to remove and click the Remove button Removing an item from a file group even by dragging it to t
78. as the searching in parameter of the search Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit For example to find all occurrences of index html in a web site one might use the following scripting command find index html searching in alias Files WebSite Likewise to find JavaScript line comments find S searching in alias Files WebSite 7 options search mode Grep To search in a single file find crash searching in alias Files WebSite index html Scripting the Clipboard BBEdit has multiple clipboards These are fully accessible via the scripting interface Due to operating system constraints most clipboard operations require BBEdit to be frontmost Here are some examples count clipboard e Returns the number of clipboards supported by the application clipboard 1 e Returns index 1 contents Files WebSite length 14 is multibyte false display font ProFont display font size 9 style plain clipboard 1 as text e Returns Files WebSite clipboard 1 as reference e Returns clipboard 1 of application BBEdit current clipboard Returns the current clipboard as a record you can coerce it to reference or text or get individual properties To set the text in a given clipboard to literal text set contents of clipboard 3 to foobar To set the text in a clipboard to text represented by an object specifier set contents of clipboard 3 to selection of window 2 To copy the contents of one clipboard to
79. can also enter values for the TYPE of script the script LANGUAGE it is written in and the character set or CHARSET of the script Mark the DEFER checkbox to add a DEFER attribute You can choose which character sets appear in the Charset pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Noscript This command begins a section of HTML to be displayed only if the Web browser does not support client side scripting often used to provide alternate content following a lt SCRIPT gt block A matching lt NOSCRIPT gt tag is also inserted Style This command begins a stylesheet declaration You will be prompted to enter the type and title of the stylesheet and optionally select the Media type it is to be used with Block Elements This submenu lets you add HTML elements that behave as paragraphs or other types of text blocks Since many block elements can be containers for other elements most have an explicit or implicit ending tag for example lt P gt to close a paragraph as well as an opening tag for example lt P gt If text is selected when one of these commands is chosen these opening and ending tags are placed before and after the selection Paragraph This command begins a new paragraph element You can specify alignment ID a class for obtaining formatting cues from a stylesheet and inline CSS style information If a selection exists each paragraph in the selection has lt P gt and lt P gt tags
80. can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder ending with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu In the Glossary Tools Stationery or any of the Scripts palettes the Set Key button allows you to assign key equivalents to any item contained in that window You can use combinations of the Command Shift Option and Control keys plus any single other key to create such equivalents except that any equivalent must contain either the Command or Control keys or both You can also map Function keys directly to items with or without the use of a modifier Text Factories The Text Factories palette displays all the text factories currently available in BBEdit s application support folder For more information see Text Factories on page 91 Windows The Windows palette displays the names of all open windows ordered either by name by creation order or by window kind as determined by the settings your Application preference panel see Chapter 10 You can open a file by dragging its icon from the Finder or
81. cannot edit text in a search results browser To edit a file double click the line that contains the match you want to edit and the specified file will open at the point of the associated match After you have opened a file you can use the Find Again Replace Replace All and Replace amp Find Again commands in the Search menu to continue searching it as if you had chosen a File by File search See the next section for information on File by File searching You can use a search results window as the basis of another multi file search See Specifying the Search Set below Specifying the Search Set When you turn on the Multi File Search option the Sources drawer of the Find amp Replace dialog will open You can also open or close the Sources drawer at any time by clicking the drawer toggle control at the lower left of the dialog Use this drawer to specify which files and folders BBEdit should examine when performing a multi file search Find amp Replace Sources l Search For g O Use Grep Patterns ind v E MyFiles amp Folders A Wrap Music Users Sha BBEdit 7 Find Al M update_ctags py User untitled text Users Sh VM Open Text Documents Replace index htm Users Sha vst Se n On rReplace All Y B Recent Folders a V Extend S paa E notes 8 0 myBBSW Search B n C www barebones com Don t Find myexamplesite Users M Case Sensitive C Match Entire W
82. command When you hold down the Shift key BBEdit changes these commands to Cut amp Append and Copy amp Append Multiple Clipboards BBEdit supports six separate clipboards Each time you use the Cut or Copy command BBEdit automatically switches to the next clipboard wrapping back around to the first clipboard after the sixth This way the last six things you copied or cut are always available for pasting sort of a clipboard history By default the Paste command pastes text from the most recently used clipboard so if you do nothing special BBEdit works just like any other Macintosh program However by using the Previous Clipboard command in the Edit menu you can access the previous clipboard contents Next Clipboard moves forward through the clipboard history There are also buttons in the Clipboard window below that let you move back and forth through the clipboards 00e Clipboard A A gt 1 6 26 characters one line NA This is the selected text O gt Once you have selected a clipboard using one of these methods the next Cut Copy or Paste command will use the clipboard you chose Subsequent Cut or Copy commands will advance to the next clipboard Paste never advances automatically Holding down the Shift key changes the Paste command to Paste Previous Clipboard or you can use the key equivalent Command Shift V This command enabled whenever the last operation was a paste and the previous clipboard
83. condensed extended text style s of displayed text tab width small integer number of spaces per tab tool window smart quotes boolean are smart quotes enabled web site show invisibles boolean are invisible characters displayed window expand tabs boolean is auto expansion of tabs enabled i gt Commands soft wrap text boolean i is automatic text wrapping enabled j soft wrap mode page guide window width character width how line Y raxt suite breaks are computed when soft wrapping YClasses soft wrap width small integer if soft wrapping to character width the character maximum number of characters per line 5 display_line show spaces boolean are spaces displayed only if show invisibles is v insertion point v true AppleScript Overview 259 260 Note You can see that a text window inherits all the properties of the window class And since the window class inherits all the properties of the item class this means that the text window class also has the properties property defined by the item class To make explicit what you might have already gathered classes in AppleScript form a hierarchy That is classes can be based on other classes Such a class is called a subclass and the class on which a subclass is based is referred to as its parent class In AppleScript classes can only have one parent Multiple inheritance is a feature found in more complex languages The idea of a class hierarchy makes it ea
84. content in the document as a block to ensure that it does not occupy the same line as the include directives However if you wish to override this behavior and have BBEdit place the included content inline you may do so by adding the special option bbincludeoptions inline true to the include directive lt bbinclude filename bbincludeoptions inline true gt lt end bbinclude gt Include Files with Variables Include files can be extended even further through the use of variables which provide a means of inserting arbitrary text when the included file is processed so that not all instances of the included file are exactly the same Variables are essentially placeholders that you make up yourself Some possible uses are to insert names taglines alt strings for images or file names for files other than the current document into documents A variable name consists of a string of alphanumeric characters enclosed in number signs the character Spaces are not allowed in variable names but underscores may be used to represent word breaks Variables can be placed anywhere in an include file just like placeholders When you include that file in a document you specify the variable names and values with it Consider an include file named footer html which contains the following lt HR gt lt IMG SRC MY_GRAPHIC ALT MY_ALT_DESC gt lt H1 gt MY_TITLE lt H1 gt lt BIG gt This document copyri
85. create an environment variable PYTHONDOCS to the location of the folder which contains the Python documentation For information on setting environment variables for BBEdit and other GUI applications refer to Apple Technical Q amp A 1067 lt http developer apple com qa qa2001 qa1067 html gt Shebang Menu The commands in this menu are also available in a floating tool palette named Unix Scripting Tools which is accessible via the Palettes submenu of the Window menu Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Check Syntax Checks the syntax for the frontmost window Errors are displayed in a standard BBEdit error browser see Chapter 9 Browsers for more details on working with error browsers This command is only available for Perl and Python scripts Run Runs the script in the frontmost window by default Any output from the script is displayed in a new BBEdit window The output window is titled Unix Script Output and the file is created in the Unix Support folder in BBEdit s application support folder By default errors for Perl and Python scripts are displayed in an error browser errors for other languages are displayed as text in the output window Hold down the Option key while choosing Run to display the Run a Script dialog which allows you to set options that will be used when the command is executed Run a Script Selection Only Use Debugger Save Before Running Run in Terminal E chdi
86. creator codes are not set Usually such files are created by Unix programs but they may also be downloaded from remote servers You can choose Ignore It BBEdit will ignore any file whose type is not TEXT or which is not otherwise recognizable by type as a text file in situations where a text file is required Assume It s Text BBEdit will assume that the file should be treated as text This will give maximum exposure to such files at the expense of occasionally seeing a file that does not actually contain text such as binary data or Unix executable files Map the File Name BBEdit will inspect the file s name to see if it can figure out whether the file is text or not BBEdit will first attempt to map the file name to the list of suffix to language mappings specified in the Languages preference panel If a file name matches up with a language even if the language is None the file is assumed to be a text file Thus you can use BBEdit s own suffix mappings to convince it to recognize as text any files whose suffixes are not in the system s built in list of file suffix to file type mappings If no match is found in the Languages preferences BBEdit will next apply the system s Internet preferences file name mappings Mac OS X includes a default set of mappings but provides no direct interface for configuring them However you can use Internet Explorer s File Helper preferences or a third party System Preferen
87. define a script to be executed when the user chooses any menu item The script might then perform some pre processing and then exit by telling the application whether to continue with the menu command or to cancel it As a simple example a script might check to see what printer is selected when the user chooses the Print command If it is the expensive color dye sublimation printer on which printing a page costs several dollars the script could remind the user of that fact and confirm their intention through an alert before continuing with the print operation An application that supports such a feature or any method of integrating user written scripts seamlessly into its user interface is said to be attachable because the scripts become attached to the features of the program BBEdit is now attachable more details about using this feature are provided later in this chapter AppleScript Overview 261 262 Scripting Resources Covering all the details you might need to write your own AppleScripts is not something we can reasonably do in this manual AppleScript despite its deceptively simple English like syntax is a sophisticated object oriented language with many subtleties For this reason we suggest you consult supplemental documentation and resources if you are a beginning scripter A good place to start is with someone else s script find a script that does almost what you want it to and repurpose it Even if you cannot
88. dialog box for choosing the desired shell Either command will open a worksheet window for typing commands to the specified shell Shell worksheets are stored in a private document format which is not text based This format has changed for BBEdit 8 in order to store auxiliary data in the worksheet file s data fork thus ensuring that worksheets can safely be stored in version control systems that are not resource fork aware Using Worksheets You can type delete and edit text in a worksheet window just as in an ordinary BBEdit document window To invoke a Unix command type the command then press the Enter key or Command Returm or click in the status area at the bottom left of the worksheet window Keep in mind that Enter and Return are different keys pressing Return by itself inserts a carriage return instead of executing a command You can execute more than one command at a time by selecting multiple lines and pressing Enter or Command Return The output will appear in the worksheet window below the line or lines containing the commands executed Unlike a terminal this does not have to be at the end of the document you can type commands anywhere in the worksheet window or place the insertion point back on a previously executed command to run it again BBEdit and the Unix Command Line 281 282 Note 0e untitled shell elect the Line below and hit either Enter or Command Return staff 364 Oct 8 16 41 Desktop
89. document proxy icon represents the current document Clicking this icon is the same as choosing Reveal in Finder from the Window menu it opens a Finder window that contains the document You can also drag the document proxy icon to any other moon or you can drag it to the Trash which is the same as choosing Close amp Delete from the File menu a Key Equivalents for Status Bar Menu Items You can assign keyboard shortcuts to items on the Text Options Markers and Line Breaks pop up menus by choosing Set Menu Keys on the BBEdit menu The Function Pop Up Menu The Function pop up menu lists the functions defined in this file for a programming language source file or for an HTML document the tags described in the description of the menu in the table above The following indicators appear in the pop up menu to show the type of function Indicator Meaning The function containing the insertion point t C C typedef 0 C C pragma mark directive italic name C C function prototype 1 6 Heading level in HTML files tag name Tag name for the indicated name or ID attribute value in HTML files The Split Bar Every text window and every browser text pane has a split bar a small black bar above the scroll bar that lets you split it into two active view regions Splitting a text pane lets you view and edit a document s content in two places at the same time Each region is independently scrollable
90. effects of the Revert command from the File menu and of a file Reload which occurs when a document is reloaded by a verify action are now both undoable Remember the N most recently used items This text field lets you choose how many files appear on the Open Recent sub menu of the File menu and how many folders appear on the folder search pop up menu in the Find Differences folder lists Chapter 10 Preferences Browser Display Preferences The Browser Display preferences control the initial appearance of BBEdit s built in browsers for search results compile errors disk contents and so forth Results Lists For search results browsers you can have BBEdit display either a hierarchical listing where all the matches associated with a particular file are grouped under that file using disclosure triangles similar to those in the Finder s list views to reveal or hide the match list or a flat listing showing each individual match encountered on a separate line In the former case you can also tell BBEdit to expand all the file nodes initially by checking Expand Listing This preference also governs the default display of hierarchical or flat error listings in error browsers Disk Browsers When the Show File Icons option is active disk browser windows will display small icons for every item files folders and disk volumes in the file list When this option is off disk browsers will list only the names of files and folders
91. find a script that does anything close to what you want reading others scripts is a good way to learn how AppleScript thinks and how BBEdit s particular AppleScript implementation behaves In addition to the basic AppleScript documentation included with the system you may find the following resources useful in your quest to understand scripting Books AppleScript The Definitive Guide Matt Neuberg O Reilly and Associates 2003 ISBN 0 59600 557 1 AppleScript in a NutShell Bruce W Perry O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 1 56592 841 5 Mailing Lists AppleScript Users http www lists apple com applescript users html The official list for AppleScript users run by Apple Computer BBEdit Talk BBEdit Scripting http www barebones com support lists html The discussion lists for BBEdit often cover BBEdit specific scripting topics and are a good place to ask questions about BBEdit s AppleScript implementation Mac Scripting http www its unimelb edu au hma pub macscrpt Unofficial list covers AppleScript and other Macintosh scripting languages with occasional forays into peripheral topics Web Sites AppleScript at Apple Computer http www apple com applescript This is the starting point for AppleScript from the people who invented it Includes a tutorial and a good amount of technical information The AppleScript Sourcebook http www AppleScriptSourcebook com An extensive collection of links
92. folders into a worksheet window the behavior is different than when dragging these items into an ordinary document window An unmodified drag of a single file or folder will insert the POSIX style path of that item at the drop location Additionally rather than selecting the inserted text as in a normal editing window the insertion point will be left at the end of the current line so you can easily continue entering additional information or execute the line as a command Dragging multiple files and folders will now produce a set of paths for those items with spaces for separators rather than carriage returns This makes it easier to add arguments to a line for immediate execution as part of a command If you hold down the Command key while dragging it will cause the file s contents to be inserted or a folder listing if the item you are dragging is a folder The default working directory for new worksheet windows is the user s home directory This directory is also used as the search directory for any Open Selection or Open File by Name operations executed from within the worksheet New shell windows are colored using the Unix Shell Script language Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools WARNING New shell worksheets initially run in normal user mode as the currently logged in user This is indicated by the locked padlock icon on the rightmost button at the top of the worksheet window You can switch to superuser mode by c
93. from a file group window into the Windows window Document windows which correspond to text files have a document icon next to them display windows such as browsers and search results windows do not A solid diamond to the left of a window s name means that the window s contents have been modified and have not yet been saved while a hollow diamond indicates that the window s state has been modified but not yet saved Window Menu 101 102 To bring any window to the front click its name in the Windows palette You can select one or more windows in the list and choose the Save Close or Print commands from the action menu at the top of the palette Holding down the Option key changes these commands to Save All Close All and Print All which apply to all listed windows for which the given command is possible You can also Control click on any selected windows and apply the Save Close or Print commands from the resulting contextual menu Hovering the mouse over a window name displays a tool tip showing the full window title this is useful for names that have been truncated with ellipses because they are too long to fit within the width of the window If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Holding down the Command key displays the full pathname for document windows or other relevant windows such as disk browsers and FTP browsers HTML Markup Tools The main HTML
94. href http www mac File reviews shtml Line 45 lt li gt Mar 2003 MacAddict says BBEdit 7 0 1 is lt a href http www File reviews shtml Line 46 lt li gt Dec 2002 About This Particular Macintosh says BBEdit 7 is lt a h lle Jina lio Last Saved 08 06 04 17 19 18 f 3 Me Me a a File Path Sandbox BBSW_site_Mac om company reviews shtml A lt h3 gt lt a_ id bbedit name bbedi t BBEdit Reviews lt a gt lt h3 gt T lt ul gt lt Li gt Dec 2003 BBEdit chosen as lt a href http www macintouch com readercho ice2003 html bes lt Lidduly 2003 The Syracuse Macintosh Users Group lt a href http ismug com atree G307 atre lt Li2May 2003 IT Enquirer gives BBEdit 7 4 a rating of lt a href http www i t enquirer com lt lidMar 2003 Macworld gives BBEdit 7 0 lt a frefeh tter fase maceor Ld con 2803 03 fraviees ud lt LidMar 2003 MacAddict says BBEdit 7 0 1 is lt a href http www macaddict com issues 4303 lt Li2Dec 2002 About This Particular Macintosh says BBEdit 7 is lt a href http www atpm com lt Li gt Dec 2002 MacUser UK awards BBEdit 7 0 lt a href http www pcpro co uk reviews reviews_ lt Li2Nov 2002 Macworld UK gives BBEdit 6 5 3 five stars article currently unavai lable lt L lt LidMar 2002 MacAddict rates BBEdit 6 5 lt a href http uwu macaddict com issues 6263 rev 1 43 39 no symbol selected B gt The items at the top
95. in the Edit menu to select text To select Choose this from the Edit menu D Line containing insertion Select Line point Paragraph containing Select Paragraph insertion point All text Select All You can then cut copy or perform any other action that affects the selected text BBEdit defines a paragraph as a block of text surrounded by blank lines lines containing no characters other than tabs or spaces The beginning and end of the document also mark the beginning and end of paragraphs Moving Text To move text from one place to another follow these steps 1 Select the text you want to move 2 Choose Cut from the Edit menu BBEdit removes the text from the window and stores it on the clipboard 3 Use the scroll bars to move to the new place for the text if necessary then click to set the insertion point where the text is to be inserted Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Note 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu You can paste the contents of the clipboard as many times as you want in any BBEdit window or in any other application Pasting inserts the text stored on the clipboard at the insertion point If there is a selection pasting replaces the selection with the contents of the clipboard To place text on the clipboard without deleting it choose Copy from the Edit menu To add selected text to the existing contents of the clipboard hold down the Shift key as you choose the Cut or Copy
96. insert a carriage return at the end of each line While BBEdit prefers to break lines at white space when soft wrapping lines will be broken as close as possible to the designated wrap width if they do not contain any white space This way long URLs and other extended strings of characters are visible without requiring horizontal scrolling Exporting Soft Wrapped Text BBEdit will not insert hard line breaks into Unix or DOS format files upon saving although versions of BBEdit prior to 4 5 did Soft Wrapping in Browsers Use the Text Options command from the Edit menu to control soft wrapping and other display options for files viewed in a browser window Soft Wrapping and Line Numbers The preference Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views controls the way line numbers are displayed when you use soft wrapping If this option is turned on the line number bar cursor position display and Go To Line commands in editing views will use line numbers that correspond to hard carriage returns in the document rather than to soft wrapped line breaks To restore the behavior of previous versions of BBEdit turn this preference off Hard Wrapping The easiest way to hard wrap text is to type a carriage return by pressing the Return key whenever you want to start a new line If the file you are editing is a program it is best to turn off soft wrapping altogether To turn off soft wrapping for the active window do one of the
97. into another application that application will have enough information to handle the text correctly assuming it is capable of doing so BBEdit remembers the encoding used in a document when you save it so the next time you open it you will not need to choose the font However files that do not have this stored information such as those you download from the Internet may not be readable until you choose an appropriate font and script for them When saving a multi byte document BBEdit will write out a styl resource in the document s resource fork This ensures compatibility with applications which otherwise cannot properly select the document font on their own When performing a search BBEdit respects any available information about each file s encoding If a file does not contain any information about its encoding BBEdit will use the default encoding set in the Text Files Opening Preferences panel Unicode Unicode is an international standard for character encoding which includes an extensive selection of characters from Roman Cyrillic Asian Middle Eastern and various other scripts For more background information or complete details on Unicode the Unicode Consortium web site is the best place to look http www unicode org BBEdit 8 includes full support for and makes extensive use of Unicode in addition to all other OS supported text encodings In particular BBEdit internally represents all documents as Unicod
98. is a carriage return beginning of a line unless used in a character class end of line unless used in a character class Being able to specifically match text starting at the beginning or end of a line is an especially handy feature of grep For example if you wanted to find every instance of a message sent by Patrick from a log file which contains various other information like so From Rich server barebones com To BBEdit Talk server lists barebones com From Patrick server example barebones com you could search for the pattern From Patrick and you will find every occurrence of these lines in your file or set of files if you do a multi file search instead It is important to note that and do not actually match return characters They match zero width positions after and before returns respectively So if you are looking for foo at the end of a line the pattern foo will match the three characters f o and o If you search for foo r you will match the same text but the match will nu contain four characters f o o and a return and do not match the positions after and before soft line breaks You can combine and within a pattern to force a match to constitute an entire line For example foos will only match foo on a line by itself with no other characters Try it against these three lines to see for yourself foob
99. it e HTML Document Brings up a dialog with options for creating a new HTML document see Chapter 11 for more information on working with HTML documents e Text Window Opens a new text window see Text Windows later in this chapter for more information e File Group Opens a new file group window see Using File Groups later in this chapter for more information e Disk Browser Opens a new disk browser see Chapter 9 for more information Creating and Saving Documents 21 e FTP SFTP Browser Opens a new FTP SFTP browser see later in this chapter for more information e Shell Worksheet shell Opens a new shell worksheet using your default shell as set in the Tools panel of the Preferences window e Shell Worksheet Opens a dialog listing all the Unix shells installed on your system choose from the list and a new shell worksheet will be opened using that shell e Text Factory Opens a new Text Factory window see Text Factories in Chapter 5 for more information You can also create a new text document by selecting text in any application which supports Mac OS X Services and choosing the New Window with Selection command from the BBEdit submenu of the Services menu BBEdit will open a new text window containing a copy of the selected text When you want to save a new text document 1 Choose the Save or Save As command from the File menu BBEdit opens the Save dialog Save BBEdit Sa
100. lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Terminator for Prototypes 2 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt dict gt lt dict gt lt plist gt AAAAAA ANAANAAAAA Creating a Module 339 340 Language Keys and Properties Key Value Type BBEditDocumentType String CodelessLanguageModule This key value pair must be present in the property list for the rest of the plist to be examined and loaded since the file containing the plist need not have any specific file type or filename extension BBLMLanguageDisplayName String This is the name displayed for the language module in popup menus and preference panels Be descriptive but terse BBLMLanguageCode String 4 characters maximum This string value should be a unique four character code for the language that the module supports Note that the value must be unique with respect to BBEdit s built in languages and with respect to any installed language modules Unfortunately there is no easy way to identify these potential conflicts beforehand but just keep this all in mind if the contents of a file ends up looking as though it is being treated as some other language than intended BBLMColorsSyntax Boolean This must have the value true for strings and comments to be colored specially by the language module Keywords will also be colored if the value is true but only if a list of keywords is also supplied in a BBLMKey
101. n Unix line break line feed t tab f page break form feed a alarm hex 07 cX a named control character like cC for Control C b backspace hex 08 only in character classes e Esc hex 1B xNN hexadecimal character code NN for example x0D for CR x NNNN any number of hexadecimal characters NN for example x 0 will match a null x 304F will match a Japanese Unicode character backslash Use r to match a line break in the middle of a pattern and the special characters and described above to anchor a pattern to the beginning of a line or to the end of a line In the case of and the line break character is not included in the match Writing Search Patterns 133 134 Other Special Character Classes BBEdit uses several other sequences for matching different types or categories of characters Special Character Matches s any whitespace character space tab carriage return line feed form feed s any non whitespace character any character not included by s w any word character a z A Z 0 9 _ and some 8 bit characters W any non word character all characters not included by w including carriage returns d any digit 0 9 D any non digit character including carriage return A word is defined in BBEdit as any run of non word break characters bounded by word breaks Word characters are generally alphanumeric and some charact
102. nulls 145 matching white space 142 matching words and identifiers 142 non capturing parentheses 147 non printing characters 133 non repeating subpatterns 154 once only subpatterns 154 pattern modifiers 149 positional assertions 151 POSIX character classes 147 quantifiers 134 ranges 132 rearranging name lists 144 recursive patterns 156 repetition 134 replacement patterns 139 replacing with subpatterns 140 setting markers with 71 subpatterns 136 139 wildcards 130 Grep Patterns xml 17 Hard Wrap command 66 68 hard wrapping 66 67 83 Head Elements submenu 221 header files 281 headers 43 heading tags 223 hex escapes 111 133 hexadecimal 90 hidden files on FIP servers 34 Highlight Insertion Point 188 highlighting of text 46 hollow diamond 50 Home key 62 HR tag 223 HTML 348 Index books on 202 CSS 214 document title 206 Web sites about 202 HTML Colors Preferences 177 HTML document creating 21 HTML Entities palette 242 HTML Markup Preferences 177 HTML Palette Preferences 178 HTML Preview Preferences 179 HTML Templates folder 243 HTML Tools 201 Block Elements 222 checking HTML 232 colors 242 custom markup 244 Edit Tag 212 entities 242 forms 225 frames 232 Head Elements 221 include files 331 indexing 236 inline elements 227 lists 224 Markup menu 204 miscellaneous 236 new document 205 optimizing documents 235 palette 204 239 241 phrase elements 230 preferences 203 reformatting docu
103. number the name of the file the time and date printed in a header at the top of each page Chapter 10 Preferences Print Full Pathname When this option is selected BBEdit prints the full pathname of the file being printed in the header Print Line Numbers When this option is selected BBEdit prints line numbers along the left edge of the paper 1 Inch Gutter When this option is selected BBEdit leaves a one inch margin along the left edge of the paper Use this option if you usually put your pages in three ring binders Print Color Syntax If this checkbox is marked BBEdit prints colorized text in color You should generally use this option only on color printers as colorized text may come out in difficult to read dithered shades of gray on black and white printers Time Stamp The Time Stamp options let you choose whether the date that appears in the header is the date that the file was last modified or the date that the file was printed Print Rubber Stamp The Print Rubber Stamp option allows you to specify a text string which will print on your documents in enlarged low density grey form using the selected font Text Search Preferences The Text Search preferences let you set default options to use with the Find command Report Single File Replace All Results When this option is selected BBEdit displays a dialog telling you how many replacements it made when you perform a Replace All operation on a singl
104. of each match Error results or File line number and status message for each general results condition You can open both files and folders from the list pane When you double click a folder name BBEdit replaces the file list pane with the contents of the folder When you double click a file name BBEdit opens the file in an editing window If the file list pane also included a line number BBEdit scrolls to that line 157 158 Controls above the list may allow you to determine what kinds of items are displayed in the list For example in disk browsers there is a pop up menu that lets you choose to display text files all files or other types of files and another that lets you return the browser to a parent directory of the current folder In error browsers checkboxes allow you to hide or show all errors warnings or notes For results browsers BBEdit can either show an error hierarchy where all the errors associated with a particular file are grouped under that file using disclosure triangles similar to those in the Finder s list views to reveal or hide the error list or a flat listing showing each individual error encountered on a separate line You can choose which of these display methods to use by default in the Browser Display preferences To remove items from the display list select them and press the Delete key or choose Clear from the Edit menu Status Bar The browser status bar is like the status bar in editing
105. of the window tell you how many matches BBEdit found in the set of files you specified as well as whether any error conditions or warnings were generated during the search The list pane lists each line that contains the matched text Depending on how you have configured BBEdit the list may be arranged hierarchically with every match attached to the file that contains it in a Finder like list view or they may be listed one after the other in a simple flat list Every match is identified by file and line number To choose whether to display the search errors warnings and results use the checkboxes at the top of the browser The Open button opens the selected items using BBEdit To open the selected items using the Finder hold down the Option key while clicking the Open button To see the contents of a file click a line in the list of matched searches The part of the file that contains the search string appears in the lower pane You cannot edit text in a search results browser To edit the file double click the line that contains the match you want to edit Search Results Browsers 161 162 After you have opened the file you can use the Find Again Replace Replace All and Replace amp Find Again commands in the Search menu to continue searching it as if you had chosen a File by File search See Chapter 7 for more information on searching Error Results Browsers When you use the HTML syntax checker link checker or update tool
106. on the Open Recent Menu Mark this checkbox to show files opened from FTP sites on the Open Recent submenu of the File menu If this box is not checked the Open Recent submenu lists only local files Passive FTP Mark this checkbox to make passive FTP mode where the server determines the port number for the FTP connection the default Use Passive FTP whenever possible Show Document Icons Mark this checkbox to display icons for the files in the Open from FTP SFTP Server and Save to FIP Server dialogs Since FTP servers do not provide Macintosh type and creator information BBEdit determines the displayed icon based on the file s name suffix html sit and so on FTP Settings Preferences 175 176 Note Note Mac OS X does not currently provide any direct interface for configuring these suffix to type mappings However you can use Internet Explorer s File Helper preferences or a third party System Preferences pane such as RCDefaultApp for this purpose Show Files Starting with The Unix convention for creating invisible or hidden files is to begin their names with a period Often configuration files and scripts such as newsrc or login begin with periods so that they do not clutter most directory listings This setting is off by default so that you will not see such files in FTP listings To display them mark this checkbox FTP Bookmarks This list displays the bookmarks you have defined for FTP s
107. order mark BBEdit opens it as that type of Unicode file 4 If the file has a resource that contains font information such as a styl resource and that resource specifies a multi byte font BBEdit opens the file as a Unicode file 5 If you are opening the file with the Open command BBEdit uses the encoding specified Read As pop up menu on the Open dialog 6 Finally it uses the encoding specified by the If the file s encoding can t be guessed use pop up menu on the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window To change the encoding for a file after opening it open the File pop up menu on the window s status bar and use the Encoding submenu If an encoding change results in the conversion of a document s contents from a single byte script to a multi byte script BBEdit will mark the document as being dirty or changed Chapter 3 Working with Files Using the Open Command To open a file with the Open command 1 Choose Open from the File menu BBEdit displays the Open dialog box Open BBEdit Enable All Readable Files H fai n J Sites i L5 Documents a images p index html p A Network GB Library mooo muon amp duplo 2 Pictures p A Applications Public i Documents LES iy Movies 6 Music Py Pictures Translate Line Breaks Read As auto detect Open in default New Folder Cancel Open 2 Select the
108. particular interest to Web authors the HTML Entities palette and the Web Safe Colors palette HTML Entities In HTML extended characters must be encoded as entities since different computers define the extended ASCII characters differently The HTML Entities palette lists these entities _ HTML Entities Insert Show Method Name ka Dec Entity Char 34 amp quot 4 38 amp amp amp 0 60 amp ilt lt 62 amp ot gt 192 amp Agrave A 193 amp Aacute A 194 amp Acirc A 195 amp Atilde A 196 amp Auml A 197 amp Aring A z Entities can be inserted by name amp copy is the copyright symbol or number amp 169 for by choosing the desired method from the small pop up menu at the top of the HTML Entities palette We suggest inserting entities by name since they are more readable unless browser compatibility requires use of the decimal versions Double click an entity name to insert it into the active document or click once to select the desired entity and then click Insert The list of entities presented in the HTML Entities palette is now sortable by decimal value name case insensitive so amp ecaute and amp Eacute are grouped together or character sorted by the character position after all diacriticals have been stripped so that all a s are grouped and so on Click on a column label to set the sort order accordingly The default is to sort by decimal value
109. programs However it is important to note that not every application is scriptable and AppleScripts are not the best solution for automating applications that are not What goes on in an application that is scriptable The foundation of AppleScript is something called the Apple Event Macintosh applications are designed around an event loop they go around in circles waiting for you the esteemed user to do something choose a menu command press some keys and so on These actions are passed to the application by the operating system in the form of an event The application decodes the event to figure out what you did and then performs an appropriate operation After an event has been handled the application goes back to waiting for another one At this point the Mac OS may decide to give some time to another application on your computer Apple Events are special events that applications send to each other enabling a feature called inter application communication IAC It s a mouthful but it just means applications can talk to each other Apple Events are also the way AppleScripts tell applications what to do and which data to retrieve So to be scriptable an application must first support Apple Events Apple Events in their naked form are raw and cryptic things bits of hieroglyphics only a programmer could love So a scriptable application also has a scripting dictionary The scripting dictionary tells any application that lets y
110. sample text to be searched lt B gt This text is in boldface lt B gt The intent was to write a pattern that would match both of the HTML tags separately Let s see what actually happens The lt character at the beginning of this line matches the beginning of the pattern The next character in the pattern is which matches any character except a line break modified with the quantifier taken together this combination means one or more repetitions of any character That of course takes care of the B The problem is that the next gt is also any character and that it also qualifies as one or more repetitions In fact all of the text up to the end of the line qualifies as one or more repetitions of any character the line break does not qualify so grep stops there After grep has reached the line break it has exhausted the operator so it backs up and sees if it can find a match for gt Lo and behold it can the last character is a greater than symbol Success In other words the pattern matches our entire sample line at once not the two separate HTML tags in it as we intended More generally the pattern matches all the text in a given line or paragraph from the first lt to the last gt The pattern only does what we intended when there is only one HTML tag in a line or paragraph This is what we meant when we say that the regular quantifiers try to make the longest possible match Non Greedy Quantifier
111. script file contains the actual Apple Events by generating these events when you save the file the operating system does not have to convert your English like commands into events each time you run the script which means it loads faster When double clicked in the Finder a compiled script file automatically opens in the Script Editor where it can be run A script can also be saved as a stand alone application or applet in which case double clicking the script s Finder icon automatically runs the script Both types of files can be saved with or without the English like source code if you save it without the source code other users you give the script to will not be able to make any changes to it of course you should also keep a copy of the script with the source for yourself Using Scripts with Applications Although you can place a script applet in the global Scripts menu or in any folder and use it any time you need it many applications including BBEdit provide a special menu that lets you launch compiled scripts intended specifically for use with that one application Since you do not have to save them as applets they take up less disk space and launch more quickly They also show up only in the application you use them with rather than cluttering your global Scripts menu Some applications go even further allowing you to define scripts to be run when certain things happen in the program For example an application might let you
112. set of files searched using a search results browser eee Search Results 1 190 Notes Open 5 190 occurrences of BBEdit 7 found in 49 files File history shtml Line 53 lt li gt November 25 BBEdit 7 0 1 incorporates various interface refineme 4 File history shtml Line 54 lt li gt November 13 BBEdit 7 0 released adding CVS support multiple DD gt news shtml 32 occurrences found Y reviews shtml 6 occurrences found File reviews shtml Line 43 lt li gt May 2003 IT Enquirer gives BBEdit 7 0 a rating of lt a href http File reviews shtml Line 44 lt li gt Mar 2003 Macworld gives BBEdit 7 0 lt a href http www mac File reviews shtml Line 45 lt li gt Mar 2003 MacAddict says BBEdit 7 0 1 is lt a href http www File reviews shtml Line 46 lt li gt Dec 2002 About This Particular Macintosh says BBEdit 7 is lt ah y gt 3 2 e E n a Fal Last Saved 08 06 04 17 19 18 File Path Sandbox BBSW_site_Mac om company reviews shtml lt h3 gt lt a_id bbedit name bbedi t BBEdit Reviews lt a gt lt h3 gt a lt ul gt lt LidDee 2003 BBEdit chosen as lt a href http www macintouch com readerchoice2003 htm bes lt Lidvuly 2003 The Syracuse Macintosh Users Group lt a href http ismug com atree 307 atre lt LidMay 2683 IT Enquirer gives BBEdit 7 0 a rating of lt a href http wmu i t enquirer com lt LidMar 2003 Macworld gives BBEdit 7 0 lt a
113. sign followed by 1234 5829 more digits d 4 t B C four digits followed R kak or 2152 B C a space followed by the string B C 0 9 d an optional dollar sign 1 234 56 followed by one or more digits 4 296 459 19 and commas followed by a 3 5 6 4 0000 period then zero or more digits 0 oops Note again in these examples how the characters that have special meaning to grep are preceded by a backslash and when we want them to match themselves Creating Subpatterns Subpatterns provide a means of organizing or grouping complex grep patterns This is primarily important for two reasons for limiting the scope of the alternation operator which otherwise creates an alternation of everything to its left and right and for changing the matched text when performing replacements A subpattern consists of any simple or complex pattern enclosed in a pair of parentheses Pattern Matches p the pattern p and remembers it You can combine more than one subpattern into a grep pattern or mix subpatterns and other pattern elements as you need Taking the last set of examples you could modify these to use subpatterns wherever actual data appears Pattern Matches Examples d d a string of digits followed by 4 2 a plus sign followed by more 1234 5829 digits d 4 t B C four digits followed by a tab 2152 B C or a space followed by the string B C 0 9 d an option
114. staff 264 Oct 8 15 55 Documents staff 764 Oct 8 16 06 Library staff 264 Oct 8 15 55 Movies staff 264 Oct 8 15 55 Music 8 staff 1486 Oct 17 10 Pictures drwxr xr x 3 admin staff 264 Aug 21 13 34 Public i 4 admin staff 264 Aug 21 13 34 Sites tesh 4 gt If the selection range is non empty only the exact text selected will be executed if there is just an insertion point the entire line containing it will be executed even if it is not at the end of the line The status area at the bottom left of the worksheet window shows the name of the Unix process currently executing or the name of the shell itself when no process is running This can be useful for seeing what is going on when a process hangs or takes a long time to complete You can kill the currently running process by typing Control C or Command Period in the worksheet window Also clicking in the status area sends the currently selected text or the line containing the insertion point as a command to the Unix shell Keep in mind that shell worksheets are not terminal windows If you have ever used MPW you will probably feel right at home using shell worksheets If you are only familiar with terminal emulators however you will find that shell worksheets work quite differently Command line editing gestures do not work nor will any Unix commands that expect to be dealing with terminals For example try running emacs in a shell worksheet When you drag files or
115. string gt lt string gt lt dict gt lt array gt lt key gt Language Features lt key gt lt dict gt lt key gt Close Block Comments lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Close Parameter Lists lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Close Statement Blocks lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Close Strings 1 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Close Strings 2 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt End of line Ends Strings 1 lt key gt lt true gt lt key gt End of line Ends Strings 2 lt key gt lt true gt lt key gt Escape Char in Strings 1 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Escape Char in Strings 2 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Identifier and Keyword Characters lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Open Block Comments lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Open Line Comments lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Open Parameter Lists lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Open Statement Blocks lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Open Strings 1 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Open Strings 2 lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Prefix for Functions lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Prefix for Procedures lt key gt lt string gt lt string gt lt key gt Terminator for Prototypes 1
116. support support barebones com BBEdit and It Doesn t Suck are registered trademarks of Bare Bones Software Inc Exuberant Ctags is included under the terms of the GNU General Public License GPL Source is available within BBEdit s application package or from lt http www barebones com support develop ctags shtml gt Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the copyright holder The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement Warranty and license information is printed on the CD ROM package and included on the next page of this user manual The owner or authorized user of a valid copy of BBEdit may reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to use such software No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes such as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid for support services CodeWarrior is a trademark of Metrowerks Inc Macintosh Mac OS Mac OS X Power Macintosh and AppleScript are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners License Agreement You the Licensee assume responsibility for the selection of the program BBEdit to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the program Bre
117. surplus presentational tags and attributes replacing them by style rules and structural markup as appropriate This option works well on the HTML saved by Microsoft Office products Insert Blank Line before lt br gt This option controls whether BBEdit should output a line break before each lt br gt element Discard Empty Paragraphs This option controls whether BBEdit should discard empty paragraphs If you do not set this option BBEdit will replace each empty paragraph with a pair of lt BR gt elements as HTML4 precludes empty paragraphs Discard Comments amp Optional Tags This option controls whether BBEdit should remove all comments and optional tags Enclose Block Text This option controls whether BBEdit should insert a lt P gt element to enclose any text it finds in any element that allows mixed content for HTML transitional but not HTML strict Enclose Text This option controls whether BBEdit should enclose any text it finds in the body element within a lt P gt element This is useful when you want to take existing HTML and use it with a style sheet Escape lt CDATA gt This option controls whether BBEdit should convert lt CDATA gt sections to normal text Give Tidy Credit This option controls whether BBEdit should add a meta element to the document head to indicate that the document has been tidied BBEdit will not add such a meta element if one is already present Reflow Document This command pre
118. tee E TES 243 Template Setup 243 Using a Template 244 Introduction to the HTML Tools Please be sure to read both this introduction and the next section Configuring the HTML Tools before attempting to create Web pages using these tools Already the most powerful set of utilities ever created for the World Wide Web developer the BBEdit HTML Tools are more powerful than ever The HTML tools streamline the process of creating HTML documents help you check for common usage errors and speed up development time without sacrificing flexibility or forcing you to work within the limits of visual editing tools Among the improvements made over time to the HTML Tools are that all of the tools support entry and editing of double byte text and they will also automatically recognize and insert tags in the correct format when used in XHTML documents 201 202 Note Anyone preparing HTML files in UTF 8 format may want to save them without the byte order mark due to a bug in Microsoft Internet Explorer for the Macintosh The BBEdit HTML Tools and their documentation are written with the assumption that you already understand HTML If you do not we suggest one or more of the references listed below None are published by or otherwise affiliated with Bare Bones Software Inc but other BBEdit users have found them useful for HTML usage and design issues Recommended Books Learning Web Design Jennifer Niederst O Reilly
119. the end of every line When soft wrapping is turned off BBEdit lets you type as far as you like on a line and never automatically moves the insertion point to the beginning of the next line You have to manually type a carriage return to start a new line You usually use hard wrapping to write programs tabular data resource descriptions and so on With hard wrapping each line of source code or data appears on its own line in the window although you may have to scroll the window horizontally to see the entire line if it is long When you use the Hard Wrap command on a rectangular selection lines will be padded with spaces as necessary If you open a file in BBEdit that appears to consist of a few very long lines you should select the soft wrapping option for that file This table summarizes the commands to soft wrap and hard wrap text The sections that follow give details about using the wrapping commands To do this Do this D G Soft wrap text as you type Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu left or select the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options sheet Convert hard wrapped text to soft Use the Remove Line Breaks command wrapped text in the Text menu and activate soft wrapping Convert soft wrapped text to hard Use the Add Line Breaks command in wrapped text the Text menu Hard wrap text to a specific margin Use the Hard Wrap command in the reflowing paragraphs as needed Text men
120. the selection is contained within one of the web sites defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel BBEdit will next search the Templates amp Includes and site root folders if any associated with that site followed by those for the default site designated in the preference panel If the CodeWarrior IDE is running and a project is open BBEdit will ask the IDE for the search paths to the current project s current target and look for files in those folders as well e If BBEdit cannot find the file in any of these places it will display a Choose Folder dialog to allow you to locate the file manually Opening Existing Documents 29 30 Note Note In some cases there may be more than one file with the same name in the various folders BBEdit looks in Normally BBEdit opens the first one it encounters and then stops If you want BBEdit to find all files that match the selected name be sure to select the Find All Matching Files option in the File Search preferences panel Open File by Name If there is no selection or there is no text display view in the front window Open Selection becomes Open File by Name Choosing this command brings up a dialog in which you can specify a file name an exact path or a file URL You can also chose a previously used name by clicking on the pop up control at the right of the name field and selecting it from the menu The number of names kept on the menu is controlled by the Remember
121. there is no selection BBEdit will attempt to determine the symbol name by inspection of the text around the insertion point rather than requiring you to type a name See Exuberant Ctags in Chapter 14 for more details about working with ctags Find in Reference Performs a search for the selected symbol on the Apple Developer Connection web site As for Find Definition if there is no selection BBEdit will attempt to determine the symbol name by inspection around the insertion point Chapter 7 Searching If for some reason you wish to modify the URL template which BBEdit uses to perform the lookup you may do so by issuing the following defaults write command in the Terminal defaults write com barebones bbedit Services ADCReferenceSearchTemplate lt template gt In the template use to indicate where the selected symbol name should be placed in the lookup string For example to make Find in Reference use Google instead use defaults write com barebones bbedit Services ADCReferenceSearchTemplate http www google com search q amp ie UTF 8 Search Menu Reference 125 126 Chapter 7 Searching CHAPTER Searching with Grep This chapter describes the Grep option in BBEdit s Find command which allows you to find and change text that matches a set of conditions you specify Combined with the multi file search and replace features described in Chapter 7 BBEdit s grep capabilities can make
122. this submenu toggles display of the corresponding palette When moved or resized palettes now automatically snap to the edges of the screen and the edges of other palettes You can override this behavior by holding down the Shift key while dragging or resizing ASCII Table The ASCII Table command opens a palette that contains the 127 entries of the ASCII character set plus all of the standard extended 8 bit Macintosh character set MacRoman The decimal value for each character is displayed in the center column while in the right hand column the character value is displayed in either hexadecimal escape format or in URL encoded format based on the language mapping of the frontmost text window Depending on the modifier keys you hold down the Insert button inserts the selected character in different formats Clicking Insert while holding Inserts in this format None Escape code appropriate to the front window for example x69 or 69 Option Decimal value for example 105 Command Literal character for example i You can also double click on a line in the ASCII table to insert the corresponding character or character code into the editing window Clicking the Show button in the ASCII Table window displays the ASCII value of the character to the right of the insertion point or the first character of the selection Glossary BBEdit s powerful Glossary provides an easy way to store
123. to that version s BBEdit Support folder into BBEdit s new application support folder You should not simply rename your existing BBEdit Support folder See BBEdit s Application Support Folders on page 12 Please carefully read the remainder of this chapter since the organization of BBEdit s supporting files has changed considerably We have provided specific suggestions and tips for transferring your customized support items in each category First Run Configuration The first time you launch BBEdit 8 it will display the Welcome to BBEdit dialog This dialog allows you to choose whether to display multiple text documents in a single window versus one document per window whether to install the command line tools and whether to immediately open the PDF user manual Welcome to BBEdit 8 Open New Documents in Front Window O In New Window Command line tool support M install the current version of bbedit M install the current version of bbdiff Serial Number If you have a BBEdit 8 serial number enter it here Leave this field blank to try the demo v Open Manual Continue 10 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Note Opening New Documents Since BBEdit now supports opening multiple documents into a single text window you must decide whether the application should work in this manner or whether it should behave in the standard fashion by opening each document into its own win
124. two decimal digits which taken together form the integer N ranging from 10 to 99 is a backreference to the Nth captured subpattern if there exist N capturing sets of parentheses in the pattern If there are fewer than N captured subpatterns the grep engine will instead look for up to three octal digits following the backslash Any subsequent digits stand for themselves So in a search pattern 11 is a backreference if there are 11 or more sets of capturing parentheses in the pattern If not it matches a tab 011 always matches a tab 81 is a backreference if there are 81 or more captured subpatterns but matches an ASCII null followed by the two characters 8 and 1 otherwise In Character Classes Modifier Effect OCTAL Inside a character class a backslash followed by up to three octal digits generates a single byte character reference from the least significant eight bits of the value Thus the character class 7 will match a single byte with octal value 7 equivalent to x07 8 will match a literal 8 character In Replacement Patterns Modifier Effect NNN If more than two decimal digits follow the backslash only the first two are considered part of the backreference Thus 111 would be interpreted as the 11th backreference followed by a literal 1 You may use a leading zero for example if in your replacement pattern you want the first ba
125. two folders will be used to build the Scripts list and Filters list two floating palettes that allow you to run your scripts or filters with a double click Scripts and filters placed in these folders will also appear in their respective submenus at the bottom of the Shebang menu Filters Filters operate on the selected text of the frontmost window The current selection is passed as input to the filter and any output generated by the filter overwrites the selection In other words filters act like plug ins for text manipulation There are two ways to run filters through the Filters palette or the Filters submenu at the bottom of the Shebang menu To open the Filters palette select it from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu You can run a filter by selecting it from the list and clicking the Run button or you can simply double click the filter name in the list Hold down the Option key while double clicking a filter or selecting it from the menu to open the file for editing instead of running it You can also hold down the Shift key while selecting a filter item from the menu to reveal the file in the Finder or you can select a folder node from the menu to open that folder in the Finder Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Optionally filter output can be sent to a different window instead of overwriting the selection hold down the Command key while selecting a filter from the Filters list palette or from the Filters subm
126. uses for syntax coloring in the Text Colors panel of the Preferences window Soft Wrap Text When this option is selected BBEdit soft wraps the text in the file to the right margin that you choose the Page Guide the window width or a specific number of characters as selected by the options below the checkbox Default Font This option controls the standard font and font size and the number of spaces per tab which BBEdit uses to display the contents of text windows To change this option click Set to bring up the standard Font panel and choose the desired font and size or tab width The default setting is 9 point Monaco with 4 spaces per tab Editor Defaults Preferences 173 174 File Filters Preferences The File Filters preference panel lists all the file filters you have defined for multi file searching You can create edit rename or delete filters using the buttons on the right side of this panel For more information on creating and using file filters see Chapter 7 File Search Preferences The File Search preferences control the way BBEdit searches for files when you use the Open File by Name or Open Selection command from the File menu Find All Matching Files When this option is selected BBEdit looks for all the files that match the entered or selected text Otherwise BBEdit stops looking as soon as it finds the first file that matches the selected name Skip Folders When this option is selected BBEd
127. verbs are displayed in normal text while classes nouns are italicized Most commands sent to BBEdit will start with one of the verbs In some cases get might be implied Events Let s look more closely at one of the events Save is a good one to start with It is shown below Skoka BBEdit asdictionary V Required Suite 4 saye Save a window s contents in text format Ww Classes save reference print settings to alias Y Commands saving as stationery boolean e ationery By open Default false print add to recent list boolean add to the application s recent file quit st By Default true run add to favorites list boolean add to the application s favorite file ist By Default true W Standard Suite vy Commands close count delete duplicate exists get make move set W Miscellaneous gt Commands v Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit The right side of the window shows the syntax of the selected event as well as a brief description of its function The boldface words are keywords they must be included exactly as shown or the script will not compile The normal text tells you what kind of information goes after each keyword For example after save you must give a reference the italicized comment next to that line indicates that it is a reference to the window to be saved In other words some window object which in BBEdit would be window 1 for the frontmost window or window Text File
128. version checking capability built into BBEdit The Check Automatically checkbox controls whether BBEdit automatically looks to see if there is a new version available from Bare Bones Software Regardless of the setting of the checkbox you can always check manually by clicking the Check Now button Chapter 10 Preferences The version checking mechanism used by BBEdit protects your privacy It works by requesting information about the currently available version from Bare Bones Software s web server The server will log the date time and originating address of the request and which versions of the OS and BBEdit you are using This information is used to guide the future development of BBEdit it is not personalized and will not be disclosed Source Control Preferences The Source Control preferences panel allows you to configure settings for CVS and Perforce projects To add a new CVS project 1 Click Add CVS The Configure CVS Repository dialog appears 2 Enter the project name choose a root folder either via drag and drop or by pressing the Choose button and selecting it via a standard file dialog and set the Use SSH option if appropriate 3 Click OK to save the project settings To add a new Perforce project 1 Click Add P4 The Configure Perforce Repository dialog appears 2 Enter the project name and values for each of the specified P4 environment variables as appropriate 3 Click OK to save the project settings
129. window appears eee untitled group Add Files Add Folder A foo html gt myexamplesite make DOS ical update_ctags py O gt To add files to a file group drag them from the Finder into the file group window or click the Add Files button When you click Add Files BBEdit presents the Open dialog in which you can choose one or more files to add You can also add a file by dragging its icon from a text window s status bar or document drawer to the group window or by dragging a file entry from any results browser In addition to file and folder references BBEdit supports URLs in file groups You can drag a URL text or clipping file to a file group window and the URL will be saved in the group If you subsequently open the item BBEdit will hand off the URL to designated helper or open it directly if it is an FTP URL To add folders to a file group drag them from the Finder into the file group window or click the Add Folder button BBEdit displays the following sheet none selected Choose v Add Folder s Contents Folders amp Files O Folders Only M Scan Nested Folders C Skip Folders Cancel n You can click Choose to choose a folder using an Open dialog or just drag the desired folder to the white area from the Finder You can add both folders and files just files or just folders and you can choose to also add all nested folders and optionally to skip folders whose names
130. windows Some browsers have additional buttons and controls in the status area as well These standard items the pencil icon the Function Text Options Mark Path pop up menus and the Info buttons should already be familiar to you since they appear on BBEdit document windows by default See Window Anatomy in Chapter 4 for an explanation of these standard BBEdit functions Text View Pane When you click an item in the list pane BBEdit displays its contents in the text view pane If you click a folder BBEdit lists the names of the files in the folder If you click a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file When the current focus is in the bottom pane the space bar acts like the Page Down key and Shift space acts as Page Up Splitter You can change the size of the file list pane or the text view pane by dragging the double line that separates them Double clicking on the splitter bar will collapse the text view pane completely and double clicking on it again in the bottom of the browser window will restore the text pane to its previous proportions Disk Browsers Use a disk browser to explore the contents of a disk or a folder without opening each file one at a time Chapter 9 Browsers Note To open a disk browser pull down the File menu and choose Disk Browser from the New submenu BBEdit opens a new disk browser that starts in your home directory but you can navigate to any desired locati
131. word and either choosing Find Definition from the Search menu or by Control clicking and accessing the Definitions submenu of the contextual menu If you choose Find Definition BBEdit will use ctags information if available to find definitions of the selected word and open a sheet from which you can choose the desired definitions to view Select a definition to open it or use the Show All button to open a search results browser showing all of the available definitions If you use the contextual menu the Definitions submenu will contain a list of the available definitions Select a definition to open it or choose Show All to open a search results browser showing all of the available definitions Tag File Generation and Updating Because individual work flows and setups vary widely BBEdit does not attempt to generate or update ctags information it only uses existing tags files To generate your tags we recommend you employ the following command ctags excmd number tag relative no fields a m n S R pwd By way of further explanation BBEdit cannot process the search macros that a standard tags file has so you must use excmd number to output line based tag data BBEdit cannot locate files referenced by relative path so you must use tag relative no to output tag files with full paths e You can generate tags files for whatever fields you wish BBEdit requires the line number fields n and the signatu
132. you can combine alternation with other pattern elements to handle more complex searches Pattern Text is Matches alt A cat each a and t ale t A cat each a c and t a cat dog A cat is here A dog is A cat is A dog is is here A giraffe is here al b Abba CA bb and na Andy Ted Andy and Ted joined AAA Andy and Ted yesterday d 4 years I ve been a loyal member 1983 years since 1983 almost 16 years ago a z d That s almost 16 years That s almost 1 6 years Writing Search Patterns 137 IMPORTANT IMPORTANT The Longest Match Issue When creating complex patterns you should bear in mind that the quantifiers and are greedy That is they will always make the longest possible match possible to a given pattern so if your pattern is E one or more E s and your text contains EEEE the pattern matches all the E s at once not just the first one This is usually what you want but not always Suppose for instance that you want to match an HTML tag At first you may think that a good way to do this would be to search for the pattern lt gt consisting of a less than sign followed by one or more occurrences of a single character followed by a greater than sign To understand why this may not work the way you think it should consider the following
133. 3M Saved Search Sources sj a peal aplenty the current filter criteria will be searched Options 38 BBEdit waits briefly before displaying the Command key equivalents so that you can type a sequence quickly without encountering visible flicker Human Interface Notes 5 Feature Highlights BBEdit 8 marks a new milestone in the evolution of the product Here are just a few of the many features and enhancements present in this version e Support for opening and managing multiple text documents via a single window interface Automator support for incorporating BBEdit s text processing power in workflows requires Mac OS X 10 4 Text Factories for applying multiple text processing actions to diverse source documents Enhanced multi file searching offering threaded searches and diverse search sources Use of ATSUI for text rendering greatly improves handling of Unicode files particularly those containing glyphs from multiple disparate languages Codeless language modules offer readily extensible syntax coloring support Server based preview option for HTML documents CSS 2 1 support in the HTML Tools via new editing commands and Tag Maker e HTML syntax checker support for checking partial documents and excluding content sections e Command line tool enhancements including support in the bbedit tool for opening files from FTP SFTP servers and a new bbdiff tool e Text menu commands expanded and enh
134. 4 15 54 31 al 2 f z B z File Path private tmp cvs 8Wwai e gt cvsi8Wwai i Enter your comment here You can use as many Lines as you like i change made by A Developer CYS CYS Enter Log Lines beginning with CVS are removed automatically CVS Committing in CVS Modified Files cys index shtml 6 3 no symbol selected B j gt To enter a comment type whatever you wish above the lines which are prefixed with CVS Then perform a Save Command S and Close the window Command W once you have done so BBEdit will commit the document and display the CVS log Although BBEdit lets you commit a file without a comment it s considered good form to supply a comment that summarizes the changes you made to the file Commit Parent Folder When you choose this command BBEdit will prompt you for a comment using the Commit Folder dialog and then commit all of the files contained in the parent folder of the current document just as if you had selected that folder and chosen the Commit Folder command If you do not need to enter a comment hold down the Shift key as you choose this command and BBEdit will commit the folder s files without displaying a dialog box Working with CVS 291 292 Update Working Copy When you choose this command and select a folder in the Update Working Copy dialog B
135. 4 Tool no keystroke defined 3 Type the key equivalent You can use any key combined with Command plus Shift Option or Control modifiers if desired The equivalent must use at least the Command or the Control modifier key to be valid You can also use Function keys with or without additional modifiers 4 Click Save If you try to assign a key sequence that is already used elsewhere BBEdit will warn you that there is a conflict and ask you whether you want to reassign that key sequence to the new item Removing a Plug in s Key Equivalent To remove the key equivalent from a BBEdit plug in 1 Choose the Tool from the Tools palette 2 Click Set Key 3 BBEdit opens the Set Key dialog 4 Click Reset BBEdit removes the key assignment from the plug in Supplied Plug ins The text processing plug ins supplied with previous versions of BBEdit have been superseded by equivalent commands on the Text menu See Text Menu Commands on page 81 You should not copy any of the factory supplied plug ins from previous versions to use with BBEdit 8 and BBEdit will warn you if it encounters any such items To determine whether a plug in was factory supplied select it in the Finder choose the Get Info command and check its version information 306 Chapter 15 Language Modules amp Plug Ins Third Party Plug ins A wide variety of BBEdit plug ins are available from third parties An extensive though not exhaustive li
136. 5 thru 60 of text window 1 of application BBEdit found text BBEdit Scripting Single Replaces To do a single find and replace via AppleScript you can write tell application BBEdit set result to find BBEdit searching in text window 17 with selecting match if found of result then set text of found object of result to Replacement end if end tell When performing a grep search you cannot just replace the matched pattern with a replacement string the grep subsystem needs to compute the substitutions The grep substitution event is provided for this purpose given a preceding successful Grep search it will return the appropriate replacement string So if you perform a grep search the script would look like tell application BBEdit set result to find BBEdit searching in text window 1 7 options search mode grep if found of result then set text of found object of result to 7 grep substitution of 1 end if end tell Note that when using a backslash character in AppleScript it needs to be escaped by means of another backslash thus in the above example 1 used in the script will become the grep replacement string 1 when passed to BBEdit Scripting Multi File Searches In BBEdit a multi file search is a simple extension of the find scripting command To search a single file or folder for all occurrences matching the search parameters specify the file or folder
137. 95 Function Popup 195 Text Options 195 Markers 195 File Options 195 Insert Menu 195 File Path 195 Get Info Icon 195 Super Get Info Icon 196 Document Icon 196 Toggle Documents Drawer 196 Function Popup 196 Show Includes 196 Sort Items by Name 196 Show Function Prototypes 196 Tools Pref rences 2 30 64 os wis gnats reari gate neces 196 Script Editor 196 Coding Tools External Editors 197 Default Shell 197 Install Command Line Tools 197 Unix Scripting Preferences 0 5 6 ranana rnnr nnr 197 Windows Preferences 0 000 198 Window Zooming 198 Window Menu 198 Sort Windows By 199 Window Stacking 199 Leave Room for Palettes 199 Leave Room for DragThing Docks 199 Leave Room for Finder 199 Optional settings via defaults write 000008 199 Remove FTP SFTP Commands from Menus 200 Add Temporary Files to the Open Recent Menu 200 CVS Perforce Subversion Tool Path Override 200 xiv Table of Contents Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools 201 Introduction to the HTML Tools 00 0000 cece ee eee 201 Recommended Books 202 Recommended Online Resources 202 SGML Resources 203 What You Need 203 Configuring the HTML Tools 0 6 c cee 203 Using the HTML Tools 0 coe 204 Creating a New Document 205 File Addressing 207 Checking Syntax 208 Previewing
138. Ad 3 d l Case Sensitive Match Using Entire Search Pattern O All Sub Patterns 1 2 N O Specific Sub Patterns Don t Process J Cancel J Process The Matching All option processes all duplicate lines Leaving One ignores the first of each set of duplicate lines and processes only the additional ones The Numbers Match by Value and Ignore Leading White Space options allow you to choose whether strings of digits should be evaluated numerically or compared as strings and whether white space at the beginnings of lines should be considered The Match Using Pattern option allows you to use a grep pattern to further filter the lines to be processed You can enter a pattern in the Searching Pattern field or choose a stored pattern from the pop up menu The Match Using radio buttons control what part of the specified pattern should be used to determine duplication 86 Chapter 5 Text Transformations IMPORTANT Note When you use a grep pattern with this command matches are not automatically anchored to line boundaries so ambiguous patterns may produce unpredictable results To avoid this problem you should use the line start and line end operators as necessary The options on the right hand side of the sheet allow you to specify how duplicate lines should be handled once they have been identified You can copy duplicate lines to the clipboard Duplicates to Clipboard copy them to a new document Duplicates to New Doc
139. All command 71 Find amp Mark command 50 Find amp Replace All Matches 120 Find Again command 109 122 Find All 109 113 Find command 107 121 Find dialog 108 Find Differences command 124 Find in Next File command 123 Find in Reference command 124 Find Selection command 122 finding text see searching floating windows ASCII table 100 Glossary 245 HTML Entities 242 HTML Tools 204 239 241 Web Safe Colors 242 window list 101 font for printing 43 FONT tag 229 Fonts panel 195 foreign text 81 FORM tag 225 226 Format command 234 Forms submenu 225 Forward Delete key 60 62 FRAME tag 232 Frames submenu 232 FRAMESET tag 232 freezing line endings 67 FTP alternate ports 35 FTP Browsers 36 FTP Settings Preferences 175 function keys 62 function placeholder 248 Function pop up menu 50 51 G Get Info command 50 104 Glossary 13 100 245 language sensitivity 246 manually sorting 246 substitutions 248 Glossary palette 4 309 Go To Center Line command 123 Go To Line command 61 123 Go To Previous Error command 123 gremlins 89 grep 110 Index 347 alternation 137 backreferences 145 character classes 132 comments 149 complex patterns 135 conditional subpatterns 153 entire matched pattern 140 escape codes 129 133 examples 142 excluding characters 132 longest match issue 138 lookahead assertions 151 lookbehind assertions 151 marking a mail digest 144 marking structured text 143 matching delimited strings 143 matching
140. BBEdit open a Finder window which will display that file Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Open in Super Get Info This command provides integration with Super Get Info Bare Bones Software s Mac OS X file info utility If you choose this command BBEdit will ask Super Get Info to open an info window for the active document s file If there is no file associated with the active document or if you have not installed Super Get Info this command will be disabled Super Get Info is a utility designed to serve as a supplement for the Finder s Show Info command Super Get Info allows you to open more than one info window at a time view and edit the Macintosh type and creator codes associated with a file view and edit the Unix owner group and permission settings associated with a file or folder and much more For more information or to download a free demo version visit our web site http www barebones com products supergetinfo html Cursor Movement and Text Selection BBEdit gives you several ways to move the insertion point and change the selection You can click and drag using normal Macintosh text selection techniques or you can use various keys on the keyboard Clicking and Dragging You can select text in an editing window in the normal Macintosh fashion by clicking and dragging Holding down the Shift key while clicking or dragging extends the selection No Modifier Shift Click Move insertion point Extend s
141. BBTemplateLib php 3 template_args array TITLE gt Welcome to Bare Bones Software META_DESCRIPTION gt Bare Bones Software develops and publish META_KEYHORDS gt bare bones software bbedit mailsmith 4 SIDEBAR gt news php RSS_FEED gt http ous barebones com news xmL ADDITIONAL_STYLESHEETS gt inain stules css 4 no symbol selecte O00 index shtmi r i P ast Saved 08 21 04 14 09 53 f liu lip T alol 2 Last Saved i g z z z z z ES 1 a File Path Users Shared ples index shtml lt gt index shtml R mm lt php a require_once BBTemplateLib php 3 0 template_args array TITLE gt Welcome to Bare Bones Software META_DESCRIPTION gt Bare Bones Software develops and publ ishg META KEYHORDS gt bare bones software bbedit mailsmith d SIDEBAR gt news php RSS_FEED gt http ne barebones com news xml META_REFRESH gt 18 url indexialt shtml ADDI TIONAL_STYLESHEETS gt main styles sidebar css no symbol selected lt SKORS Differences New File Users t shtml P lt Apply to New a Apply to Old gt P Old File Users x shtml Nonmatching Lines File index_alt shtml Line 10 File ind tml Line 10 11 Extra lines in Old before 19 in New File index_alt shtml Line 19 File index shtml Line 20 21 Nonmatching Lines File index_alt shtml Line 20 23 File index shtml Line 23 37 3 differences found lt 9 yr 4 Tip Y
142. BEdit will update all of the files contained in the folder to the latest available revisions You can select any recently accessed folder from the pop up menu or choose the Other entry to bring up an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any desired folder to update You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box Update Working Copy Root none selected Other HJ Cancel OK x J Commit Working Copy When you choose this command BBEdit will bring up the Commit Folder dialog which allows you to batch commit all the files within a specific folder that have uncommitted changes Commit Working Copy Root none selected Other E Message Cancel OK You can select any recently accessed folder from the pop up menu choose the Other entry to bring up an Open dialog in which you can select any desired folder or drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box If you enter a checkin comment in the Message field that comment will be applied to each file that BBEdit commits Show Working Copy Status When you choose this command and select a folder in the Show Working Copy Status dialog BBEdit will check whether any files contained within that folder have uncommitted changes If there are any such files BBEdit will display a results browser containing a list of them Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools You can select any recently
143. C Skip Folders Text Files Only _ Search Invisible Folders O All File Types _ Exclude Matches Use File Filter current criteria i C Edit Filter Sey Cancel To search the contents of all subfolders within the folders you choose select the Search Nested Folders option in the resulting sheet You can also choose to skip any folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses here by selecting the Skip Folders option or whether to search the contents of invisible folders by selecting the Search Invisible Folders option You can also choose to search only text files or to search all file types If you have image files or other non text files in search source folders it may be a good idea to restrict the search to only text files This setting is applied in addition to any file filter see next section and in fact takes effect before the filter To find only files whose contents do not contain the search string select the Exclude Matches option You can further restrict which files from the chosen sources will be searched by applying a file filter See File Filters below for more details Chapter 7 Searching Note File Filters If you do not want to search every file in the set you selected but want to include only those that meet certain criteria such as those created on a certain date or only those created by BBEdit and not some other program or those that are HTML or Perl documents
144. Cmd 0 Window gt Palettes Windows HTML Markup Tools Block CSS Entities Font Style Forms Inline Phrase Table Utilities Web Safe Colors Unix Tools Unix Filters Unix Scripts Shebang Check Syntax Check Selection Syntax Opt Run Run Opt Run in Terminal Run in Debugger Run File Find in Reference Show POD Show Module Documentation Unix Filters submenu Unix Scripts submenu CVS Update to Head Update to Head Shift Update to Revision Commit Commit File Shift Commit Parent Folder Update Working Copy Commit Working Copy Show Working Copy Status Shift Compare Revisions Compare Arbitrary Revisions Compare with Base Compare with Head Show Annotation Show Annotation Shift Show Revision History Show Revision History Shift Show CVS Status Add Remove Go to Previous Conflict Go to Next Conflict Export Project Open Log File Listing by Menu and Command Name 313 314 P4 Edit Revert Revert amp Sync to Head Sync to Revision Sync All Submit Show Opened Compare Revisions Compare Arbitrary Revisions Compare with Base Compare with Head Show Annotation Show Revision History Add Revert amp Delete Open Log File Go to Previous Conflict Go to Next Conflict Subversion Revert Update to Head Revert amp Update to Head Shift Commit Update Working Copy Commit Working Copy
145. Contents of BBEdit Document New BBEdit Document Sort Lines This action will sort the provided lines according to the specified rules Input Text Result Text Sorted Lines of Text Related Actions Remove Duplicate Lines Straighten Quotes This action will convert typographer quotes into their ASCII equivalent Input Text Result Text Text with typographer s quotes converted to ASCII quotes Related Actions Educate Quotes Zap Gremlins This action will convert each non ASCII character as specified in the configuration Input Text Result Text Text with non ASCII characters removed Related Actions Convert to ASCII Chapter 5 Text Transformations CHAPTER Arranging Windows amp Palettes This chapter describes the commands in the Window menu These commands allow you to arrange and access editing and browser windows quickly and also to access BBEdit s extensive set of tool and utility palettes In this chapter Wud ow Menu siamea i re ie este 8 app E See a alee where ed wie eee Minimize Window ssc ssc i oa E a E E E SNS Sg CO Bring All to Fronts pese ert cee cet ene e enn e eee Palettes cas See eea O56 eae teck cee etal A acca tek ER EEE AAR eee ae ASCII Table 100 Glossary 100 Plug In Tools 100 Scripts 101 Stationery 101 Windows 101 Windows 101 e HTML Markup Tools 102 Unix Scripting Tools Unix Filters and Unix Scripts 102 WOKS Pace dis in 6 5
146. Emphasis Inserted Text Input Text Kbd Sample Output Strong Emphasis Variable Markup gt Font Style Elements Big Small Bold Italic Strike Through Teletype Text Underline Markup gt Frames Frame Set Frame No Frames Markup gt Check Document Syntax Cmd Ctl Y Document Links Cmd Ctl K Folder Syntax Folder Links Site Syntax Site Syntax Opt Site Links Site Links Opt Markup gt Update Document Cmd Ctl U Folder Site Site Opt Document Images Document Images Opt Folder Images Site Images Site Images Opt Markup gt Includes Persistent Include Include Placeholders Markup gt Utilities Format Format Optimize Translate Remove Comments Remove Markup Comment Uncomment Normalize Tag Case Make Tags Upper Case Make Tags Lower Case Cmd Opt Shift F Cmd Opt T Markup gt Misc Dreamweaver Document Size Index Document Index Folder Index Site GoLive Cleaner HomePage Cleaner PageMill Cleaner Cmd Ctl X Markup gt Preview With Preview as Text in All Running Browsers Installed browsers Listing by Menu and Command Name 317 318 Listing by Default Key Equivalent Key Command Cmd 1 to Cmd 0 Window Open windows Cmd A Edit Select All Cmd B Text Balance Cmd C Edit Copy Cmd D File Open File by Name Cmd E
147. Encodings Preferences 188 Text Files Saving Preferences 191 Text Files Opening Preferences 189 text highlighting 46 Text Options pop up menu 50 text panel 160 Text Printing Preferences 192 Text Search Preferences 193 text transformation 66 text wrapping 66 TEXTAREA tag 227 TFOOT tag 225 TH tag 225 THEAD tag 225 time placeholder 249 time stamps 43 Toggle Documents Drawer 196 Tools Preferences 196 TR tag 224 transformations case 141 Translate Line Breaks 189 translation HTML 235 243 TT tag 232 typing text 46 U U underline tag 232 UL tag 224 Un Comment plug in 91 Undo command 48 Unicode 24 25 31 81 188 universal argument 326 352 Index nix line breaks 23 nix shell scripts 284 nordered lists 224 pdate submenu 233 ser interface 3 sing Language Modules 304 TF 8 32 tilities submenu 234 v validation 232 233 VAR tag 231 variables 333 VisiBone 242 wW watermark 43 Web Safe Colors palette 242 Web Site Settings dialog 182 wildcards 130 window list 101 windows arranging 103 exchanging with next 104 Info button 104 sending to back 104 split bar 51 status bar 49 Windows floating window 25 Windows menu 99 Windows Preferences 198 worksheets shell 281 wrap around 110 Wrap while Typing option 66 wrapping text 63 66 X Xcode 197 302 XML declaration 206 Y yank pop 326 Z Zap Gremlins command 89 Ge Gece Ss ce
148. Enter keys You can use the Case Sensitive and Find Backwards options to change the way Quick Search looks for text To clear the most recent word of the search string you can press Option Delete or to clear the entire search string you may use any of these shortcuts e the Clear command on the Edit menu e the Clear key on the numeric keypad e the Escape key You can keep the Quick Search window open all the time and bring it to the front whenever you want to search Quick Search always searches in the text view of the window immediately behind the Quick Search window Search Menu Reference This section describes all of the commands in the Search menu Find Opens the Find amp Replace dialog You can set the search and replace strings choose searching options and for a multi file search specify the set of files to search Quick Search Opens the Quick Search window You can use this window to interactively search for text strings as described in the previous section Quick Search 121 122 Tip Tip Find Again Uses the previous settings of the Find amp Replace dialog to search for the next occurrence of the search string Hold down the Shift key to search in the opposite direction from the current search direction For example if you have set the Backwards option in the Find amp Replace dialog holding down Shift while performing a Find Again will search forward in the document Find Selection Uses the select
149. File3 html Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif In File4 html Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif Include Files An include file or just an include is a special form of placeholder whose substitution happens to be the contents of another file If you have used C or certain other programming languages you may already be familiar with the concept Using includes you can reuse standard bits of text content or HTML markup in several templates or glossary entries without having to revise all of those individual files whenever you revise the included text Include File Locations BBEdit looks for include files first in the same directory as the document containing the directive then in the same directory as the document into which the processed document is being inserted and finally in the HTML Templates folder specified in your preferences Simple Includes A simple include takes the following form bbinclude filename where filename is the full name of the file whose contents you wish to include When such an include is present in a template or glossary entry it is replaced with the contents of the specified file when the template is used to build a new document or when the glossary entry is inserted The original template or glossary file is not changed Include Files 331 IMPORTANT Imagine that you have ten different templates each of which contains your name address phone number email address an
150. Get Info installed on your system Document Icon This option displays the Document Icon button which serves as a proxy for the document file You can click the icon to reveal the current file in the Finder or drag it anywhere the original file can be dragged Toggle Documents Drawer This option displays the Document Drawer Toggle control at the right hand side of the status bar Function Popup The following preference options control how the Function pop up menu left in the status bar behaves Show Includes When this option is selected the Function pop up menu includes the files named in include directives Sort Items by Name When this option is selected the items in the Function pop up menu are sorted by name Otherwise items in the pop up menu appear in the same order as they appear in the file Show Function Prototypes When this option is selected the Function pop up menu includes the names of function prototypes as well as the function definitions Otherwise the pop up menu does not include entries for function prototypes Tools Preferences The Tools preferences control the way BBEdit integrates with programming tools such as AppleScript editors development environments and Toolbox references Script Editor To set the script editor for use with the Open Script Editor command in the Script menu do one of the following e Click the Set button and select the script editor from the dialog box e Drag th
151. Its standard contents are as follows Document State plist BBEdit stores state information for individual documents in this file 16 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Upgrading Note Note File Filters BBEdit stores user defined file filter patterns in this file FTP Bookmarks xml BBEdit stores user defined FTP and SFTP bookmarks in this file which supersedes the previous FTP Bookmarks file You should not attempt to directly edit the contents of this file instead use the FTP Bookmarks preference panel to add remove or modify your bookmarks Grep Patterns xml BBEdit stores user defined search patterns in this XML file which is located in your active BBEdit Preferences folder If you have created and saved any custom grep patterns in a previous version of BBEdit these patterns will be imported otherwise a set of factory default patterns will be created Recent Files amp Favorites This folder contains aliases to the most recent local files that you have opened or URL clippings for any files opened from FTP or SFTP servers The items stored in this folder are used to create the Open Recent list in BBEdit s File menu and the file lists in the Find Differences dialog To set the number of items shown in the Open Recent list use the Remember the most recently used items option on the Application panel of the Preferences window You may lock items in this folder to have them persist as Favorites To do thi
152. Keys 6 ccc ce ccc cence tenes 324 Emacs Key Bindings einet ease s cece cect eee EREE e nes 325 Using universal argument 326 Mouse Commands No Modifier Shift Click move insertion point extend selection Double click select word extend selection to word Triple click select line none Triple clicking is the same as clicking in a line and then choosing the Select Line command from the Edit menu Holding down the Command or Option keys as you click or double click triggers special actions Option Command A ption Click none Open URL none Double click look up selected word none find next instance in programming of the selected reference text 323 Arrow and Delete Keys You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point right left up and down You can augment these with the Command and Option keys to move by word line or screens or with the Shift key to create or extend selections For example pressing Shift Option Right Arrow selects the word to the right of the insertion point You can hold down the Control key while using the arrow keys to scroll through editing windows without moving the position of the insertion point Key Modifier Action left right Arrow Move 1 character left right left right Arrow Option Move 1 word left right left right Arrow Command Move to beginning end of line left right Arrow Control Scroll v
153. L Templates This folder contains a sample set of HTML document templates for use with the New HTML Document command which you can modify or add to as you wish In order to use these templates you must either choose this folder to be the Templates amp Includes folder for an existing web site in the HTML Web Sites preferences or you can copy the template files into an already designated site templates folder Please see Chapter 11 for more information on BBEdit s HTML tools You should move or copy over any customized template or include documents that you wish to preserve Language Modules Global Local This folder contains plug in modules that tell BBEdit about new programming scripting or markup languages so that it can colorize them appropriately and generate function pop up menu listings for them Three modules are supplied with the default installation Python Setext and TeX A list of additional modules from third party developers is available on our web site You should move or copy over any compatible third party language modules that you wish to preserve Menu Scripts Local only This folder contains scripts that are attached to BBEdit menu items See Chapter 13 for more information on creating and using menu scripts BBEdit s Application Support Folders 13 Note Upgrading Upgrading IMPORTANT Upgrading Only items in the instance of this folder which resides in the local application support folde
154. Line command honors the Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Text Views option in the Editing General preferences panel Go to Center Line Will move the insertion point to the beginning of the middle or center line of the displayed text Go to Previous Next Error If an error browser is open this command will open the listed error which came before or after the selected error See Chapter 9 for more information on error browsers Go to Previous Next Placeholder When you apply a glossary item that contains multiple INSERTION cookies the second and subsequent cookies are replaced with a placeholder string You can use the Go To Previous Placeholder and Go to Next Placeholder commands to jump back and forth between these special strings from the keyboard For example you might use this command when filling in the parameters of a function call or a series of tag attributes For additional details see Selection and Insertion Placeholders on page 249 Go to Function Start End When you choose one of these commands BBEdit will move the insertion point to a position immediately before the start or immediately after the end of the current function where a function is any item which appears on the function pop up menu If you anticipate using these commands often you may wish to assign them key equivalents by using the Set Menu Keys command from the BBEdit menu Search Menu Reference 123 124 Go to Previous Next Fu
155. Markup gt Update gt Document Check Markup gt Check submenu Update Markup gt Update submenu Includes Markup gt Includes submenu Utilities Markup gt Utilities submenu Misc Markup gt Misc submenu Preview in BBEdit Markup gt Preview in BBEdit Preview Markup gt Preview in submenu Preview all Markup gt Preview in gt All Running Browsers browsers Other Palettes In addition to the main HTML Tools palette BBEdit incorporates a number of other palettes that may be useful to HTML authors First several of the pop up menus on the HTML Tools palette can be used to open floating palettes for specific tools At the bottom of the pop up menus for CSS Block Elements Inline Elements Table Forms Phrase Elements Font Style Elements and Utilities is a menu item that opens the specified menu as a palette For example choosing Inline Palette from the bottom of the Inline Elements pop up menu opens a new palette containing a button for each of the items on that menu You probably will not need to open all these subpalettes at once but they can be quite convenient to open temporarily when you are working on a particular type of element form table and so on In addition to being able to open them from the main HTML Tools palette you can also access each palette from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu The HTML Tools Palette 241 242 Note Two other palettes are also of
156. OUT and a single line indicating the error will be added to the error browser For example enter this directive in your HTML file lt bbinclude foo pl length 2 width 3 gt lt end bbinclude gt Then use this source code for foo pl and save it in the same folder as the HTML file or in the Templates and Includes folder specified in the HTML Web Sites panel of your BBEdit preferences usr bin perl w my file shift ARGV my gargs ARGV my Sarea Sargs length Sargs width print Filename file n print Area Sarea n When you run the Update command BBEdit will place the file name in the script s variable file and the length and width variables in the associative array hash Joargs After the update the BBEdit file will look like this lt bbinclude foo pl length 2 width 3 gt Filename Mac HD Desktop Folder sample html Area 6 lt end bbinclude gt In addition BBEdit will pass information about the current HTML Tools settings to the script in the following environment variables BBEditServerURL BBEditServerPath BBEditDefaultFileName BBEditTemplateDirectory BBEditRootDirectory BBEditLowercaseTags BBEditLowercaseAttributes BBEditAlwaysQuoteAttributes To access these in your Perl code use the ENV environment variable hash For example this line of Perl will print the Web server name specified in your BBEdit HTML We
157. PATH Path to access your documents from the Web server as specified in your HTML Web Site preferences PREFIX As DIRPATH but does not strip the leading slash of the path REAL_URL The real URL for the current document in its current location RELATIVE The relative path from the current file back up to the Local Server Root inserts a path of the form 1 1 to tell the browser to back up to the site s root directory ROOT Path to the Local Site Root as specified in your HTML Web Site preferences ROOTPATH The file s path relative to the Local Server Root specified in the HTML Web Site preferences to the current file SERVER URL of your Web server as specified in your HTML Web Site preferences SHORTDATE Short Date Day month year e g 08 15 04 SHORTUSERNAME Returns the login short name instead of the full user name TIME Current time according to your Format settings in the International panel of the System Preferences TITLE Title of the current document as entered using the New HTML Document command USERNAME The owner name for the currently logged in user Placeholders 329 Placeholder Replaced By YEARNUM The current year e g 2004 Time Formats The GMTIME XXX and LOCALTIME XXX placeholders offer you the option to insert the specified time value with flexible formatting In order to use these placeholders you must substitute a time format using the same expans
158. Preferences window to the visibility state and positions they had when the workspace was created For example you might create an HTML workspace with the HTML Tools and Windows palettes open and a Perl workspace with the Unix Scripts and Unix Filters palettes open Then starting with only the Windows palette displayed when you choose the HTML workspace BBEdit will open the HTML Tools palette and position both palettes according to their saved locations If you then choose the Perl workspace BBEdit will close both these palettes and open the Unix Scripts and Unix Filters palettes Chapter 6 Arranging Windows amp Palettes Arrange The Arrange command gives you several ways to organize text windows and shell worksheets This command has no effect on any other types of windows such as browsers or file groups When you choose the Arrange command BBEdit opens the Arrange Windows dialog box Arrange Windows Arrange Windows on Main Screen O Largest Screen pa J Smallest Screen mim mN Hijas Cancel The radio buttons at the top of the dialog specify which screen the windows will be arranged on You can choose the main screen the largest screen or the smallest screen A 5 Description HA Ll Stacks every window so that some part is visible no matter which window is frontmost If you select the Leave Room for Finder options in th
159. Right These commands indent or outdent the selected text by one tab stop If there is no selection this command works on the current line Hold down the Shift key while choosing these commands to have BBEdit indent or outdent the text by one space instead of one tab stop BBEdit also entabs and detabs on the fly as you shift text For example if the selected text is indented one tab stop and you apply Shift Left One Space the tab will be converted to spaces and the text will be outdented one space If you then apply Shift Right One Space the spaces will be converted back to a single tab Un Comment Selection This command automates the task of commenting and uncommenting sections of code in various programming languages Choose a range of text and apply this command to add or remove comments to it depending on its initial comment state If there is no selection this command place a comment at the insertion point You can use the Options button of the Installed Languages list in the Languages preference panel to modify or set comment strings for any available languages If you have set custom comment delimiters for HTML in the Languages preference panel those delimiters will be honored when you use the Un Comment command However they will not affect the operation of the HTML specific comment commands on the Markup menu Hard Wrap This command wraps long lines by inserting hard line breaks and can reflow fill paragraphs if desired
160. Scrolling the non active split region does not automatically change view focus Window Anatomy 51 Tip IMPORTANT To split the text pane simply drag the split bar down and let go 090e index html oO fel fu Tilalial Last Saved 08 22 04 12 58 42 SS I f b ak a z 3 hi File Path Users Shared index html index html K DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C 0TD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd gt lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt Welcome to Bare Bones Software lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and publishes best of clai lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mailsmith supergetinfo i v 1 1 no symbol selected 4 eB p gt To collapse the text pane back down to a single region drag the split bar starting from anywhere along its length not just at its right end back up to its original position Double clicking the split bar unsplits a split text pane or restores the last used split position If the text pane has never been split it will be split 50 50 To force a 50 50 split for a previously split text pane Option double click the split bar when it is in its original position The Navigation Bar The navigation bar is a panel at the t
161. Search Enter Search String Cmd F Search Find Cmd G Search Find Again Cmd H Search Find Selection BBEdit Hide BBEdit Cmd l CodeWarrior Debug Cmd Search Go to Line Cmd K CodeWarrior Compile Cmd L Edit Select Line Cmd M Markup Tag Maker Cmd N File New Text Document Cmd O File Open Cmd P File Print Cmd Q BBEdit Quit BBEdit Cmd R CodeWarrior Debug Cmd S File Save Cmd T Search Replace amp Find Again Cmd U CodeWarrior Bring Up To Date Cmd V Edit Paste Cmd W File Close Document Cmd X Edit Cut Cmd Y CodeWarrior Check Syntax Cmd Z Edit Undo Appendix A Command Reference Key Command Cmad Text Rewrap Quoted Text Cmd Search Find Definition Cma Text Find Next Misspelled Word Cmad Text Shift Left Cmd Text Shift Right Cmd Window Cycle Through Windows Cmd Zoom Window Cmd Search Replace Cmd Text Hard Wrap Cmd left arrow Search Apply to New Cmd right arrow Search Apply to Old Cmd Ctl A Markup Inline Anchor Cmd Ctl B Markup Inline Break Cmd Ctl F Markup Inline Font Cmd Ctl H Markup Block Elements Heading Cmd Ctl I Markup Inline Image Cmd Ctl K Markup Check Document Links Cmd Ctl L Markup Lists List Cmd Ctl N File New HTML Document Cmd Ctl P Markup Preview Cmd Ctl T Markup Tables Table Cmd Ctl U Mark
162. Searching with Grep These options can also be set using the clustering non capturing parentheses syntax defined earlier by inserting the option letters between the and The scope of options set in this manner is limited to the subpattern contained therein Examples Search for i saturday sunday Will match SATURDAY or Saturday or SUNday and so on Search for i f00 i bar Will match foobar or FOObar Will not match FOOBAR or fooBAR Positional Assertions Positional assertions anchor a pattern without actually matching any characters Simple assertions have already been described those which are invoked with the escape sequences b B A Z z and For example the pattern bfoo b will only match the string foo if it has word breaks on both sides but the b s do not themselves match any characters the entire text matched by this pattern are the three characters f o and o Lookahead and lookbehind assertions work in a similar manner but allow you to test for arbitrary patterns to anchor next to If you have ever said to yourself I would like to match foo but only when it is next to bar lookaround assertions fill that need Positive lookahead assertions begin with and negative lookahead assertions begin with For example wt will match any word followed by a semicolon but the semicolon is not included as part
163. Shift and drag across the items or to select discontinuous criteria press Command Option and click on the desired items Click Save to save the file filter and use it for this search BBEdit will ask you to name the filter and it will then appear in the Filters pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog and in the Define File Filter dialog Click Revert to undo any changes you have made to the filter Hold the Option key when you click Revert to skip the confirmation alert Filtering by Name In order to provide the greatest possible flexibility BBEdit offers several different criteria for filtering based on file names File Name Tests the complete string corresponding to the file name File Name Root Tests only the root portion of the file name Given a name of the form foo txt the root is the string which occurs before the period in this case foo File Name Suffix Tests only the file name suffix In the above example the suffix is txt Note that the suffix does not include the period Temporary Filters Choose current criteria from the pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog to reuse the last set of criteria applied either from using a saved filter or from using the Edit button to define criteria Thus you can use filter criteria on the fly without the need to create and store a throwaway filter Editing and Deleting Filters To edit a file filter you have already defined choose it f
164. Show Full Paths Mark this checkbox to show the complete pathname of open documents rather than just their names in BBEdit s Window menu If two or more files have identical filenames their complete pathnames will always be shown to prevent ambiguity regardless of this setting Chapter 10 Preferences IMPORTANT Group by Window Kind Mark this checkbox to group windows of the same kind together in the Window menu For example text editing windows disk browsers and search results browsers are all different kinds of windows Within each group windows will be sorted as determined by the Sort Windows By radio buttons see below Auto Assign Shortcut Keys Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit automatically assign shortcut key equivalents of Command 0 through Command 9 to text windows or shell worksheets as these windows are created If you leave this option off these key equivalents will become available for assignment to other menu items via the Set Menu Keys command Sort Windows By This option controls the order in which documents are listed on the Window menu and in text window submenus Select Name to list documents alphabetically by name or Creation Order to list documents in the order they were opened in the current BBEdit session This option also controls the order in which documents are displayed in the documents drawer and on the navigation bar menu Window Stacking These icons determine how BBEdit stacks windows do
165. Smoothing This option allows you to choose the font sizes for both fixed width and proportional fonts at and below which BBEdit will not employ text smoothing Editing Keyboard Preferences The Editing Keyboard preferences control BBEdit s response to the use of various special keys Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete When this option is selected holding down the Shift key with the Delete key makes the Delete key work the same way as the Forward Delete key on extended keyboards This feature is particularly useful on PowerBooks Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement To use the numeric keypad to move the insertion point select this option start of line 3 scroll up 170 Chapter 10 Preferences left show selection right 4 end of line down scroll down 2 You can use the Shift key with the keys on the numeric keypad to extend a selection You can use the Command and Option keys with the 2 4 6 and 8 keys as you would the arrow keys To toggle the behavior of the keypad between moving the cursor and entering numbers hold down the Option key and press the Clear key in the upper left corner of the keypad This key is also labeled Num Lock on some keyboards When Auto Indenting This option controls whether BBEdit should remove any existing leading whitespace from lines which it applies auto indentation to Home and End Keys Choose Scroll to Beginning and E
166. T it makes sure there are line breaks around each paragraph in the resulting text HTML Entities When converting TEXT to HTML the Translate tool converts characters from their positions in the standard Macintosh character set into HTML entities using either names or the code in decimal or hexadecimal You can specify whether the tool should ignore lt and gt This is useful when translating text already marked up as HTML You can also specify that all Unicode text should be converted to entities Templates In addition to providing many facilities for creation and markup of individual documents the HTML Tools also incorporate a Template facility which can be used to quickly create or revise a set of HTML documents that share a common format structure or content You can design a skeleton document make a template from it and then use that template over and over again to produce new pages ready to fill with content or to insert into existing text documents to provide an uniform structure or appearance Templates may also employ placeholders and include files see Appendix C adding even more power to this useful function Template Setup A folder named HTML Templates which contains some sample templates is provided as part of the standard BBEdit installation We suggest in most cases that you continue to use this as your templates folder If you would prefer however you can set up your own template folder wherever you like
167. Tag Maker also works with CSS With the insertion point in a CSS selector or declaration Tag Maker will display a list of valid CSS 2 1 properties Option click while clicking the Insert button and Tag Maker will open a follow up dialog for editing the property for classes that BBEdit offers editing dialogs Invoking Tag Maker when the insertion point is not within a CSS selector will create a new skeleton rule set Tag Maker is also available through contextual menus Simply Control click at any point in your markup and BBEdit will open a contextual menu that includes all valid attributes or properties for the context of the insertion point Once you have used Tag Maker to enter a tag you can place the insertion point inside a tag and invoke Tag Maker again to show a list of available attributes for the tag Attributes that are already present in the tag are not shown in the list The list below for instance shows attributes of the lt BODY gt tag under HTML 4 0 Transitional Selecting an attribute from the list adds it to the tag and places the insertion point at the proper location for typing a value Insert Attribute alink background bgcolor class ondblclick onkeydown onkeypress onkeyup Edit Tag Another way to add or edit the attributes of a tag is to place the cursor inside the tag and choose Edit Tag from the Markup menu or the HTML Tools palette Choosing Edit Tag displays a dialog appropriate to editing the mos
168. This information is now stored centrally by BBEdit it is no longer a property of a document s file You can control how BBEdit makes use of state information via the Honor Saved State options in the Text Files Opening preferences panel Emacs Local Variables Emacs the popular Unix text editor supports a convention in which you can define Emacs specific settings in a block of text near the end of the file or in the first line of the file BBEdit now recognizes the Emacs variable block and can optionally read and set certain variables If this option is selected BBEdit will change the value of the coding variable in the variable block to be the Internet text encoding name which corresponds to the document s encoding and will write out a variable block if necessary Text Printing Preferences The Text Printing preferences control how BBEdit prints your documents Default Font To set the default printing font click the Default Font button BBEdit opens the Font panel in which you can specify the font and font size and the width of tab stops The current printing font settings appear in the display box to the right of the button Use Document s Font When this option is selected BBEdit uses the document s font and tab settings when printing Frame Printing Area When this option is selected BBEdit draws a box along the edges of the printed text Print Page Headers When this option is selected BBEdit prints the page
169. To change the keyboard shortcut for any menu command as well as some document status bar options choose the Set Menu Keys command from the BBEdit menu Human Interface Notes Many other BBEdit features can have keyboard shortcuts assigned as well Here s how to set them Feature Set Keys in Menu commands Set Menu Keys Plug ins Plug In Tools palette Glossary items Glossary palette Scripts Scripts palette Unix filters and scripts Unix Filters and Scripts palettes Stationery Stationery palette To display any of BBEdit s floating palettes use the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Contextual Menus When you Control click on selected text or at the insertion point in a text window BBEdit s contextual menu will display a set of commands relevant to that location or text as well as some appropriate standard commands such as Cut Copy Paste or Check Spelling so you do not have to hunt around in the menu bar for them Snappy Palettes When you move or resize palettes floating windows they will snap to the edges of the screen and the edges of other palettes You can override this behavior by holding down the Shift key while dragging or resizing Dialog Box and Sheet Key Equivalents You can use key equivalents to click buttons or select options in most of BBEdit s dialog boxes and window sheets Certain keys have the same meaning in all dialogs and sheets e Pressing either the Return or Enter key is
170. To start the built in web server turn on the Personal Web Sharing option in the Sharing panel of the System Preferences Preview Server URL When you are configuring a new web site if the local site root folder is located within the Sites folder of your home folder Sites BBEdit will create an appropriate local http URL and enter it in this field Otherwise you can specify the local http URL for your site root folder If your web site folders are not located within Sites or if you want to use virtual domains need to enable PHP etc you will need to modify the Apache config file Such configurations are not directly supported through the HTML Web Site preferences Languages Preferences The Languages preferences allow you to configure how BBEdit maps file names to language types e g html to HTML and to configure certain parameters for each supported language Installed Languages The list of installed languages includes both languages intrinsically supported by BBEdit and those provided via additional language modules Choose a language and click Make Default to use that language as the default when creating new text documents and when opening text documents for which the language cannot otherwise be guessed by mapping the file s suffix or examining its content The default setting is none Languages Preferences 183 184 Note Note To configure the comment start and comment e
171. Unix command line compilers do not usually do recursive searches you need to qualify the include file s name if you want to include a file out of one of the subdirectories include lt sys ioctl h gt With the Unix Search Paths settings you can add usr include to the list actually this is one of the factory defaults When you select sys ioctl h and choose Open Selection BBEdit attempts to construct a file path using each of the directories shown in the Unix Search Paths list If one resolves to a file BBEdit will open the resulting file Thus the partially qualified selection sys ioctl h resolves to usr include sys ioctl h and the file opens FTP Settings Preferences The FTP Settings preferences let you change the default settings of some options in the Open from FTP SFTP Server and Save to FTP Server dialogs Remember Bookmark Passwords Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit store the passwords for FTP sites Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags Dragging the window proxy icon from an editing window corresponding to a file opened from an FTP server will drag that file s URL rather than a representation of the local temporary file To control whether the dragged URL includes the FTP account password set the Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags checkbox This setting is turned off by default so that you do not accidentally create clippings containing passwords as this may be a security risk List FTP Files
172. Update Source Control cvs Perforce Spelling External Editors Startup i ic CodeWarrior w Dreamweaver Text Colors Xcode F Absoft Fortran Text Encodings g Default Shell bin bash i Text Files Saving Text Printing Install Command Line Tools Text Search Unix Scripting Windows If you made any changes in the default Tools options click the Save button Now you must quit and relaunch BBEdit in order for these changes to take effect Syntax Coloring Although it is not essential you may want to turn on syntax coloring when you use BBEdit with a development environment When syntax coloring is on BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color You can turn on syntax coloring by setting the Syntax Coloring option in the Editor Defaults preference panel Exuberant Ctags In addition to its native function browsing capability BBEdit now supports the use of Exuberant Ctags for navigating source code files Complete information about Exuberant Ctags is available on the project web site http ctags sourceforge net Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Source for the implementation used by BBEdit is available within the application package or from our web site http www barebones com support develop ctags shtml Using ctags If a tags file is found in the same directory as the front document or in a parent of the front document s directory you can employ the ctag information by selecting a
173. Windows e window the basic window class contains properties that can be fetched and set for any window on screen position size and so forth e palette the palette class refers to windows that float above all others on the screen the HTML tools palette scripts list and so on text window the text window class provides properties which are specific to text editing windows as on screen entities These properties pertain mostly to the display of text in the window show invisibles auto_indent and so on In addition to the text editing specific properties the basic window properties are also accessible e group window provides a way to reference windows corresponding to open file groups A group window does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate file group windows from other types of window disk browser window provides a way to reference windows corresponding to open disk browsers A disk browser window does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate disk browser windows from other types of window results browser provides a way to reference results generated by a batch operation A results browser does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate results windows from other types of window e search results browser a subclass of results browser referringspecifically to the r
174. a S EAEE aw ios 48 Rea a ae a Heres ATT ANS 3 ce cease shire ates Gon ich eq tne S aris E Sadler ee age ME e ah sro Sh ets Savers Get Info sessed seid 6s seas hehe BNE aegis ES gegen te AL esol oh Exchange with Next 6 cc cece cee ence eens Synchro Serolling eoi 5 a gia aie ase She eae a ag eg ee RE Re AR EEA Window Names gaire edgen eotia iena eee eee ene nee e teens Window Menu The Window menu provides easy centralized access to all of BBEdit s tool and utility palettes in addition to offering commands that you can use to access and organize editing and results windows on screen BBEdit also offers several preference options in the Applications panel of the Preferences window so that you have greater control over the listing of open documents You can choose whether items are grouped by window kind or are all listed together without dividers You can also elect to sort windows by name or in order of creation Please refer to Chapter 10 for additional details Minimize Window This command puts the frontmost window into the Dock Click the window icon in the Dock to restore the window Hold down the Option key and this command will become Minimize All Windows 99 100 Note Bring All to Front This command will bring all un minimized BBEdit windows to the front Palettes The Palettes submenu provides quick access to all of BBEdit s numerous tool palettes and utility windows Choosing an item from
175. a folder listing Inserting File amp Folder Paths The Insert File Path command inserts the full path information for a selected file into the document you are editing and the Insert Folder Path command inserts the full path information for the contents of the selected folder hierarchy When you use these commands BBEdit opens a directory dialog box that lets you select the file or folder BBEdit inserts the path information at the insertion point or replaces the selected text Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Tip You can also use the File Path or Folder Path command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert path information Inserting a Page Break To insert a page break choose the Page Break command from the Insert submenu of the Edit menu This will place a form feed character ASCII 12 at the location of the insertion point BBEdit uses this character to indicate the start of a new page when printing You can also use the Page Break command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a page break The Insert Submenu 73 Comparing Text Files If you have ever had to reconcile changes between two different versions of a file or even larger numbers of documents you know how laborious this task can be BBEdit s Find Differences command is a powerful tool for doing such comparisons faster and more effectively Using Find Differences you can compare any two files or the contents of two folde
176. a revision list for the frontmost document and then syncs the file to the chosen revision Sync All Performs a p4 sync with no additional arguments Submit Opens a change list editor window in BBEdit and then submits the changes described within Working with Perforce 295 Show Opened Displays a results browser showing all the files opened or added to the repository You can select files in this browser and apply many other commands to them Compare Revisions Displays a revision list for the frontmost document and then compares the contents of that document to the revision you chose from the list Compare Arbitrary Revisions Displays two revision lists and then compares the two revisions you choose to each other without changing the version you have checked out Compare with Base Compares the contents of the frontmost document to the revision it is derived from Compare with Head Compares the frontmost document to the head revision Show Annotation Opens a window containing the results of a p4 annotate Show Revision History Shows the revision history for the current document Equivalent to a p4 filelog Add Adds the frontmost document to the P4 repository As with the command line tool you must then perform a Submit to register this change with the server Delete Deletes the frontmost document from the P4 repository As with the command line tool you must then perform a Submit to regist
177. ace it on the Clipboard e208 F Rectangular Selections oO A fifsiimlfelitifoall Last Saved 03 24 MS 2 z L gt kd 5 1 2 File Path Sa tions Po This This text text goes goes on the on the left right This text doesn t go anywhere 8 no symbol selected B gt Next you must paste in the text you just cut You can do this in either of two ways e Use the Paste Column command which will paste down from the current insertion point This allows you to directly insert text without needing to make a rectangular selection first e Make a rectangular selection as described below and then use the standard Paste command This procedure is less efficient for moving columnar data than using the Paste Column command but it allows you to select and replace a region of text as well as simply inserting text Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note To manually make a rectangular selection prior to pasting text position the arrow pointer just to the left of the top right column press and hold the Option key press the mouse button and drag straight down until you have a very thin vertical selection just to the left of the whole column as shown below e088 F Rectangular Selections zlin alra Last Saved 03 24 2 fA f ii J a ne 2 File Path Sa _ tions Coat 10 pe This his text ext goes joes o
178. ackground color text color link color active link color and visited link color You can specify the background image by typing or by clicking the File button Link background and text colors are chosen from the 216 color Web safe palette that appears when you click one of the color swatches Option clicking a color swatch will bring up the system color picker so you can select colors that are not in the Web safe palette Head Elements This submenu allows you to add tags that are valid in the document s head The tag is inserted at the current insertion point even if the insertion point is not a contextually valid location for the tag Base The BASE tag determines the default location of documents referenced in the current document You will be prompted to enter the Href the document or folder that all relative links in the document should be considered relative to You can enter the Href by typing it into the supplied field or by clicking the Folder button to select a folder on your hard disk A set of radio buttons offer the choice of full root or relative addressing The Target field determines the frame in which hyperlinked documents will appear by default Both fields are optional Link The LINK tag tells the browser about a document related to the current document The most common use for this tag is to point to an externally defined CSS stylesheet document You can choose to indicate whether this link defines a REL
179. ail in Chapter 14 Install Command Line Tools The Install Command Line Tools button installs the current version of the bbedit and bbdiff tools for invoking BBEdit from the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install these tools for you If you choose not to do so you can use this button in the Tools preference panel to install the tools at a later time If the tools are already installed the button will update them to a newer version if one is available it will not overwrite existing versions of the tools with older versions See Chapter 14 for further details on the bbedit and bbdiff command line tools Unix Scripting Preferences The Unix Scripting preferences control how BBEdit handles files which are run as Unix filters or scripts Use UTF 8 for Unix Script 1 0 Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit always send UTF 8 to Unix filters and interpret Unix script output as UTF 8 This precludes the previous need for BBEdit to create and execute a temporary copy of the script file which could result in different behaviors for a script when run inside and outside of BBEdit Unix Scripting Preferences 197 198 Warn About Non Unix Line Breaks Before Running Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit post an alert when you attempt to run a filter or script which does not have Unix line breaks Although BBEdit transparently handles this case most external environments do no
180. aking the package seal and installing the program constitutes your acceptance of these terms and conditions If you do not accept these terms and conditions then do not break the package seal or install the software and return the package for a full refund License You may use the program and documentation on a single machine and copy the program and documentation into any machine readable or printed form for backup or support of your use of the program and documentation on the single machine provided that no more than one copy of the program and documentation may be used on a single machine by no more than one user at a time You may not use copy modify or transfer the program or documentation or any copy thereof in whole or in part except as provided in this Agreement If you use copy modify or transfer the program or documentation or any copy thereof in whole or part except as expressly provided for in this agreement your license is automatically terminated The license is effective on the date you accept this Agreement and remains in effect until terminated as indicated above or until you terminate it If the license is terminated for any reason you agree to destroy the program and documentation together with all copies thereof in whole or in part in any form and to cease all use of the program and documentation Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies The program documentation and any support from Bare Bones Software
181. al dollar sign 1 234 56 followed by one or more 4 296 459 19 digits and commas followed 3 5 6 4 0000 by a period then zero or 0 more digits Chapter 8 Searching with Grep What if we wanted to match a series of digits followed by a plus sign followed by the exact same series of digits as on the left side of the plus In other words we want to match 1234 1234 or 7 7 but not 543241984 Using grouping parentheses you can do this by referring to a backreference also known as a captured subpattern Each set of parentheses in the pattern is numbered from left to right starting with the opening parenthesis Later in the pattern you can refer to the text matched within these backreferences by using a backslash followed by the number of the backreference Pattern Matches Examples d 1 a string of digits followed by 7 7 a plus sign followed the 123441234 same digits wt s 1 double words the the w w 2 1 a word character a second abba word character followed 7 the second one again and the first one again We will revisit subpatterns in the section on replacement where you will see how the choice of subpatterns affects the changes you can make Using Alternation The alternation operator allows you to match any of several patterns at a given point To use this operator place it between one or more patterns x y to match either x or y As with all of the preceding options
182. ally be Users lt username gt Library Application Support BBEdit Using the Global Application Support Folder You can use the global application support folder to provide a common set of supporting items in BBEdit to each user of the machine Users whose accounts do not have admin privileges will not be able to modify the contents of the global application support folder since it resides in the system hierarchy This arrangement can be advantageous when configuring the software for use in shared machine environments such as labs or common area workstations However if such an arrangement is not desirable for your purposes you should not create a global application support folder Instead each user can maintain their own local application support folder for BBEdit which they may add items to or remove items from at will Using a Local Application Support Folder If a local application support folder does not exist when BBEdit starts up BBEdit will create one for you and populate it with a set of factory default examples Although none of these default items are essential for doing basic tasks with BBEdit and you can remove any or all of them they provide additional functionality that you may wish to retain Application Support Folder Contents BBEdit s application support folders contain various subfolders each of which holds a specific type of support item As indicated items in some subfolders can be loaded from both t
183. anced imported capabilities of former plug in tools sheet support improved recordability and more Integrated support for the Subversion and Perforce P4 source control systems e Spell checking now uses the Mac OS X system spelling checker e Integrated support for Exuberant Ctags e Numerous CVS improvements including CVSEDITOR support for checkin comments Affrus support for debugging Perl Scripts Streamlined application support folder handling allows both global and local add in items e New visual Page Guide and tab stop indicators e Current line highlighting preference Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit Info on New Features In addition to these major enhancements BBEdit 8 also contains a plethora of additional features and interface and performance enhancements as well as bug fixes For a detailed summary of changes and bug fixes please refer to the current release notes which are available in the BBEdit Support section of our web site http www barebones com support bbedit current_notes shtml Support Services The Bare Bones Software web site provides up to date information on BBEdit Mailsmith and other Bare Bones Software products including FAQs product updates plug ins sample scripts and other support and informational materials http www barebones com For support help and information follow the links to the Support area where you ll find a wide range of information including e Frequentl
184. and access frequently used text of any sort For details on using the Glossary including its language sensitive mode please refer to Chapter 12 Plug In Tools The Tools palette displays a list of all the plug ins in your BBEdit Plug Ins folder Any plug ins you have installed will appear both in this Tool List window and in the Tools menu itself See Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins for more information on installing plug ins Chapter 6 Arranging Windows amp Palettes Note Scripts The Scripts palette displays all the currently installed AppleScripts in your BBEdit Scripts folder See Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit for information about using AppleScript with BBEdit Stationery The Stationery List is a palette that displays all the stationery pads you have placed inside the Stationery folder of BBEdit s application support folder You can create a new document from any of these pads by double clicking it in this list Although the document created will have the content and all the state information from the stationery pad it is a new untitled document separate from the stationery pad To create a stationery pad click the Save As Stationery checkbox when saving the file from BBEdit Alternately any document can be changed into a stationery pad in the Finder by clicking the Stationery Pad checkbox in the document s Get Info window By default items in the Stationery List are displayed in alphabetical order However you
185. and many other words Both the asterisk and the question mark can be used anywhere in a wildcard pattern and any number of either can be used in a single pattern Grep patterns also known as regular expressions are a powerful method of selecting file names based on classes of text or repeating text They are covered in great detail in the next chapter The right column specifies the match criterion For example when filtering by File Name you type the text you want the name to match contain begin with or end with or not When filtering by Language you choose a supported language from a pop up menu To quickly set a match criterion drag a file from the Finder to a field in the Define File Filter dialog BBEdit inserts the appropriate attribute from the dragged file if possible Chapter 7 Searching Specifying Time and Date Criteria When using a time or date criterion you can use the special words below to specify dates and times relative to the current date and time Word Means now current date and time today midnight on the current date yesterday current date and time minus 24 hours tomorrow current date and time plus 24 hours You can add any number of criteria using the More Criteria button To delete the last criterion click the Fewer Criteria button To select any single criterion for deletion press the Option key and click on the desired item To select multiple continuous criteria press Option
186. angle for the window shell document modal boolean r o the window modal shell window file alias r o the d with this window if any source_control_fc modified boolean r o Has the window been modified since the last text document a Save text window name international text the title of the window tool window position point upper left coordinates of the window web site resizable boolean r o w resizable selection reference ti contents anything s of the window if any gt Commands text text the wind t if any W Text Suite N YClasses titled boolean r o ti dow have a title bar visible boolean r o is the window visible character zoomable boolean r o ls the wind mable seca Zoomed boolean Is the window zoome insertion point v line M All windows in BBEdit belong to this class A class defines a particular kind of object a particular example of an object belonging to the class is said to be an instance of that class or just an object of that class So here we are looking at the class itself each individual window object has all these properties After a tag line that tells you about the class an open window comes the plural form AppleScript lets you refer to windows either singly or as a group so it needs to know what the plural of every term is For example try this little script tell application BBEdit to count windows The result of this script is the total n
187. another set contents of clipboard 5 to clipboard 3 or to set the current clipboard to the contents of a different clipboard thus making it exportable to the system clipboard set current clipboard to clipboard 3 as text BBEdit s Scripting Model 273 274 or finally with even less typing involved set current clipboard to clipboard 5 To make any clipboard the current clipboard select it select clipboard 5 Scripting Text Factories You can now apply a text factory to a file via the AppleScript interface The minimum invocation is apply text factory lt file reference gt to lt reference gt The to parameter can be a single reference or a list of references as for the mullti file find or replace events mom mom mom mon Optional parameters include filter saving recursion text files only skip shielded folders search invisible folders all with the same meanings as in the multi file replace event Arranging Documents and Windows BBEdit 8 1 includes several scripting enhancements which provide you greater control over window and document handling Opening Documents The open command now supports additional options which allow you to override your window handling preferences on a case by case basis open aFileList opening in lt value gt As in previous releases lt value gt may be a reference to an existing text window n ou However you may instead specify front_window
188. appears Open from FTP SFTP Server Bookmarks es pub Rendezvous g demos Newb Server j developer SS 3 freeware GoTo ftp barebones com J glossaries m SFTP Massive FTP helper apps language modules Open User Name 2 manual adam_s 3 pictures 3 products Password ia _ README gt scripts eai C3 third party plugins v Remember Password 2 updaters C Cancel _ Auto Connect Disconnect _ Show Files Starting with wv Show Document Icons Enter the name of the server or choose a server from the Rendezvous pop up menu specify your user name and password in the appropriate fields and choose the SFTP or Passive FTP options if appropriate then click the Connect button to connect to the server You can also click the Go To button to bring up a dialog in which you can type the exact pathname of a directory to view Accessing FTP SFTP Servers 33 34 Note Note The Rendezvous pop up in the dialog will show FTP servers if the SFTP option is turned off or SFTP servers if this option is turned on Note that SSH services are only advertised by machines running Mac OS X 10 3 when Remote Login is turned on in the Sharing section of the System Preferences Alternatively you can choose an item from the Bookmarks pop up menu to fill ina predefined server user name and password Bookmarks can be set by entering the appropriate information i
189. ar foo fighting foo The pattern will only match the second line In versions of BBEdit prior to 6 5 the character was a wildcard that matched any digit O 9 however this is no longer the case If you have grep patterns written with an old version of BBEdit that use for this purpose you will need to change these patterns The easiest way to do this is to use the d character class which has the exact same meaning that used to it matches any character from 0 9 Character classes are explained in the next section 130 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Other Positional Assertions BBEdit s grep engine supports additional positional assertions very similar to and Escape Matches A only at the beginning of the document as opposed to which matches at the beginning of the document and also at the beginning of each line b any word boundary defined as any position between a w character and a W character in either order B any position that is not a word boundary z at the end of the document as opposed to which matches at the end of the document and also at the end of each line Z at the end of the document or before a trailing return at the end of the doc if there is one Examples the text matched by the pattern is underlined bfoo b bar foo bar foo bar Will not match foobar Search for Will match Will match Search for Will match Will match Search for Will match
190. arious contextual clues such as whether the opening tag is a block element or an inline element and whether there are line breaks in a block element s contents if the tag is a block element This is the default option e Before Insertion Point always places the closing tag immediately before the insertion point thus leaving the insertion point outside of the tag container e After Insertion Point always places the closing tag immediately after the insertion point This leaves the insertion point inside the tag container HTML Palette Preferences The HTML Palette preferences determine how the HTML tools floating palette is displayed Chapter 10 Preferences Note Button Height Choose normal or short buttons Using short buttons allows the palette to require less space vertically Buttons on Main HTML Tools Palette This list allows you to select which buttons are displayed on the palette You can select a series of buttons by Shift clicking their names in the display area or a discontinuous group of buttons by Command clicking each button name After you make a selection click Show or Hide to mark or unmark the selected buttons HTML Preview Preferences The HTML Preview preferences tell BBEdit how you prefer to preview HTML documents When Previewing Files with Unsaved Changes Choose to preview files with unsaved changes by saving the changes to a temporary file by saving the current file just before preview
191. as well as for the display of tabular data although strictly speaking their use for layout should be avoided as much as possible BBEdit fully supports HTML 4 tables which are considerably more flexible than the HTML 3 2 tables many users may be familiar with If some tags or attributes in this section are unfamiliar to you we strongly encourage you to study the HTML 4 standard before attempting to use them Table This command inserts lt TABLE gt and lt TABLE gt tags around the selected text You can specify border width spacing padding frame ruling alignment and background color If there is no selection you can have BBEdit generate a shell for the table including all lt TR gt and lt TD gt elements inside the table for the number of rows and columns you specify and optionally insert placeholder label text in each cell Row This command inserts lt TR gt and lt TR gt tags in the document before and after the selection if there is one You can specify the desired horizontal and vertical cell alignment and a row background color If horizontal alignment to a specific character is specified you can also indicate the character that determines alignment and the character offset to the first alignment character in the line Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools TD TH These commands inserts a table data cell element or a heading cell element respectively Both have the same options though most browsers render TH ele
192. at overlaps with the suffix map of another language module or BBEdit s built in languages confusion may result Fortunately all of the suffix mappings can be seen in BBEdit s Languages preference panel BBLMIsSourceKind Boolean If this key is present and its value is true files with this suffix are considered source files BBLMIsHeaderKind Boolean If this key is present and its value is true files with this suffix are considered header files If both the BBLMIsSourceKind and BBLMIsHeaderKind keys are present and have the value true BBLMIsSourceKind takes precedence but there should really be only one or the other or neither If the module s language has a concept of source versus header files and the appropriate values are specified for example files with names ending with h are considered header files for C whereas files with names ending with cp are considered source files users will be able to jump between source and header files that share a common prefix e g foobar h and foobar cp using command tab Language Features Dictionary This dictionary is simply a collection of key value pairs that define the language elements that the module supports Identifier and Keyword String Characters Most languages have keywords and identify other language elements with names that are words made up of letters digits and possibly other special characters The function scann
193. at the file was printed Printing 43 44 Chapter 3 Working with Files CHAPTER Editing Text with BBEdit This chapter describes the basics of editing text with BBEdit wrapping text text manipulations and file comparison In this chapter Basic Editing niere a teats Win Sp singe ahaa wae aoe wee Sheed w Thr nw i Tears 8 46 Moving Text 46 e Multiple Clipboards 47 Drag and Drop 48 Multiple Undo seeen gan aie ahs EE ta heed oak EA ee 48 Window Anatomy 2 6 EEE e ERE SRT e nen n een S 49 The Status Bar 49 The Split Bar 51 The Navigation Bar 52 The Documents Drawer 53 The View Menu 54 Cursor Movement and Text Selection 6 6 cece cence cece eee 55 Clicking and Dragging 55 Arrow Keys 56 Rectangular Selections 57 Working with Rectangular Selections 57 Scrolling the View 59 The Delete Key 60 The Numeric Keypad 60 Go To Line Command 61 Function Keys 62 Resolving URLs 62 TEXEOPUONS niria WSs Goats al eadal Sedna kiaiets esa aa eters alee as 62 Editing Options 63 Display Options 64 SHOW BONUS vse ds as gii scar Ea ERA a In by Jo GE E bance ones Shee 65 How BBEdit Wraps Text s sses cosi eiid doim eee n enn E 66 Soft Wrapping 67 Hard Wrapping 67 The Mark Submenu 2 6 cece eee tent AE A eens 70 Setting Markers 70 Clearing Markers 71 Using Grep to Set Markers 71 The Insert Submenu mire a ee
194. ath warns you if any file paths contain aliases rather than real folders File Out of Server Scope controls whether the link checker will issue out of server scope warnings for links that fall outside of the server scope for the document being checked In general you will want to leave this option on and make sure your web site preferences are properly configured If however you often check transient content such as help files or readme files which does not merit adding a separate site configuration you may want to turn this warning off Chapter 10 Preferences HTML Web Sites Preferences The HTML Web Sites preferences let you tell BBEdit about the Web server where your pages will be hosted e800 BBEdit Preferences These settings specify information about the Web site you re developing for use by BBEdit s HTML site tools Application Browser Display Differences Documents Editing General Editing Keyboard Editor Defaults File Filters File Search FTP Settings Function Popup Glossary HTML Colors HTML Markup HTML Palette HTML Preview HTML Tools HTML Web Sites Languages Software Update Source Control M gt Add V www barebones com Change Remove Make Default You can define as many separate web sites as you like The Add button brings up a Web Site Settings dialog see below for adding a new site to the list and specifying its properties When a site is selected in the list the Change bu
195. ation for the file However unlike the Save As command where BBEdit will start working with the new file you saved in place of the original when you use Save a Copy you create a new file in the designated location but keep working with the original file For example say you are editing a document called Test c and use the Save a Copy command to save a document called Backup Test c The next time you choose the Save command BBEdit saves the changes to Test c and not to Backup Test c File Saving Options BBEdit s Save dialog is the standard Macintosh Save dialog with these additions e Save As Stationery When this option is selected BBEdit saves the document as a stationery pad When you later open this document BBEdit uses it as the basis of a new untitled document The new document will inherit the contents and display settings of the stationery document but BBEdit will prompt you for a name when you save it e Options button This button opens a dialog box that lets you control what kind of line breaks and encoding the file should have Save Options Line Breaks _Unix zs Encoding Western Mac OS Ro HJ Setting the Line Breaks The line breaks settings let you choose what kinds of line breaks BBEdit writes when you save the file Choose e Unix line breaks ASCII 10 for most purposes including use with most Mac OS X applications or for files being saved to a Unix file server Creating and Saving Documents 23
196. attern 140 Case Transformations 141 EXA ple SSe ea Bist Bie ccna cd ie set ee ee es ee cand lala tal hs th ee 142 Matching Identifiers 142 Matching White Space 142 Matching Delimited Strings 143 Marking Structured Text 143 Marking a Mail Digest 144 Rearranging Name Lists 144 Advanced Grep Topics 600 c cece cnn 145 Matching Nulls 145 Backreferences 145 POSIX Style Character Classes 147 Non Capturing Parentheses 147 Perl Style Pattern Extensions 148 Comments 149 Pattern Modifiers 149 Positional Assertions 151 Conditional Subpatterns 153 Once Only Subpatterns 154 Recursive Patterns 156 Chapter 9 Browsers 157 Browser Overview ccc ccc cence ence ene e nee 157 List Pane 157 Status Bar 158 Text View Pane 158 Splitter 158 Disk Browsers ss ecisuss oye y sconce epg Gs Sees ad aha eae Anguelh 40 GM 158 Using Disk Browsers 159 Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers 160 Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers 160 Search Results Browsers 00 ccc cece teen ene 161 Error Results Browsers 000s cece cece ten een eens 162 Table of Contents Chapter 10 Preferences 163 The Preferences Command 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 164 Application Preferences 0 0 c ccc eens 165 Optional Mac OS Services 165 Optional Application Services 165 Always Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu 165
197. b Site preferences print SENV BBEditServerURL Include Files 335 IMPORTANT Here s an example Python include script usr local bin python import os import string import sys print Hello Python World print print File being updated sys argv 1 print userVariables for i in range 2 len sys argv 2 userVariables sys argv i sys argv it l print print Dumping the user variables passed to the script print S sSsssssssssssssssSssssssSSSSeSSSSeSeeeeSeeeea print keys userVariables keys keys sort for k in keys print 30s s k userVariables k print print Dumping the environment variables set by BBEdit print print for k v in os environ items if string find k BBEdit 0 print 30s s k os environ k Other Include Notes Some old versions of BBEdit supported the use of include as an alternative to bbinclude However this syntax made it difficult to mix BBEdit includes and Microsoft Active Server Page ASP directives so it is no longer supported If you have existing documents which use this syntax simply change include and end include to bbinclude and end bbinclude to use them with BBEdit 8 336 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files APPENDIX Note Codeless Language Modules This appendix lists the syntax elements available for use in codeless langua
198. being compared in a folder In other words when comparing folders it looks in each subfolder of the first folder you select and tries to match it with a file of the same name in the same subfolder of the second folder and so on down for all subfolders If you choose Flatten Hierarchies BBEdit considers the files in the folders as a single flat list allowing a file in one folder to match a file of the same name in the other folder regardless of whether they are in the same subfolder in both hierarchies Only List Text Files If this option is set BBEdit does not list non text files when comparing folders Skip Folders If this option is set BBEdit skips subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses when comparing folders Use File Filter File Filters allow you to select files for comparison with great precision If either file in a compared pair matches the filter the files are eligible for comparison if neither file matches the filter the files will not be compared See Chapter 7 Searching for more information on creating editing and using file filters When comparing folders with the Find Differences command BBEdit applies any specified file filter to the contents of the resulting Only in new and Only in old lists so that only those files that match the filter criteria will appear in the lists Spell Checking Documents The Check Spelling command in the Text menu lets you check the spelling of the t
199. ble block and can optionally read and set certain variables Chapter 10 Preferences If this option is selected BBEdit will use the coding variable whose value is the Internet text encoding name in which the file is written e g iso 8859 1 or utf 8 to interpret the file s contents when opening it Scrollbar Position When this option is selected BBEdit restores the scroll bar position to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise BBEdit opens the file with the top of the file showing Option Settings When selected BBEdit reads document specific options such as soft wrap show invisibles and line numbering from the saved state information Text Files Saving Preferences The Text Files Saving preferences control BBEdit s behavior when it saves files including file backup settings Force New Line at End When this option is selected BBEdit will always add a line break at the end of the file if it does not already end with one Default Line Breaks These options let you choose what kinds of line breaks BBEdit writes when you save the file You can choose e Macintosh line breaks ASCII 13 if you are using the file only on a Macintosh e Unix line breaks ASCII 10 if the file resides on a Unix file server or if you are sending it to someone who uses Unix e DOS line breaks ASCII 13 10 if the file resides on a DOS file server or if you are sending it to someone who uses a DOS system
200. ble to you BBEdit also supports FTP and SFTP URL clippings You can make a clipping of the FTP or SFTP URL for a file add the clipping to a file group and double click it and BBEdit will open the specified file for editing If the clipping contains the URL for a directory BBEdit will open a new FTP SFTP Browser window see the next section for more information about FTP SFTP Browsers Alternatively you can double click an FTP or SFTP clipping in a disk browser or drop one on BBEdit s icon in the Finder with the same results as just described Dragging the window proxy icon from an editing window corresponding to a file opened from an FTP or SFTP server will create a clipping containing that file s URL Once you have selected a file and opened it BBEdit displays the file in a text editing window The status bar displays the URL of the file on the server not the pathname of the file on your hard drive as it does for local files The window path pop up menu in editing windows for files opened via this command displays the file s path on the server rather than the local path to the temporary file Choosing one of the items from the pop up menu will open a new FITP SFTP Browser window to the chosen directory When you open a file from an FTP or SFTP server BBEdit downloads it raw in binary mode and then performs a standard line ending conversion on the downloaded file Chapter 3 Working with Files Note Specifying Al
201. bol or a backslash W Editor Defaults Preferences The Editor Defaults preferences control the behavior of newly created document windows and documents without saved state information Many of the preferences in this panel are the same as those in the Text Options sheet and in the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar The difference is that the text options control the behavior of the active window while the Editor Defaults preferences control the behavior of new windows Auto Indent When this option is selected pressing the Return key in new windows automatically inserts spaces or tabs to indent the new line to the same level as the previous line To temporarily invert the sense of the Auto Indent option while typing hold down the Option key as you press the Return key Balance While Typing When this option is selected BBEdit flashes the matching open parenthesis brace bracket or curly quote when you type a closing one This option is useful when you are editing source files to ensure that all delimiters are balanced Smart Quotes When this option is on BBEdit automatically substitutes curly or typographer s quotes for straight quotes To type a straight quote when this option is selected or to type a curly quote when the option is deselected hold down the Control key as you type a single or double quote You should avoid using Smart Quotes when creating or editing HTML doc
202. can also select a predefined search pattern from the Patterns pop up menu or click the grab selection button to use the current selection as the search pattern If the selection ends in a trailing carriage return the carriage return will be omitted from the search string copied into the text field The checkboxes on the right of the sheet control the way lines containing the specified search pattern will be processed By selecting the appropriate combinations of these options you can achieve the effect of applying various editing commands to each line e Setting both Copy to Clipboard and Delete Matched Lines on is equivalent to applying the Cut command Text Menu Commands 87 88 Note e Setting Copy to Clipboard on and Delete Matched Lines off is equivalent to applying the Copy command e Setting Copy to Clipboard off and Delete Matched Lines on is equivalent to applying the Clear command The Copy to New Document option opens a new untitled document containing copies of all lines matching the search pattern whether or not they are deleted from the original window By using this option and turning Copy to Clipboard off you can collect all matching lines without affecting the previous contents of the clipboard The Report Results option causes BBEdit to display a dialog reporting the total number of lines matched regardless of their final disposition With all of the other options turned off this can be useful for pret
203. cause a window is an item it has in addition to all its listed properties another property which returns all the other properties as a record a single piece of data that can be stored in a variable Every class in BBEdit is part of a hierarchy with the item class at the top so every object in BBEdit inherits the properties property This catch all property can be handy for making exact duplicates of objects among other uses You may realize that BBEdit has several kinds of windows you can see their classes listed in the dictionary clipboard window differences window disk browser window file group window text window tool window and the like Let s look at text window e080 BBEdit asdictionary perl_reference wi 4 Class text window A text editing window 4 picture document Plural form picture window text windows plugin_info_windc Elements preferences_wind text document by numeric index by name by ID recent file Properties i fold lt inheritance gt window properties are also inherited from the basic recent folder window class results browser active document reference r o the current document being search results brc displayed edited shell document display font string font in which text is displayed shell window display font size small integer point size of displayed text source_control_fo display font style a list of plain bold italic outline shadow underline text document
204. ces pane such as RCDefaultApp for this purpose You should select whichever setting makes the most sense for the sorts of files you work with For example if you often download or work with files which lack filename extensions but you know that they always contain text you can select Assume It s Text Text Files Opening Preferences 189 190 Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set When this option is selected BBEdit will use the character set specified in the appropriate HTML meta tag or XML declaration to determine a file s encoding when opening the file Also when this option is on changing an HTML or XML document s character set with the Character Set markup command will adjust the file s encoding to match as indicated on the Encoding submenu of the File Options popup in the status bar and changing the file s encoding will adjust the character set declaration if one exists This option is on by default When this option is off then BBEdit does not attempt to use the character set specified in the HTML meta tag or XML declaration but will follow the usual procedure for determining the file s character set See Choosing the Encoding for a Document on page 25 The only reason you might want to turn this option off is if you routinely put characters into your document that cannot be represented in the declared character set e g if you will be post processing the file by some other means which modif
205. ch offers the option to sign up http www barebones com support lists html BBEdit s grep engine is based on the PCRE library package which is open source software written by Philip Hazel and copyright 1997 2000 by the University of Cambridge England For details see lt ftp ftp csx cam ac uk pub software programming pcre gt 128 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Note Writing Search Patterns This section explains how to create search patterns using BBEdit s grep syntax For readers with prior experience this is essentially like the syntax used for regular expressions in the Perl programming language However you do not need to understand anything about Perl in order to make use of BBEdit s grep searching Most Characters Match Themselves Most characters that you type into the Find amp Replace dialog match themselves For instance if you are looking for the letter t Grep stops and reports a match when it encounters a t in the text This idea is so obvious that it seems not worth mentioning but the important thing to remember is that these characters are search patterns Very simple patterns to be sure but patterns nonetheless Escaping Special Characters In addition to the simple character matching discussed above there are various special characters that have different meanings when used in a grep pattern than in a normal search The use of these characters is covered in the following sections
206. cintosh Drag and Drop 48 see also drag and drop Macintosh line breaks 23 Macromedia Dreamweaver 236 MAP tag 229 Mark pop up menu 50 70 markers clearing 71 setting 70 Markup menu 204 menu list HTML 224 menus 3 message URL http tidy sourceforge net 237 META tags 206 207 222 Misc submenu 236 monospaced font 224 232 mouse shortcuts 323 moving text 46 moving the cursor 55 using the arrow keys 56 multi byte text 24 25 31 81 188 multi file comparisons 76 multi file search 110 111 multiple clipboards 47 multiple Undo 48 name placeholder 248 249 328 329 New amp Opened Documents 168 New Project command 302 New Window with Selection 22 NOFRAMES tag 232 Non Greedy Quantifiers 138 non printing characters 64 111 NOSCRIPT tag 222 223 numeric keypad 60 O OBJECT tag 228 OL tag 224 Open command 25 options 27 Open File by Name command 30 Open Hidden 28 Open Recent command 25 28 29 Open Selection command 25 29 Opening 25 Opening Existing Documents 25 optimizing HTML 235 OPTION tag 227 Option on Japanese Keyboards 172 OPTIONGROUP tag 227 Index 349 ordered lists 224 outdenting 83 P P paragraph tag 222 page breaks 73 Page Down key 62 Page Guide 173 Page Up key 62 paragraph definition 46 Paragraph Fill option 69 PARAM tag 228 passive FTP 34 Paste command 4 47 Paste Previous Clipboard 326 Paste Previous Clipboard command 47 Path pop up menu 50 pattern matching see grep pencil icon
207. ck the box next to that group s name or double click on its name in the Sources drawer Searching the files on a web site You can limit your multi file search to the files for a specific web site folder as defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel This menu lists all of the local site root and Templates amp Includes folders that you have specified for the web sites in your HTML Web Sites preference panel If you have not designated such a folder for a site the site name appears dimmed in the menu and cannot be selected Multi File Searching 115 116 Note The Choose a Folder dialog will display any packages it encounters as folders rather than just as single files the way they appear in the Finder This allows you to navigate their internal structure just as you would any other folder Similarly you can drag a package from the Finder into the path box in the Find amp Replace dialog and it will be treated as a true folder rather than as a single file Saved Search Sources You can use the Saved Search Sources pop up menu to store specific sets of search sources for later reuse To save a set of search sources choose Remember this Set from the pop up menu and give the set a name in the resulting dialog To select a saved set of search sources choose that set s name from the pop menu Multi File Search Options Click the Options button to display the search options sheet v Search Nested Folders File Type
208. ck the project for modified files and to recompile and reload any files that have changed Make Tells CodeWarrior to issue a make command to recompile and link all modified files in the open project Debug Tells CodeWarrior to run the open project in the CodeWarrior debugger Run Tells CodeWarrior to run the open project without using the source debugger If choosing this command causes CodeWarrior to recompile files compiler errors may not be reported to BBEdit If that happens use Make instead and then select Run Working with Xcode Xcode is Apple s native development environment for Mac OS X If you have Xcode installed you can configure it to use BBEdit as an external editor To enable this integration first turn on the Xcode option in the Tools panel of BBEdit s Preferences window Then switch to Xcode open its Preferences window and select the File Types section and expand the file hierarchy to reach the sourcecode node From the popup menu at the right choose External Editor and select BBEdit from the list of available applications Once you have completed these steps Xcode will automatically ask BBEdit to open any files you select and BBEdit will notify Xcode whenever you save a file that it asked BBEdit to open Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools CHAPTER Language Modules amp Plug Ins Language modules and plug ins are code modules that you can install to enhance BBE
209. ckreference followed by a literal 1 you can use 011 If you use 11 you will get the 11th backreference even if it is empty NN If two decimal digits follow the backslash which taken together represent the value N and if there is an Nth captured substring then all three characters are replaced with that substring If there is not an Nth captured substring all three characters are discarded that is the backreference is replaced with the empty string N If there is only a single digit N following the backslash and there is an Nth captured ae both characters are replaced with that substring Otherwise both characters are discarded that is the backreference is replaced with the empty string In replacement patterns 0 is a backreference to the entire match exactly equivalent to amp Chapter 8 Searching with Grep POSIX Style Character Classes BBEdit now provides support for POSIX style character classes These classes are used in the form CLASS and are only available inside regular character classes in other words inside another set of square brackets Class Meaning alnum letters and digits alpha letters ascii character codes 0 127 cntrl control characters digit decimal digits same as d graph printing characters excluding spaces lower lower case letters print printing characters including spaces punct punctuation characters space whi
210. cting it from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu BBEdit remembers which palettes you had open when you quit so if you open the HTML Tools palette it will remain open until you close it again even on subsequent uses of BBEdit The HTML Tools Palette 239 240 You can choose the buttons to be displayed on HTML Tools palette in the HTML Palette preference panel HTML Tools Palette Tips A list of all the tools that are available on the HTML Tools palette appears below In most cases their behavior corresponds obviously with the tool descriptions in the previous section In the few cases where there are significant differences these are noted Many of the tools also work with drag and drop Those that do are marked with grip strips two vertical slashes at the left side of the button You can drag these tools into your document to have them take effect wherever you drop them Some palette buttons are actually pop up menus Clicking a pop up menu button while holding down the Command key invokes that menu s last selected menu option Try pressing the Option key and watch how the palette changes By holding down Option as you click you can force many buttons that normally display a settings dialog to use their previous settings instead The Preview button previews your document ina new browser window when you Option click HTML Tools Palette Tool Menu Based Equivalent New Document File gt New gt HTML Document
211. cument window which contains a single action step corresponding to a single operation Text factory documents are plist text files which are distinguished from editable text files by having either a file type of TxEN and a creator type of R ch or a filename extension of textfactory If you store documents in any manner which does not preserve file type info you must name your text factory documents accordingly Text Factories 91 92 Choosing Targets At the top of a text factory window is a summary area which displays information about the target files and folders you have chosen for processing Click Choose to present a sheet containing a list of selected and available target items This list is similar to the Sources drawer used for multi file searches in the Find dialog Other 3 MI My Files amp Folders A foo html Users Shared v A Recent Folders www barebones com Sandbox BBSW_ ww myexamplesite Users Shared Web Sites Personal test bed www barebones com Cancel 0K To choose or deselect an item as a target click the checkbox next to its name To add a file or folder to the list click Other and select it in the resulting Choose Object dialog Click Options to select additional options for controlling which target items will be processed To process all the files in subfolders of each target folder mark the Search Nested Folders checkbox The Skip Folders checkbox skip
212. d The enclosed text is text to be entered on a computer keyboard used in instructions Sample Output The enclosed text is sample output from a computer program used in instructions Strong Emphasis The text should be displayed with strong emphasis most browsers interpret this as boldface Variable The text is a placeholder in an instruction or tutorial and should be replaced with an actual value of the appropriate type before actually performing the indicated operation Font Style Elements Like Phrase Elements Font Style Elements mark relatively short pieces of text within a block element However they are concerned more with the appearance of the text than its structural function in the document Big This displays the enclosed text in a larger font than usual Small This displays the enclosed text in a smaller font than usual Bold This displays the enclosed text in boldface type Italic This displays the enclosed text in italic type Strike Through This displays the enclosed text in a strike through style HTML Tool Descriptions 231 232 Teletype Text This displays the enclosed text in a monospaced font as on a computer terminal or teletype Underline This displays the enclosed text in an underlined style Frames The commands in the Frames submenu help you design documents that use frames The first document loaded by the browser contains at least one lt FRAMESET gt tag and one or more lt FRAME gt
213. d a copyright statement with the current year in them Rather than pasting this info into all ten templates you can create a file named address html put it in your Templates folder and include this statement bbinclude address html1 in each of the templates at the appropriate point Later when the new year arrives or you move you only have to update one file not all ten templates You could use the YEARNUM placeholder for the year and only need to update the include file when you move Headers and footers are probably the most common uses for include files but any template or glossary entry may use as many include statements as you wish Included files themselves may also use bbinclude directives up to 16 levels deep Persistent Includes Simple includes are appropriate for use situations where you want the inclusion to happen only once Once the file has been included however it cannot be changed in any automated fashion Since the bbinclude directive is replaced by the included text the Update tool cannot tell the included text is any different from any other text Includes become even more powerful however when you can update existing files to incorporate revised include text at a later date For example suppose you generate several dozen HTML documents using a template that uses an bbinclude directive to insert a standard footer containing your email address Later you change your email address After you cha
214. dary whose width you can set in the Text Status Display panel of the Preferences Text Options 63 64 See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter to learn how wrapping works in BBEdit Language The Language menu lets you specify which source code language the file uses The file s language setting affects how BBEdit performs syntax coloring and parses function names for the function pop up menu BBEdit generally determines the file s language from its filename extension using the mapping table in the Languages panel of the Preferences window For example cp files are C and m files are Objective C You can use this menu to override those settings for a specific file To quickly check the language for a file click the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar and look at the Languages item Display Options These options determine which controls appear in the frontmost text window regardless of whether that window contains one or more documents Changes you make here affect only that window To change the display characteristics for text windows that you will open in the future use the Text Status Display preferences panel Line Numbers This option displays line numbers along the left edge of the window Status Bar This option shows or hides the status bar in the window Navigation Bar This option shows or hides the navigation bar in the window Page Guide This option shows or hides the page guide in the
215. dge of the window And this is another short line 3 62 no symbol selected B j gt BBEdit joins all the lines together to form a paragraph and then wraps the text to a width of 65 character The Paragraph Indentation buttons let you indent paragraphs after they have been wrapped e Flush Left does not indent paragraphs at all e First Line indents all lines in the paragraph by one tab stop How BBEdit Wraps Text 69 70 Tip Note mi Tip e Reverse places the first line in the paragraph flush against the left edge of the window and indents all other lines in the paragraph by one tab stop Mark the Relative to First Line checkbox to make any paragraph indents relative to the original indent of the first line of the selection or document If you want paragraph indents to be relative to the left margin of the document make sure this checkbox is not marked Click the Wrap button to perform the Hard Wrap command Click the Don t Wrap button to save the settings without changing the text If you hold down the Option key as you choose the Hard Wrap command BBEdit uses the last Hard Wrap settings to perform the operation without displaying a sheet The Mark Submenu A marker is a selection range that you can name If a document contains any markers you can select them from the Mark pop up menu to move quickly to the specified section of the file If you are programming you may be tempted to use markers to mark fu
216. display leave the size blank for a pop up menu rather than a scrolling list and whether the list allows multiple items to be selected Optionally mark the control as disabled and specify onFocus onBlur and onChange handlers Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Option Group Using the lt OPTIONGROUP gt tag you can create submenus in pop up menus in browsers that support them All lt OPTION gt tags within an lt OPTIONGROUP gt container are displayed as items cascading from the specified submenu label In browsers that do not understand lt OPTIONGROUP users will see a simple straight list of all defined options Option This tag defines an option in a pop up menu or a scrolling list Enter the desired label and value for the option and mark the Selected checkbox to make the option the default or initial choice Text Area This tag defines a scrolling text area field for entering large amounts of data You can specify the name of the file its size in rows and columns and optional HTML 4 only attributes such as Disabled Read Only Access Key and Tab Index You can also specify script handlers for onFocus onBlur onSelect and onChange events Inline Elements Inline elements are HTML elements that can appear as part of a paragraph such as anchors images applets client side scripts image maps and more Anchor This command inserts an HTML anchor lt A gt tag Anchors can either be hyperlinks or be used as the target of
217. dit s features Language modules provide support for syntax coloring and optionally function browsing for programming languages beyond those built in while plug ins provide specialized text processing and related features Many developers have written language modules or plug ins for BBEdit which are available from various web sites including our own This chapter describes the basic procedures for installing and using language modules and plug ins and provides references to information about producing such items In this chapter Installing Language Modules and Plug Ins 0 0 0 cece eens 303 Using Language Modules 1 1 0 6c cece ce cece eee eee eens 304 Codeless Language Modules 304 Language Module Compatibility 304 Overriding Existing Modules 305 Using Pl s Msn aeiae ie SE acs eit Saha EE Lave Se Le al eas a Taree 305 The Tools Menu and Palette 305 No Plug Ins Available 305 Setting Key Equivalents for Plug Ins 305 Supplied Plug Ins 306 Third Party Plug Ins 307 Plug In Compatibility 307 Developer Information 6 66 cece cee een e eens 307 Installing Language Modules and Plug Ins To install a language module move or copy the module file into the Language Modules folder of your BBEdit application support folder If no such folder exists you may create one To install a plug in drag and drop it directly onto the BBEdit application icon in the Finder BBEdit will launch i
218. dit can make full use of the standard Mac OS X Perl install with no need for further configuration However if you wish to install and work with multiple versions of Perl you will need to specify the appropriate version in your scripts shebang lines BBEdit 8 also supports the use of Affrus for debugging Perl scripts Affrus is an integrated Perl development environment from Late Night Software http www latenightsw com You can configure BBEdit to use Affrus in preference to the command line Perl debugger by setting the appropriate option in the Unix Scripting preferences panel see page 197 If you chose to do this BBEdit will pass complete environment parameters and control to Affrus but will not attempt to retrieve output Configuring Python BBEdit expects to find Python in usr bin usr local bin or sw bin If you have installed Python elsewhere you must create a symbolic link in usr local bin pointing to your copy of Python in order to use pydoc and the Python debugger The standard Mac OS X install of Python does not include keyword documentation In order to employ the Find in Reference command with Python scripts you must obtain and install this documentation as follows e Download the documentation files from the python org web site http www python org doc 2 3 e Extract the documentation files and place them in some suitable location e g Library Python Docs e Edit your environment plist file and
219. document is created from a template the placeholders in the template are replaced with their current values The new document receives the substituted text the original template file is not modified e When the Update Document command part of the HTML Tools is invoked any placeholders in the documents being updated are replaced with their current values Since the placeholders are replaced subsequent updates do not update the substituted text Although this command is part of the HTML Tools it can be used in any document whenever you want to use placeholders e When a file is included in another file using the bbinclude directive or a related directive any placeholders in the included file are replaced with their current values before the text is included The include file itself is not changed only the included text is substituted All of the above methods of invoking placeholders can also invoke included files which can have placeholders of their own The placeholders described in this chapter are only available for use with the HTML Tools Update command They cannot be used with BBEdit s Glossary command nor can Glossary placeholders be used in include or template files 327 BBEdit supports the following placeholders Placeholders are not case sensitive Placeholder Replaced By ABBREVDATE Abbreviated date e g Sun Aug 15 2004 BASE The BASE tag as entered using the N
220. document window and then save the text into an appropriate place within the Glossary folder The standard location of the Glossary folder is Library Application Support BBEdit Glossary For more details see BBEdit s Application Support Folders on page 12 You can create multiple levels of subfolders inside the Glossary folder to better organize different types of content The first level of such subfolders appear in the Set pop up menu of the Glossary window allowing you to reveal only the group of glossary items you wish to work with at a given time Any glossary items that are not placed in a subfolder are always shown in the Glossary window as are the contents of the Universal Items set Language Sensitivity of the Glossary If you have selected the Glossary Is Language Sensitive option in the Glossary preference panel BBEdit will select a glossary set to use with the current document according to the following rules e If there is a glossary set whose name ends in the same suffix as the document that set will be selected If there is a glossary set with the same language mapping as the document as determined from the mappings in the Languages preference panel that set will be selected If there are multiple glossary sets with the same language mapping for example HTML Glossary html and HTML Glossary shtm1 the glossary set that appears first in the Set pop up menu will be selected You can con
221. dow A document represents either a file which you open for editing a text document created by the New Document command on the File menu or any similar item such as a text document created via the scripting interface Choose In Front Window to have BBEdit open all new documents into a single text window Choose In New Window to have BBEdit open each new document into its own text window If you change your mind later you can adjust these options in the Documents panel of the Preferences window Entering Your Serial Number The dialog also enables you to enter the unique product serial number that you received at the time of purchase either with your email order invoice or on your product CD ROM to activate BBEdit Once you enter the serial number your copy of BBEdit will be activated and all demo restrictions will be removed If you have not yet purchased the product and thus do not have a serial number leave this space blank BBEdit will operate as a fully functional demo for a limited trial period after which you must purchase a license and enter a valid serial number in order to continue using it If BBEdit has already been activated the dialog will display the associated serial number You may continue using this serial number or enter a different serial number if you wish to change the active license Activating the Demo While running in demo mode BBEdit will operate with full functionality for a limited pe
222. dows Preview in lt Default Browser gt This command will display the name of the current default web browser and choosing it will cause BBEdit to display the frontmost document in that browser You can choose a browser from the Preview With submenu or use Preview by itself to use the last chosen browser You can also preview the page in all running browsers or in a text only format On Mac OS X browsers running in the Classic environment are labeled Classic Preview With The Preview With command provides a submenu listing all installed web browsers and versions The default browser i e the one which BBEdit will use unless you choose otherwise has a checkmark listed next to its name while the names of any browsers that are currently running will be underlined You may add browsers which are not listed by using the HTML Preview Preferences panel You can preview the frontmost document in any available browser by choosing it from the menu Making such a choice will also cause BBEdit to use that browser as the default until another is selected Alternatively you can choose the Preview as Text item to generate a text only rendering within BBEdit or the All Running Browsers item to preview the current document in all running browsers The HTML Tools Palette The main HTML Tools Palette is the place from which you will probably access the HTML Tools most frequently You can invoke the HTML Tools palette at any time by sele
223. e beginning of the clicked line Double Click to Balance When this preference is turned on you can double click any opening or closing parenthesis brace or bracket to select the entire range of text enclosed by a balanced pair Documents Drawer Preferences 169 Confirm Non Undoable Editing Actions To have BBEdit stop warning you when you are about to perform an action that cannot be undone turn this checkbox off Include Delimiter Characters when Balancing This option controls whether BBEdit selects delimiter characters parentheses braces brackets etc when you use the Balance command either by choosing it from the Text menu or by double clicking on a delimiter This option is on by default Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views If this option is turned on the line number bar cursor position display and Go To Line commands in editing views will use line and character position numbers that correspond to the hard line breaks actually present in the document rather than the soft wrapped line breaks Additionally when this option is on line selection commands and gestures including the Select Line command triple clicking and click selection in the left margin will treat only hard line breaks as line boundaries Extra Space in Text Views To have BBEdit leave extra empty space when you scroll to the end of a text view choose Half Window or Full Window here Turn Off Text
224. e for more information on the availability of updated modules 304 Chapter 15 Language Modules amp Plug Ins Overriding Existing Modules Language modules can override existing language definitions including the built in definitions If there is more than one module present which supports a given language BBEdit will use the module with the most recent modification date Using Plug Ins The commands made available by all installed plug ins appear in the Tools menu To use a plug in choose it from the menu Some plug ins may require that there be an active text window or an active text selection in order to function The menu entries for such tools may be dimmed when this condition is not met The Plug In Info command in the BBEdit menu displays a window listing all installed plug ins and their version numbers The Help and Web Site buttons at the bottom of the window are enabled when there is online help or a Web page available respectively about the selected plug in The Tools Menu and Palette The Tools palette can be displayed by choosing Plug In Tools from the Palettes submenu of the Window menu Any plug ins you have installed will appear both in this Tools palette and in the Tools menu itself Names that are too long to fit within the width of the window are truncated with ellipses Hovering the mouse over such a truncated name displays a tool tip showing the full name If you hold down the Option key the tool t
225. e regardless of their on disk encoding Saving Unicode Files BBEdit lets you save documents that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman even multi byte character sets When saving a file you can choose to save text composed in any script with any encoding In addition to the standard character set encodings BBEdit also lets you save the files in a variety of plain Unicode files An International Text Primer 31 e UTF 8 e UTF 8 no BOM e UTF 16 e UTF 16 no BOM e UTF 16 byte swapped e UTF 16 byte swapped no BOM Here are details about what each of the above options means e UTF 8 UTF 8 encoding is a more compact variant of Unicode that uses 8 bit tokens where possible to encode frequently used sequences from the file This format makes it easier to view and edit content in non Unicode aware editors e UTF 16 UTF 16 encoding always uses 16 bit tokens e no BOM When saving Unicode files you should always include a byte order mark BOM so that the reading application knows what byte order the file s data is in For maximum compatibility the BOM should be used whenever possible Use one of the no BOM options only if there is a specific reason to do so such as providing compatibility with software that malfunctions when a BOM is present For purposes of recognition when you use this option the UTF 16 BOM is FEFF and the UTF 8 BOM is EFBBBEF e byte swapped Since UTF 16 uses two bytes to represent each c
226. e Windows section of the Preferences window BBEdit leaves room along the right side or bottom of the screen for Finder icons BBEdit offers four different ways to stack windows down and to the left straight down atop and down and to the right These are the top four choices in the dialog BBEdit tiles the windows in two or three rows or columns If you have more than three windows open BBEdit stacks additional windows behind the three front windows BBEdit figures out how many rows and columns it needs to tile windows The larger your screen the more rows and columns BBEdit uses The windows are never narrower than half of a classic Macintosh screen HES LE BBEdit tiles the front two window horizontally or vertically and stacks any additional windows behind the two front windows Window Menu 103 104 Note To arrange the windows using the same settings as the last time you used this command hold down the Option key as you choose Arrange from the Window menu Get Info The Get Info command displays a dialog box that lists the number of characters words line and pages in the selected text and in the document Using this command is the same as clicking the info button in the status bar Info index shtml Users Shared myexamplesite bbedit index shtml Selection Document Chars 0 11988 Words 0 1605 Lines 0 395 Pages 0 0 Paginate Copy Path Eon To find out
227. e bbeditProjectDir sharedLibsDir os path join sharedLibsDir Shared Libs sharedLibsTagsFile os path join sharedLibsDir tags ctagsExecutiblePath os path join os environ TARGET_BUILD_DIR ctags baseArgs excmd number tag relative no fields a m n S f tmp tags R appendArg append os chdir create the BBEdit tags in tmp buildBBEditTagsCommand Ss s Ss amp ctagsExecutiblePath baseArgs bbeditProjectDir output os popen buildBBEditTagsCommand read print output append the Shared Libs tags to the same file appendSharedLibsTagsCommand s s s s 3 ctagsExecutiblePath appendArg baseArgs sharedLibsDir output os popen appendSharedLibsTagsCommand read print output move it where it goes os rename TAGS_TEMP_FILE bbeditTagsFile create the Shared Libs tags in tmp buildSharedLibsTagsCommand s s Ss 3 ctagsExecutiblePath baseArgs sharedLibsDir output os popen buildSharedLibsTagsCommand read print output move it where it goes os rename TAGS_TEMP_FILE sharedLibsTagsFile Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Switching Between Source and Header Files When you edit a C or C source file you can press Control Tab to switch to the corresponding header file and vice versa BBEdit uses the information in the Languages section of the Preferences window to determine whether a file is a source or header file
228. e cece cence eee een enees 245 Language Sensitivity of the Glossary 0 eee eee cece eee 246 Manually Sorting the Glossary 6 cece cece e ee ence ee eens 246 Inserting Glossary Items 6 1 cee eee eee eens 247 Assigning Key Equivalents to Glossary Items 00 e eee eee 247 Glossary Substitution Placeholders 1 6 cece cece eee ees 248 Using Scripts with the Glossary 1 1 6 ccc c ee ee eee eee eens 251 The Glossary Command Choosing the Glossary command from the Palettes submenu of the Window menu opens the Glossary palette shown below This window lists the contents of the active glossary set plus the contents of the Universal Items glossary set and any glossary items contained directly within the Glossary folder that is which do not belong to a set Names that are too long to fit within the width of the window are truncated with ellipses O O Glossary Set HTML Glossary html B Y HTML Glossary html Anchor Bigger Font Bold Center Italicize Link Page Template Y Universal Items Current Date amp Time Hovering the mouse over such a truncated name displays a tool tip showing the full name If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Names that fit entirely within the window without truncation do not display a tool tip 245 246 To create a glossary item type or paste the desired text or text and keywords into a BBEdit
229. e desktop printer queue AppleScript Overview 255 256 You will probably want to make the window bigger if you have room on your screen Down the left side is a list of every event and object supported by the application An event is a verb it tells the application what to do A class is a noun a piece of data or a structured collection of data inside the program In BBEdit for instance classes are things like files windows the clipboard browsers and so on Suites The first thing you will notice is that the events and classes are divided into suites A suite is just a collection of related events and classes Apple for instance has decreed that all applications should support particular events which together are called the Required Suite Another Apple defined suite is the Standard Suite if an application supports certain functions which Apple considers to be common it should use these standard terms so that scripters do not need to learn a new term for each application they work with After that it is a free for all each developer is free to organize their events and classes however they think best In addition to the Required and Standard suites BBEdit has a Miscellaneous suite a BBEdit Suite a Text suite and an HTML Scripting suite Additionally if you have any scriptable plug ins installed as many of the supplied ones are you will see additional suite entries for each such plug in Within each suite events
230. e document which you currently have in the foreground either at the current insertion point or on the current range as appropriate Some of the utility functions however can operate on many documents The Tool Descriptions section provides more details on how each function works Creating a New Document You can create an HTML document simply by taking any text file and adding HTML markup to it but there s a better way BBEdit includes a New Document command to create the basic skeleton of an HTML document for you To create a new HTML document you can do either of the following e Chose New from the File menu and then choose HTML Document from the New submenu e Click the New Document button in the HTML Tools palette In either case the following dialog appears New HTML Document nsert XML Declaratior Mi insert DOCTYPE HTML 4 01 Transitional f Mi HTML M Head M Body M Give BBEdit Credit Title Untitled Lang _ B Charset B Base Meta Link Web Site www barebones com E Template Default B Note If the frontmost document in BBEdit is editable you can deselect the Create New Document option in the dialog This will insert the document template around the current text contents of the window Using the HTML Tools 205 206 Note Note Note In many cases you can simply specify a title for the document and click OK ignoring the other options However we suggest that yo
231. e ee ene eens 72 Inserting File Contents 72 Inserting a Folder Listing 72 Inserting File amp Folder Paths 72 Inserting a Page Break 73 Comparing Text Files 2 6 cece cc eee ett A EN A 74 Compare Against Disk File 76 Multi File Compare Options 76 Spell Checking Documents 6 6c c cc cee cence eens 77 Using the Built in Spelling Checker 77 The Spelling Panel 78 Using an External Spelling Checker 79 45 46 Note Basic Editing BBEdit behaves like most Macintosh word processors and text editors Characters that you type in an active window appear at the insertion point a vertical blinking bar You can click and drag the mouse to select several characters or words and the selected text is highlighted using the system highlight color which you can set in the Appearance panel of the System Preferences Koka untitled text ol plfs s 1 B Tja New Document bE L L L L untitled text This line of text is mot selected This is the selected text An additional Line of text 3 1 no symbol selected OB gt If you select some text and then type whatever you type replaces the selected text To delete selected text press the Delete key or choose Clear from the Edit menu If you have a keyboard with a numeric keypad on it you can press the Clear key on the keypad to delete the selected text In addition to clicking and dragging you can use three selection commands
232. e file Remember Find Dialog s Start At Top Setting Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit remember the state of the Start At Top checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog from one invocation to the next Color Grep Patterns in Find Dialog When this preference is turned on and Use Grep is turned on in the Find amp Replace dialog BBEdit will apply syntax coloring to grep search and replace patterns Text Search Preferences 193 194 Note Note Grep Patterns This list displays all the grep patterns regular expressions you have defined for use in the Find amp Replace dialog s Patterns pop up menu Click Add to add a new one click Change to edit the selected pattern or click Remove to delete the selected pattern If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add grep patterns from the Find amp Replace dialog To work around this close the Preferences window before using the Find amp Replace dialog to add new grep patterns Text Status Display Preferences The Text Status Display preferences let you choose which icons and pop up menus appear in the status bar of BBEdit text windows All Windows The following options determine which controls and navigation items BBEdit should display by default in text windows and text panes Show Status Bar Enable this option to have BBEdit display the status bar by default You can always show it or hide it independently for each window Show Navigat
233. e file s path the second containing the parameter x passed to it in the bbinclude directive and the third containing the parameter author on include f vars set s to f as text set s to File Path amp s amp return amp return as text set s to S amp x amp x of vars amp return amp return as text set s to s amp Name amp author of vars amp return as text return s end include The resulting document might look like this lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt Include Test lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 8 0 gt lt head gt lt body gt lt bbinclude foo script x 3 author JEK gt File Path Boot Desktop Folder incl_test html x 3 Name JEK lt end bbinclude gt lt body gt lt html gt Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Including Perl or Python Scripts BBEdit lets you include scripts written in Perl Python or any other Unix scripting language The complete path name of the file being processed is passed to the script as its first argument and any variables in the include statement are passed as additional arguments All these can be retrieved via ARGV in your Perl script Any text sent to STDOUT by the script will be taken as the value of the bbinclude operation and inserted into the HTML file If an error occurs while running the script the STDERR output if any will be inserted into the file along with the STD
234. e gt i lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and publishes best of lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mailsmith supergetinf lt link rel alternate type application rss xml title RSS href http www barebont lt style type text css gt body color black background white a link color blue aivisited color purple aiactive color red lt style gt lt link rel stylesheet href css site styles css med lt script language JavaScript type text javascript s lt script language JavaSeript type text javascript st t gt s menulib js gt lt seript gt is search_field js gt lt seri lt script type text javaser ipt gt prea window onload function setupNavtenus lt t var menus new Array company products support store contact Ini tial izetenus menus lt script gt lt head gt gt lt body 4 j 1 no symbol selected je You can choose whether BBEdit should display all new and opened documents in the frontmost text window or open each document into a new text window by setting the New amp Opened Documents option in the Documents preference panel see page 168 Similarly you can control whether documents opened from other applications
235. e icon of the script editor to the path box Chapter 10 Preferences IMPORTANT Coding Tools External Editors The Coding Tools and External Editors options let you select which development environments you plan to use with BBEdit Turning off the tools you do not plan to use will allow BBEdit to start up faster However in order for changes you make to any of these options to take effect you must quit and relaunch BBEdit Supported environments include BBEdit s built in HTML tools a variety of programming packages including Apple s Xcode Metrowerks CodeWarrior and Absoft Fortran and the Dreamweaver visual HTML editor from Macromedia BBEdit also integrates with any Unix scripting tool such as Perl Python Ruby or shells as well as the CVS and Perforce source control systems In order to select any of these options you must have the appropriate package s installed e g the Apple Developer Tools for Xcode or the p4 command line tool for Perforce In order for CVS commands to be operative you will need to first configure your system to allow repository access from the command line The details of how to do this vary from one installation to another consult your local CVS expert for specifics Default Shell The Default Shell pop up menu lists all Unix shells currently known and available on your system allowing you to choose one as your preferred shell for use with shell worksheets Shell worksheets are discussed in det
236. e status bar in the frontmost text window Hide Show Navigation Bar Choose this command to hide or show the navigation bar in the frontmost text window Hide Show Documents Drawer Choose this command to hide or show the documents drawer for the frontmost text window Previous Document Next Document You may use these commands to select documents within the frontmost text window in most recently viewed order If the frontmost text window contains only one document these commands will be disabled In previous releases these commands selected documents in alphabetical order corresponding to the display order shown in the documents drawer Open in Separate Window Choose this command to open the active document of the frontmost text window into its own text window If the frontmost text window contains only one document this command will be disabled Get Info Choose this command to display an Info dialog for the active document Equivalent to clicking the Info button in the status bar Reveal in Finder Choose this command to open a Finder window which will display the active document s file If the active document is not associated with a file this command will be disabled Using this command is the same as clicking without dragging the document proxy icon in the status bar If the selected text in a document is the name of a file hold down the Option key as you open the File menu and choose the Reveal Selection command to have
237. e the bbedit command line tool to open files in BBEdit via the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install the bbedit tool for you If you choose not to do so you can use the Install Command Line Tools button in the Tools preference panel to install the tool at a later time To open a file in BBEdit from the command line type bbedit filename where filename is the name of the file to be opened You may also specify a complete FTP or SFTP URL to a remote file or folder to have BBEdit open the file or an FTP SFTP browser to the folder To launch BBEdit without opening a file or activate it if it is already running type bbedit 1 You can also pipe stdin to the bbedit tool and it will open in a new untitled window in BBEdit for example ls la bbedit If you just type bbedit BBEdit and the Unix Command Line 283 284 with no parameters the tool will accept stdin from the terminal type Control D end of file to terminate and send it to BBEdit The complete command line syntax for the bbedit tool is bbedit bchlpsuvVw resume e lt encoding_name gt t lt string gt lt n gt file or lt S FTP URL gt See the bbedit tool s online man page man bbedit for a complete description of the available switches and options The bbdiff Command Line Tool You can use the bbdiff command line tool t
238. eScripts startup items please see the preceding upgrade note for the Scripts folder about script compatibility Stationery Global Local This folder contains stationery files for use with BBEdit s New with Stationery command and the Stationery List palette Stationery files may be placed within subfolders up to four levels deep to organize them You can hide or show all items included from the global folder by using the menu item Hide Show Library Stationery You should move or copy over any stationery documents that you wish to preserve BBEdit s Application Support Folders 15 Upgrading Upgrading Text Factories Global Local This folder contains text factory files which you can access via the Apply Text Factory command the Text Factories menu or the Text Factories palette For more information on creating and using text factories see Text Factories on page 91 Unix Support Global Local This folder contains the Unix Scripts and Unix Filters folders which are used to build the Shebang menu and the floating Unix Scripts and Unix Filters palettes You can place scripts and filters within subfolders up to four levels deep of their respective folders to organize them Some example Perl Python and shell scripts and filters are supplied with the standard installation The Unix Script Output file stores output from scripts and the Unix Script Logs folder stores output logs for specific source fil
239. earches at a time each search will have its own progress window Closing a search s progress window or clicking Cancel in the progress window will stop the operation and BBEdit will display a search results browser containing any matches found up to that point Multi File Searching 111 Starting a Search To search for a string in multiple files do the following steps 1 Choose Find from the Search menu to open the Find amp Replace dialog box if it is not already open 2 Mark the Multi File Search checkbox Find amp Replace Search For O _ Use Grep Patterns 3 Find Replace Vi Start at Top Search Selection Only S RenlacesAllm eplace Wrap Around V Extend Selection iani _ Search Backwards SS Danterinda A Case Sensitive _ Match Entire Words f Cancel Replace With O BBEdit 8 1 Multi File Search Saved Search Sources E a 4 O oTa Sites Other Options 3 Type the string you are looking for in the Search For text field 4 Type the replace string if any in the Replace With text field Be sure to read the section Multi File Replacing later in this chapter if you use the replacement features 5 Mark any checkboxes in the middle part of the dialog box that you want to apply to your search To learn more about these options see Search Settings earlier in this chapter 6 If you want BBEdit to find only files that do not contain the search string select the Excl
240. earching the files in a folder To search the files in a folder click on the box next to the folder s name or double click its name in the Sources drawer If the folder you want to search is not in the Sources drawer click the Other button at the right of the dialog and pick the folder using the resulting selection sheet You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the search items box of the Find amp Replace dialog to choose it as the source Searching all open documents You can choose any or all open text documents as search sources This option allows you to search documents that have not yet been saved to a file or which contain unsaved changes To choose all open documents click the box next to the Open Documents item or double click on the item in the Sources drawer Searching the files contained in a results browser If a previous multi file search found many files that contain your search string you may want to narrow the search To search the files listed in any results browser window click the box next to that browser s name or double click on its name in the Sources drawer You can also click the box next to the Results Browsers item or double click on this item to search the files listed in all results browsers Searching the files in a file group If the files you are working with are all listed in a BBEdit file group you can choose that group in order to search the files To chose a file group cli
241. ecific folder You can choose from five different styles of indexes including one that provides full information about every referenced file The best way to see what each format of index looks like is to experiment for yourself Index Site This command works like Index Folder except that it always creates an index of the HTML files within the root folder of the default web site as set in the HTML Web Sites preference panel GoLive Home Page or PageMill Cleaner These commands clean up the often gnarly HTML code created by these WYSIWYG editing tools This will make the file easier to edit smaller and often slightly quicker to load into a browser The GoLive cleaner removes font tags with no semantic value that is tags which contain nothing at all or just white space The PageMill cleaner removes the NATURALSIZEFLAG attribute that PageMill puts in lt IMG gt tags and turns every two consecutive line break tags into paragraph lt P gt tags Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Tidy The Tidy commands provide various options for reformatting and cleaning up your HTML documents To perform these commands BBEdit makes use of code from the HTML Tidy Library project http tidy sourceforge net Clean Document This command presents a dialog in which you may select various options for modifying the frontmost document s tags The available options are e Remove Bogus Markup This option controls whether BBEdit should strip out
242. ected item so you can edit it you can also do the same thing by Option double clicking the item directly The Insert Glossary Entry command in the Edit menu brings up a dialog window in which you can select a glossary item and insert it at the insertion point or in place of the current selection with the Insert button You can move quickly to an item in this window by typing its first few letters from the keyboard or by using Tab and Shift Tab to navigate forward and backward through the list Another way to insert a glossary item is with the Auto Complete Glossary command in the Edit menu If there is a current selection BBEdit will look for and insert a glossary item whose name begins with the selected text If there is more than one such item BBEdit will display the Insert Glossary Entry dialog to allow you to choose one if there are no matching glossary items it will beep to signal an error If no text is currently selected BBEdit will scan backward from the insertion point to the nearest non alphanumeric character and match that text in the same manner This allows you to quickly insert a glossary item on the fly by typing the first few letters of its name and choosing Auto Complete Glossary from the menu To make the most of Insert Glossary Entry and Auto Complete Glossary we recommend that you assign key equivalents to these commands by using the Set Menu Keys command on the BBEdit menu Assigning Key Equivalent
243. ed patterns of text matches which were impossible to achieve with older versions of BBEdit However with this power comes complexity If you are new to grep it is possible that the topics covered in this section will not make much sense to you That s OK The best way to learn grep is to use it in real life not by reading example patterns In many cases the basic grep syntax covered previously in this chapter will be all that you need If you are an experienced user of grep however many of the topics covered below will be of great interest Matching Nulls The grep engine used in versions of BBEdit prior to 6 5 was unable to search text that contained null characters ASCII value zero but this limitation has since been removed Here s one way to match a null x 0 Backreferences The following charts explain the rules BBEdit uses for determining backreferences In Search Patterns Modifier Effect O A backslash followed by a zero is an octal character reference Up to two further octal characters are read Thus 040 will match a space character and 07 will match the ASCII BEL x07 but 08 will match an ASCII null followed by the digit 8 because octal characters only range from 0 7 1 9 A backslash followed by a single decimal digit from 1 to 9 is always a backreference to the Nth captured subpattern Advanced Grep Topics 145 146 Modifier Effect 10 99 A backslash followed by
244. ed text as the search string and finds the next occurrence of the selected text This command is the same as using the Enter Search String command followed by the Find Again command When you invoke this command BBEdit will add the current search string to the Find dialog s pop up menu of recently used search strings Hold down the Shift key to search in the opposite direction from the current search direction just as for Find Again You can also hold down the Option and Command keys as you double click on a selection to search for the next occurrence of the selected text Enter Search String Choose the Enter Search String command to enter the currently selected text into the Find amp Replace dialog as the search string without opening the dialog This command does not perform a search but only sets the contents of the search string When you invoke this command BBEdit will add the current search string to the Find dialog s pop up menu of recently used search strings Enter Replace String Choose the Enter Replace String command to enter the currently selected text into the Find amp Replace dialog as the replace string without opening the dialog This command does not perform a search but only sets the contents of the search string When you invoke this command BBEdit will add the current replace string to the Find dialog s pop up menu of recently used replace strings Enter Search Pattern Choose the Enter Replace String com
245. election Double click Select word Extend selection to word Triple click Select line none Triple clicking is the same as clicking in a line and then choosing the Select Line command from the Edit menu You can hold down the Command or Option keys when clicking or double clicking to trigger special actions Option Command Click none Open URL Double click Look up selected word none in programming reference Cursor Movement and Text Selection 55 56 BBEdit optionally allows you to select entire lines by clicking in the left margin of an editing window If you have line numbers displayed via the Show Line Numbers option in the Status Bar preference panel you can click in the line number as well You can click and drag to select multiple lines double click to select an entire paragraph or double click and drag to select a range of paragraphs A checkbox in the Text Editing preferences labeled Allow Single Click Line Selection controls this behavior If the checkbox is turned off clicking in the left margin simply moves the insertion point to the beginning of the clicked line Arrow Keys You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point right left up and down and augment these movements with the Command Option and Control keys No Modifier Option Command Control Up Up one line Up one screen Start of scroll view up document Down Down one line Down one screen End of document scroll vi
246. elow Edit File Filter HMTL and text Search Criteria Every AND More Criteria Fewer Criteria Any OR File Name Contains v html File Type Vis Y TET Revert Close Save The leftmost column lets you specify which attribute of a file you wish to test BBEdit lets you test a file s name the name of its enclosing folder its creator or type its creation and modification date or both date and time or its Finder label visibility or the programming or markup language it is written in You can also test the content of a file using the Contents criterion The middle column lets you choose the test to be applied to the selected attribute The available options here change depending on what attribute you selected If you choose Visibility in the first column for instance your only choices are whether the file is or is not visible However if you choose File Name in the first column the middle column lets you test to see if the name does or does not exactly match contain begin with or end with a particular string You can also test file names to see if they match wildcard or Grep patterns In wildcard patterns the asterisk and question mark characters have special meanings The asterisk matches any number of characters such that c matches any file whose name ends with c The question mark matches a single character so that foo matches food fool foot
247. empty text editing window New Disk Browser This option specifies that BBEdit should open a disk browser starting at your home directory New FTP Browser This option specifies that BBEdit should open an FTP browser Open This option specifies that BBEdit should bring up the standard Open dialog allowing you to select and open a file Open from FTP SFTP Server This option specifies that BBEdit should bring up the Open from FTP SFTP Server dialog allowing you to connect to an FTP server and open a file You can hold down the following modifiers during launch to override these actions Modifier s Function Option Suppress startup items only Shift Disable all plug ins tools external services and startup items Text Colors Preferences The Text Colors preferences let you select the colors that BBEdit uses when the syntax coloring option is on You can also select a custom window background color and text color as well as custom highlight colors which will apply to all text windows although we feel compelled to point out that there are good reasons why the default Macintosh text color scheme is what it is Guide Contrast You can use this sliding control to adjust the contrast level of the page guide display region See Show Page Guide on page 194 Text Colors Preferences 187 188 Note Activating Syntax Coloring You can turn on syntax coloring globally by setting the Syntax Coloring option in the Edi
248. en if 2 is set to blue Here s an example that uses an assertion for the condition and the if then else form Let s say we want to match a run of digits of any length followed by either is odd or is even depending on whether the matched digits end with an odd or even digit d lt 13579 is odd is even Advanced Grep Topics 153 154 This pattern starts with d to match the digits Next comes a conditional subpattern with a positive lookbehind assertion as the condition to be satisfied The lookbehind assertion is true only if the last character matched by d was also in the character class 13579 If that is true we next try to match is odd if it is not we try to match is even Thus this pattern will match 123 is odd 8 is even and so on but will not match 9 is even or 144 is odd Once Only Subpatterns With both maximizing greedy and minimizing non greedy repetition failure of what follows normally causes the repeated item to be reevaluated to see if a different number of repeats allows the rest of the pattern to match Sometimes it is useful to prevent this either to change the nature of the match or to cause it to fail earlier than it otherwise might when the author of the pattern knows there is no point in carrying on Consider for example the pattern d foo when matching against the text 123456bar After matching all 6 digi
249. ening bracket To use the character place it anywhere except immediately after the opening bracket To match a dash character hyphen in a range place it at the beginning of the range to match it as part of a set place it at the beginning or end of the set Or you can include any of these character at any point in the class by escaping them with a backslash Character Class Matches 0 9 any digit or aeiou a vowel or A Z a dash or A Z A any character in the range from to A aeiou any vowel or aei ou any vowel or Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Character classes respect the setting of the Case Sensitive checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog For example if Case Sensitive is on a will only match a if Case Sensitive is off a will match both a and A Matching Non Printing Characters As described in Chapter 7 on searching BBEdit provides several special character pairs that you can use to match common non printing characters as well as the ability to specify any arbitrary character by means of its hexadecimal character code escape code You can use these special characters in grep patterns as well as for normal searching For example to look for a tab or a space you would use the character class t consisting of a tab special character and a space character Character Matches r line break carriage return
250. enu to open the Filter Options dialog Changes made in the Filter Options dialog affect all filters and remain in effect until you make changes in the Filter Options dialog again Using Filters with Multi Byte Text Filters are now two byte savvy If the front window is Unicode the selection is written out as big endian Unicode with a byte order mark Your filter is responsible for handling the input correctly If the front window contains 8 bit text the input is written out as usual Scripts Scripts are similar to filters but do not operate on the text of the frontmost window Like filters you can run scripts from either a submenu at the bottom of the Shebang menu or from the Scripts list palette The same options as for filters apply when running scripts hold down the Command key while double clicking a script in the list or selecting it from the menu to open the Run Options dialog hold down the Option key while double clicking on a script or selecting it from the menu to open the file for editing instead of running it hold down the Shift key while selecting it from the menu to reveal the file in the Finder or while selecting a folder node to reveal that nod in the Finder Additional Notes In addition to the features detailed above there are some additional considerations about BBEdit s Perl integration which it may help you to be aware of Setting Menu Keys for Filters and Scripts The Filters and Scripts lists both have a
251. er looks for complete and unbroken sequences of such characters and then tries to decide whether the word is a keyword or some other identifier This string should contain all of the characters that can be in such a word Thus a typical value for this string might be 0123456789ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ_abcdefghijklmnopaqrstuvwxyz which is the set of characters used in many languages for keywords and other identifiers Note that the character need not be in any particular order Language Keys and Properties 341 342 Key Value Type Prefix for Functions String Prefix for Procedures String In some languages function definitions begin with a specific keyword For example Pascal has functions that return values begin with the keyword function and functions that return no values begin with the keyword procedure Other languages such as C and C have functions begin simply with their names and other attributes followed by a list of parameters followed by the statement block that comprises the function body If one or both of these prefix strings is present in the plist and non empty the function scanner will look for Pascal style function definitions otherwise it will look for C style function definitions Open Parameter Lists String Close Parameter Lists String A function s list of parameters is almost always enclosed by matching left and right parentheses probably due to the traditio
252. er this change with the server Revert amp Delete Performs a p4 revert on the chosen document file prior to performing a deletion allowing modified files to be discarded Go to Previous Next Conflict Searches the current document for the previous or next marker which indicates a sync conflict Open Log File Opens the log file which contains the output from BBEdit s Perforce commands Library Logs BBEdit Perforce log 296 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Note Working with Subversion BBEdit now features integrated support for the Subversion source control system http subversion tigris org Configuring Subversion In order to enable BBEdit s Subversion integration you must have Subversion 1 1 or later installed and available in the PATH for GUI applications as controlled by MacOSX environment plist You must also have a Subversion working copy which has been checked out via the command line If your repository access method is file No additional steps are necessary but for convenience you might want to set up a Subversion configuration in the Source Control preference panel See the descriptions of the Show Working Copy Status Commit Working Copy and Update Working Copy commands which follow http https svn If access to the repository requires authentication you will need to either a Let Subversion cache your credentials At the present time this will
253. erful grep searching capability BBEdit also uses the backslash as an escape character If you want to search for an actual backslash in a document you have to tell BBEdit to search for However if you do that in AppleScript you must keep in mind that AppleScript will first interpret the backslashes before passing them to BBEdit To pass one backslash to BBEdit from AppleScript you must write two in AppleScript So to tell BBEdit to search for a single literal backslash from an AppleScript you must write no fewer than four backslashes in the script Each pair of backslashes is interpreted as a single backslash by AppleScript which then passes two backslashes to BBEdit And BBEdit interprets those two backslashes as a single one for search purposes This proliferation of backslashes can make your scripts look a bit like a blown over picket fence The Every Item Issue When writing a script that loops through every item of a BBEdit object for example every line of a document do not do it like this repeat with i in every line of text document 1 do stuff here end repeat This forces BBEdit to evaluate every line of document 1 every time through the loop which will slow your script significantly Instead write set theLines to every line of text document 1 repeat with i in theLines do stuff here end repeat Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit CHAPTER Working with Development Tools This chapter describes how
254. erms of rectangles or blocks of text that include parts of several lines This is where you can make use of BBEdit s ability to manipulate rectangular selections For example consider you have the document shown below and you want to move only the bottom left column the one that says This text goes in the middle and move it in between the top left and top right columns To do this using standard selection methods you would have to perform five separate cut and paste operations However by using rectangular selections you can move the whole column in one operation eee Rectangular Selections Oo e Last Saved 03 24 J 2 E eE SO 5 File Path Sa tions bE This This text text goes goes on the on the left right This This text text goes doesn t in the go middle anywhere 1 1 no symbol selected B gt Cursor Movement and Text Selection 57 58 To start hold down the Option key while dragging over the bottom left column until you get a selection that looks like this 00e P Rectangular Selections e lim Ifall Last Saved 03 24 ne 4 f ii B B File Path Sa tions t0 pS This This text text goes goes on the on the left right his text loesn t o Mjanyuhere 8 1 no symbol selected 4 eB la Choose Cut from the Edit menu or press Cmd X to cut the selected text out of the document and pl
255. ernatively you can choose a bookmark from the Bookmarks menu To open a file from the browser listing double click it or select it and click the Open button For editing purposes files opened from a browser behave exactly like those opened with the Open from FTP SFTP Server command To refresh the contents of the listing click the button in the lower right with the circular arrow icon Chapter 3 Working with Files You can double click a folder to change directories If you hold down the Option key when opening a folder it will open in a new FIP SFTP Browser window You can select a range of files and directories by Shift clicking and you can select and deselect multiple items one at a time by Command clicking Using BBEdit from the Command Line You can use the bbedit command line tool to open files in BBEdit via the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install the bbedit tool for you If you choose not to do so you can use the Install Command Line Tools button in the Tools preference panel to install the tool at a later time To open a file in BBEdit from the command line type bbedit filename where filename is the name of the file to be opened To launch BBEdit without opening a file or activate it if it is already running type bbedit 1 In addition to files you can also specify FTP or SFTP URLs to files or directories to have BBEdit open the specified file
256. ers whose value is greater than 127 are also considered word characters Note that any character matched by s is by definition not a word character thus anything matched by s will also be matched by W but not the reverse Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns The special characters and specify how many times the pattern preceding them may repeat style quantifiers allow you to specify exactly how many times a subpattern can repeat The preceding pattern can be a literal character a wildcard character a character class or a special character Pattern Matches p zero or more p s pt one or more p s p zero or one p s p COUNT match exactly COUNT p s where COUNT is an integer p MIN match at least MIN p s where MIN is an integer p MIN MAX match at least MIN p s but no more than MAX Note that the repetition characters and match zero or more occurrences of the pattern That means that they will always succeed because there will always be at least zero occurrences of any pattern but that they will not necessarily select any text if no occurrences of the preceding pattern are present Chapter 8 Searching with Grep For this reason when you are trying to match more than one occurrence it is usually better to use a than a because requires a match whereas can match the empty string Only use when you are sure that you really mean zero or more times not just more t
257. erties color font size line height font family font style font weight and font variant Note that BBEdit will parse the font shortcut property but never generates it instead BBEdit generates exploded values for font style font variant font family and font weight Font Selector BODY Color e 3 Style Default By Size 6em B Weight Default By Line Height 1 5em B Variant Default By Font Family Helvetica sans serif List The List dialog allows you to edit the following list properties marker image and addressing format marker type and marker position List Style Marker Image Addressing Full Root Relative Marker Type Default xs Marker Position Default HJ Cancel Apply Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Text The Text dialog allows you to edit the following text properties text decoration text indent text align vertical align line height text transform word spacing letter spacing and white space Text Selector BODY Text Indent 3 Line Height 1 5em j B Alignment Default E Word Spacing B Vertical Align Letter Spacing B Transformation Inherit E White Space Default RA Decoration C None _ Line Through C Underline C Blink C Overline Cancel Apply Body Properties This submenu allows you to edit attributes of the BODY tag in the current document including the background image b
258. erver If you want to save the file in a different directory or under another name choose Save to FTP SFTP Server to open a dialog shown below that works much like the Open from FTP SFTP Server dialog Like a standard Save dialog for saving a local file it includes a field for the name of the file so that you can name it before saving Save to FTP SFTP Server Bookmarks es www barebones com zs Rendezvous 2 T about shtm hE oer 3 H Fs YY Server J cgi bin a C company GoTo 4 eee www barebones com J contact V SFTP Passive FTP _ crafting_shirt shtml F css Save User Name _ dberror php adam _s _ error shtml Get Info l J _ essay shtml Password GP _ essay_enter shtml _ essay_thanks shtml Delete eecccece essay_winner shtml M Remember Password fal favicon ico Cancel m 3 fw_menu js __ Auto Connect E 3 images Disconnect Farsi v lt gt C Show Files Starting with m Show Document Icons Save As about shtml Accessing FTP SFTP Servers 35 36 Note When you save a file to an FTP or SFTP server using either Save or Save to FTP SFTP Server and the file has Unix LF or Windows CR LF line endings BBEdit uploads the file in binary mode preserving its line endings exactly as they are on your local machine However if the file has Macintosh CR line endings it is uploaded in text mode so that the server can convert the line endings a
259. ervers you use frequently with BBEdit Click Add to create a new bookmark click Change to edit the selected bookmark or Remove to delete it When adding or editing a bookmark set the SFTP option in the Edit Bookmark dialog to have BBEdit connect to this server via SFTP if the option is unchecked BBEdit will use FTP instead If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add bookmarks in the Open From Save To FTP Server dialogs To work around this close the Preferences window before using the FTP dialogs to add new bookmarks Glossary Preferences The Glossary preferences determine how BBEdit handles glossary entries Ignore Trailing CR Click Ignore Trailing CR to have BBEdit strip off all white space from the end of a glossary entry when inserting it This allows glossary entries to be inserted in the middle of a line rather than as a block of text You can use the INLINE cookie in a glossary entry to achieve the same effect but only for that one entry Glossary Is Language Sensitive Mark this checkbox to make BBEdit s glossary language sensitive If this feature is active then each time you bring a window to the front BBEdit automatically selects the first glossary set whose name maps to the same language as that window For example if the front window is an HTML document BBEdit selects the first glossary set whose name ends in html or htm or any of the other file suffixes mapped to HTML in the Language
260. es 183 Software Update Preferences 184 Source Control Preferences 185 Spelling Preferences 186 Startup Preferences 186 Text Colors Preferences 187 Text Encodings Preferences 188 Text Files Opening Preferences 189 Text Files Saving Preferences 191 Text Printing Preferences 192 Text Search Preferences 193 Text Status Display Preferences 194 Tools Preferences 196 Unix Scripting Preferences 197 Windows Preferences 198 Optional settings via defaults write 0 0 6c cece eens 199 163 The Preferences Command The Preferences window provides control over many aspects of BBEdit s behavior You can decide which windows should open when you launch BBEdit set the default display options for windows set default options for editing behavior and searches and so on BBEdit 8 employs standard OS services to store its preference settings bringing improved durability and performance BBEdit s use of these services also makes it possible for you to modify preference settings directly using appropriate defaults write commands see page 199 However the Preferences window remains the standard interface for making and changing preference settings IMPORTANT You should not arbitrarily remove your BBEdit preferences file as doing so will require you to re activate the application with your product serial number in addition to re selecting any customized preference options y
261. es oranges kiwis mangos penguins The search string above would match the entire line This is another instance of the longest match behavior of BBEdit s grep engine which was discussed previously Once again non greedy quantifiers come to the rescue The following pattern will match delimited strings Marking Structured Text Suppose you are reading a long text document that does not have a table of contents but you notice that all the sections are numbered like this 3 2 7 Prehistoric Cartoon Communities 5 19 001 Restaurants of the Mesozoic Examples 143 144 You can use a grep pattern to create marks for these headings which will appear in the Mark pop up menu Choose Find amp Mark All from the Mark pop up menu in the status bar Then decide how many levels you want to mark In this example the headings always have at least two digits and at most four Use this pattern to find the headings d d t 2 d d t a z and this pattern to make the file marks 1 2 The before the first search group ensures that BBEdit matches the numeric string at the beginning of a line The pattern d matches a possible decimal point and a digit sequence The other groups use the white space idiom and the identifier idiom You can use a similar technique to mark any section that has a section mark that can be described with grep Marking a Mail Digest You can elaborate the struct
262. es See Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools for more information on this folder You can hide or show all items included from the global folder by using the menu items Hide Show Library Scripts or Hide Show Library Filters You should move or copy over any Unix scripts or filters that you wish to preserve Preference Files and Folders When you start up BBEdit it may create the files and folders noted in this section BBEdit Preferences File All of BBEdit s basic preference settings are stored in the file Library Preferences com barebones bbedit plist which is created and maintained using standard OS services This change brings several benefits including improved durability of the preferences file better performance when accessing remote storage e g with a network home folder and the ability to modify preference settings outside of BBEdit by using appropriate defaults write commands see Optional settings via defaults write on page 199 BBEdit 8 will import relevant preference settings from previous versions of BBEdit if a suitable BBEdit Prefs Data file is available i e can be found within a BBEdit Preferences folder in either the old BBEdit Support folder or in Library Preferences BBEdit Preferences Folder The folder Library Preferences com barebones BBEdit PreferenceData contains ancillary preference and settings files and folders for BBEdit
263. es in the Find amp Replace dialog let you control how BBEdit searches your document for the indicated text You can set the defaults for many of these settings in the Text Search section of the Preferences window Basic Searching and Replacing 109 110 Use Grep When this checkbox is selected BBEdit treats the search and replace strings as grep patterns Otherwise BBEdit searches the document for text that matches the search string as it appears literally and will replace any matched text with the replace string To learn more about pattern searching see Searching with Grep on page 127 Start at Top When this checkbox is selected BBEdit always starts searches from the beginning of the document Choosing this option will disable the Wrap Around and Search Backwards settings Wrap Around When this checkbox is selected BBEdit continues searching from the beginning of the document if a match is not found or from the end of the document if searching backwards Otherwise BBEdit stops searching when it reaches the end or the beginning if searching backwards of the file Choosing this option will automatically disable Selection Only Unavailable if Start at Top is checked When performing a Replace All with Wrap Around selected the replace is transformed into Start at Top to allow for performance optimizations Search Backwards When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches from the insertion point to the beginnin
264. ess to CVS and Perforce for source code control Chapter 14 provides more information on how to set up BBEdit for this type of work Writing HTML Documents BBEdit is an ideal tool for preparing and editing HTML documents web pages In addition to many options for preparing text content such as wrapping case changes and searching BBEdit offers a powerful set of tools to make editing web pages easier The Tag Maker command speeds the creation of HTML tags while the Edit Tag option allows quick changes to existing markup and the HTML Tools palette makes dragging and dropping tags simple or lets you access commands with just a click Using BBEdit you can easily preview your work in most Macintosh Web browsers including Safari Internet Explorer Netscape Mozilla OmniWeb and Opera as well as via BBEdit s native Preview feature For more information on using the HTML Tools to create edit and preview Web pages see Chapter 11 Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit IMPORTANT Human Interface Notes BBEdit enhances the behavior of its menus and dialogs as described in this section Dynamic Menus Many of BBEdit s pull down menus are dynamic if you hold down the Shift Option or Control key while a menu is open you can see some of the items change The illustration below shows what the File menu looks like normally left and when you hold down the Option key right Save a Copy to FTP SFTP Server CdS Hex Dump File Hex Dum
265. esting the extent of a search operation without affecting the clipboard or the contents of the original window Rewrap Quoted Text This command rewraps hard wrapped text having Internet style quoting while retaining the quoting characters and quote level Break Lines at 72 characters Paragraph Indentation No Indent O Standard Indent O Reverse Indent In Quote Delimiters wi Remove Spaces m Leave Trailing Space v Relative to First Line v Paragraph Fill Don t Rewrap Cancel E Rewrap In Internet messages it is common to use the gt symbol to indicate that part of a message is quoted from a message that is being replied to As a message gets batted back and forth in a discussion the oldest bits of text will end up having several gt symbols in front of them Each line of text in the message has a carriage return at the end making rewrapping the text to a different width somewhat problematic When you apply this command BBEdit first extracts each chunk of quoted text a successive set of lines with the same number of markers and temporarily removes the markers and any hard line breaks from the chunk of text forming it into a soft wrapped paragraph BBEdit then hard wraps that paragraph according to your chosen settings which are the same as for the Hard Wrap command see Hard Wrap on page 83 and reinserts the quote markers When you use this command on a rectangular selection BBEdi
266. esults of a single file Find All command or a multi file search Classes of Document As with windows there are various classes of document e document the basic document class contains properties that apply to any sort of document whether it has unsaved changes the alias to the file on disk and so on e text document text documents contain information specific to text files opened for editing in BBEdit BBEdit s Scripting Model 269 270 e group document refers to a document corresponding to an open file group A file group document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate file group documents from other types of document e picture document refers to a document corresponding to an open picture file A picture document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate picture documents from other types of document e movie document refers to a document corresponding to an open QuickTime movie file A movie document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate movie documents from other types of document QuickTime document refers to a document corresponding to an imported Quicktime image file A QuickTime document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate QuickTime documents from other t
267. et Menu Keys command 3 4 309 Set Target command 301 Setting Key Equivalents 305 setting markers 70 using grep 71 SGML 203 prologue 206 Shell scripts 284 Shell Worksheet 22 Shell Worksheet creating 22 shell worksheets 281 Shift Delete keystroke 60 shifting text 83 Show Invisibles command 50 Show Page Guide 194 Show pop up menu 159 simple includes 331 SMALL tag 231 smart quotes 63 Soft Wrap Text command 50 soft wrapping 63 66 67 as default 67 solid diamond 50 Sort Lines plug in 85 source files 281 SPAN tag 230 spell checking 77 external spell checker 79 user dictionary 79 Spelling Preferences 186 split bar 51 in browsers 158 startup items 20 Startup Preferences 186 stationery 39 assigning key equivalents 4 creating 23 39 Stationery folder 15 using 39 status bar 49 hiding 64 in browsers 158 in disk browsers 159 STRIKE tag 231 STRONG tag 231 STYLE tag 222 stylesheets 222 SUB subscript tag 230 subpatterns 136 substitution in glossaries 248 SUP superscript tag 230 Super Get Info button 51 Synchro Scrolling command 104 syntax checking 233 Index 351 syntax coloring 65 PHP files 204 T tab width 195 TABLE tag 224 Tables submenu 224 tabs converting to and from spaces 90 Tag Maker command 211 212 TBODY tag 225 TD tag 225 templates for HTML documents 207 243 scripts 334 see also stationery 207 variables 333 Text Colors Preferences 187 Text Document creating 21 Text Editing Preferences 188 Text
268. ew HTML Document command BASENAME The name of the file stripped of its rightmost period delimited portion For example if the file is named test html the base name is test while if the file is named test foo html the base name is test foo BASE_URL The value of the BASE URL specified in an HTML document s header useful if you want to refer to the document s location on the server BODYTEXT When invoking a template using the New HTML Document command and the Create New Window checkbox is not marked the current contents of the frontmost window if any will replace this placeholder CHARSET The character set specified in the New HTML Document command COMPDATE Compact Date format e g 15 Aug 04 CREATIONDATE The creation date of the current file e g 15 Aug 04 CREATIONTIME The creation time of the current file formatted according to your Format settings in the International panel of the System Preferences DIRPATH The path on the server as specified in the HTML Web Site panel of the Preferences window Strips any leading slash from the path string DOCSIZE The size of the current document plus included images in bytes DOCTITLE The title of the current document as extracted from the lt TITLE gt tag DONT_UPDATE Marks a document so that the HTML Update tool will ignore it during processing FILE_EXTENSION The filename extension for the file determined as the rightm
269. ew down Left Left one character Left one word Start of line scroll view left Right Right one Right one word End of line scroll view right character Holding down the Shift key extends the selection For example pressing Shift Option Right Arrow selects the word to the right of the insertion point If you are used to a word processor or text editor that lets you use Command key combinations to page through your document you may want to swap the meaning of the Option and Command keys 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu 2 Select the Text Editing preferences in the list on the left in the Preferences window 3 Under the heading Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior select Horizontally Vertically or both as you prefer When active these settings change the sense of the up and down arrow keys as follows No Modifier Option Command Up Up one line Start of document Up one screen Down Down one line End of document Down one screen Left Left one Start of line Left one word character Right Right one End of line Right one word character Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit IMPORTANT When the Shift key is held down the arrow keys behave as described in the table above except that the selection range is extended to include the new placement of the insertion point This is the same effect as typing the arrow key combination and then holding down the Shift key and clicki
270. example you may use count lines of text of window 1 or count lines of active document of window 1 but not count lines of window 1 Documents vs Windows In old versions of BBEdit the object classes document and window could be used interchangeably and generally had the same properties listed in the scripting dictionary This is no longer the case The class window now corresponds to a window of any type text or otherwise on screen and thus the properties of the window class now refer strictly to properties of a window on screen If a document is associated with a window the document is accessed as the document property of the window document of text window 1 268 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit The class document refers to a document and as with a window the document s properties pertain strictly to the condition of a document that is something that can be saved to disk and opened later Note that this does not mean a document must be saved to a file only that it could be As a rule documents and windows are associated with each other but it is important to remember that there is not a one to one correspondence between windows and documents For example the About box is a window which has no document associated with it Furthermore in current versions of the application there is no such thing as a document with no associated window Here is a general overview of the object classes used in BBEdit Classes of
271. ext in your documents You can use either the Mac OS X system spelling checker the default or an external spelling checker that supports Apple s Word Services Suite see Using an External Spelling Checker later in this chapter Using the Built in Spelling Checker Choose the Find Next Misspelled Word command from the Text menu or type its key equivalent Command to start checking a document s spelling BBEdit will check every word in the document starting from the top using the system spelling checker When BBEdit encounters a word which is either misspelled or not in the checker s dictionary it will draw a heavy red underline beneath the word You can either type a correction or Control click on the word and select a suggested correction from the contextual menu To skip the identified word and continue checking use the Check Spelling command again To ignore all further instances of the word Control click on it and choose Ignore Spelling from the contextual menu To add the word to the dictionary Control click on it and choose Learn Spelling from the contextual menu Spell Checking Documents 77 78 To check the spelling of all words in the document at once choose the Find All Misspelled Words command or type its key equivalent Command Option BBEdit will draw an underline under every questioned word in the document You can then correct the spelling of any questioned word by typing or by using the contextual men
272. f necessary and present an alert asking you to confirm that you want to install the item If there is already a plug in with the same name in your BBEdit application support folder you will be asked whether to replace that item with the version you are dragging If you confirm this operation the plug in you dragged will be placed at the top level of the Plug Ins subfolder 303 Note IMPORTANT When you install a plug in by drag and drop if there is no local BBEdit application support folder available one will be created See BBEdit s Application Support Folders on page 12 After installing a new language module or plug in you will need to quit and relaunch BBEdit in order to use it To remove an installed language module or plug in you must remove the item s file from the appropriate subfolder of your BBEdit application support folder then quit and relaunch BBEdit Using Language Modules Language modules are add on items which provide syntax coloring and function browsing for programming languages that BBEdit does not natively support There are two types of language modules coded and codeless Coded language modules must be prepared according to the requirements of BBEdit s plug in module interface See Developer Information on page 307 Codeless language modules are text documents prepared in a specific plist format See below After you install a language module and relaunch BBEdit syntax coloring
273. false means yes true means stop after executing the script If MenuSelect returns false BBEdit will call the script s PostMenuSelect handler if it has one after it performs the menu command Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Here is a simple example which adds a confirmation dialog to the Save command addressed as File Save Note that we test the menu and item names to make sure the script is attached to the Save command if it is attached to some other command it does nothing on menuselect menuName itemName if menuName File and itemName Save then set weHandledCommand to true display dialog Are you sure you want to save 7 buttons No Save default button 2 if button returned of the result is Save then the application should do its work set weHandledCommand to false else we handled the command app does no work postmenuselect doesn t get called display dialog The document was not saved 7 buttons OK default button 1 end if return weHandledCommand end if end menuselect on postmenuselect menuName itemName this is called after the application has processed the command display dialog The document was saved 7 buttons OK default button 1 end postmenuselect Using AppleScripts in BBEdit 267 IMPORTANT BBEdit s Scripting Model This section provides a high level overview of BBEdit s scripting model that will where appropriate contrast the current scripting f
274. ferences 0 0606 nsanra eee aes 188 Text Files Opening Preferences 6 06 cece eee eens 189 Translate Line Breaks 189 If a File s Type Is Unknown 189 Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set 190 If the File s Encoding Can t Be Guessed use 190 Warn of Malformed UTF 8 Files 190 Honor Saved State 190 Text Files Saving Preferences 6060s cece aes 191 Force New Line at End 191 Default Line Breaks 191 Default Text Encoding 191 Make Backups Before Saving 191 Save Document State 192 Text Printing Preferences 006 c eee eee 192 Default Font 192 Use Document s Font 192 Frame Printing Area 192 Print Page Headers 192 Print Full Pathname 193 Print Line Numbers 193 1 Inch Gutter 193 Print Color Syntax 193 Time Stamp 193 Print Rubber Stamp 193 Table of Contents Text Search Preferences 0 c cece cece eee eee ee 193 Report Single File Replace All Results 193 Remember Find Dialog s Start At Top Setting 193 Color Grep Patterns in Find Dialog 193 Grep Patterns 194 Text Status Display Preferences 0 00 e cece eee 194 All Windows 194 Show Status Bar 194 Show Navigation Bar 194 Show Cursor Position 194 Show Current Function 194 Defaults 194 Show Page Guide 194 Show Tab Stops 195 Show Line Numbers 195 Status Bar Controls 1
275. file you want to open You can select or deselect multiple files by holding down the Command key or the Shift key as you click the files 3 Change any desired options see below 4 Click Open to open the file You can use the options described below when you open a file Show Pop Up Menu This pop up menu lets you choose what kinds of files can be selected from the Open dialog If you know a file contains text but it does not appear in the Open dialog this means that the Macintosh type of the file is not set to TEXT This is sometimes the case with files received from other computers or downloaded from the Internet Choose All Files from the Show pop up menu to open the data fork of any file as a text file IMPORTANT Given that Mac OS X does not set the file type of any text file created by a Unix program to a useful value you may find it helpful to turn on the Map the File Name option in the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window With this preference turned on BBEdit will inspect the file s name to see if it can determine whether the file is text or not BBEdit will first attempt to map the file name to the list of suffix to Opening Existing Documents 27 28 language mappings specified in the Languages preferences If a file name matches up with a language even if the language is None the file is assumed to be a text file Thus you can use BBEdit s own suffix mappings to convince it to rec
276. files referenced by the document tal 4 The Text Options pop up menu contains commands such as Soft Wrap Text and Show Invisibles that let you control how the text appears in the window The Mark pop up menu contains commands such as Set Marker and Find amp Mark that let you set or mark specific locations in the file when ane these marked locations will be listed on the pop up menu below the commands 3 e The File pop up menu contains commands that let you set line break options specify what state information is saved and set Unicode file options if applicable The Insert pop up menu contains commands that let you insert the contents of files folder listings and page breaks The Path pop up menu displays the list of folders that contain the document You can use this menu to open any of the folders along the path in the Finder The Info button displays a dialog box that lists the number of characters words lines and pages in the document Clicking this button is the same as choosing the Get Info command from the Window menu m EF Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note Icon Meaning The Super Get Info button asks Super Get Info to display information regarding the current document This button is available only if you have Super Get Info installed on your computer Super Get Info is a Mac OS X file info utility from Bare Bones Software see our web site for more details The
277. fit within the width of the window are truncated with ellipses Hovering the mouse over such a truncated name displays a tool tip showing the full name If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Names that fit entirely within the window without truncation do not display a tool tip Organizing Scripts Items in the Scripts menu or Scripts window are displayed in alphabetical order by default but you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Save All would sort before 01 Close All For names of this form the first three characters are not displayed in the window You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Using AppleScripts in BBEdit 265 266 Attaching Scripts to Menu Items BBEdit lets you attach scripts to menu items By this we mean that you can write scripts that BBEdit automatically calls before or after performing a menu command For example if you want BBEdit s Open from FTP SFTP Server command to launch your favorite FTP client you can simply attach a script to that menu item Scripts can return a value that tells BBEdit whether to c
278. following e Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar How BBEdit Wraps Text 67 68 Note e Deselect the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options sheet box by choosing Text Options from the Edit menu To turn off soft wrapping for new windows deselect the Soft Wrap Text option in the Editor Defaults section of the Preferences window BBEdit provides two ways to convert soft wrapped text into hard wrapped text The first is a simple technique that uses a single command the second is a bit more complicated but gives you much more control over wrapping Hard Wrapping Soft Wrapped Text To convert soft wrapped text to hard wrapped text use the Add Line Breaks command in the Text menu This command inserts a carriage return at the end of every line of the text as it appears in the window If your wrapping margin is the edge of the window you will get different results depending on the width of the window If the current document contains a selection range Add Line Breaks will affect only the selected text if there is no selection this command will affect the entire contents of the current document The Add Line Breaks command does not turn off soft wrapping Hard Wrapping and Filling Text The Hard Wrap command in the Text menu offers more flexibility for hard wrapping text than the Add Line Breaks command Whereas Add Line Breaks merely freezes the line breaks displayed in a document by i
279. for Cursor Movement 170 When Auto Indenting 171 Home and End Keys 171 Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior 171 Use Emacs Key Bindings 171 Option on Japanese Keyboards 172 Table of Contents XI Editor Defaults Preferences 0c cece eee eee eee eens 172 Auto Indent 172 Balance While Typing 172 Smart Quotes 172 Auto Expand Tabs 172 Show Invisibles 173 Syntax Coloring 173 Soft Wrap Text 173 Default Font 173 File Filters Preferences sanscr cii oases Bn atecs Sa tole ate ete 174 File Search Preferences 0 00 e cece eee eee eee eens 174 Find All Matching Files 174 Skip Folders 174 Search Folders 174 Unix Search Paths 174 FTP Settings Preferences 6666 c cece eens 175 Remember Bookmark Passwords 175 Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags 175 List FTP Files on the Open Recent Menu 175 Passive FTP 175 Show Document Icons 175 Show Files Starting with 176 FTP Bookmarks 176 Glossary Preferences Pua a AERE KEE E E AEE AN 176 Ignore Trailing CR 176 Glossary Is Language Sensitive 176 HTML Colors Preferences 0 0 177 Color Palette Layout 177 Color Swatch Size 177 Color Picker 177 HTML Markup Preferences 066 nananana nrnna 177 HTML Tags 177 Quoting Tag Attributes 177 Quote Character 177 XML HTML Markup Rules 178 CSS Markup Formatti
280. forward relation or REV reverse relation the type of the relation for example a stylesheet the media the URL of the referenced file including full root or relative addressing and optional Type Hreflang Target and Charset attributes HTML Tool Descriptions 221 222 Note Meta META tags are used to define browser specific or optional information that is not a part of the HTML specification You can choose to create either a NAME or an HTTP EQUIV variation of the META tag The latter is frequently used for client pull applications in browsers that support it but more generically it makes most browsers behave as if the specified line was received as part of the HTTP protocol header After choosing the type of META tag and the desired value of the NAME or HTTP EQUIV field enter a value for the tag s CONTENT attribute and optionally its SCHEME attribute You can choose from some common values for the NAME field by using the pop up menu to the right of that field If the HTTP EQUIV value is content type you can also choose from among some common values for the Content field by using the pop up menu to its right Script This command begins a section of client side script code by default JavaScript although some browsers support other scripting languages You can choose to execute a script contained in an external file by entering a URL in the Source field click File to choose the file using an Open dialog You
281. g of the document Otherwise BBEdit searches from the insertion point to the end of the file Unavailable if Start at Top is checked Search Selection Only When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches only the selected text Otherwise BBEdit searches the entire document Unavailable if Wrap Around or Start at Top is checked Extend Selection When this checkbox is selected BBEdit extends the selection from the current insertion point to the end of the matched search string Case Sensitive When this checkbox is selected BBEdit treats upper and lowercase letters as different letters Otherwise BBEdit treats upper and lowercase letters as if they were the same Match Entire Words When this checkbox is selected BBEdit matches the search string only if it is surrounded in the document text by word break characters white space or punctuation Otherwise BBEdit matches the search string anywhere in the text Multi File Search When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches a set of files for the search string See Multi File Searching below to learn more about searching across multiple files Chapter 7 Searching Note IMPORTANT Special Characters You can use the following special characters to search for line breaks and other non printing characters as well as hexadecimal escapes to search for any desired 8 bit character Character Matches r line break carriage return n Unix line brea
282. g time indeed because there are so many different ways the and repeats can carve up the subject and all have to be tested before failure can be reported Chapter 8 Searching with Grep CHAPTER Browsers Browsers are special kinds of windows that let you see a lot of information about files at once Browsers typically have two panes one pane lets you select a file the other displays detailed information about the file often its contents If you have used the Batch Find option in a multi file search you have already seen an example of a BBEdit browser In this chapter Browser Overview 0 0 ccc cee eee nett eee n eens 157 List Pane 157 Status Bar 158 Text View Pane 158 Splitter 158 Disk Browsers wened abi os De Sis OE SOS EEL aE ase N A oe 158 Using Disk Browsers 159 Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers 160 Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers 160 Search Results Browsers 6 cece eee eee eee eens 161 Error Results Browsers 0 ccc eee eee ee een eens 162 Browser Overview All BBEdit browsers share the same basic structure and behavior All browsers have a status bar a file list and a text pane List Pane The top pane of a browser lists the items available in the browser This pane shows different information for different kinds of browsers Browser File List pane contains Disk browser Files and folders that BBEdit can open Search results File and line number
283. ge modules For further details and example modules visit the Developer and Plug In Library sections of our web site http www barebones com support develop index shtml http www barebones com support bbedit plugin_library shtml In this appendix Creating a Module meea iat ccc cect eee teens 337 Required Elements 337 Starting from a Template 338 Language Keys and Properties 0 cece cece eee ence tenes 340 Creating a Module Codeless language modules are written as property lists or plists which is an XML format that Mac OS X uses for many purposes http developer apple com documentation Cocoa Conceptual PropertyLists Concepts XMLPListsConcept html You can create or edit codeless language module files with BBEdit itself with the Mac OS X Property List Editor or with a third party editor such as PlistEdit Pro http homepage mac com bwebster plisteditpro html The Property List Editor labels boolean properties as yes or no However the actual plisttext file must contain values of either true or false written as lt true gt and lt false gt Required Elements Ata minimum your codeless language module file must include the appropriate XML header declaration as well as key value specifications for each of BBEditDocumentType BBLMLanguageCode and BBLMLanguageSuffix in order for BBEdit to load it The module may then specify an
284. general such special characters are those that you type by holding down the Option key Zap Control Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps a specific range of invisible low ASCII characters also known as control characters Control characters can cause compilers and other text processing utilities to malfunction and are therefore undesirable in many files Zap Null ASCII 0 Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps all instances of the null character ASCII 0 Like other control characters nulls can cause many programming tools and text processing utilities to malfunction This specific option is included in case you want to remove only nulls without affecting other control characters that may be present in a file Delete This option removes the zapped character completely from the text It is useful if you are only interested in destroying gremlins and you do not care where they were in the text Text Menu Commands 89 90 Note Replace with Code This option replaces the gremlin character with any other character specified in escaped hexadecimal format The escape code is formed via the same convention used by the C programming language 0x followed by the character code in hexadecimal base 16 This option is useful for identifying both the value and the location of gremlin characters Later you can search for occurrences of Ox to locate the converted characters Searching for the grep
285. ght 1998 2004 by Sid Zookim lt BIG gt In your document the Include reference would look like this lt BODY gt lt bbinclude footer html MY_GRAPHIC testl gif MY_ALT_DESC a test image MY_TITLE A Test Title gt lt end bbinclude gt lt BODY gt Note that the values of placeholders are specified inside the HTML comment of a persistent include using a PLACEHOLDER Value syntax The quote marks around the value are mandatory if you need to include a quote mark in the actual value escape it with a backslash Include Files 333 334 Including AppleScripts BBEdit allows included files to be compiled AppleScript scripts The script should contain an on include handler which is passed two parameters a reference to the file from which the script is being called and a record containing one field for each variable passed in the bbinclude directive Scripts can of course also retrieve information from BBEdit other scriptable applications or the system The handler s return value is inserted into the file that included it Given the HTML document below lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt Include Test lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 8 gt lt head gt lt body gt lt bbinclude foo script x 3 author JEK gt lt end bbinclude gt lt body gt lt html gt The following script inserts three lines the first containing th
286. gine as Safari and is updated whenever you modify the document Closing the document will also close the preview window You can of course have multiple preview windows open on multiple documents The preview window will not automatically display changes made in any related files such as images or linked CSS files However you can use the Refresh BBEdit Preview command see below to update the preview window s display of both the source document and all related files Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Refresh BBEdit Preview This command works in conjunction with the Preview in BBEdit command How it behaves depends on the situation in which it s invoked e If the front window is a BBEdit Preview window its associated HTML file will be reloaded together with any related files which were changed behind the preview window s back e g images linked CSS files e If the front window is a text document and there exists a preview window previously created by a Preview in BBEdit command on that document then the associated preview window will be reloaded e If the front window is a text document and any preview windows are open the frontmost preview window will be reloaded even if it does not necessarily belong to the front document BBEdit Preview windows also contain a Reload button which has the same effect as this command Finally whenever you save a CSS file BBEdit will automatically refresh all open BBEdit Preview win
287. gly recommend that you carefully review the sections BBEdit and AppleScript and Working with Scripts in this chapter In this chapter AppleScript Overview sis iek ccc cece cc cee een eens 253 About AppleScript 254 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events 254 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary 255 Recordable Applications 260 Saving Scripts 261 Using Scripts with Applications 261 Scripting Resources 262 Using AppleScripts in BBEdit 1 6 cece eee cece 263 Recording Scripts in BBEdit 263 The Scripts Menu 264 The Scripts Palette 265 Organizing Scripts 265 Attaching Scripts to Menu Items 266 BBEdit s Scripting Model 6 cece ccc cece eee eens 268 Script Compatibility 268 Getting and Setting Properties 270 Performing Actions 271 Common AppleScript Pitfalls 276 AppleScript Overview If you are familiar with AppleScript you should have little difficulty scripting BBEdit It has a robust and highly flexible object model If you do not know much about scripting though read on for an introduction to the necessary concepts 253 254 Note About AppleScript AppleScript is an English like language which you can use to write scripts that automate the actions of applications and exchange data between applications Although AppleScripts can manipulate applications user interfaces by taking advantage of Mac OS X s GUI Scripting capability
288. h entry in the list pane corresponds to an error warning or note You can use the checkboxes for each type of item to suppress or display the associated results as desired If you click on a entry in the file list BBEdit displays the location of the error If you double click an item in the file list BBEdit opens the associated file into an editing window and selects the section of text related to the error Chapter 9 Browsers CHAPTER Preferences You can use the Preferences command to customize much of BBEdit s behavior You can decide which windows are open when you launch BBEdit set the default options for windows set the default options for searches and so on This chapter describes BBEdit s extensive preference options In this chapter The Preferences Command 6 6 cece cee cece eee e nee e eens 164 Application Preferences 165 Browser Display Preferences 167 Differences Preferences 167 Documents Preferences 168 Documents Drawer Preferences 169 Editing General Preferences 169 Editing Keyboard Preferences 170 Editor Defaults Preferences 172 File Filters Preferences 174 File Search Preferences 174 FTP Settings Preferences 175 Glossary Preferences 176 HTML Colors Preferences 177 HTML Markup Preferences 177 HTML Palette Preferences 178 HTML Preview Preferences 179 HTML Tools Preferences 179 HTML Web Sites Preferences 181 Languages Preferenc
289. han once Try the following examples to see how their behavior matches what you expect Pattern Text Matches Fourscore and seven years Fourscore and seven years 0 9 I ve been a loyal member 1983 since 1983 or so d I ve got 12 years on him 12 A BAAAAAAAB AAAAAAA A 3 BAAAAB AAA first three A s A 3 BAAAAB AAAA A 1 3 BAAAAB AAA on the first match the remaining A on the second match c andy andy likes candy andy on the first match candy on the second A Ted joined AAA yesterday AAA on the first match a from RRN on the secon Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns So far the patterns you have seen match a single character or the repetition of a single character or class of characters This is very useful when you are looking for runs of digits or single letters but often that is not enough However by combining these patterns you can search for more complex items As it happens you are already familiar with combining patterns Remember the section at beginning of this discussion that said that each individual character is a pattern that matches itself When you search for a word you are already combining basic patterns Writing Search Patterns 135 136 You can combine any of the preceding grep patterns in the same way Here are some examples Pattern Matches Examples d d a string of digits followed bya 4 2 literal plus
290. happen automatically unless you specifically prohibit it by passing no auth cache on the command line or setting that as the default behavior in your Subversion configuration files b Create a Subversion source control configuration in the Source Control preference panel supply a username and password and choose the location of your working copy The password will be stored in your system Keychain If you employ option b the username and password will be passed to the svn tool on the command line and this information may be visible to other users of the machine If you allow other users to log into your machine this represents a security problem and you should allow Subversion to cache credentials as outlined in a svnt ssh Create a Subversion source control configuration in the Source Control preferences supply a username and password and choose the location of your working copy If you have already configured an ssh agent to work with GUI processes it should also work here Command Line Integration You can use the bbdiff command line tool as an external diff tool for Subversion You can do so either directly e g svn diff diff cmd bbdiff extensions resume wait rPREV lt FILE gt Working with Subversion 297 or by specifying the tool as the default diff cmd in your Subversion config subversion config as appropriate Subversion Commands You can use most Subversion comma
291. haracter this leaves the question of which of the two bytes comes first whether it is little endian or big endian By default BBEdit writes UTF 16 big endian the standard By choosing one of the byte swapped options you can write little endian files instead which some Windows software requires Files saved as Unicode from BBEdit are given a type of utxt the standard for Unicode text files on the Mac UTF 8 files are given a type of TEXT for compatibility with other applications however BBEdit will also recognize such files with type UTF8 Opening Unicode Files When opening files BBEdit will ordinarily determine the format of a file based on its file type and content and automatically process Macintosh text Unicode and UTF 8 However some files are structured such that BBEdit is unable to correctly determine their format based on their type or contents The cases that we know of are e UTF 8 files whose type is TEXT and which lack a byte order mark If a UTF 8 file is of type TEXT but has a byte order mark it will be correctly interpreted as UTF 8 e Byte swapped Unicode files which were written without a byte order mark usually by broken Windows software e Unicode files whose type is TEXT instead of the Macintosh standard utxt and which lack a byte order mark If a UTF 16 file lacks a BOM but is of type utxt BBEdit will treat it as big endian Unicode
292. he Preferences window If the script editor is not running BBEdit launches it Open Scripting Dictionary Choose this item to switch to your preferred AppleScript editor and open BBEdit s scripting dictionary for viewing If the script editor is not running BBEdit launches it Open Scripts Folder Choose this item to open the Scripts folder which is located within BBEdit s application support folder See Scripts on page 14 Start Recording Select this item to record all available actions that you perform within BBEdit or any other recordable applications which you switch to When this command is active the menu item will change to Stop Recording and a tape icon will flash over the Apple menu When you choose Stop Recording BBEdit will display a Save dialog which allows you to save a script file containing the recorded actions Running and Editing Scripts Choose the item corresponding to any script to run that script Hold down the Option key when choosing a script item to have BBEdit open the script for editing in your preferred script editor or hold down the Shift key when choosing a script item to have BBEdit reveal the script file in the Finder If you choose a folder node rather than a script item BBEdit will open the corresponding folder in the Finder The Scripts Palette The Scripts command located in the Palettes submenu of the Window menu opens a palette listing all available scripts Names that are too long to
293. he Trash does not delete the original file only its entry in the file group Using Stationery Like most Macintosh applications BBEdit supports stationery pads A stationery pad is a template document that when opened results in a new untitled document with the content from the stationery file In other words you do not edit the stationery document itself you use it as a starting point for a new document To create a stationery pad click the Save As Stationery checkbox when saving the file from BBEdit Alternatively you can change any document into a stationery pad in the Finder by clicking the Stationery Pad checkbox in the document s Get Info window You can create new documents from a stationery pad in any of these ways e Open the pad the same way you would open any other document e Choose New With Stationery from the File menu and select the desired stationery pad from the contents of the Stationery folder inside BBEdit s application support folder Using Stationery 39 40 e Use BBEdit s Stationery List which is available from the Window menu The Stationery List is a palette that displays all the stationery pads you have placed inside the Stationery folder of BBEdit s application support folder You can create a new document from any of these pads by double clicking them in this list To assign a keyboard shortcut to a stationery pad select the pad in the Stationery List window then click the Set Key butt
294. he file Option click the pencil icon to skip the confirmation dialog When you are finished editing simply choose Save from the File menu BBEdit will prompt you to authenticate as a user with Administrator privileges Type a suitable user name and password to save the file e e e Opening Existing Documents There are several ways to open existing documents with BBEdit Double click any file with a BBEdit document icon e If BBEdit is running choose the Open Open Hidden or Open Recent command from the File menu e Select the name of a file in a BBEdit editing window then use the Open Selection command in the File menu e Double click a file name in a browser s file list see Chapter 9 Browsers e Drag a file s icon to the Windows palette see Chapter 6 Working with Windows e Drag a file s icon to the document drawer of any text window see Chapter 4 Window Anatomy e Drag a file s icon to the BBEdit icon or to an alias of the icon e Select a file in the Finder and use the Open File command from the BBEdit submenu of the Services menu BBEdit can natively open files with type TEXT utxt UTF8 or PICT Of course you cannot edit PICT files in BBEdit but it will display them You can view any image files or movie files whose format is supported in QuickTime by opening them with BBEdit You can also have BBEdit ask QuickTime to try to open non text files by select
295. he global and local application support folders other items may only be used from a specific location If there are multiple copies of any plug ins or language modules BBEdit will use the latest version regardless of location For all other items BBEdit lists the global and local sets separately Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Upgrading Upgrading Upgrading To prevent alias loops BBEdit will not follow aliases to folders that are placed inside any of the subfolders within the application support folder We also recommend that you do not try to share plug ins or scripts between BBEdit and other applications and that you not make aliases to plug ins or scripts located on remote server volumes Glossary Global Local The Glossary folder holds text files whose contents can be inserted into an editing window with the click of a button or a keystroke Glossary files can also use special placeholders to insert varying or context sensitive information for example a date or the name of the current file Initially your local BBEdit application support folder will be populated with several sample glossary sets for C source code HTML WML Mac OS X Property List files RSS and plain text which you can use or modify as you like See Chapter 12 for more information on the Glossary You should move or copy over any third party glossary packages or any custom glossary items which you have created that you wish to preserve HTM
296. he individual lt TD gt or lt TH gt elements THead TFoot TBody These tags define an optional table section element which can be used independently of the lt TH gt tag The latter indicates that particular cells should be displayed in a heading style which is usually displayed by browsers as boldface lt TH gt may be used anywhere in a table that a heading look is desired In contrast these three related tags define the logical divisions of a table Browsers might hold the table s header or footer fixed on the screen while scrolling a lengthy body up and down for instance All three tags allow you to select vertical and horizontal alignment which may be inherited by cells inside the element depending on the attributes of lt TR gt lt TD gt and lt TH gt tags Convert to Table This command provides a quick way to convert tab delimited or comma delimited lines of text to tables You must specify the delimiter to be used either tabs or commas and you can optionally have the entire first row of the table or the first cell of each row converted to lt TH gt rather than lt TD gt elements If One Cell Per Line is marked each cell will be placed on its own line in the resulting HTML otherwise cells will be placed on a single line Forms This submenu contains commands that help you build HTML forms which are used for accepting user data for processing by a client side script or a server side CGI program or o
297. he input text into an ASCII only representation Input Text Result Text Text with non ASCII characters translated into ASCII Delete Lines Containing This action will return all lines in the input string which do not the specified string Input Text Result Text Text with the complement of the matching lines Related Actions Extract Lines Containing Chapter 5 Text Transformations Educate Quotes This action will convert ASCII quotes into their typographer equivalent Input Text Result Text Text with ASCII quotes converted to typographer s quotes Related Actions Straighten Quotes Extract Lines Containing This action will return all lines in the input string which contain the specified string Input Text Result Text Text with the matching lines Related Actions Delete Lines Containing Get Contents of BBEdit Document This action will get the contents of the frontmost text document in BBEdit according to the options you set Requires A text document must be open Result Text A BBEdit document object Related Actions Set Contents of BBEdit Document New BBEdit Document New BBEdit Document This action creates a new BBEdit document from the input text Input Text Result com barebones bbedit document object A BBEdit document object Related Actions Get Contents of BBEdit Document Set Contents of BBEdit Document Normalize Line Breaks This action will change all line breaks into the for
298. here in the URL text or Control click to bring up the contextual menu and choose Open URL from the menu BBEdit will examine the URL and launch the appropriate helper application If the URL is not valid or the helper application cannot be found BBEdit will beep Some Web browsers cannot resolve URLs if the request is sent when the browser is starting up If your Web browser does not properly resolve the URL wait until the browser has finished starting up and then try again Bare Bones Software gratefully acknowledges John Norstad for providing the URL parsing code Text Options You can use the Text Options command to change the way BBEdit edits text and the way it displays text and additional elements in its windows When you choose this command BBEdit will drop a Text Options sheet in the current text window Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note The controls on the Text Options sheet are divided into two parts the Editing options on the left control the way BBEdit behaves while you type and the Display options on the right control the appearance of the BBEdit window Editing Options Display Smart Quotes _ Line Numbers _ Auto Expand Tabs Status Bar Cl Soft Wrap Text i Navigation Bar to Page Guide m Page Guide to V t l Tab Stops to Character Width 80 L Show Invisibles Language HTML Show Spaces You can also change many of the text options through the Text Options pop up menu left in the statu
299. his pattern allows underscores in only the first character of the identifier a z_ a zA Z0 9 The following pattern allows underscores anywhere but the first character but allows identifiers to begin with an uppercase or lowercase letter a zA Z a zA Z0 9_ Matching White Space Often you will want to match two sequences of data that are separated by tabs or spaces whether to simply identify them or to rearrange them Chapter 8 Searching with Grep For example suppose you have a list of formatted label data pairs like this User name Bernard Rubble Occupation Actor Spouse Betty You can see that there are tabs or spaces between the labels on the left and the data on the right but you have no way of knowing how many spaces or tabs there will be on any given line Here is a character class that means match one or more white space characters t So if you wanted to transform the list above to look like this User name Bernard Rubble Occupation Actor Spouse Betty You would use this search pattern a z t a z and this replacement pattern I 2 Matching Delimited Strings In some cases you may want to match all the text that appears between a pair of delimiters One way to do this is to bracket the search pattern with the delimiters like this n n This works well if you have only one delimited string on the line But suppose the line looked like this appl
300. his tag is deprecated it is considered better form to use stylesheets HTML Tool Descriptions 229 230 Bidirectional Override This command inserts a lt BDO gt tag to note that the enclosed text is in a language that should be rendered in a different direction either left to right or right to left than the default text order for the document s primary language You can specify the desired text order and the language so that savvy browsers can switch fonts or script systems to display the text correctly Quotation This command marks the selected text as a quotation Use this only for short quotes within a paragraph use lt BLOCKQUOTE gt for quotations consisting of a paragraph or more of text Span This command marks the selection as belonging to a certain class of information such as a book title usually so that its text style can be retrieved from a stylesheet In contrast with lt DIV gt which marks paragraph level classes lt SPAN gt marks character level classes You will be prompted for an ID for this span a class name which should correspond to a stylesheet entry and inline style information All are optional The Span command can now create nested span elements This means that in order to edit an existing span element since they can be nested you must place the insertion point within the open tag of the desired instance Subscript This command marks the selected characters as a subscript lowered below
301. hoose the desired font font size and style using controls in this window You can also tell BBEdit how many spaces should occur between tab stops The chosen display style will be used for all text in the window BBEdit does not support the use of selective text styles The changes you make here affect only the active document To set the default font size style and tab information for all documents use the Default Font option in the Editor Defaults preferences panel Show Fonts 65 66 Note oo ai Tip How BBEdit Wraps Text BBEdit wraps text in one of two ways soft wrapping or hard wrapping Soft wrapping is like the word wrapping found in most word processors When the insertion point reaches a right margin as you type the word processor automatically moves the insertion point to the beginning of the next line You never need to type a carriage return that is press the Return key at the end of a line but only to start a new paragraph If you place the insertion point in the middle of a paragraph and start typing the text reflows so that words that are pushed out beyond the right margin end up on the next line Usually you use soft wrapping when you are editing memos mail messages and other prose It is also useful for HTML documents With soft wrapping you generally do not have to scroll the window horizontally to see all the text in the file Unlike soft wrapping hard wrapping requires a carriage return at
302. hors to use this tag to indent a section of text although stylesheets are a more correct and flexible way to accomplish this You may optionally indicate the document being quoted if it is available on the Web using the Cite field Center This command inserts a block centering tag This tag while permitted in current HTML specifications is deprecated since it includes no information about the content being centered It is generally considered better form to use stylesheets or P or DIV tag ALIGN attributes instead Deleted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been deleted usually with a horizontal line through it that is struck out You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Inserted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been inserted usually by underlining the text You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Noscript This command begins a section of HTML to be displayed only if the Web browser does not support client side scripting it is often used to provide alternate content following a lt SCRIPT gt block A matching lt NOSCRIPT gt tag is also inserted HTML Tool Descriptions 223 224 Preformatted This command begins a section to be reproduced with line breaks as specified in the HTML document Normally b
303. how many pages the document will take to print click the Paginate button To put the full path to the file on the clipboard click the Copy Path button Zoom There is no longer a Zoom command in the Window menu but the key equivalent Command which users of earlier versions of BBEdit may be accustomed to still works Zoom will produce the same effect as clicking a window s zoom box it makes the active window larger if it is small or returns it to its original size if it was previously enlarged by a Zoom command When zooming windows BBEdit will move the window as little as possible consistent with maximizing the window s size This behavior is similar to what the Finder does when zooming a window The Move as Little as Possible switch in the Windows preference panel controls this behavior turning this switch off will revert the behavior to be the same as previous versions of BBEdit Send to Back This command sends the front window behind all the other windows Exchange with Next This command makes the second window the active window Choose this command repeatedly to alternate between the front two windows Synchro Scrolling When you have two or more windows open Synchro Scrolling makes both files scroll when you scroll one This feature is useful to look over two versions of the same file Chapter 6 Arranging Windows amp Palettes Tip Window Names The last items in the Window menu are the names of all the
304. how this can be used Let s say we want to match the words red or blue and refer to whichever word is matched in the replacement pattern That s easy red blue To make it harder let s say that if and only if we match blue we want to optionally match a space and the word car if they follow directly afterward In other words we want to match red blue or if possible blue car but we do not want to match red car We cannot use the pattern xred blue car because that will match red car Nor can we use red blue car blue because in our replacement pattern we want the backreference to only contain red or blue without the car Using a conditional subpattern however we can search for blue red 2 car Here s how this pattern works First we start with blue red When this subpattern matches blue 1 and 2 are set to blue and 3 is empty When it matches red 1 and 3 are set to red and 2 is empty Next comes the conditional subpattern 2 car The conditional test is on 2 the second backreferenced subpattern if 2 is set which in our case means it has matched the word blue then it will try to match car If 2 is not set however the entire conditional subpattern is skipped The question mark at the end of the pattern makes this conditional match optional ev
305. href http www macwor ld com 2003 03 rev i ews bb lt LioMar 2003 MacAddict says BBEdit 7 0 1 is lt a href http www macaddict com issues 8303 lt Li gt Dec 2682 About This Particular Macintosh says BBEdit is lt a href http www atpm com lt Li gt Dec 2002 MacUser UK awards BBEdit 7 0 lt a href http www pepro co uk rev i ews rev i ews lt LidNov 2002 Macworld UK gives BBEdit 6 5 3 five stars article currently unavai lable lt l lt LidMar 2002 MacAddict rates BBEdit 6 5 lt a href http www macaddict com issues 0203 rev J 43 39 no symbol selected The items at the top of the window tells you how many matches BBEdit found in the set of files you specified as well as specifying whether there were any error conditions or warnings generated during the search You can display or hide any combination of errors warnings and matches by checking the appropriate options Multi File Searching 113 Note The middle panel lists each line that contains the matched text Depending on how you have configured BBEdit this list may be a Finder style hierarchical list where each match in a file is listed under the file s name or a flat list where each occurrence is simply displayed in order Every match is identified by file name and line number To see the contents of a file click a line in the list of matched searches The part of the file that contains the search string appears in the lower pane You
306. hyperlinks to provided multiple targets on a single page The anchor must have an associated URL in the HRFF field to be a link it must have a name in the Name field to be a target The Target field is used to specify which frame the linked page should appear in When specifying a URL you can choose a recently used URL from the Recent URLs pop up menu or choose another file from the same folder as the current document using the Current Folder pop up menu If you hold down the Option key the Recent URLs pop up menu will turn into a pop up menu containing Internal Anchors in the current document If you click the File button you will be prompted to choose a file from an Open dialog Normally all types of files will be displayed here However if you select the Only Show HTML and Image Files checkbox at the bottom of the Anchor dialog you will only see images and files whose names match those defined as HTML in BBEdit s Languages preference panel Alternatively you can drag and drop a file into the HREF field in order to insert its path and name BBEdit displays a warning message when the URL does not exist on your computer or is outside the scope of your site these warnings can be disabled using the checkboxes at the bottom of the dialog Image This command inserts an lt IMG gt tag to display an image As with the Anchor tag you can select the Source from the Recent URLs or Current Folder pop up menus by typing a URL or by clicking
307. ibed in the previous section the effects of Command and Option shown in the table above will be reversed accordingly The Numeric Keypad Most Macintosh keyboards have a numeric keypad on the right side Normally you use the keys on the keypad to enter numbers If you prefer you can use the numeric keypad to move the insertion point 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu 2 Select Text Editing from the list on the left in the Preferences window Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit 3 Mark the Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement checkbox start of line 3 Scroll up left show selection Right 4 end of line down Scroll down 2 You can use the Shift key with the keys on the numeric keypad to extend a selection You can use the Command and Option keys with the 2 4 6 and 8 keys as you would the arrow keys To toggle the behavior of the keypad between moving the cursor and entering numbers hold down the Option key and press the Clear key in the upper left corner of the keypad This key is also labeled Num Lock on some keyboards Go To Line Command To move the insertion point to a specific line use the Go To Line command in the Search menu When you choose this command BBEdit opens a Go To Line sheet in the frontmost document 0808 2 index html oO PIF 8 B11 1 22 04 12 Line 52 i shared index htrr lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC GoTo http
308. ich of these items should appear in the pop up menus that list encodings These pop up menus are e The Read As pop up menu in the Open dialog e The Encoding pop up menu in the Options dialog within the Save dialog e The Encoding submenu of the status bar s File Options pop up menu e The character set pop up menus in various HTML tools dialogs including the New HTML Document dialog e The encoding pop up menu in the Text Files Opening and Text Files Saving preferences panels To include an encoding in those menus select it and click Enable To remove an encoding from those menus select it and click Disable To add all the encodings or remove all the encodings from the menus use the Enable All and Disable All buttons To restore the contents of those menus to the factory defaults use the Restore Defaults button All the Unicode encodings are permanently enabled and cannot be turned off Chapter 10 Preferences Tip Note To keep the length of the encoding menus manageable you should add only those encodings which you use frequently Text Files Opening Preferences The Text Files Opening preferences control BBEdit s behavior when it opens files Translate Line Breaks When this option is selected BBEdit translates DOS or Unix line breaks when opening a file Otherwise BBEdit leaves the original line breaks untranslated If a File s Type Is Unknown These settings tell BBEdit how to deal with files whose type and
309. ies that subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses should not be checked Check Nested Folders indicates that nested folders should be included in the check If a Check Syntax or Check Links operation generates any errors or warnings BBEdit will display an error results browser listing For more details on the error results browser format please refer to Chapter 9 Syntax This command invokes BBEdit s syntax checker which validates your HTML document to the specification defined in the lt DOCTYPE gt SGML prolog at the top of the document Errors are displayed in an error results browser Scroll through the list at the top of the window to see the errors that have been found click to see the text that caused the error in the lower part of the window Double click an error message to open the file for editing Links This command causes BBEdit to scan your document or a folder of documents looking for links and object references such as images and Java applets that cannot be resolved Note that BBEdit only looks at pages on your site as defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel not at any links that go offsite BBEdit will in fact generate warnings for offsite links unless you disable the Remote Links warning in the HTML Tools preferences Update The Update submenu contains commands for updating IMG tags includes and placeholders in the current document the selected folder or the current site as selected in
310. ies these characters If the File s Encoding Can t Be Guessed use This menu determines which character set encoding to use when BBEdit cannot determine the proper encoding by examining the file This setting also establishes the default setting of the Read As pop up menu in the Open dialog Warn of Malformed UTF 8 Files When this option is selected BBEdit warns you if you open a UTF 8 file that contains an invalid UTF 8 character sequence Honor Saved State When this option is selected BBEdit honors state information that may be stored in a file The following suboptions let you fine tune which state information BBEdit honors Window Position When this option is selected BBEdit restores the window of the document to the same position as when the file was saved Otherwise BBEdit opens the window in its default position Font Settings When this option is selected BBEdit restores the font information stored with a document Otherwise it uses the default font settings Selection Range When this option is selected BBEdit restores the insertion point or selection range to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise the insertion point is at the beginning of the file Emacs Local Variables Emacs the popular Unix text editor supports a convention in which you can define Emacs specific settings in a block of text near the end of the file or in the first line of the file BBEdit now recognizes the Emacs varia
311. iew left right up down Arrow Move up down 1 line in file up down Arrow Command Move to top bottom of file up down Arrow Option Move to previous next screen page up down Arrow Control Scroll view up down any of the above Shift Make or extend a selection range Delete Deletes selection range or character preceding to the left of the insertion point Delete Command Deletes all characters backwards to beginning of line Delete Option Deletes all characters back to beginning of word Delete Shift same as Forward Delete Forward Delete Deletes selection range or character after to the right of the insertion point Forward Delete Command Deletes all characters forward to end of the current line Forward Delete Option Deletes all characters forward to end of word Forward Delete Shift same as Forward Delete alone Note The meaning of the Command and Option modifiers listed above may be exchanged depending on which settings you have selected for Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior in the Text Editing panel of the Preferences window 324 Appendix B Editing Shortcuts Emacs Key Bindings The Text Editing panel of the Preferences window contains a checkbox labeled Use Emacs Key Bindings When this option is turned on BBEdit will enable the following Emacs style keyboard navigation commands The Escape key is specified in lieu of the Emacs Meta key to use these key equivalents press and release the Escape
312. if you want to specify a window by name we will show you how to figure all that out ina moment you have to look at the window class s dictionary entry Anything in square brackets is optional Most of the rest of the save event is optional in fact The basic event just saves the frontmost window to the same file from which it was opened However you can also optionally include the word to followed by a file reference You specify a file simply by using the word file followed by the path name of the file as in file Hard Disk Users BBS W Documents My file If you specify a file to save the window to the text will be saved into that file instead of the file it came from like using Save As instead of Save The last three optional parts of the save event are denoted as boolean That means they take either a true or a false value In AppleScript there are a couple of different ways to specify boolean values You can write saving as stationery true to tell BBEdit to save the file as a stationery document Or you can write with saving as stationery You will notice that the last two parameters default to true if you do not specify them as false To do that you would use add to recent list false or without add to recent list Whichever way you write it you will notice that when you compile the script AppleScript rewrites it using with or without Since that is the syntax AppleScript seems to like best that is probably the one y
313. ile that is referenced in the text of a document It is particularly useful for opening include files or any document referenced by another file To open a file whose name is referenced in the text of a document 1 Select the file name within the body of the document 2 Choose Open Selection from the File menu If a suffix of the form x follows the name BBEdit will automatically expand the selection to include the suffix BBEdit also understands the Unix style line number specifications that can be appended to a file name This type of specification is generated frequently by Unix command line tools For example selecting the text main cp 210 and choosing Open Selection will open the file main cp and automatically select line 210 If the file is already open this command will simply select the designated line In searching for the requested file BBEdit will look in the following locations in order e If the selected file name is surrounded by angle brackets BBEdit will start its search in the folder that you have specified in the Search Folders list of the File Search preference panel e If the Open Selection is being done from a shell worksheet BBEdit will search the shell s current working directory followed by any subdirectories within it e Otherwise BBEdit will look first in the same folder as the file containing the selected file name and then in any subfolders within that folder If the file containing
314. iling Lists http lists perl org Picking Up Perl a freely redistributable Perl tutorial book by Bradley M Kuhn http www ebb org PickingUpPerl comp lang perl misc comp lang perl moderated Usenet news groups Python is a portable interpreted object oriented programming language originally developed by Guido van Rossum If you are interested in learning Python consider the following books Learning Python by Mark Lutz amp David Ascher O Reilly and Associates 1999 ISBN 1 56592 464 9 Programming Python 2nd Edition by Mark Lutz O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 596 00085 5 Internet resources for Python Python home page http www python org Python Cookbook http aspn activestate com ASPN Cookbook Python comp lang python Usenet news group Perl Python and Shell Scripting 285 286 Note Line Endings and Unix Scripts To execute scripts the script interpreter for any given language requires source code to be encoded with native line endings i e Unix line breaks for Perl and other shell scripting languages BBEdit will automatically make sure that the script source sent to each interpreter matches its line ending expectations Although for best compatibility you should set the line endings of your scripts appropriately regardless of the line endings of the file on disk BBEdit will always send scripts to Perl Python and other script interpreters with Unix line endings Configuring Perl BBE
315. in DATE Selection and Insertion Placeholders In BBEdit 8 you can use multiple SELSTART SELEND pairs together with any number of INSERTION placeholders Example Suppose you have defined the following glossary item which contains an insertion placeholder typedef struct SELECT INSERTION SELECT SELECT Ptr SELECT Handle Glossary Substitution Placeholders 249 250 If the selected text in your editing window is MyStruct and you insert this glossary item BBEdit will insert the following in the editing window typedef struct MyStruct MyStruct MyStruct Ptr MyStruct Handle where the vertical bar marks the point at which the blinking insertion point will be placed Example Suppose you have defined the following glossary item which contains multiple pairs of selection placeholders MyFancyFunction selstart targl selend selstart arg2 selend selstart arg2 selend When you insert this glossary item BBEdit will place the following text in the editing window MyFancyFunction argl lt arg2 gt lt arg3 gt and the string arg1 will be selected You can then use the Go To Next Previous Placeholder commands from the Search menu to hop to the other arguments and enter the desired values Temporary Placeholder Formats In previous versions of BBEdit the Glossary would generate temporary placeholders of the form for items containing mult
316. in which the text view status bar is not adjacent to the window title bar for example disk browsers and search results do not have a status bar control but do honor the global status bar preference and you can use the Text Options sheet to show and hide the status bar on a per window basis The icons on the status bar are indicators buttons and pop up menus that give you quick access to commonly used functions The following table explains each icon Icon Meaning A solid diamond indicates that the document has been modified A hollow diamond means only the state of the document window position selection range scrolling position and so on has changed o The pencil icon indicates that the document can be modified If the pencil has a slash across it the document cannot be modified because the file is read only the disk is locked or the file is part of a source control system project such as Perforce or CVS and is checked out If the file is not on a locked disk you can click the pencil icon to toggle the document s editability l The Function pop up menu gives quick access to routines and functions in languages that BBEdit can parse In HTML documents this menu lists the contents of the TITLE tag if any all named anchors in your document that is those defined with lt A NAME gt all level 1 6 headings any tags that have ID attributes and any BBmark indicators as well as all BBEdit include
317. ing it or by asking whether to save the file If you have set the Ask option and choose Save when prompted the file will be saved and then previewed if you choose Don t Save the preview operation will be cancelled and no changes will be made to the file Web Browsers Available for Preview This list displays all the Web browsers known to BBEdit Browsers are shown by name and version number in the same form in which they will appear in the Preview With submenu of the Markup menu Any browser which runs under the Classic environment will be further labeled Classic The browser list includes each individual browser application that is available on your Mac For example if you have Netscape 4 7 5 and Netscape 6 2 1 on your hard disk both applications will be listed in the preferences and available for previewing You can use the Add Remove and Change buttons respectively to add or delete a browser from the list or update an entry by choosing a different version of the application The Remove button does not delete a browser from your hard disk but only removes its entry from the preview list The Find All button finds all available Web browsers that BBEdit recognizes and adds them to the list if they are not already there If using this button does not add a browser which you know is available you can add it directly with the Add button Sometimes the system may not properly advise BBEdit of every browser which is present
318. ing the appropriate setting in the Application panel of the Preferences window BBEdit can then open image files and sounds in their own windows rather than displaying them as text If this preference is not active BBEdit will open the files in their raw condition as if they were text documents Choosing the Encoding for a Document When you open a document BBEdit will automatically examine its contents for any indication of the proper encoding and attempt to handle it appropriately If BBEdit cannot determine the proper encoding and you opened the file with the Open command it uses the encoding specified in the Read As pop up menu on the Open dialog Otherwise it uses the encoding specified by the If the file s encoding can t be guessed use preference setting in the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window Opening Existing Documents 25 26 Note Note You can choose which encodings appear in both the Read As and the If the file s encoding can t be guessed use pop up menus by using the Text Encodings preferences panel Here are the details of the steps that BBEdit goes through to determine the proper encoding for a file 1 If the file is well formed HTML or XML BBEdit looks for an encoding or lt meta charset gt directive 2 If the file contains a BBEdit state resource BBEdit uses the encoding stored in the state resource 3 If the file contains a UTF 8 or UTF 16 Unicode byte
319. inserted around it You can also control whether the opening and closing tags should be inserted on the same line as the content or on separate lines by setting the Place Tags on Separate Lines option appropriately Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Div This command begins a new division A division is a generic block of text containing one or more paragraphs or other block elements that all have some type of structural attribute in common Use lt DIV gt when no predefined block type is appropriate You can specify alignment ID a class for obtaining formatting cues from a stylesheet and inline CSS style information Horizontal Rule This command inserts a lt HR gt tag You can specify the alignment the thickness size of the rule its width and whether it contains a three dimensional shade Heading This command inserts a heading of any level and allows you to specify the alignment of the heading H1 through H6 These commands insert a heading of the specified level The alignment attribute used will match the last one chosen when using the Heading tool Address This command inserts an lt ADDRESS gt block The formatting of this element is browser dependent but it is usually used to indicate that a block of text is a postal address Blockquote This command inserts a block quote that is several lines of text that have been quoted from another document Most browsers display this as indentation leading many aut
320. into account Note that some languages such as VBScript overload the keyword END with another keyword such as SUB separating the two with one or more spaces Visually this is nice because it lets a human reader know what the END ends but it presents a problem for the function scanner which is not prepared at this time to treat sequences of keywords as having special meaning In theory it would be possible to get by with specifying just END or more likely just SUB for the value of Close Statement Blocks but in practice it s hard to say Open Block Comments String Close Block Comments String Block comments are multi line comments that begin and end with special delimiters such as and in C and and in Pascal where everything in between is ignored entirely Open Line Comments String Line comments begin with a special delimiters such as in C and continue until the end of the line they begin on Language Keys and Properties 343 Key Value Type Open Strings 1 String Close Strings 1 String Escape Char in Strings 1 String End of line Ends Strings 1 Boolean Open Strings 2 String Close Strings 2 String Escape Char in Strings 2 String End of line Ends Strings 2 Boolean Most languages allow for strings to be enclosed by either matching single quote characters or matching double quote characters Thus two different sets of key value pairs can be
321. ion g 3 of Rights in Data General Clause in Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR 52 227 14 the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights Clause in FAR 52 227 19 and or subdivision c 1 ii of Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause in Department of Defense FAR 252 227 7013 Acknowledgment You acknowledge that you have read this agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions You further agree that it is the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between you and Bare Bones Software Inc which supersedes all proposals or prior agreements oral or written and all other communications between you and Bare Bones Software Inc relating to the subject matter of this agreement Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Contents Welcome to BBEdit Getting Started eesti sah Bret rain desea ee ae oslidea att ate ohh What Is DBEA pessan sacuna sedans Hon han dalele Oakes eA How Can I Use BBEdit 0 0 0 cee eee eee Development Environments 2 Writing HTML Documents 2 Human Interface Notes 0 0 000 c ccc eee eee eee eee Dynamic Menus 3 Bypassing Options Dialogs 3 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands 3 Contextual Menus 4 Snappy Palettes 4 Dialog Box and Sheet Key Equivalents 4 Feature Highlights nore cse naar poaa cee eens Info on New Features 7 SUpport SELVICES zin nea sale hale tated eee eines wine Installing BBEdit Basie In
322. ion Bar Enable this option to have BBEdit display the multiple document navigation bar by default You can always show it or hide it independently for each window Show Cursor Position This option adds a panel at the bottom left corner of the window that displays the location line and column of the insertion point or the endpoint of a just changed selection range if the cursor has not been moved yet after the change Show Current Function This option displays the name of the function the insertion point is in if any at the bottom left corner of the window Defaults The following options control the presence and default position of text area visual indicators Show Page Guide Enable this option to have BBEdit display the Page Guide which is a uniform light grey boundary region starting at the specified character width This flexible boundary indicator replaces the historical Philip Bar margin indicator Chapter 10 Preferences Show Tab Stops Enable this option to have BBEdit display tab stops as vertical grid lines within the content area of text windows using the tab width set in the Fonts panel Show Line Numbers This option displays line numbers along the left edge of the window Status Bar Controls These options let you choose which controls should appear on the status bar To quickly enable or disable the visibility of all controls you can click either Show All or Hide All respectively Function Popup
323. ion options offered by the strftime routine see man strftime for further details Examples LOCALTIME r z on A produces 06 50 13 PM 0400 on Monday GMTIME r z produces 10 50 13 PM 0000 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder When dealing with large web sites that have multiple content folders it is often useful to specify relative rather than absolute paths for linking documents The RELATIVE placeholder allows you to easily generate relative references in templates and include files by providing a virtual path that uses the construction to back up the hierarchy to the root directory of the site To use this placeholder write your links as if they were all relative to the top of your web site including RELATIVE as the first directory in the path For example consider that you have the following file structure where each page includes a file which references the separate GIF image My_Web_Site Folderl Filel html Folder2 File2 html File3 html Folder3 Folder4 Folder5 File4 html Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif 330 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files If you write a relative link as follows lt img src relative Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif alt gt and then run the Update command the following links will be generated In File1 html Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif In File2 html Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif In
324. ip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Names that fit entirely within the window without truncation do not display a tool tip Any plug ins you place directly in the Plug Ins subfolder of the BBEdit application support folder will appear as individual items in the Tools menu If you place them in subfolders within the Plug Ins folder they will appear in submenus of the Tools menu that mirror this subfolder structure In the Tools window such subfolders will appear as separate sublists plug ins located at the top level of the Plug Ins folder will appear in the sublist named Plug Ins No Plug Ins Available If BBEdit does not load any plug ins at launch either because there were none present or because there were no compatible items available the Tools menu will contain a single item No Plug Ins Available If you choose this item BBEdit will display a dialog explaining why no other items are present on the Tools menu Setting Key Equivalents for Plug Ins The Set Key button in the BBEdit Tools palette lets you assign key equivalents to a plug in You can use any combination of the Command Shift Option and Control keys in the key equivalents Using Plug Ins 305 Warning IMPORTANT Assigning a Key to a Plug in To assign a key to a BBEdit plug in 1 Select the tool you wish to assign a key equivalent to in the Tools palette 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog Set Key Keystroke for textSOAP
325. iple characters for example in the case of ligatures Educate Quotes This command converts straight quotes and to typographer s quotes and You should not use this plug in to prepare text for posting on a web page or use in an email as typographer s quotes in the Mac character set will generally not be properly displayed by applications on other platforms Straighten Quotes This command performs the reverse of Educate Quotes it converts typographer s quotes and to straight quotes and Add Remove Line Numbers This command displays a sheet which allows you to add or remove line numbers for each line of the selected text or of the document You can set the starting number and numbering increment as well as whether to add or remove trailing spaces and whether to right justify the inserted numbers by choosing the appropriate options Add O Remove Starting line number T Line number increment f v Include Space After Number v Keep Text Justified Don t Number Cancel C Number Chapter 5 Text Transformations Note Prefix Suffix Lines This command displays a sheet which allows you to add or remove the specified prefix and or suffix strings to each line of the selected text or of the document Insert O Remove Prefix Suffix Don t Change C Cancel Ear If you define both a prefix and a suffix string BBEdit will apply the
326. iple instances of INSERTION However since the bullet character cannot be represented in all character encodings BBEdit now generates temporary placeholders You should not rely on the format of these temporary placeholders use the supported placeholders INSERTION SELSTART SELEND instead If you have any existing glossary items which directly employed the old temporary placeholder format you will need to modify them to use the supported placeholders Time Formats The GMTIME XXX and LOCALTIME XXX placeholders offer you the option to insert the specified time value with flexible formatting In order to use these placeholders you must substitute a time format using the same expansion options offered by the strftime routine see man strftime for further details Examples LOCALTIME r z on A produces 06 50 13 PM 0400 on Monday GMTIME br z produces 10 50 13 PM 0000 Chapter 12 Using the Glossary WARNING Using Scripts with the Glossary The placeholder script filename provides a powerful means to insert variable or conditional content by allowing access to any compiled AppleScript or Unix shell script from within a glossary item The script itself can either be located in the same folder as the glossary item that invokes it in which case you need only specify its name such as MyDateScript or you can supply a full pathname to a script on any mounted volume such as Hard Drive M
327. is non empty replaces the pasted text with the contents of the previous clipboard The previous clipboard becomes current and will be used for any further paste operations repeated applications of the command cycle backward through the available clipboards For compatibility with international text content the Clipboard window displays text in the font and font size that it was put on the clipboard with Changing the display font in the Clipboard window does not change the font of the underlying data Basic Editing 47 48 Drag and Drop Another way to move text from one place to another is by drag and drop If you drag and drop text from one window to another BBEdit copies the text to the target window without removing it from the original window In addition you can drag and drop an item from the Finder onto an editing window in BBEdit If the item is a text file the file s contents are inserted If the item is a folder a listing of the item s contents is inserted If you hold down the Command key while dragging a folder the path of the item is inserted instead Multiple Undo BBEdit provides the ability to undo multiple edits one action at a time The number of edits that may be undone is limited only by available memory The practical limitation is determined by the extent of the edits and the amount of free memory BBEdit also supports multiple Redos If you have not made any changes after performing an Undo y
328. ision Compare Arbitrary Revisions Displays a dialog which allows you to choose any two revisions of the current file from the repository and perform a Find Differences on those revisions Compare with Base Compare with Previous Compare with Head These are convenience commands which allow you to compare the local revision with BASE PREV or HEAD revisions respectively Resolved Marks the current file as resolved if it was previously marked as in conflict with updates received from the repository Show Annotation Displays the content of the file line by line with author and revision information Show Revision History Brings up a sheet on which you can display options and then displays the revision history of the local file You can hold down the Option key when selecting this command to use the last settings Add Schedules the current file or all files selected in a browser for addition to the repository You must perform a Commit to add the file s to the repository This command will not be available if the selected files are already part of the repository Delete Schedules the current file or all files selected in a browser for deletion from the repository The local file s will be deleted immediately but you must perform a Commit to permanently delete them from the repository Revert amp Delete Reverts local changes to the current file or all files selected in a browser then schedules the file s for deleti
329. it does not search folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses Search Folders The Search Folders box displays a list of folders which BBEdit will search in response to an Open File by Name or Open Selection command or a Control Tab to locate the corresponding source or header file The contents of each listed folder will be searched recursively i e the contents of any subfolders will also be searched To add folders to the list do any of the following e Click the Choose button and select the folder from the directory selection dialog e Drag the icon of the folder to the path box To change the target folder for an existing entry select it from the list click Change and choose a new folder using the directory selection dialog To remove folders from the list select them and click Remove Unix Search Paths The Unix Search Paths box displays a list of folders which BBEdit will search in response to an Open File by Name or Open Selection command or a Control Tab to locate the corresponding source or header file The contents of each listed folder will only be searched directly i e without recursion Unix search paths are designed to make it easier to work with Unix source code which uses include statements of the form include lt xxx yyy h gt Chapter 10 Preferences As a more concrete example the canonical Unix include directory is usr include It contains its own subdirectories but since
330. ites out when you choose Save to Disk from the factory s Options sheet Neither operation changes any file contents in memory so they will have no visible effect if the document is left open either by choosing the Leave Open button in the Options sheet or by opting to leave the document open when confirming a save e When you use the Run AppleScript Filter operation your script should be written with an entry point named ApplyTextTransform The input parameter to this entry point is a Unicode string containing the file s contents This entry point should return the file s contents as a Unicode string or something which can be directly coerced to one on ApplyTextTransform fileData do something to fileData return fileData or some reasonable facsimile thereof end Text Factories 93 94 Note e When you use the Run Unix Filter operation you can choose to have BBEdit convert the file s contents and the output to UTF 8 by setting the Use UTF 8 for I O option If you do not set this option BBEdit will use the system encoding instead As a point of technical interest your program will be run on a secondary thread This should not pose a problem as long as your Unix script avoids doing fancy GUI ish things Applying a Text Factory Once you have configured your factory and selected the files and folders to process click the Apply button in the lower right hand corner of the window BBEdit will
331. ith CVS eirp asne eenaa u ccc nee ee ene enn eens 290 Quick Start for SSH accessed Repositories 290 Other Configurations 290 Performing Commit Operations 290 CVS Menu Commands 290 Working with Perforce 6 6 ccc cence een ene 295 Perforce Menu Commands 295 Working with Subversion 0 0 00 e cece cece eee ee teenies 297 Configuring Subversion 297 e Command Line Integration 297 Subversion Commands 298 Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior 0 6 cece eee eee eee 301 Using the CodeWarrior Menu 301 Working with Xcode so cetei seisi ccc eee eee nents 302 277 278 Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments Before you can use BBEdit with a development environment you need to let BBEdit know which development environments you plan to use Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu Select Tools from the list along the left side of the dialog Click the check boxes to select the development tools you plan to use Note that some options will only be available if you have the appropriate programs installed More information can be found in Chapter 10 e800 BBEdit Preferences These settings control how BBEdit interacts with third party tools HTML Markup Script Editor HTML Palette Applications AppleScript Script Editor app Set HTML Preview HTML Tools HTML Web Sites Coding Tools ong BBEdit HTML Tools M Unix Scripting Tools Software
332. ix mappings for all the types of documents you will be working with In order to apply syntax coloring to stand alone PHP files you must use the Languages preference panel to set the suffix mapping for such files to be PHP If the mapping is set to HTML XML or JSP the PHP content must be enclosed by an appropriate tag lt SCRIPT language php gt lt SCRIPT gt or lt php gt in order to have BBEdit apply syntax coloring Using the HTML Tools There are two ways to use BBEdit s HTML Tools via the HTML Tools floating palette right and through the Markup pull down menu These two methods are functionally equivalent in most respects Most beginning users find it easiest to use the HTML Tools through the palette There are three basic types of buttons on the HTML Tools palette e Those you simply click to perform an action or bring up a settings dialog before performing an action for example New Document or Preview in BBEdit e Those that provide pop up menus containing related options for example Heading Frames and Utilities e Those that contain both a clickable button and a pop up list for example List Table and Preview Close Current Tag Head Elements v HTML Tools New Document Tag Maker Edit Tag Balance Tags Document Type Character Set css v Body Properties Anchor Image Break Font Paragraph Div Heading v Dreamweaver Bl
333. k line feed t tab f page break form feed xNN hexadecimal character code NN for example xOD for CR backslash The form of a hex escape is xNN where N is any single hex digit 0 9 A F The x may be upper or lower case You can use the ASCII Table in the Window menu to find the hex value for any 8 bit Macintosh character You can perform a literal search for any character including a null using this option Malformed escapes are treated as literal strings In older versions of BBEdit you could not perform a grep search for a null character ASCII 0 even if it was escaped This limitation is no longer present you can find nulls as part of a grep search Multi File Searching The only difference between single file searching and multi file searching is that to perform a multi file search you must specify the files to be searched BBEdit gives you a great deal of flexibility in how to do this You can search all the files in a given folder or defined web site in a file group in open editing windows or in an existing search results browser For even greater control you can select a diverse set of search sources or apply BBEdit s advanced multi criteria file filtering option Mullti file searching is no longer a modal operation When you start a search BBEdit will display a search progress window and return control so that you can continue working You can perform more than one multi file s
334. key followed by the specified letter key for example to type Esc V press and release the Escape key and then type the letter V Key Sequence Action Ctl A te a Move insertion point to start of current ine Ctl B backward char Move insertion point backward 1 place Ctl D delete char Delete forward 1 character Ctl E end of line Move insertion point to end of current line Ctl F forward char Move insertion point forward 1 place Ctl G keyboard quit cancel pending arguments Ctl K kill line Delete to end of current line Ctl L recenter Scrolls the current view so the selection is centered on screen Ctl N next line Move insertion point down one line Ctl O open line Inserts line break without moving insertion point Ctl P previous line Move insertion point up one line Ctl R isearch backward Quick Search with the Backwards option Ctl S isearch forward Quick Search Ctl T transpose chars Exchange Characters Ctl U universal argument See note below Ctl V scroll up Page down Ctl W kill region Cut Ctl Y yank Paste Ctl _ undo Undo Emacs Key Bindings 325 326 Key Sequence Action Ctl X Ctl C save buffers kill emacs Quit Ctl X Ctl F find file Open file Ctl X Ctl S save buffer Save current document Ctl X Ctl W write file Save As Esc lt beginning of buffer Move insertion point to start
335. kward searching 110 Balance Tags command 233 balancing parentheses 82 BASE tag 207 221 BASEFONT tag 229 basename placeholder 248 bbdiff 75 bbdiff tool 284 installing 284 BBEdit Glossary folder 13 BBEdit Scripts folder 14 BBEdit Startup Items folder 13 bbedit tool 283 installing 283 BBEdit Talk mailing list 128 BDO tag 230 bi directional override 230 BIG tag 231 Block Elements submenu 222 BLOCKQUOTE tag 223 BODY tag 221 bookmarks 34 BR tag 229 breakpoints 301 Bring Up To Date command 302 broken links 233 Browser Display Preferences 167 browser plug ins 228 browsers 157 differences 75 disk browser 158 errors 281 file list panel 160 search results 113 161 splitter 158 status bar 158 159 text panel 158 160 BUTTON tag 226 e C programming language 90 Cancel button 4 capitalize lines 83 sentences 83 words 83 CAPTION tag 225 Cascading Style Sheets 214 case sensitivity 110 case transformations 141 CENTER tag 223 345 changing case 82 character classes 132 character set encoding 24 25 31 188 190 Check Spelling command 77 Check submenu 232 Check Syntax command 301 checking links 233 checking spelling external spell checker 79 user dictionary 79 CITE tag 230 Clear command 4 46 Clear key 46 clearing a marker 71 client pull 222 client side image maps 229 client side scripts 222 223 229 Clipboard 47 clipboard 47 clipboard placeholder 248 clipboards multiple 47 Close Current Tag comma
336. l help you learn more about editing and searching text using BBEdit Configuring the HTML Tools Before using the HTML Tools you should prepare your source documents and your copy of BBEdit Although you can change your settings at any time we suggest visiting the Preferences window before starting First create a folder to contain working draft copies of your HTML documents Put the HTML documents you are working on in this folder either copying them from your web site or moving them from elsewhere on your hard drive then upload them to your Web server when you are satisfied with them Next launch BBEdit and open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu For now we will only set the preferences for working with HTML Refer to the following sections of this manual for further details e HTML Colors Preferences on page 177 to choose a layout for the Web Safe Colors palette e HTML Markup Preferences on page 177 to choose options for formatting HTML tags and attributes Configuring the HTML Tools 203 204 Note Tip HTML Palette Preferences on page 178 to select the appearance of the HTML Tools palette e HTML Tools Preferences on page 179 to tweak the function of the HTML Tools HTML Web Sites Preferences on page 181 to tell BBEdit where your web site is locally and on your server Languages Preferences on page 183 to check that there are suitable file suff
337. lders indicates that nested folders should be included in the update Includes The Includes submenu contains commands for inserting one time include directives persistent include directives and placeholders See Appendix C for more information Choosing Include or Persistent Include prompts you to choose a file using an Open dialog and then inserts the appropriate markup Choosing Placeholders displays a scrolling list of available placeholders selecting one and clicking Insert places it into the document Utilities The Utilities submenu contains commands for automatically editing the current HTML document for ease of editing and for consistency Format This command formats the current HTML document for easier editing The appearance of the document in a browser is generally not affected except in the case of Document Skeleton You can choose from among the following e Hierarchical Nested HTML structures are indented This command may add white space which can affect display in a browser e Gentle Hierarchical Same as Hierarchical with less indenting e Plain Places each tag on a separate line with no indenting e Compact Absolute minimum white space Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools e Gentle Compact A slightly more human readable version of Compact e Source Format Profile Formats the document according to the Dreamweaver Source Format Profile selected in the HTML Markup preference panel if any e Document Skeleto
338. lect it in the Finder choose the Get Info command and check its version information You will also not be able to use any third party plug ins that have not been updated to function on Mac OS X Contact the developers of your plug ins or visit the Bare Bones Software web site for more information on the availability of updated plug ins Scripts Global Local The Scripts folder contains compiled AppleScripts that appear in the Scripts menu left You can place scripts in this folder and use the Scripts menu to run the script Scripts may be placed within subfolders up to four levels deep to organize them A floating Scripts palette lets you activate scripts with a double click and assign keyboard shortcuts to any script Several basic scripts are supplied in this folder You can hide or show all items included from the global folder by using the menu item Hide Show Library Scripts You should move or copy over any customized scripts that you wish to preserve Note that some scripts written for use with older versions of BBEdit may not work with BBEdit 8 Please see Chapter 13 for more details and tips on modifying your existing scripts 14 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Upgrading Upgrading Upgrading Shutdown Items Local only The items in this folder are opened when you quit BBEdit Usually this function will be used to run scripts of some sort This folder is installed empty by default Shutdown items are now
339. lected documents into the frontmost text window If there are no text windows open or the frontmost text window contains an active sheet this option will be disabled e New Window BBEdit will open all of the selected documents into a new text window e Separate Windows BBEdit will open each of the selected documents into its own text window Using the Open Hidden Command The Open Hidden command in the File menu presents a dialog with the same appearance and behaviors as the standard Open dialog except that it shows invisible files including both files whose invisible attribute has been set and those whose names begin with a period Using the Open Recent Command The Open Recent submenu contains a list of files you have opened recently To open one of these files choose it from the Open Recent submenu Chapter 3 Working with Files To set the number of items in the Open Recent list use the Remember the most recently used items option on the Application panel of the preferences window Using the Reopen using Encoding Command The Reopen using Encoding submenu contains a list of all available text encodings To reopen the current text document and have its contents interpreted using a different encoding choose the desired encoding from the Reopen using Encoding submenu This command will only be available if the current document is unmodified Using the Open Selection Command The Open Selection command lets you open a f
340. licking the padlock button you will be prompted to enter your administrator password This is equivalent to executing the command sudo s in a terminal window the worksheet s status area will indicate this with a sudo prefix to the current state and the padlock icon will change to unlocked Clicking the button again locks the padlock and returns to normal user mode If you are not familiar with Unix command line tools we strongly urge you to obtain and read an introductory guide to using a Unix shell Command line tools can be very useful but if used incorrectly they can render files or even your entire system unusable Default Worksheet Stationery When creating a new worksheet window BBEdit will look for a worksheet stationery file named Default Worksheet Stationery This file is located in the Stationery folder of BBEdit s application support folder See Chapter 2 for more information regarding BBEdit s application support folder If the default worksheet stationery exists you will see the contents of this file in every new worksheet window you create BBEdit ships with a default worksheet stationery file that provides a small tutorial on using worksheet windows When you grow tired of seeing this tutorial in every new worksheet you can either remove the Default Worksheet Stationery file from the Stationery folder or replace it with one of your own The bbedit Command Line Tool You can us
341. m of matching a string in parentheses allowing for unlimited nested balanced parentheses Without the use of recursion the best that can be done is to use a pattern that matches up to some fixed depth of nesting It is not possible to handle an arbitrary nesting depth Perl 5 6 has provided an experimental facility that allows regular expressions to recurse among other things It does this by interpolating Perl code in the expression at run time and the code can refer to the expression itself Obviously BBEdit s grep engine cannot support the interpolation of Perl code Instead the special item R is provided for the specific case of recursion The following recursive pattern solves the parentheses problem 2 gt 07 1 R First it matches an opening parenthesis Then it matches any number of substrings which can either be a sequence of non parentheses or a recursive match of the pattern itself that is a correctly parenthesized substring Finally there is a closing parenthesis This particular example pattern contains nested unlimited repeats and so the use of a once only subpattern for matching strings of non parentheses is important when applying the pattern to strings that do not match For example when it tries to match against this line of text aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa it yields no match quickly However if a once only subpattern is not used the match runs for a very lon
342. m to the text at the same time When using the add prefix add suffix remove prefix or remove suffix scripting commands the string direct parameter is required Sort Lines This command displays a sheet which allows you to sort lines of text by collating them in alphanumeric order The sorted lines can be copied to the clipboard be displayed in a new untitled window replace the selection within the original document or any combination of the three Numbers Match by Value C Sorted Lines to Clipboard _ Ignore Leading White Space L Sorted Lines to New Document _ Reverse Sort Al Sorted Lines Replace Selection v Sort Using Pattern Searching Pattern B AANE tc A t Case Sensitive Sort Using Entire Search Pattern O All Sub Patterns 1 2 N Specific Sub Patterns Don t Sort Cancel There are also options for ignoring white space at the beginning of lines taking case distinctions into account sorting strings of digits by numerical value instead of lexically and sorting in descending rather than ascending order By checking the Sort Using Pattern option you can specify a grep pattern to further filter the lines to be sorted If the pattern contains subpatterns you can use them to control the sort order based on the contents of the strings they match When you sort using a grep pattern the Case Sensitive option controls the case sensitivity of the pattern match in
343. mand to enter the currently selected text into the Find amp Replace dialog as the search pattern and set the Use Grep search option without opening the dialog This command does not perform a search but only sets the contents of the search pattern and the specified search option When you invoke this command BBEdit will add the current search pattern to the Find dialog s pop up menu of recently used search strings Enter Replace Pattern Choose the Enter Replace String command to enter the currently selected text into the Find amp Replace dialog as the replace pattern and set the Use Grep search option without opening the dialog This command does not perform a search but only sets the contents of the replace pattern and the specified search option When you invoke this command BBEdit will add the current replace pattern to the Find dialog s pop up menu of recently used replace strings Chapter 7 Searching Note Replace Replaces the selected text usually an occurrence of the search string with the replace string Replace All Replaces every occurrence of the search string in a file with the replace string Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selected text with the replace string and searches for the next occurrence of the search string Go to Line When you choose this command BBEdit opens the Go To Line dialog box Type in a line number and the frontmost text window will jump to display that line The Go To
344. many editing tasks quicker and easier whether you are modifying Web pages extracting data from a file or just rearranging a phone list In this chapter What Is Grep or Pattern Searching 6 c cece cee eens 128 Recommended Books and Resources 00sec cece cence ences 128 Writing Search Patterns 6 6 cece cee eee eens 129 Most Characters Match Themselves 129 Escaping Special Characters 129 Wildcards Match Types of Characters 130 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters 132 Matching Non Printing Characters 133 Other Special Character Classes 134 Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns 134 Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 135 Creating Subpatterns 136 Using Alternation 137 The Longest Match Issue 138 Non Greedy Quantifiers 138 Writing Replacement Patterns 1 0 cece ee cece nes 139 Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful 139 Using the Entire Matched Pattern 140 Using Parts of the Matched Pattern 140 Case Transformations 141 Examples ae ee Re ee ere ae ee EE E 142 Matching Identifiers 142 Matching White Space 142 Matching Delimited Strings 143 Marking Structured Text 143 Marking a Mail Digest 144 Rearranging Name Lists 144 Advanced Grep Topics 0 6 ccc cece cect eee teen eens 145 Matching Nulls 145 Backreferences 145 POSIX Style Character Classes 147 Non Capturing Parentheses 147
345. mat specified Input Text Result Text Text with the chosen line breaks Remove Duplicate Lines This action will eliminate duplicates from the provided lines according to the specified rules Input Text Result Text Unique Lines of Text Related Actions Sort Lines Remove Line Numbers This action will remove leading line numbers from each line processed Input Text Result Text Text with leading line numbers removed Related Actions Add Line Numbers Remove Prefix This action will remove the supplied string from the beginning of each line processed Input Text Result Text Text with the specified prefix removed from each line Automator Actions 97 98 Related Actions Add Suffix Remove Suffix Remove Suffix This action will remove the supplied string from the end of each line processed Input Text Result Text Text with the specified suffix removed from each line Related Actions Add Suffix Remove Prefix Search and Replace This action will search the input string and replace all matches with specified string Input Text Result Text Text with the specified replacements done Set Contents of BBEdit Document This action will replace or insert the passed text into the frontmost text document in BBEdit according to the options you set Requires A text document must be open Input Text Result com barebones bbedit document object A BBEdit document object Related Actions Get
346. match any of the mappings in BBEdit s Languages preferences BBEdit will attempt to guess what language the file contains and apply the appropriate syntax coloring If BBEdit guesses wrong or is unable to guess you can resort to the Language submenu of the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar or the Language pop up menu in the Text Options sheet which gives you the ability to manually select any installed language to be applied to the document regardless of its name If the file is saved with BBEdit state the manual language selection will persist and override any suffix mapping By default BBEdit recognizes over 20 different languages and several dozen suffix mappings You can add new suffixes to map to existing languages or by installing third party language plug ins add syntax coloring support for new languages as well All the specific languages that BBEdit recognizes and the suffixes or extensions it expects for them are listed in the Languages preference panel and suffix mappings can also be changed there You can choose the colors that BBEdit uses for syntax coloring in the Text Colors preference panel BBEdit will recognize and syntax color VBScript embedded within HTML via the lt gt and lt SCRIPT gt lt SCRIPT gt tags Show Fonts You can choose the font font size text style and tab spacing for a window by choosing Show Fonts from the Text menu and using the standard system Font panel You can c
347. matically Give BBEdit Credit This option generates a lt META NAME generator CONTENT BBEdit 8 gt tag in the document indicating that you used BBEdit to create it Title Enter the HTML title for the document which can be different from the file name here This text will appear in the title bar of a browser s window when this document is opened Lang This option indicates the language this document is written in This information can be used by search engines and translation software to help Web users find pages in their own language Charset This option indicates the character set used by the document If you do not specify a character set the character set chosen in the user s browser will be used You can choose which character sets appear in this pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Base Enter the URL for this document s BASE tag The BASE tag indicates the actual location of the document on a server and all relative URLs specified in the document will be resolved by the browser relative to this location No BASE tag is created if you leave this field blank Meta Enter the META tag to be included at the top of the document here if any META tags can be used for client pull techniques for indicating search keywords and for a wide variety of other purposes Link If you want to use a LINK tag to specify a relationship between
348. media Box Padding Border Margins Layout Position Size amp Constraints Clipping Effects Background Font List Style Text Format see page 317 Markup gt Head Elements Base Link Meta Script Noscript Style Format Markup gt Block Elements Paragraph Paragraph Opt Div Horizontal Rule Horizontal Rule Opt Heading Cmd Ctl H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Address Blockquote Center Deleted Text Inserted Text Noscript Preformatted Markup gt Lists List Cmd Ctl L Unordered Ordered Definition Menu Directory List Item List Items Listing by Menu and Command Name 315 316 Markup gt Tables Table Cmd Ctl T Row Row Opt TD TD Opt TH TH Opt Caption Colgroup Col THead TFoot TBody Convert to Table Markup gt Forms Form Button Field Set Legend Input Label Select Option Group Option Text Area Markup gt Inline Anchor Cmd Ctl A Image Cmd Ctl I Applet Object Param Script Map Area Convert to Client Side Map Break Cmd Ctl B Break Font Cmd Ctl F Base Font Bidirectional Override Quotation Span Subscript Superscript Appendix A Command Reference Markup gt Phrase Elements Abbreviation Acronym Citation Computer Code Deleted Text Defined Term
349. ment Powerful We covered subpatterns earlier when discussing search patterns and discussed how the parentheses can be used to limit the scope of the alternation operator Another reason for employing subpatterns in your grep searches is to provide a powerful and flexible way to change or reuse found information as part of a search and replace operation If you do not use subpatterns you can still access the complete results of the search with the amp metacharacter However this precludes reorganizing the matched data as it is replaced Pattern Matches amp the entire matched pattern replacement only p the pattern p and remembers it search only Nay N2 ae the nth subpattern in the entire search pattern 99 BBEdit will now remember up to 99 backreferenced subpatterns Versions prior to 6 5 were limited to 9 subpatterns Writing Replacement Patterns 139 140 Using the Entire Matched Pattern The amp character is useful when you want to use the entire matched string as the basis of a replacement Suppose that in your text every instance of product names that begin with the company name ACME needs to end with a trademark symbol The following search pattern finds two word combinations that begin with ACME ACME A Za z The following replacement string adds the trademark symbol to the matched text am For example if you start with ACME Magnets ACME Anvils and ACME TNT are all premium prod
350. ments differently from TD elements You can specify the width and height of the cell the number of rows or columns it should span its vertical and horizontal alignment including alignment to a character and the offset to the first such character whether the text in the cell should be permitted to wrap the background color of the cell and the scope of the header information in this cell if any You can also specify the axes an abbreviated version of the cell s content and which header cells contain information about the current cell Many of the less familiar and infrequently used attributes have use in certain applications such as speech accessibility To provide maximum accessibility for tabular data we suggest you consult the HTML 4 specification Caption This tag specifies a caption for a table You may also optionally specify the caption s vertical alignment Colgroup Col These tags are used to define column and column groups Browsers that understand HTML 4 tables can for example be told to format a number of columns the same way or to place rules between column groups using this construction The contents of a column group may be one or more lt COL gt elements or none at all if the SPAN attribute is used You can specify the span of the column or group its desired width and its vertical and horizontal alignment Cells within this column group may inherit some or all of these attributes depending on the attributes of t
351. ments 234 scripts 334 tables 224 Tag Maker 211 212 templates 243 tool descriptions 211 translation 235 243 updating documents 233 utilities 234 variables 333 HTML Tools Preferences 179 HTML Web Site Preferences 181 human interface 3 I italic tag 231 image maps 229 IMG tag 227 include files 331 variables 333 see also templates indent placeholder 248 indenting 83 indexing HTML documents 236 Info button 50 Inline Elements submenu 227 inline placeholder 249 INPUT tag 226 INS tag 223 231 Insert Glossary Entry command 247 Insert pop up menu 50 inserted text 223 inserting files 72 inserting folder listings 72 inserting page breaks 73 inserting project listings 73 inserting text 72 insertion placeholder 249 insertion point 46 installing BBEdit 9 international text 24 25 31 81 188 invisible characters 64 invisible files 28 on FIP servers 34 Invisible Folders 92 Java applets 228 JavaScript 222 223 229 K KBD tag 231 Key Equivalent 318 keyboard shortcuts 305 310 323 in dialogs 4 205 L LABEL tag 226 language source code 64 Languages Preferences 183 language sensitive glossary 246 launching BBEdit 20 Leave Room for DragThing Docks 199 Leave Room for Palettes 199 LEGEND tag 226 LI tag 224 line breaks 23 83 line numbers on printouts 43 link checker 233 LINK tag 207 221 List Display Font 166 list items HTML 224 Lists submenu 224 longest match issue 138 lower case 82 Ma
352. n A hierarchical view with all non tag content removed e Don t Reorganize Allows normalizing of case quote and entity settings as well as encoding entities within attributes without otherwise changing the existing structure You can also have the Format command operate on the whole document or only the selection normalize the tags to uppercase or lowercase according to your settings in the HTML Tools preferences normalize quote marks around attributes and encode special characters or entities found in attributes If you choose the Format command with the ellipsis BBEdit displays a dialog allowing you to choose the formatting options If you choose the Format command without the ellipsis BBEdit uses the previous options Optimize This command reformats the document to use the absolute minimum of characters while remaining syntactically valid You will have difficulty editing your document in this format in fact if you do not have Soft Wrap turned on in the text options you might think most of your document has vanished because the command strips out all line breaks but rest assured that your document will appear the same in your browser as it always has Use one of the Format commands discussed above to put your page back into an editable format if you need to make changes This command also applies the various Cleaner tools automatically Translate This command allows you to translate plain text to HTML or
353. n Disk Browsers When you select a folder or disk in the file list pane BBEdit displays the names of all the files and folders contained in that folder or disk in the text pane When you click on a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file in the text pane if the file is of a type that BBEdit recognizes TEXT utxt or UTF8 Chapter 9 Browsers You can search the contents of the text pane with the Find command or with the Quick Search window and you can copy text from the text pane You cannot edit a file s contents in the text pane To edit a file use the Open button in the status bar to open it in an editing window Search Results Browsers If you selected the Batch Find option when performing a multi file search BBEdit displays every occurrence of the search string in the searched files in a search results browser eee Search Results 1 0 Error OWarnings 9 190 Notes Open 190 occurrences of BBEdit 7 found in 49 files fin File history shtml Line 53 lt li gt November 25 BBEdit 7 0 1 incorporates various interface refineme 4 File history shtml Line 54 lt li gt November 13 BBEdit 7 0 released adding CVS support multiple D gt news shtml 32 occurrences found Y reviews shtml 6 occurrences found File reviews shtml Line 43 lt li gt May 2003 IT Enquirer gives BBEdit 7 0 a rating of lt a href htt File reviews shtml Line 44 lt li gt Mar 2003 Macworld gives BBEdit 7 0 lt a
354. n in mathematics though there are exceptions Note that in C style function definitions empty parameter lists must be designated at a minimum by or whatever pair of delimiters applies whereas in Pascal style function definitions even the delimiters may be omitted Terminator for Prototypes 1 String Terminator for Prototypes 2 String Some languages allow for a function definition to appear without a body so that other functions that reference it know its interface without needing to know its implementation Sometimes a keyword is used as a substitute for the body in Pascal the keywords forward or external are used In C style languages the function definition is usually just closed off with a semicolon after the parameter list In either case if one of the specified strings is encountered before the string value of Open Statement Blocks described below the function definition is considered to be a bodiless prototype and doesn t appear in the function popup menu Appendix D Codeless Language Modules Key Value Type Open Statement Blocks String Close Statement Blocks String Function bodies are usually statement blocks that begin and end with something In Pascal it is literally the keywords begin and end In C and C style languages it is usually the characters and In both cases such statement block can usually be nested inside one another and the function scanner takes this
355. n of the list pane lets you specify the kinds of files you want BBEdit to list in the browser You can select All Readable Files meaning all types of files BBEdit recognizes that it can open or All Files which will display every file present in a folder regardless of type or kind You can also select from one of the more specific types listed below text files PICT files QuickTime movies QuickTime images BBEdit file groups and shell worksheets Directory Pop Up Menu This pop up menu always shows the currently selected folder By default when you open a disk browser it will display the contents of your home folder If you have opened any volume or folder within a volume the current folder will be shown here instead Disk Browsers 159 160 Tip Note You can use this menu to back out of any folder you are currently in to a higher level folder as you can in the Finder Recently Used Folders This pop up menu allows you to quickly go back to any recently visited folder You can also choose the Other option to get a folder selection dialog from which you can choose any folder on any currently mounted volume Open Button Clicking the Open button in the status bar opens the selected item or you can double click on the item If you open a folder BBEdit displays the contents of that folder in the file list pane If you click one or more files BBEdit opens those files into editing windows Alternatively yo
356. n the Open from or Save to dialogs and choosing Add from the Bookmarks pop up menu or by using the bookmark list in the FTP Settings preference panel The Passive FTP checkbox tells BBEdit to open a connection to the FTP server in passive mode in which the server will send BBEdit the number of the port to use for the session If this option is turned off BBEdit will specify the port number We recommend using passive mode when possible however not all servers or networks support it so if you encounter difficulties try turning this checkbox off The checkbox labeled Show Files Starting with tells BBEdit whether to display hidden or admin files in the chosen directory such as login forward and signature Starting a file name with a period is a Unix convention to make it invisible in most directory listings Once the connection is made you can use the Open button and the directory pop up menu to navigate through the directories just as you would navigate through the folders on your hard drive Click Delete to remove the file from the server You can use the Get Info button to reveal the size modification date and if applicable file system permissions of the selected file You can edit the file s name and click the Rename button to rename the file on the server you can also make changes to the permissions and click the Set button to change them Take care not to set the permissions such that the file becomes inaccessi
357. n the document status bar let you insert the contents of other files folder listings Macintosh Toolbox templates and page break characters Inserting File Contents The Insert File Contents command inserts the contents of one or more files into the document you are editing When you use this command BBEdit displays the Open dialog box and lets you select the files to insert To insert more than one file hold down the Shift key or Control key as you click the files BBEdit then inserts the files at the insertion point or replaces the selected text If you select more than one file the files are inserted in alphabetical order according to file name When you use the Insert File Contents command you can now select more than one file from the dialog box You can also use the File Contents command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar or you can drag a file s icon from the Finder into a BBEdit editing window to insert the contents of that file Inserting a Folder Listing The Insert Folder Listing command inserts a textual listing of a folder hierarchy When you use this command BBEdit displays a directory dialog box that lets you select a folder to insert BBEdit inserts the folder listing at the insertion point or replaces the selected text You can also use the Folder Listing command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a folder listing or you can drag a folder s icon from the Finder into a document to insert
358. n the on the left _pight This text doesn t go anywhere 2 9 no symbol selected B gt Now paste the text you previously cut back in eee Rectangular Selections R 2 f a E al ol Last Saved 03 24 bE zlim L Ga File Path Sa tions This This This text text text goes goes goes on the in the on the left middle right This text doesn t go anywhere 6 17 no symbol selected 4 eB gt Some word processors also provide support for rectangular selections which works a little differently than BBEdit s so you may wish to keep this difference in mind Typically when you copy a rectangular selection of text to the clipboard in these programs they handle that piece of text different than text copied from a line by line selection Then when you paste the text will be entered in a block even when you have not made a rectangular selection to paste into BBEdit does not do this Instead when you copy a rectangular selection to the clipboard BBEdit turns the selection into a series of individual lines which is why you must make a rectangular selection before pasting so BBEdit will know it should paste the text in block fashion Though this method does require an extra step it is more flexible because you can select a set of lines and then paste it as a block or vice versa Scrolling the View When holding down the Control key the arrow keys will scroll document windows
359. nction When you choose one of these commands BBEdit will select the name of the previous or next function in the document where a function is any item which appears on the function pop up menu If you anticipate using these commands often you may wish to assign them key equivalents by using the Set Menu Keys command from the BBEdit menu Find Differences Finds the differences between two files or all of the files contained in two folders See Comparing Text Files in Chapter 4 for more details Compare Two Front Documents Performs a Find Differences on the two frontmost text documents Compare Against Disk File Performs a Find Differences between the contents of the front document and the disk file for that same document This capability makes it easy to locate in progress changes to a document Apply to New Applies the currently selected difference to the New version of two files which are being compared See Comparing Text Files for more details Apply to Old Applies the currently selected difference to the Old version of two files which are being compared See Comparing Text Files for more details Compare Again Find the differences between two files using the same settings that were used in the last time you used the Find Differences command See Comparing Text Files for more details Find Definition Looks up definitions for the selected word using ctags information if available If
360. nctions in your source code However if BBEdit supports the language you are using this is usually unnecessary your functions will automatically appear in the Function pop up menu in the document window Setting Markers To set a marker 1 Select the text you want to mark 2 Choose the Set Marker command from the Mark pop up menu identified by the icon shown at left or Control click the selected text and choose Set Marker from the contextual menu BBEdit opens a sheet so that you can name the marker If you have selected a range of text the sheet will contain the first characters of the selection OKK index html AIEE Marker Name Welcome lt DOCTYPE I p lt html gt A lt head gt Cancel Coser p lt title SS lt meta lt meta FEtS SqUTU CSn tan EEO pe COMES ES FEZ EPH EM Us CHAPSE EST SOSOS TIN gt d lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and publishes bi X oO 5 3 Click Set to set the marker If you hold down the Option key as you choose Set Marker BBEdit sets the marker using the leading characters of the selected text as the name of the marker without displaying a dialog box Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Clearing Markers To clear a marker 1 Choose the Clear Markers command from the Mark pop up menu BBEdit displays the list of markers Clear Markers Markers to Clear Welcome 2 Select the marker you want to delete 3 Click Clear
361. nd 213 CODE tag 230 CodeWarrior 301 COL tag 225 COLGROUFP tag 225 colored text 65 in HTML documents 221 Command and Option keys in document windows 56 Command key 5 command keys assigning to menu items 309 in dialogs 4 205 in menus 3 listing by default key 318 listing by menu 311 shortcuts 323 Command Period 4 comments removing 235 Compare Again command 124 Compare Against Disk File 76 Compare Two Front Documents 74 comparing files 74 multiple files 76 Compile command 281 301 compile errors Compile Errors browser 281 complex patterns 135 context sensitive HTML 211 212 control characters 89 Convert to ASCII 84 Convert to Client Side Map command 229 Convert to Table command 225 346 Index Copy amp Append command 47 Copy command 4 47 creating documents 21 from templates 244 HTML documents 21 205 with clipboard 21 with selection 21 CSS 214 import 214 format 215 cursor movement 55 using arrow keys 56 custom markup 244 Cut amp Append command 47 cut and paste 46 Cut command 4 46 date placeholder 248 DD tag 224 defined term 231 definition list 224 DEL tag 223 231 Delete key 46 60 324 deleted text 223 deleting text 46 Detab command 90 development environments 277 configuring BBEdit for use with 278 source and header files 281 DEN tag 231 dialog keyboard shortcuts 4 205 dictionary AppleScript 270 Differences command 76 Differences Preferences 167 directory list HTML 224 Disassemble command 301
362. nd compare that to the current document Show Annotation When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will perform a cvs annotate on the file Show Revision History When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will show the file s revision history in a new display window Working with CVS 293 294 Show CVS Status When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will bring up the CVS Info dialog which displays the local path to the file and its current status and revision information CVS Info myData Projects WebSites www barebones com index html Status Up to date Working Revision 1 79 Repository Revision 1 79 Gord Add When you choose this command BBEdit will add the current file to the appropriate CVS repository if it is not already present Note that after using this command you must also perform a Commit in order to store the file s contents to the repository Remove When working with a file that is in a CVS repository you can choose this command to remove the file from the repository Note that after using this command you must also perform a Commit Parent Folder or a Commit Folder on the repository as a whole before the file will actually be removed Go to Previous Next Conflict When you perform a CVS update on one or more files if there are conflicts between your revisions and those in the re
363. nd of Document to have the Home and End keys perform these respective actions This is the default setting which reflects the standard key motion behavior in Macintosh applications Choose Move Cursor to Beginning and End of Current Line to have the Home and End keys perform these respective actions instead This option may be useful for those accustomed to Windows editing key behavior Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior These two checkboxes let you swap the meaning of the Option and Command keys when used with cursor navigation keys to move through a window s contents You can set this separately for horizontal and vertical cursor movement For details on using cursor navigation keys see Chapter 4 and Appendix B Use Emacs Key Bindings If turned on this option allows you to use the basic Emacs navigation keystrokes to move around in editing views It is not a full Emacs emulation mode rather it is more of a comfort blanket for individuals with Emacs key bindings hard wired into their muscle memory See Appendix B Editing Shortcuts for a list of the Emacs commands BBEdit supports If you turn on the Display Status Window option a small palette will appear when you type an Emacs shortcut indicating which command you have applied Editing Keyboard Preferences 171 172 Tip Tip Note Option on Japanese Keyboards This option controls whether typing Option yen on a Japanese keyboard generates a yen sym
364. nd strings used by the Un Comment command on the Text menu for a particular language choose it from the list click Options and edit its comment strings as desired The comment strings used for CSS are fixed and cannot be edited Suffix Mappings By default BBEdit offers a set of file suffix to language mappings which covers the common usages for each supported language To add a new suffix mapping 1 Click Add The Add Suffix dialog appears 2 Enter the suffix choose the associated language from the pop up menu and click a radio button to tell BBEdit whether this type of file is a source file an include file or neither 3 Click Add to save the new mapping You can use wildcards in the suffix to indicate single characters any number of characters or a single digit For example page html could map to a different language from html To change an existing suffix mapping 1 Select an item from the list 2 Click Change The Change Suffix dialog appears 3 Fill in the Change Suffix dialog with the appropriate suffix choose a language from the pop up menu and select a radio button to indicate whether this type of file is a source file an include file or neither To delete a suffix mapping 1 Select an item from the list 2 Click Remove To reset all suffix mappings to default settings 1 Click Reset All Software Update Preferences The Software Update preferences control the integrated
365. nds on either the active document or the selection in a results browser or disk browser Exceptions are as follows These commands are always available e Update Working Copy e Commit Working Copy e Show Working Copy Status e Open Log File These commands require either an open document or that you have selected a single item in a results browser or disk browser e Compare Revisions all variants e View Annotation e View Revision History e Go to Previous Conflict e Go to Next Conflict Revert Discards local changes to the active document s file reverting it back to BASE Has no effect if there are no local modifications to the file Update to Head Updates the active document s file to the HEAD revision merging local changes with the head revision and marking conflicts as necessary The first conflict in the file if present will be selected after the command successfully runs Revert amp Update to Head Discard local modifications before updating to HEAD 298 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Commit Commits the local file to the repository BBEdit will display a Subversion commit window into which you can enter your commit message e088 Subversion Commit Commit front document Cancel Commit 1 2 This line and those below will be ignored 3 4 M Users examp le Proj ects MyWebSi te index html 5 O As shown above this window will be prefilled with form text below the insertion
366. need to specify the document to be loaded when the area is clicked or mark the No HREF checkbox to cause clicks in the area to be ignored along with its Target frame if the page is being used in a frameset You can choose the desired map shape rectangular circular polygonal or the default URL using the Shape pop up menu and enter the desired coordinates of the shape ina comma separated list in the Coords field For rectangles this is in the order left top right bottom for circles it is in the order X Y radius For polygons this should be a comma separated list of coordinates in X Y form You can also set the tab index of the field for keyboard control on browsers that support it JavaScript onFocus and onBlur handlers are also supported Convert to Client Side Map This command converts the selected text which should be a server side image map file in NCSA server format to a client side image map You must specify a name for the converted imagemap Break This command enters a line break tag lt BR gt into the document If multiple lines are selected a line break tag will be inserted after each Font This tag selects the font size and or color for the selected text This tag is deprecated and should generally not be used stylesheets are a more flexible and more content oriented way of achieving this end Base Font This tag selects the default font size and or color for the text in this document Like lt FONTS gt t
367. ng 178 Close Current Tag 178 HTML Palette Preferences 0 cece cece 178 Button Height 179 Buttons on Main HTML Tools Palette 179 HTML Preview Preferences 0 00 cece cece e eee ee 179 When Previewing Files with Unsaved Changes 179 Web Browsers Available for Preview 179 HTML Tools Preferences 0 00 cece eee eee eee 179 HTML Updater 180 Syntax Checker Warnings 180 Link Checker Warnings 180 xii Table of Contents HTML Web Sites Preferences 00 c eee cece ences 181 Site Name 182 Web Server Name 182 Site Path on Server 182 Default Page Name 183 Local Site Root 183 Look for Templates and Include Files In 183 Use Local Preview Server 183 Preview Server URL 183 Languages Preferences 0 6 c cece 183 Installed Languages 183 Suffix Mappings 184 Software Update Preferences 00 cece eee eee eee 184 Source Control Preferences 0 185 Spelling Preferences 0 cece E eee eens 186 Built In 186 Word Services 186 Startup Preferences yri eosta m a e a RDA 186 Do Nothing 187 New Text Document 187 New Disk Browser 187 New FTP Browser 187 Open 187 Open from FTP SFTP Server 187 Text Colors Preferences 0 0 e eee nrnna rrn 187 Guide Contrast 187 Activating Syntax Coloring 188 How to Change Colors 188 Highlight Insertion Point 188 Text Encodings Pre
368. ng at the original placement of the insertion point or at the end of the original selection range Rectangular Selections By holding down the Option key as you drag or holding down the Shift and Option keys while clicking you can select all text lying within a specified rectangular area You can then perform all of the normal editing operations on this rectangular selection such as Cut Copy Paste or drag and drop as well as text transformations such as Change Case Shift Left Shift Right Entab Detab Increase Quote Level Decrease Quote Level Strip Quotes and Zap Gremlins Rectangular selection and soft wrapping are mutually incompatible When soft wrapping is enabled dragging the mouse to make a selection will always result in a normal non rectangular selection even if you hold down the Option key If you do the latter BBEdit will display an alert to inform you that you must turn off soft wrapping in order to make a rectangular selection Conversely if you have made a rectangular selection in a hard wrapped document the Soft Wrap Text option in the Text Options pop up menu or sheet will be disabled Working with Rectangular Selections Commonly while working with text you will be performing actions on a line by line basis for example when making a selection you will start by selecting the contents of one line before moving on to the next However if you need to deal with tabular data it can be useful to think in t
369. nge it in the footer document only new HTML files you create from the template will include your new address What you would really like to be able to do is update all the files you have already created to include the revised footer Since this capability is needed primarily in web site maintenance BBEdit lets you embed the include directive in an HTML comment An end bbinclude comment is also required The included text is inserted between the two comment markers but the comments themselves remain in place The comments are not shown in the browser This is known as a persistent include A persistent include looks like this lt bbinclude filename gt lt end bbinclude gt The first time a persistent include is processed it is handled much like a simple include However since the include directives remain in place and because they mark the beginning and end of the inserted text the Update tool can rip out the obsolete included text and replace it with the updated file Using persistent includes and the Update Folder or Update Site commands you can easily make these sorts of changes to entire sites in moments Any changes you have made to the included text after its initial inclusion will be discarded when the persistent include is updated even if you have not changed the include file 332 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Note Inline versus Block Includes By default BBEdit places included
370. ning lt style gt tag plus one additional tab stop for better readability There are two preference settings in the HTML Markup preference panel that control how the CSS formatter and markup tools place the braces for block markup e The New Line Before Block Start checkbox controls the placement of opening braces If the checkbox is on you get this style H1 color green If it s off you get H1 color green e The Put Simple Rules on One Line checkbox will format a single line of CSS like this H1 color green BBEdit s CSS markup tools listed below use the same rules for formatting as does the Format command HTML Tool Descriptions 215 Box The Box dialog allows you to specify a selector s width height and display properties Box Selector BODY i i Display Default RA g 3 Border The Border dialog allows you to edit the border width border color and border style properties for a selector The first row lets you specify values that apply to all four sides The color buttons let you select colors from your preferred Web color palette as specified in the HTML Colors preference panel the pop up menus next to them let you select colors by name The icons on the left side of the dialog represent from top to bottom the entire border top right bottom and left Border Selector BODY ytd 3
371. not need to know SGML to create Web pages but you may find that studying it improves your understanding of some HTML issues What is SGML and why should I use it by the SGML Project http www oasis open org cover exetwhat html SGML on the Web by Softquad Inc http www ncsa uiuc edu SDG Software Mosaic WebSGML html What You Need Before you start make sure you have the following available e A modern Web browser for previewing your pages We suggest having at least one version each of Microsoft Internet Explorer Netscape Navigator or Communicator Mozilla and OmniWeb available plus Safari always available as a standard OS provided application These are the most widely used browsers but they often do not display pages the same way e A general purpose FTP client such as Fetch Interarchy or Transmit While BBEdit does have built in FTP tools such dedicated applications are naturally more powerful and of course also allow you to upload things other than text files You will find them useful in creating and managing your web site e Access to a Web server either your own or someone else s where you will publish your pages on the Web Your Internet provider is a good place to start and can help you find the answers to questions about obtaining your own domain name setting up your own dedicated server and so on You will also want to be familiar with BBEdit s basic capabilities The other chapters in this manual wil
372. ns search mode Grep with selecting match end tell In previous versions the find command always operated on the front window Now you must explicitly specify the text to be searched either by specifying an explicit tell target or by supplying a searching in parameter So the following scripts are equivalent tell application BBEdit find BBEdit searching in document of text window 1 end tell and tell application BBEdit tell document of text window 1 find BBEdit end tell end tell Note that either the tell target or the searching in parameter must resolve to something that contains text As a shortcut you can specify a window and if the window contains text the search can proceed You can also specify a text object find Search Text searching in lines 3 thru 5 of document of text window 2 BBEdit s Scripting Model 271 272 Also unlike previous versions of BBEdit the defaults for parameters not specified in the find command are no longer controlled by the user interface that is the Find amp Replace dialog When performing a find BBEdit will return a record describing the results of the search This record contains a Boolean which indicates whether the search was successful a reference to the text matched by the search and the text string matched by the search Given the first example above the results might look like this after reformatting for clarity found true found object characters 5
373. nserting carriage returns the Hard Wrap command allows you to wrap text to any arbitrary width while also reflowing or indenting paragraphs If the current document contains a selection range Hard Wrap will affect only the selected text if there is no selection this command will affect the entire contents of the current document When you choose the Hard Wrap command BBEdit opens a sheet in the frontmost document 088 index html oO Break Lines at Paragraph Indentation i a O Page Guide Flush Left a a O Window Width O First Line 725 Character Width 72 O Reverse lt 4 v Paragraph Fill Relative to First Line lt t tst o lt r E SSS sgeti Don t Wrap Cancel wrap lt Jareb lt style Temen body color black background white atlink color blue 42 ym cte O j gt The controls in the left half of the sheet control the maximum width of lines after hard wrapping and whether wrapped lines should be consolidated to fill paragraphs to the specified width The controls in the right half determine how paragraphs should be indented Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit The Break Lines at buttons let you specify the wrapping margin If the Paragraph Fill option is selected BBEdit forms the lines into paragraphs before wrapping the lines An example is the best way to illustrate this option Suppose you start with this text
374. nt e If there is a selection this command transposes the characters at either end of the selection If you hold down the Option key as you choose this command Exchange Characters becomes Exchange Words Exchange Words behaves like Exchange Characters except that it acts on entire words rather than individual characters Change Case This command lets you change between uppercase and lowercase characters or capitalize word line or sentence starts When you choose the Change Case command the following sheet appears Change Case O ALL UPPER CASE Capitalize Words O all lower case 3 Capitalize sentences 3 Capitalize lines Don tChange Cancel Change The radio buttons let you choose how to change the case of the text The following table explains the function of each option in this dialog This button Changes the text like this ALL UPPER CASE Every character changes to uppercase all lower case Every character changes to lowercase 82 Chapter 5 Text Transformations Note This button Changes the text like this Capitalize Words The first character of every word changes to uppercase all other characters change to lowercase Capitalize sentences The first character of every sentence changes to uppercase all other characters change to lowercase Capitalize lines The first character of every line changes to uppercase other characters are unaffected Shift Left Shift
375. nter Replace String 122 Enter Search Pattern 122 Enter Replace Pattern 122 Replace 123 Replace All 123 Replace amp Find Again 123 Go to Line 123 Go to Center Line 123 Go to Previous Next Error 123 Go to Previous Next Placeholder 123 Go to Function Start End 123 Go to Previous Next Function 124 Find Differences 124 Compare Two Front Documents 124 Compare Against Disk File 124 Apply to New 124 Apply to Old 124 Compare Again 124 Find Definition 124 Find in Reference 124 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep 127 What Is Grep or Pattern Searching 060 eee nee 128 Recommended Books and Resources 000 000 eee aes 128 Table of Contents ix Writing Search Patterns 0 0 6 eens 129 Most Characters Match Themselves 129 Escaping Special Characters 129 Wildcards Match Types of Characters 130 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters 132 Matching Non Printing Characters 133 Other Special Character Classes 134 Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns 134 Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 135 Creating Subpatterns 136 Using Alternation 137 The Longest Match Issue 138 Non Greedy Quantifiers 138 Writing Replacement Patterns 0 0 0 e cece 139 Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful 139 Using the Entire Matched Pattern 140 Using Parts of the Matched P
376. nu You can also preview the page in all running browsers or in a text only format Any browser which runs in the Classic environment will be labeled Classic In addition to static previews BBEdit also supports live local previewing of web pages through the standard web server built into Mac OS X This capability enables you to easily preview pages which are built using server side technologies for example DHTML or PHP To enable live previewing for a defined web site project you must turn on the Use Local Preview Server option and enter an appropriate Site Path on Server in the HTML Web Sites preferences panel see page 183 You must also turn on the Personal Web Sharing option in the Sharing panel of the System Preferences to start the built in web server Once you have done so whenever you preview a file from that web site project using any of the Preview In commands BBEdit will have the selected browser load that file s corresponding page through the built in web server Printing Previewed Pages When a BBEdit preview window is frontmost you can use the Page Setup and Print commands to print a copy of the displayed page Note Due to limitations of the Safari rendering engine which BBEdit employs the format of the printed output may not exactly match the screen rendition Previewing from a File Vault protected Home Folder If your home folder is protected by FileVault you will have to change the permissions on yo
377. o apply BBEdit s Find Differences command to a pair of files or folders specified on the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install the bbdiff tool for you If you choose not to do so you can use the Install Command Line Tools button in the Tools preference panel to install the tool at a later time To invoke the Find Differences command from the command line type bbdiff filel file2 or bbdiff folderi folder2 where filel and file2 are the names of the files or folder1 and folder2 are the names of the folders to be compared You can also specify options for how the Find Differences command will be applied which correspond to those available in the dialog The complete command line syntax for the bbdiff tool is bbdiff lt options gt FILE1 FILE2 FOLDER1 FOLDER2 See the bbdiff tool s online man page man bbdiff for a complete description of the available switches and options Perl Python and Shell Scripting BBEdit provides robust integration with Perl Python and Unix shell scripting languages Using Unix Scripts BBEdit works directly with the native Perl and Python environments provided with Mac OS X and supports similar integration with shell scripts and any other Unix scripting language such as Ruby BBEdit s Unix shell scripting features are accessed via the Shebang menu Why Shebang Because executable Unix scri
378. o display a list of possible corrections Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Click Find Next to ignore this instance of the questioned word and continue checking Click Correct to replace this instance of the questioned word with the text in the adjacent text field Click Learn to add the questioned word to the active dictionary Click Forget to remove the questioned word from the active dictionary Using an External Spelling Checker You can use any external spelling checker that supports Apple s Word Services Suite To set up an external spelling checker 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu and select the Spelling panel 2 Select the Word Services option 3 Click the Choose button and select an external spell checker You can also drag the icon of the spelling checker from the Finder to the path box to the left of the Choose button To start the external spelling checker use the Check Spelling command from the Text Menu See the documentation for your spelling checker for details on how to use it once it has been invoked Spell Checking Documents 79 80 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit CHAPTER Text Transformations This chapter describes the range of powerful text transformation commands offered by BBEdit Beyond applying individual commands to the current document you can define and save Text Factories which are sequences of commands that can be applied to one or mo
379. o the document head to indicate that the document has been tidied BBEdit will not add such a meta element if one is already present Convert to XHTML This option instructs BBEdit to convert the current contents of the frontmost document to XHTML If no DOCTYPE or namespace was present BBEdit will set them as appropriate If a DOCTYPE or namespace was given it will checked for consistency with the content of the document and in the event of an inconsistency the corrected values will appear in the output Entities will be written using the named form and the original case of tags and attributes will be preserved Convert to XML This option instructs BBEdit to convert the current contents of the frontmost document to well formed XML Any entities not defined in XML 1 0 will be written as numeric entities to allow them to be parsed by a XML parser and the original case of tags and attributes will be preserved Preview The Preview commands provide various options for previewing your HTML documents in a web browser Preview in BBEdit Choosing this command will open a live content preview window within BBEdit which is linked to the document that was frontmost when you chose the command You can go back from the preview window to its corresponding source document by clicking on the document icon button in the preview window or by choosing the Show Document command from the Markup menu The preview window uses the same content rendering en
380. ock Elements v Inline Elements List v Table ndi Forms ii Phrase Bements v Font Style Heme v Frames Check Syntax Check Links Update Check v Update v Includes v Utilities Misc v Preview in BBEdit Preview v Preview all Browsers Buttons containing a grip strip a double vertical bar on the left side may be used via drag and drop For example the Image button may be dragged into a document window to display the Image tool dialog Subsequently the specified lt IMG gt tag is placed at the point where the button was dropped You can Command click a pop up menu to bypass the menu display the tool will perform the last used action again The second means of using the HTML Tools is from BBEdit s Markup menu This allows you to make your own choice between the drag and drop convenience of palettes and the less screen intensive menus either way you will still be able to access all of the HTML Tools capabilities Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Every HTML Tools function is available through an item on the Markup menu or one of its submenus Key equivalents if assigned are displayed next to the menu item You can change or assign keyboard shortcuts to menu commands by choosing Set Menu Keys from the BBEdit menu Many tool dialogs offer keyboard shortcuts for activating buttons Hold the Command key down when a dialog is open to see these shortcuts Most of the HTML Tools commands apply to th
381. of document Esc gt end of buffer Move insertion point to end of document Esc Q fill paragraph Hard Wrap with current settings Esc V scroll down Page up Esc W copy region as kill Copy Esc Y yank pop Paste Previous Clipboard Using universal argument The universal argument command Ctl U does not work quite the same way as it does in Emacs In BBEdit it is a simple repeat count For example if you type Ctl U then a 3 and then Ctl N the insertion point will move down three lines There is no visual feedback as you type the number and no way to backspace or otherwise edit the number If you make a mistake the best you can do is type Ctl G keyboard quit and start over Appendix B Editing Shortcuts APPENDIX Note Placeholders and Include Files This appendix lists the placeholder tokens used by BBEdit templates and include files and describes the use and capabilities of include files In this appendix Bla cehold 6S z5seed 2352 a i E aie ores E EA tp Moat a8 a sd ARERR R 327 Time Formats 330 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder 330 Include PUES sos cas ose Ee an aed A E ote ay ghee E EE Oa oleae 331 Simple Includes 331 Persistent Includes 332 Include Files with Variables 333 Including AppleScripts 334 Including Perl or Python Scripts 335 Other Include Notes 336 Placeholders Placeholders are processed under the following circumstances e When a new HTML
382. of the match foo bar matches any occurrence of foo that is not followed by bar Note that the apparently similar pattern f00 bar does not find an occurrence of bar that is preceded by something other than foo it finds any occurrence of bar whatsoever because the assertion foo is always true when the next three characters are bar A lookbehind assertion is needed to achieve this effect Positive lookbehind assertions start with lt and negative lookbehind assertions start with lt For example lt f00 bar does find an occurrence of bar that is not preceded by foo The contents of a lookbehind assertion are restricted such that all the strings it matches must have a fixed length However if there are several alternatives they do not all have to have the same fixed length Thus lt Martin Lewis Advanced Grep Topics 151 152 is permitted but lt dogs cats causes an error Branches that match different length strings are permitted only at the top level of a lookbehind assertion This is different compared with Perl 5 005 which requires all branches to match the same length of string An assertion such as lt ab c de is not permitted because its single top level branch can match two different lengths but it is acceptable if rewritten to use two top level branches lt abc abde The implementation of lookbehind a
383. of these commands will be applied to the active text selection in the frontmost document range or if there is no active selection to the entire contents of the document Hold down the Option key when selecting any command from the menu in order to quickly re invoke it with its last used option settings These short form commands are also available in the Set Menu Keys dialog so that you can set key equivalents for them 81 Balance This command locates the pair of parentheses braces brackets or smart curly quotes that surround the insertion point or the current selection If there are unmatched delimiters within this area BBEdit beeps You can also double click a delimiter character to invoke this command When syntax coloring is active for a document Balance including auto balance will ignore balance characters that appear inside strings or comments Exchange Characters This command once named Twiddle swaps two characters according to the following rules e If there is no selection and the insertion point is not at the beginning or end of a line or of the document this command transposes the two characters on either side of the insertion point e If the insertion point is at the beginning of a line or document this command transposes the two characters following the insertion point e If the insertion point is at the end of a line or document this command transposes the two characters before the insertion poi
384. of years in some cases The pattern D lt d gt matches an unlimited number of substrings that either consist of non digits or digits enclosed in lt gt followed by either or When it matches it runs quickly However if it is attempts to match this line of text aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa it takes a long time before reporting failure So long in fact that it will effectively freeze BBEdit This is not really a crash per se but left to run on its own it might take years before it finally fails We are not sure frankly because much like determining how many licks it takes to get to the center of a Tootsie Pop we do not feel like waiting long enough to find out The reason this takes so long to fail is because the string can be divided between the two repeats in a large number of ways and all have to be tried before the grep engine knows for certain that the pattern will not match The example used rather than a single character at the end because both PCRE and Perl have an optimization that allows for fast failure when a single character is used They remember the last single character that is required for a match and fail early if it is not present in the string If the pattern is changed to gt D lt d gt sequences of non digits cannot be broken and failure happens quickly Advanced Grep Topics 155 156 Recursive Patterns Consider the proble
385. ognize as text any files whose suffixes are not in Mac OS X s built in list of file suffix to file type mappings If no match is found in the Languages preferences BBEdit will next apply the Internet Config file name mappings See Chapter 10 Preferences for more details Translate Line Breaks When this option is selected BBEdit translates DOS or Unix line breaks when opening a file Otherwise BBEdit leaves the original line breaks untranslated The setting of this option is not preserved between uses of the Open command unlike the other options in the Open dialog Generally you will want to change this option only temporarily e g to read in a particular file To change the default setting of this option use the Translate Line Breaks option from the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window Read As When opening a file you can tell BBEdit what encoding to use by choosing it from this pop up menu Usually BBEdit will correctly auto detect the encoding but if it does not you can close the file and try again manually specifying the desired format Chapter 5 includes more information on encodings Open In When opening one or more files you can use the options on this pop up menu to override your default document opening preferences These options have the following effect e default BBEdit will open the selected documents according to your preference settings e Front Window BBEdit will open all of the se
386. ommands bool true If you have applied this change but want BBEdit to display the FTP SFTP menu commands again issue the following command in the Terminal and then quit and relaunch BBEdit defaults write com barebones bbedit FTP HideFTPMenuCommands bool false Add Temporary Files to the Open Recent Menu Ordinarily BBEdit will not add files to the Open Recent menu if they are located in the system temporary directories tmp or private tmp However if you routinely work with such files and want them to appear on the Open Recent menu you may issue the following Terminal command defaults write com barebones bbedit RememberRecentTempFiles bool true If you have applied this change but no longer want to have such files added to the Open Recent menu issue the following command in the Terminal defaults write com barebones bbedit RememberRecentTempFiles bool false CVS Perforce Subversion Tool Path Override If you need to control which cvs p4 or svn tool BBEdit should use you can do so by issuing any or all of the following Terminal commands For CVS defaults write com barebones bbedit CVS CVSToolPathOverride path to cvs binary For Perforce defaults write com barebones bbedit Perforce PerforceToolPathOverride path to p4 binary For Subversion defaults write com barebones bbedit Subversion SubversionToolPathOverride path to svn binary Chapter 10 Preferences CHAPTER IMPORTANT BBEdit HTML Tool
387. on Disk Browser 1 HTML Templates Library Application Support BBE Show All Readable Files E Directory HTML Templates E A Open kal baseURL incl FS Include Example Group ical Include Example tmpl A Simple Page tmpl ical Table Of Contents tmp p f g ICI a ca Last Saved 08 16 2004 18 23 33 ad ae L I File Path Library Application L Templates footer incl DONT_UPDATE lt hr noshade size 1 align left width 90 gt Created by USERNAME on LONGDATE lt br gt For more information please lt a href mailto IC_EMAIL gt send mail to I1C_EMAIL lt a gt Last Updated COMPDATE TJT no symbol selected B i The name and path of the directory currently being viewed are displayed in the title bar of the window The file list pane displays all the items in the current folder Click on a file in the file list pane to display its contents in the text pane or double click to open the file into a text window You can also click on a folder to display a listing of its contents in the text pane You can open a disk browser starting at any particular folder by dragging that folder onto BBEdit s icon in the Dock or the Finder Using Disk Browsers The controls in the disk browser let you open files and folders limit the kinds of files to show in the list pane and navigate through your disks and folders Show Pop Up Menu The pop up menu on the upper left sectio
388. on Find Selection reverse Enter Search String Enter Search Pattern Enter Replace String Enter Replace Pattern Replace Replace All Replace amp Find Again Go to Line Go to Line Go to Center Line Go to Previous Error Go to Next Error Go to Previous Placeholder Go to Next Placeholder Go to Function Start Go to Function End Go to Previous Function Go to Next Function Find Differences Compare Two Front Documents Compare Against Disk File Apply to New Apply to Old Compare Again Find Definition Find in Reference Tools installed plug ins Markup Cmd F Cmd Opt F Cmd G Cmd Shift G Cmd H or none Cmd Shift H Cmd E Cmd Shift E Cmd Opt E Cmd Shift Opt E Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd T Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Shift Cmd Opt up arrow Cmd Opt dn arrow Ctl Shift Ctl Cmd left arrow Cmd right arrow Cmd hyphen Cmd Shift hyphen none by default see following pages View Hide Status Bar Hide Navigation Bar Hide Navigation Bar Previous Document Next Document Open in Separate Window Get Info Reveal in Finder Open in Super Get Info Cmd Opt Cmd Opt Window ASCII Table Minimize Window Minimize All Windows Opt Bring All to Front Palettes see next page Workspace submenu Arrange Get Info Reveal in Finder Cycle Through Windows Cmd Exchange With Next Synchro Scrolling Open windows Glossary Plug In Tools Scripts Stationery Cmd 1 to
389. on type the desired key in the Set Key dialog and click OK Manually Sorting the Stationery By default items in the Stationery List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their names For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These naming conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Hex Dump for Files and Documents Choose the Hex Dump File command to generate a hex dump representation from a file that you choose You may also choose Hex Dump Front Document to generate a hex dump representation of the frontmost document as it exists in memory You should bear in mind that the result of performing the Hex Dump command against a disk file may differ from the result obtained by using it against an open document since when a document is open in memory even without any explicit edits being made line break translation and possibly character set encoding conversions have taken place Making Backups BBEdit can automatically make a backup copy of a document before saving it You can also manually take
390. on from the repository The local file s will be deleted immediately but you must perform a Commit to permanently delete them from the repository Go to Previous Next Conflict Selects the previous or next conflict in the file if any Open Log File Opens BBEdit s Subversion log file Library Logs BBEdit Subversion log Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior The following sections describe the range of commands which you can send to Metrowerks CodeWarrior For complete information on setting up and using BBEdit as an external editor with the CodeWarrior IDE please refer to the appropriate section of your CodeWarrior user manual Due to the continual change in CodeWarrior project format BBEdit does not currently offer support for browsing or performing Find Differences on such files Using the CodeWarrior Menu This section describes each of the commands in the CodeWarrior menu left CodeWarrior IDE Choose this item to switch to CodeWarrior If CodeWarrior is not running BBEdit launches it Compile This command tells CodeWarrior to compile the source file in the active window The active window must belong to a project that is open in the development environment Check Syntax This command tells the target development environment to check the syntax of the source file in the active window The active window must belong to a project that is open in the development envi
391. on in the BBEdit section of the Print sheet You can set default printing options in the Text Printing preferences panel Frame Printing Area When this option is selected BBEdit draws a frame around the printed text Print Line Numbers When this option is selected BBEdit prints line numbers along the left edge of the paper 1 Inch Gutter When this option is selected BBEdit leaves a one inch margin along the left edge of the paper Use this option if you usually put your pages in three ring binders Print Color Syntax When this option is selected BBEdit will print the document in color Print Rubber Stamp When this option is selected BBEdit prints a message in gray diagonally across the page Use the pop up menu to choose a font and type the message in the text field BBEdit chooses the right size font to print the message If your printer supports grayscale printing BBEdit prints the rubber stamp in gray otherwise it is printed in outline style This feature is not supported by all printer drivers Print Page Headers When this option is selected BBEdit prints the page number the name of the file and the time and date printed in a header at the top of each page Print Full Pathname When this option is selected BBEdit prints the full pathname of the file in the header Time Stamp The Time Stamp options let you choose whether the date that appears in the header is the date that the file was last modified or the date th
392. on on checkin messages and provides a better text composition environment CVS Menu Commands BBEdit s CVS menu contains the following commands Update to Head This command replaces a file with the latest revision of that file from the CVS repository To update the file in the front most window choose Update File from the CVS menu To update any file on disk hold down the Shift key while choosing Update File from the CVS menu and choose a file from the Open dialog that appears 290 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Note Update to Revision Choosing this command will bring up a dialog listing all available revisions for the current file Select any of these revisions to perform an update against the current file To preserve the previous functionality of this command if your file has local modifications BBEdit will ask whether you want to merge those mods with the selected revision as cvs update would normally do or discard them and fetch the selected revision as is which BBEdit formerly did Commit Choosing this command will bring up a CVSEDITOR window see below to permit you to enter checkin comments and then commits the current document into the repository If the document has unsaved changes it will be saved first You cannot commit a file without having first added it to the repository using the Add command 00e c vsl8Wwai zla lal all Last Saved 11 21 0
393. onal Notes 289 Working with CVS 0 6 c cece eee eee Quick Start for SSH accessed Repositories 290 Other Configurations 290 Performing Commit Operations 290 CVS Menu Commands 290 Working with Perforce 2006 Perforce Menu Commands 295 Working with Subversion 6 Configuring Subversion 297 Command Line Integration 297 Subversion Commands 298 Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior Using the CodeWarrior Menu 301 Working with Xcode 0 00 cece eee 302 Language Modules amp Plug Ins Installing Language Modules and Plug Ins Using Language Modules Codeless Language Modules 304 Language Module Compatibility 304 Overriding Existing Modules 305 Using Plug Ins enren e e 6 66 a EEEE KOS The Tools Menu and Palette 305 No Plug Ins Available 305 Setting Key Equivalents for Plug Ins 305 Supplied Plug Ins 306 Third Party Plug Ins 307 Plug In Compatibility 307 Developer Information 05 Command Reference Keyboard Shortcuts forCommands Assigning Keys to Menu Commands Available Key Combinations 310 Listing by Menu and Command Name Listing by Default Key Equivalent Table of Contents xvii Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Editing Shortcuts Mouse Commands
394. ons You can compare multiple files at once by selecting the Folders button in the Find Differences dialog BBEdit lists all the files and marks those that are different with a bullet You have the additional options described below List Identical Files Normally when you compare folders using the Find Differences command BBEdit presents you with three lists one list of the items that are in the first folder but not in the second folder another list of the items that are in the second folder but not in the first one and another list of the items that appear in both folders The list of items that appear in both folders generally displays a bullet next to items that are not identical For example if you have an archived mail folder that you are comparing against a current mail folder mailbox files that appear in both the old and new file will all be listed together however if there have been any changes to the contents of particular mailbox files the changed mailbox files will be listed with bullets next to them If you are comparing very large folders however the list of common items can be extremely long making the flagged items hard to find When you deselect the List Identical Files checkbox BBEdit will list only the flagged items the ones that have been changed in the list of items that appear in both folders Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note Flatten Hierarchies Normally BBEdit retains the hierarchy of the files
395. ontinue with the command that was selected or to cancel the operation in which case only the script is executed Scripts attached to BBEdit menu items must be stored in the Menu Scripts folder of BBEdit s application support folder These files should be compiled scripts not script applications Scripts are named to indicate which menu item they go with first the name of the menu or the submenu upon which the item is immediately located then a bullet e Option 8 character then the name of the menu item For example to attach a script to the Open from FIP SFTP Server menu item you would name it Filee Open from FTP SFTP Server while to attach a script to the New Document menu item you would name it New Text Document Some of BBEdit s menus have icons rather than names BBEdit uses the following names for its icon menus the Shebang menu CVS Compiler and Scripts Furthermore the New With Stationery submenu is named Stationery for purposes of attachability When you choose a menu item with an attached script BBEdit runs its MenuSelect handler if it has one passing it the menu name and item name of the selected menu item as parameters If no MenuSelect function is present BBEdit executes the script s run handler The MenuSelect handler can return a boolean value to indicate whether BBEdit should continue by performing the action usually invoked by the menu command
396. op of a text window which provides controls for selecting the active document Click the Previous or Next buttons to move to the previous or next document in the window or choose Previous Document Next Document from the View menu You can also choose a specific document from the adjacent pop up menu to make it frontmost index html G SEE Last Saved 08 22 04 gt 2 fi aa ka H File Path User ex html 4 tr Documents sui JOTO HTML 4 01 Transitional EN index html a ao http www w org TRAhtml4 loose dtd gt lt html gt 0 index shtml untitled text ica update_ctags py lt head gt lt title gt Welcome to Bare Bones Software lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset iso 8859 1 lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and pub lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mailsmi jr rege no symbol selected To hide the navigation bar choose Hide Navigation Bar in the View menu or turn off the Show Navigation Bar option in the Text Status Display preferences panel The Previous and Next buttons in the Navigation bar as well as the Previous Document Next Document commands now select documents in most recently used order rather than alphabetical order 52 Chapter 4 Editing Text wi
397. open documents browsers and other editing windows Choose a window s name from this menu or use its numbered Command key equivalent if applicable to bring that window to the front You can also use the Windows palette to quickly select any open window Window Menu 105 106 Chapter 6 Arranging Windows amp Palettes CHAPTER Searching This chapter describes BBEdit s powerful Find command now enhanced with a flexible file filtering mechanism It tells you how to search for text in the active window or within a set of files BBEdit can also do advanced pattern or grep searching To learn about pattern searching you should read this chapter first and then read Chapter 8 Searching with Grep In this chapter Basic Searching and Replacing 0 cece cece eect eens 108 Search Settings 109 Special Characters 111 Mullti File Searching siena E cece eect eee 111 Multi File Search Results 113 Specifying the Search Set 114 Multi File Search Options 116 File Filters 117 Mullti File Replacing sne pesi e e a ccc cee eee teens 120 Quick Search 121 Quick Search aene hers a a a ee A ode a oe E a A eS 121 Search Menu Reference 0 cc cece ee ee cece ee eee eee eee 121 Find 121 Quick Search 121 Find Again 122 Find Selection 122 Enter Search String 122 Enter Replace String 122 Replace All 123 Replace amp Find Again 123 Go to Line
398. opy from a repository that you access via SSH BBEdit should now work out of the box To get started you need only create a configuration in the Source Control preference panel for your CVS working copy by choosing the project folder checking the Use SSH checkbox and supplying your password which BBEdit will store in the system keychain Other Configurations If you use any other means than the above to access a CVS server you will need to configure your local CVS setup and repository access from the command line and perform an initial checkout How this configuration must be done varies from user to user and from organization to organization The below article on Apple s web site provides a general overview of using CVS for more details you should consult your local CVS guru as necessary Mac OS X Version Control with CVS http developer apple com internet macosx cvsoverview html Once you have configured CVS you must create a profile for each of your local CVS repositories for use with BBEdit via the Source Control preferences panel see page 185 After doing so you can proceed to work with files and folders in your local repository using the commands on BBEdit s CVS menu Performing Commit Operations All CVS commit operations now open a CVSEDITOR window to permit entry of checkin comments in place of the text fields previously presented in the command dialogs This lifts the previous 255 character restricti
399. ords vB Web Sites Cancel Personal Replace With B 5 Semeer O test bed M www barebones com POESIE cal Multi File Search Saved Search Sources a ER Users Shared doc_examples update_ctags py Other LOP One Folder Users Shared myexamplesite eer One Document Users Shared doc_examples index html One Web Site www barebones com C Options You can choose multiple sources for a multi file search and you can mix different types of sources Available sources include e specified individual files e the files in any selected or recently searched folder e open text documents e the files listed in any results browser such as a search results browser an HTML syntax errors browser or a compile errors browser Chapter 7 Searching e the files and folders contained in a file group e the files in a defined web site folder To add a file folder or other suitable item to the Sources drawer click Other in the Find amp Replace dialog and choose the item using the resulting selection sheet You can select multiple items to be added To designate any item in the drawer as a search source click on the box next to its name or double click on the name to add a checkmark To deselect a search source click the box next to its name or double click its name to turn off the checkmark BBEdit will display a summary of the selected sources in the search items box of the dialog Here are some common scenarios S
400. ort folder Be sure to name the alias Startup Items so that BBEdit can locate it Chapter 3 Working with Files Creating and Saving Documents To create a new text document or special purpose window within BBEdit pull down the File menu and open the New submenu Since BBEdit uses different kinds of documents for specific purposes you will see several options as follows New with Stationery Open Open Hidden Open from FTP SFTP Server Open File by Name Open Recent Reopen Using Encoding Close Window Close Document Close amp Delete Save Save As Save a Copy Save to FTP SFTP Server Save a Copy to FTP SFTP Server Revert Hex Dump File Hex Dump Front Window Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Print Text Document with selection with Clipboard 30 HTML Document 36N 380 Text Window EN 3D gt File Group Disk Browser XEN FTP SFTP Browser Shell Worksheet bin bash Shell Worksheet Text Factory TES CAES P The available commands and their effects are as follows Text Document Opens an empty text document e with selection Opens a new text document containing any text selected in the active document and having the same display font saving you the trouble of copying and pasting it e with Clipboard Opens a new text document and automatically pastes the contents of the current clipboard into
401. ost period delimited portion of the filename without the period For example whether the file is named test html or test foo html the filename extension is html FILENAME The file name of the current file GENERATOR Generator name used for Give BBEdit Credit in New HTML Document function e g BBEdit 8 GMTIME XXX The current GMT time formatted according to the parameters XXX see Time Formats below LANGUAGE The language specified in the New HTML Document command in format space lang en Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Placeholder Replaced By LINK The LINK tag as entered using the New HTML Document command LOCALPATH The full local path to the current file LOCALTIME XXX The current local time formatted according to the parameters XXX see Time Formats below LONGDATE Long Date format e g Sunday August 15 2004 MACHINE The machine name as specified in the Sharing section of the System Preferences META Any META tag entered using the New HTML Document command MODIFIEDDATE Modification date of the current file e g 15 Aug 04 MODIFIEDTIME Modification time of the current file in the format specified in the International section of the System Preferences MONTHDAYNUM Numeric value of the day of the month MONTHNUM Numeric value of the current month
402. oting Tag Attributes You may choose to always enclose tag attributes in quote marks or only to enclose attributes when the HTML standard would require it Quote Character You may choose whether BBEdit should use single or double quotes to enclose tag attributes when generating new tag attributes BBEdit will always preserve the quote characters in use when editing any existing attributes HTML Colors Preferences 177 178 XML HTML Markup Rules If you are working with a document that does not contain a DOCTYPE specification or an XML declaration you can specify whether BBEdit s HTML Tools should insert HTML or XML style tags by selecting the appropriate radio button CSS Markup Formatting The New Line Before Block Start checkbox controls how the CSS markup and formatting tools place the opening braces for block markup If the checkbox is on you get this style H1 color green If it is off you get H1 color green The Put Simple Rules on One Line checkbox will format a single line of CSS like this H1 color green The Allow Short Hex Color Notation checkbox controls whether hex color codes which can be expressed in a 3 digit collapsed form are inserted that way or are inserted in the normal 6 digit format Close Current Tag This option allows you to control how the Close Current Tag command inserts the appropriate closing tag e Context Sensitive places the closing tag according to v
403. ou are not limited to a single use of an operation for example you can apply multiple Replace All operations in a single factory e an Options button which is used to configure any settable options for the command If the command has no settable options this button is disabled e Add plus and Remove minus buttons Clicking the Remove button in an action will remove that action clicking the Add button will insert a new action after the selected action Hold down the Option key while clicking the Add button to create a new action which duplicates the action next to that button If there is only one action in the factory its Remove button is disabled e a summary line which describes the chosen command and any parameters y y It is up to you to make sure that your actions do not work at cross purposes For example it would not be useful to have an Educate Quotes operation followed immediately by a Straighten Quotes operation You can re order actions by clicking the line containing an action in any place not occupied by a button or pop up menu and dragging it to a new location Each operation available on an action s pop menu behaves similarly to its counterpart command on the Text menu When choosing and configuring operations you should keep the following differences in mind e Change Line Endings and Change Text Encoding will only affect the line endings and text encoding of the file that BBEdit wr
404. ou can change this arrangement with the Arrange command in the Window menu To change the default arrangement use the Differences preferences panel Comparing Text Files 75 76 Note The Differences window lists all the differences between the new file and the old file To see the differences in context click a line in the Differences window BBEdit scrolls and selects that spot in both files Use the Apply to New and Apply to Old buttons in the Differences window to make the new file look like the old file or vice versa After you use one of these buttons BBEdit italicizes the line in the Differences window to indicate that you have already applied that change If a Differences window is open and is the frontmost window the Compare Again command in the Search menu will recompare the two files being compared and refresh the list of differences accordingly The small button with the circular icon between the Apply to New and Apply to Old buttons performs the same function You can also compare the current clipboard contents against any file Just choose Clipboard from either the New or the Old pop up menu in the Find Differences dialog when the Clipboard window is open Compare Against Disk File You can use the Compare Against Disk File command to compare the contents of the front document against the disk file for that same document This capability makes it easy to locate in progress changes to a document Multi File Compare Opti
405. ou can redo each action in order by choosing that Redo command from the Edit menu or typing Command Shift Z However once you perform a new action you cannot redo any actions that you undid before you made that change There is also a Clear Undo History menu command Command Control Z which will clear the undo history for the current editing window This command can be useful if you have performed many operations on a file and wish to recover memory stored by Undo state information in the rare event that should become necessary You can also script this operation via the clear undo history scripting command see the scripting dictionary for details Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit IMPORTANT Window Anatomy BBEdit text windows have the same controls you are familiar with from other Macintosh applications for example text windows are resizable and zoomable and have both vertical and horizontal scroll bars Some additional elements which may be less familiar are the status bar the split bar the navigation bar and the documents drawer e608 index html j fez Last Saved 08 22 04 12 58 42 1b sisl e fr e a u B AREE File Path Users Shared index html 4o fi gt index html Documents KIDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC M3C OTD HTML 4 81 Transitional EN ad http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd gt untitled text 2 mi gt lt head gt lt titleWelcome to Bare Bones Software lt titl
406. ou may have chosen Note If you chose to modify your preferences by means of defaults write commands other than those documented here without explicit advice from Bare Bones Software technical support you take responsibility for any adverse effects To open the Preferences window choose the Preferences command from the BBEdit menu e800 BBEdit Preferences These settings control miscellaneous aspects of BBEdit s appearance and behavior Application Optional Mac OS Services Optional Application Services Browser Display QuickTime Translation Mi BBEdit Plug ins Contextual Menus Don t Translate PDFs i Text Factories Menu Differences Documents F QuickTime Playback Documents Drawer M Always Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu Editing General Editing Keyboard C Allow Menu Key Equivalents to Autorepeat Editor Defaults When Dragging Show File Filters File Search Outline Only FTP Settings O Translucent Image Glossary HTML Colors List Display Font Lucida Grande 11 Set HTML Markup HTML Palette Verify Open Files After HTML Preview ww Activating BBEdit C Running a BBEdit Plug In HTML Tools M Running an OSA Script _ Running a Unix Script HTML Web Sites Languages b a Software Update Rememberthe 12 most recently used items A Activating a Window The small text area at the top left of the Preferences window gives you a brief description of the contents of the currently dis
407. ou should get used to thinking in Let s take a look at another one the prosaic get Select get from BBEdit s dictionary listing and take a quick look at its class definition You use get to retrieve information from an application You must specify a reference to the object you want to retrieve and you can specify a coercion a condition that tells AppleScript to treat one type of data as if it were another by adding the as clause However after that is the Result line which we have not seen before This line tells you what type of value the command returns This value is placed in the AppleScript system variable called the result Get can retrieve any kind of object so it can return anything as indicated here Other events might return a specific type of result or none at all Save did not have a Result line in its dictionary entry which means it does not return a result AppleScript Overview 257 Classes and the Class Hierarchy Let s look now at a typical class definition window will do nicely It is in the BBEdit Suite toward the bottom e080 BBEdit asdictionary picture window 4 Elements a plugin_info_wind P text by numeric index Properties preferences_wind recent file recent folder results browser search results bre lt inheritance gt item bounds bounding rectangle the boundary rec doseable boolean r o v have a Close box collapsed boolean index integer the number of the window t
408. ou write AppleScripts such as the standard Script Editor the English like equivalent for each Apple Event and each event s parameters Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit It is important to note that because Apple Events were originally designed to allow applications to communicate with each other AppleScripts automatically inherit the ability to talk to more than one application It is common in the publishing industry for instance to write scripts that obtain product information from a FileMaker Pro database and insert it into a Quark XPress file This integration is one of the Macintosh s primary strengths You use AppleScript s tell verb to indicate which application you are talking to If you are only sending one command you can write it on one line like this tell application BBEdit to count text documents If you are sending several commands to the same application it is more convenient to write it this way tell application BBEdit count text documents repeat with x from 1 to the result save text document x end repeat end tell The Script Editor automatically indents the lines inside the tell block for you so you can more easily follow the organization of the script Reading an AppleScript Dictionary To display an application s AppleScript dictionary you can simply drag that application onto the Script Editor icon or use the Script Editor s Open Dictionary command As we noted earlier all scriptable application
409. p Front Window Page Setup New gt New gt New with Stationery gt New with Stationery gt Open 0 Open 0 Open Hidden Open Hidden Open from FTP SFTP Server O Open from FTP SFTP Server TO Open File by Name 3D Open Recent gt Open Recent gt Close Window TEW Close All Windows Xt3w Close Document W Close All Documents XW Save S Save All KES Save As Save a Copy Save a Copy Save to FTP SFTP Server TES Save to FTP SFTP Server TES Save a Copy to FTP SFTP Server CdS Hex Dump File Hex Dump Front Window Page Setup Print 3P Print All KEP You can use the Shift Option or Control keys when you choose an item from a menu or when you use the Command key equivalents Bypassing Options Dialogs You may have noticed that commands that require additional settings to be made before they are performed appear on the menu with ellipses after their names To bypass this step and use the command with its most recent settings hold down the Option key while selecting the menu item For example Zap Gremlins in the Text menu becomes Zap Gremlins when the Option key is pressed and when chosen will zap gremlins in the frontmost text document using the current settings Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands Many of BBEdit s commands have keyboard shortcuts BBEdit lets you reassign the shortcuts for any menu item glossary entry plug in or script to suit your own way of working
410. page breaks See Special Characters later in this section BBEdit remembers the last 12 search terms you used since launching the application If you are searching for something you recently searched for you can choose it from the pop up menu above the Search For field Click the button to enter the document selection in the Search For field 3 Type the replace string if any in the Replace With text field BBEdit also remembers the last 12 replace terms you used since launching the application These appear in the pop up menu above the Replace With field Click the button to enter the document selection in the Replace With field 4 Mark any checkboxes in the middle part of the dialog box that you want to apply to your search For more info about these options see Search Settings later in this section 108 Chapter 7 Searching Note Note 5 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box The size of both the search and replace strings is limited only by available memory However the memory requirements for searching multi byte text files are generally at least double those for single byte text The following table explains what each of the buttons does This button Does this ST ET a a Find Finds the first occurrence of the text in the active window Shortcut Cmd F Find All Finds all the occurrences of the search string and displays the results in a search results window Shor
411. pattern of 0x will select the entire character code for easy modification or deletion Replace with lt character gt This option replaces the gremlin with the character you type in the text field next to the radio button It is useful for identifying the location of gremlins but not their value The replacement character can be specified not only as any typeable character but also by using any of the special characters defined for text searches including hex escapes See Special Characters on page 111 In some cases this option could be counterproductive since hex escapes xNN can themselves be used to insert unprintable characters Entab This command displays a sheet which allows you to set the number of consecutive space characters which should be converted into tabs This transformation is useful when you are copying content from many online sources which use spaces to line up columns of text If you do not use a monospaced font columns usually will not line up unless you entab the text first Detab This command displays a sheet which allows you to set the number of consecutive spaces which should replace each tab This command is useful when you are preparing text for use in a program which has no concept of tabs as column separators for email transmission and similar purposes Normalize Line Endings This command converts a document containing mixed line endings to have a uniform set of line endings
412. play the Documents Drawer always only if the window contains two or more documents or never Open the Documents Drawer on the You can specify whether the Documents Drawer should be displayed on the left hand or right hand side of text windows by default Next Document and Previous Document Navigate in You can specify whether the Next Document and Previous Document commands should select documents according to their display order or in order of most recent use Allow Documents Drawer to Acquire Keyboard Focus Choose this option to prevent the Documents Drawer from also gaining keyboard focus when you click in it When this option is on you will not be able to use typeahead or the arrow keys to move among open documents in the drawer Editing General Preferences The Editing General preferences control the behavior of various general editing behaviors Allow Single Click Line Selection If the checkbox is turned on clicking in the left margin of an editing window selects an entire line If you have line numbers displayed via the Show Line Numbers option in the Text Status Display preference panel you can click in the line number as well The pointer changes to a right arrow when it is in the left margin Click and drag to select multiple lines Double click to select an entire paragraph double click and drag to select a range of paragraphs If this option is off clicking in the left margin moves the insertion point to th
413. played preference panel The list along the left side of the window lets you select the preference panel to use BBEdit s Preferences window is non modal you can leave it open and change preference settings while you work or close it at any time by clicking its close button or by choosing Close Window from the File menu 164 Chapter 10 Preferences Any changes you make to preference settings will be stored immediately though not every setting will take effect immediately Some options are only checked or applied at application launch as mentioned in their descriptions The following sections describe each of the preference panels in detail Application Preferences The Application preferences control which application and system services BBEdit uses when open files are verified and various other global settings Optional Mac OS Services QuickTime Translation If you mark this checkbox and have a recent version of QuickTime installed BBEdit will ask QuickTime if it recognizes any files that BBEdit does not If QuickTime recognizes the file as one it can display BBEdit will open it for viewing otherwise the file will be opened as raw text This option is on by default Don t Translate PDFs If the supplemental option Don t Translate PDFs is checked BBEdit will not attempt to apply QuickTime translation to PDF files This option is on by default QuickTime Playback This checkbox controls whether BBEdit open
414. pository CVS will add markers in the affected file s at the appropriate points If you update a single file and one or more conflicts result BBEdit will automatically jump to the first conflict and you can use these commands to move to other instances if any exist If you update multiple files and conflicts result you can choose either of these commands to move between instances of conflicts in a file If there are no conflicts in the current file BBEdit will beep when you select either command Export Project This command creates a copy of a project at the selected location When you choose this command BBEdit displays a dialog that lets you choose a CVS project and then displays a Save dialog that lets you choose the location in which to create a copy of it Open Log File Opens the CVS log file or brings it to the front if it is already open This file is stored in the Log files folder within the BBEdit Preferences folder Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Working with Perforce BBEdit features integrated support for the Perforce source control system http www perforce com In order to enable BBEdit s Perforce integration you must have the p4 command line tool installed and must turn on the Perforce option in the Tools preference panel and quit and relaunch BBEdit Next you should configure your local Perforce repositories via the Source Control preferences panel see page 185
415. pts traditionally start with the two character sequence Some people pronounce these two characters hash bang others say sharp bang but the most common pronunciation is simply shebang Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools The shebang line is the first line of the script and includes a Unix style path to the interpreter for the language for example usr bin perl or usr local bin python While BBEdit does not entirely depend upon the accuracy of the shebang line for Perl and Python files if you have the correct language mapping set for the file contents it is a good practice for these and necessary for any other shell scripts that the shebang line given must be a correct full path to the executable Language Resources Perl is an acronym for Practical Extraction and Report Language or alternatively Pathologically Eclectic Rubbish Lister and was developed by Larry Wall If you are interested in learning Perl the quintessential Perl references are Learning Perl 3rd Edition by Randal L Schwartz amp Tom Phoenix O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 596 00132 0 Programming Perl 3rd Edition by Larry Wall Tom Christiansen Jon Orwant O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 0 596 00027 8 The following are excellent Internet resources for the Macintosh implementation of Perl and Perl in general Perl com from O Reilly and Associates http www per1 com Perl Ma
416. r will be loaded You should move or copy over any menu scripts that you wish to preserve Plug Ins Global Local The Plug Ins folder contains third party code modules that add features to BBEdit Each plug in adds a command to BBEdit s Tools menu and you can run the plug in by choosing its name from that menu To install a plug in drag and drop it directly onto the BBEdit application icon in the Finder BBEdit will open if necessary and present an alert asking you to confirm that you want to install the plug in If there is already a plug in with the same name in your Plug Ins folder you will be further prompted whether to replace it with the version you are dragging If you confirm the operation the plug in you dragged will be placed at the top level of your Plug Ins folder and the one it replaced will be moved to the Trash You will need to quit and relaunch the BBEdit application in order to use the newly installed plug in Various plug ins and information are available from our web site as well as the BBEdit Plug In SDK if you are interested in writing your own BBEdit plug ins If you have any compatible third party plug ins that you wish to use with BBEdit 8 you may move or copy them into the Plug Ins folder You should not copy any of the factory supplied plug ins from previous versions to use with BBEdit 8 and BBEdit will warn you if it encounters any such items To determine whether a plug in was factory supplied se
417. r case specifier u U 1 or E E End case transformation opened by U or L Writing Replacement Patterns 141 142 Here are some examples to illustrate how case transformations can be used Given some text mumbo jumbo and the search pattern w W w the following replace patterns will produce the following output U I E 2 3 MUMBO jumbo u 1 2 u 3 Mumbo Jumbo Note that case transformations also affect literal strings in the replace pattern U 1 2f red MUMBO FRED 1MUMBLE 2 3 mUMBLE jumbo Finally note that E is not necessary to close off a modifier if another modifier appears before an E is encountered that modifier will take effect immediately Ufred uwilma FRED Wilma Examples The example patterns in this section describe some common character classes and shortcuts used for constructing grep patterns and addresses some common tasks that you might find useful in your work Matching Identifiers One of the most common things you will use grep patterns for is to find and modify identifiers such as variables in computer source code or object names in HTML source documents To match an arbitrary identifier in most programming languages you might use this search pattern a z a zA Z0 9 This pattern matches any sequence that begins with a lowercase letter and is followed by zero or more alphanumeric characters If other characters are allowed in the identifier add them to the pattern T
418. r expression based grep search and replace multi file search sophisticated text transformations intelligent text coloring and other features not usually found or missed in word processors BBEdit also has features that make it easier to edit specific kinds of text such as source files for programming languages and HTML Hypertext Markup Language files for the World Wide Web In fact since the rise of the Web BBEdit has been the tool of choice for Macintosh Web designers who need more flexibility than visual Web authoring tools can provide How Can I Use BBEdit Use BBEdit any time you need to create or edit Web pages source files or text documents of any kind Whether you need to find or change all the occurrences of some text in a set of files or modify or reformat large text files of any sort or quickly tweak a Web page BBEdit is the right tool for the job Development Environments BBEdit found its initial following among the Macintosh programming community with its core editing and development oriented tools Although we have added countless other features to BBEdit since its first incarnation its source code editing capabilities are now stronger than ever In addition to offering syntax coloring and function browsing for many different languages BBEdit integrates with the Xcode and CodeWarrior development environments supports direct use of Perl Python or any other Unix scripting environment and allows acc
419. r in how they represent field sets visually but some browsers may draw a rectangle around the related controls as in dialog boxes In this case the Align attribute of the LEGEND tag can be used to set the alignment of the legend relative to the visual representation of the field set Browsers that do not support these tags will ignore them and the contents of the LEGEND container will be displayed as any other text Input This tag defines an input field which can be a text or password input various types of buttons and even files images or hidden fields Specify the name and the default value of these fields and if applicable their size maximum length tab index access key and disabled or read only attributes Disabled Read Only Tab Index and Access Key are HTML 4 features and may not be supported by all popular browsers You may also specify handlers for the JavaScript onFocus onBlur onSelect and onChange handlers Label HTML 4 allows you to specify that text next to a control is a Label and in browsers that understand the tag clicking the label associated with a button activates the corresponding control BBEdit lets you create a lt LABEL gt tag specifying the name of the control it should be associated with an optional keyboard equivalent to activate the control and onFocus and onBlur JavaScript handlers Select This tag defines a scrolling list or pop up menu Enter the name of the control the number of items to
420. r plug in the lt PARAM gt tag can be used between the lt OBJECT gt and lt OBJECT gt or lt APPLET gt and lt APPLET gt tags Each parameter to be passed to the object requires a separate lt PARAM tag You must specify the name and value of each parameter the actual parameter names and values required will vary depending on the object being embedded Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Script This tag begins a section of client side script code by default JavaScript although some browsers support other scripting languages You can choose to execute a script contained in an external file by entering a URL in the Source field click File to choose the file using an Open dialog You can also enter values for the TYPE of script the script LANGUAGE it is written in and the character set or CHARSET of the script Mark the DEFER checkbox to add a DEFER attribute You can choose which character sets appear in the Charset pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Map This tag embeds a client side image map in the document You must enter a name by which the map can be referenced in the Use Map attribute of the Image tag Individual clickable areas within the image map are provided by the lt AREA gt tags inserted between the lt MAP gt and lt MAP gt tags Area This tag defines a clickable area within a client side image map Each clickable area requires a separate lt AREA gt tag You will
421. r to Script s Folder Output to Output Options New Window Clear Before Writing Unix Output File Save After Writing Hello World pl log Selection Only Check this box to execute only the selected text in the frontmost document window Save Before Running Check this box to save the source file before running the script Output to Choose to display output in a new window to direct it to the Unix Output file or to write it to a file in BBEdit s Logs folder Library Logs BBEdit Use Debugger Check this box to run Perl or Python scripts in the interpreter s debugger Run in Terminal This command runs the script in a new Terminal window Chdir to Script s Folder Check this box to set the working directory to the folder that contains the script before running it Output Options Mark these checkboxes to clear the output file before writing and to save it after writing respectively Run in Terminal This command will run the script in a new Terminal window regardless of the settings in the Run Perl Script dialog Run in Debugger Runs the script in the interpreter s debugger regardless of whether the Use Debugger option is set for the Run command also any output options set in the Run command will be ignored The Run in Debugger command is only available for Perl and Python Perl Python and Shell Scripting 287 288 Note Run File Runs a script from an arbitrary file rather than from
422. ramework against older versions of BBEdit and suggest how you can modify your existing scripts for compatibility Because BBEdit s scripting dictionary changes whenever we add features it should be considered the definitive reference in any situation where it and this document differ We have found Script Debugger from Late Night Software to be an excellent tool for browsing and navigating BBEdit s scripting dictionary as well as for preparing and testing scripts http www latenightsw com Script Compatibility BBEdit s scripting model has changed significantly from that used in versions prior to 6 0 Consequently scripts prepared for such versions may need to be revised in order to work properly Further with the addition of support for multiple documents per window in BBEdit 8 you may need to revise other existing scripts Distinguishing Between Script Elements Because different applications handle different types of data you should be aware that the actual data or the interface items referred to by a particular name may not be consistent from application to application The following sections describe how several common elements are handled in BBEdit Applying Commands toText Since BBEdit supports opening multiple documents within a single text window all scripting commands which operate on text must specifically target the text contents of a window or a document within that window rather than the window itself For
423. rch Enter Search Pattern Cmd Shift G Search Find Again reverse Cmd Shift H Search Find Selection reverse Cmd Shift I CodeWarrior Set Breakpoint 320 Appendix A Command Reference Key Command Cmd Shift J Search Go to Center Line Cmd Shift N File New Text Window Cmd Shift O File Open from FTP SFTP Server Cmd Shift P File Print One Copy Cmd Shift S File Save to FTP Server Cmd Shift V Edit Paste Previous Clipboard Cmd Shift W File Close amp Delete Cmd Shift X Edit Cut amp Append Cmd Shift Z Edit Redo Cmd Shift Search Find in Reference Cmd Shift Text Show Spelling Panel Cmd Shift Text Shift Left One Space Cmd Shift Text Shift Right One Space Ctl Search Go to Next Placeholder Ctl Shift Search Go to Previous Placeholder Ctl Tab Switch to Header Source File Ctl Edit Previous Clipboard Ctl Edit Next Clipboard Listing by Default Key Equivalent 321 322 Appendix A Command Reference APPENDIX Editing Shortcuts In BBEdit you can perform many editing functions including word selection or deletion directly from the keyboard Chapter 4 contains complete details on BBEdit s text editing features This appendix provides a quick reference to available keyboard and mouse shortcuts for word selection and deletion In this appendix Mouse Commands 6 eee e eee e eee eee ene ee ence ene 323 Arrow and Delete
424. re fields S to build the definitions menu For our own source code we also include class members a and function implementations m in addition to the required fields e BBEdit looks for tags files starting in the same folder as the current document and crawls upwards from there Note that the tmp portion of the Python script is included to allow you to merge tags files from different source trees e If the ctags tool is invoked without a path it appears to ignore the tag relative directive so you should add the current directory s path as indicated by adding pwd to the command In order to keep your tags up to date we recommend incorporating a suitable script into your build system or employing some other mechanism such as a cron task Refer to the Xcode documentation for information on creating build phases that run shell scripts Similar solutions should be possible for CodeWarrior and other IDEs Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments 279 280 For example we use the below Python script to update the tags for our source code whenever a build is started in Xcode Since ctags is efficient this script only takes a few seconds to run and will update the tags even if one or more files does not compile usr bin python import os import sys TAGS_TEMP_FILE tmp tags bbeditProjectDir os environ SRCROOT bbeditTagsFile os path join bbeditProjectDir tags sharedLibsDir os path dirnam
425. re documents In this chapter Text Menu Commands 6 6c cece eee eee een een eens 81 Balance 82 Exchange Characters 82 Change Case 82 Shift Left Shift Right 83 Un Comment Selection 83 Hard Wrap 83 Add Line Breaks 83 Remove Line Breaks 83 Apply Text Factory 84 Apply Text Factory lt recent gt 84 Convert to ASCII 84 Educate Quotes 84 Straighten Quotes 84 e Add Remove Line Numbers 84 Prefix Suffix Lines 85 Sort Lines 85 Process Duplicate Lines 86 Process Lines Containing 87 Rewrap Quoted Text 88 Increase and Decrease Quote Level 88 Strip Quotes 89 Zap Gremlins 89 Entab 90 Detab 90 Normalize Line Endings 90 Text FAChOMeS ii ya8 cig Sie be os oolong ied waded ar Ewen te aie EE AAEE E A Aue ens 91 Creating and Configuring Text Factories 91 Applying a Text Factory 94 Automator ACHOS sga alienas wid eases E Mr ta a ak oe ee eR ee wale 94 Using BBEdit with Automator 94 Available Actions 96 Text Menu Commands BBEdit provides a variety of commands which you can use to transform text in different and useful ways Most of these commands are situated in the Text menu and described in this section You can also use BBEdit s search and replace capabilities or additional plug in tools to transform text each of these topics is covered in a separate chapter Unless otherwise specified each
426. rences Set Menu Keys Enter Serial Number Services Hide BBEdit Hide Others Show All Quit BBEdit File New New With Stationery Open Open Hidden Open from FTP SFTP Server Open File by Name Reveal Selection Open Recent Reopen Using Encoding Close Window Close All Windows Close Document Close All Documents Close amp Delete Save Save All Save As Save As Selection Save a Copy Save to FTPS FTP Server Save a Copy to FTP Server Revert Hex Dump File Hex Dump Front Document Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Print Print All Print One Copy Cmd submenu none or Cmd H Cmd Q see next column submenu Cmd O Cmd Shift O Cmd D Cmd Opt D submenu submenu Cmd Shift W Cmd Opt W Cmd W Cmd Opt Shift W Cmd Shift W Cmd S Cmd Opt S Opt Cmd Shift S Cmd Opt Shift S Cmd P Cmd Opt P Cmd Shift P File gt New Text Document with selection with Clipboard HTML Document Text Window File Group Disk Browser FTP SFTP Browser Shell Worksheet lt default gt Shell Worksheet Text Factory Edit Undo Redo Clear Undo History Cut Cut amp Append Copy Copy amp Append Paste Paste Previous Clipboard Paste Column Clear Select All Select None Select Line Select Paragraph Insert Auto Complete Glossary Insert Glossary Entry Show Clipboard Previous Clipboard Next Clipboard
427. riod of time Upon expiration of this trial period you must purchase the product and receive a serial number in order to continue using it To activate the demo you may either enter your product serial number into the dialog that BBEdit displays at launch or you may choose the Enter Serial Number command from the BBEdit menu to bring up the product activation dialog at any time Enter your BBEdit serial number or click Demo to use BBEdit for a limited evaluation period Demo Quit O Basic Installation 11 IMPORTANT 12 Note BBEdit s Application Support Folders BBEdit makes use of an application support folder to store and organize a variety of items that add functionality such as glossary items plug in tools scripts and more Such items are kept in subfolders according to their purpose described below BBEdit 8 does not make use of the BBEdit Support folder that previous versions employed nor can you can place the application support folder alongside BBEdit itself Instead BBEdit s application support folder must be present in either or both of the following locations e Global items available to all users Library Application Support BBEdit e Local user specific items Library Application Support BBEdit In the above path to the local application support folder is the customary Unix shorthand to indicate the user s home directory If written out as a full path this would norm
428. rk on text acquired from other sources in the workflow If you only need to apply BBEdit s text transformations to files or sets of files you would be better served by using a Text Factory Automator Actions 95 Available Actions Add Line Numbers This action will prepend a line number to each line processed Input Text Result Text Text with leading line numbers added Related Actions Remove Line Numbers Add Prefix This action will prepend the supplied string to each line processed Input Text Result Text Text with the specified string prepended to each line Related Actions Add Suffix Remove Suffix Remove Prefix Add Suffix This action will append the supplied string to each line processed Input Text Result Text Text with the specified string prepended to each line Related Actions Remove Suffix Remove Prefix Change Case This action will change the case of the provided text according to the specified rules Input Text Result Text Text with the case transformation applied Convert Spaces to Tabs This action will convert each run of N space characters into a tab character Input Text Result Text Text with runs of space characters converted to tabs Convert Tabs to Spaces This action will convert each tab character into the specified number of spaces Input Text Result Text Text with tab characters converted to runs of spaces Convert to ASCII This action will convert t
429. rming a syntax check This can be useful for purposes such as checking documents which must from necessity incorporate non standard markup to support old browsers or which contain customized server constructs To mark a section enclose it with bbpragma ignore_errors directives as follows lt bbpragma ignore_errors on gt ignored markup lt bbpragma ignore_errors off gt Note that when you check a document containing ignored sections BBEdit s syntax parser still runs through the markup contained in these sections it simply does not report errors encountered there You should thus be mindful of the following conditions e The presence of fragmentary tags or similarly malformed content in an ignored section can cause a syntax check to fail e An error may still be generated for an unclosed element which resides within an ignored section if its lack of closure results in an error cascade which continues beyond that section e If you terminate a document inside of an ignored section an error will be generated Using the HTML Tools 209 Previewing Pages IMPORTANT BBEdit s Preview commands allow you to view your pages in one or more web browsers You can display an automatically updated page preview directly within BBEdit by choosing the Preview in BBEdit command use the Preview in lt Default Browser gt command to use the current default browser or choose a specific browser from the Preview With subme
430. rom the Filters pop up menu change it as desired and click Save Since each filter must have a unique name saving it will replace the old version of the filter To delete a filter entirely visit the File Filters panel in the Preferences window You can also create or modify filters there Multi File Searching 119 120 Multi File Replacing If you want to replace only some occurrences of text in multiple files you can simply search those files select the instances you want to change in the search results browser to open the files to those points and perform the replacements individually However BBEdit can also change all occurrences of a string in a group of files with one command Globally replacing text in more than one file works the same as replacing it in a single file The only possible complication is that if you make a mistake it can have much wider consequences If you are not sure what effect a replace operation will have test it out on a few sample files or a copy of your data first To do a multi file search and replace replacing all occurrences 1 Set up the find and replace strings in the Find amp Replace dialog as described in the section Multi File Search 2 Choose the files to be searched as described in Specifying the Search Set 3 Click Replace All in the Find amp Replace dialog or use its key equivalent of Command Option R BBEdit displays the Find amp Replace All Matches dialog box
431. ronment Show in Debugger This command makes the selected text visible in the source level debugger if the debugger is running Set Breakpoint Use this command to make the selected text visible in the source level debugger and to set a breakpoint If you hold down the option key when you open the Compiler menu this command becomes Set Breakpoint amp Go which sets the breakpoints and begins execution of the program If CodeWarrior s source level debugger is not active this command is not available Add If the active editing window has been saved on disk and it is not part of an open project this command adds the file to the project Add amp Compile If the active editing window has been saved on disk and it is not part of an open project this command adds the file to the project and compiles it This command is the same as using the Add command followed by the Compile command Precompile Tells CodeWarrior to precompile the source file in the active window BBEdit displays a standard file dialog that lets you specify the name of the precompiled header Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior 301 302 The active window must belong to a project that is open in CodeWarrior Preprocess Tells CodeWarrior to preprocess the source file in the active window and to place the results in a new untitled editing window The active window must belong to a project that is open in CodeWarrior Bring Up To Date Tells CodeWarrior to che
432. rowsers convert carriage returns to white space for display breaking lines only at lt P gt or lt BR gt tags Most browsers use a monospaced font for this type of block Lists These commands add numbered or bulleted lists to your HTML documents If text is selected the selected text is converted to a list with each line terminated by a carriage return becoming a list item List This command inserts a list You can choose the type of list unordered ordered definition menu or directory and also the type of marker for an unordered bulleted list You can also suggest a compact display format for the list When converting existing text to a list you can choose to ignore blank lines in the text being converted to mark up only list items and not insert the list header and whether to indent the list items When converting text to a definition list DT term and DD definition tags are applied to alternating lines in the selection Unordered Ordered Definition Menu Directory These commands convert the selected text to the indicated type of list or insert a new list as with the List command using the options set in the last List dialog displayed List Items This command converts selected text to list items one line becomes one item or inserts an lt LI gt tag if no text is selected Tables The commands on this submenu all have to do with building HTML tables HTML tables are frequently used for layout purposes
433. rs You can also specify options to eliminate minor variations in document content such as different amounts of white space from being considered If you have two or more text documents open choose the Compare Two Front Documents command on the Search menu to quickly compare the topmost two documents BBEdit will automatically determine which document is newer and which older based on their modification dates To compare two arbitrary files or folders 1 Choose the Find Differences command from the Search menu BBEdit opens the Find Differences dialog box Find Differences Compare Files O Folders New indexa Other Old index ht FP Other Users Shared doc_examples Users Shared doc_examples index html index_alt shtml Compare Options wi Case Sensitive wi Ignore Curly Quotes Ignore Spaces _ Leading C Trailing _ Runs Multi File Compare dentical Files V Only List Text Files Flatten Hierarchies Vl Skip Folders Use File Filter current criteria B Edit Cancel Compare 2 Click the Files radio button 3 Use the New and Old pop up menus to select the documents you want to compare If the files you want to compare are already open they will appear in the pop up menus otherwise you can select them by clicking the Other button next to one of the pop up menus or by dragging the files or folders icons from the Finder into the New and Old boxes in the Find
434. run after all windows have been closed and only if BBEdit is actually quitting Previously shutdown items were run before all windows were closed and were run whenever the application was told to quit either by the Quit menu command or via the scripting interface regardless of whether it actually quit or not Thus if you wish to run any items as the immediate result of a Quit command you should write a menu script attached to BBEdit e Quit You should move or copy over any shutdown items that you wish to preserve Startup Items Local only When launched BBEdit will open any items it finds in this folder This folder is installed empty by default If the items present are documents of a type that BBEdit knows how to handle such as text files or file groups BBEdit will open them directly If you place a compiled OSA AppleScript or any other OSA compliant scripting language script in this folder BBEdit will execute the script If you place a folder alias here BBEdit will open a disk browser window based at that folder If you place other types of items in this folder BBEdit will ask the Finder to open them If you often edit HTML files for instance you may want to place an alias to your Web browser or your visual HTML editor in the BBEdit Startup Items folder so that it will start up automatically whenever you run BBEdit You should move or copy any file or application aliases that you wish to preserve If you have any Appl
435. s 86 Process Lines Containing 87 Rewrap Quoted Text 88 Increase and Decrease Quote Level 88 Strip Quotes 89 Zap Gremlins 89 Entab 90 Detab 90 Normalize Line Endings 90 Text Factories sashes aah aE teased diated ABM le EE ta E EY Creating and Configuring Text Factories 91 Applying a Text Factory 94 Automator ACtiOns eener eta eae eee tenes Using BBEdit with Automator 94 Available Actions 96 Chapter 6 Arranging Windows amp Palettes Window Men sci 4554 vane yok date eee eaten eek areas Minimize Window 99 Bring All to Front 100 Palettes 100 Workspace 102 Arrange 103 Get Info 104 Zoom 104 Send to Back 104 Exchange with Next 104 Synchro Scrolling 104 Window Names 105 Table of Contents Chapter 7 Searching 107 Basic Searching and Replacing 0 cece ene 108 Search Settings 109 Special Characters 111 Mullti File Searching 0 0 6 cece eee 111 Starting a Search 112 Multi File Search Results 113 Specifying the Search Set 114 Saved Search Sources 116 Multi File Search Options 116 File Filters 117 Multi File Replacing 6 i e E EE eens 120 Quick Search sramno eee tie hold a E Berni AE AREE ae 121 Search Menu Reference 0 000 c ccc cece eect eee 121 Find 121 Quick Search 121 Find Again 122 Find Selection 122 Enter Search String 122 E
436. s This chapter describes the use of BBEdit s HTML Tools a powerful suite of utilities for creating and maintaining HTML documents and entire web sites In this chapter Introduction to the HTML Tools 6 6 cece ee ee eens 201 Recommended Books 202 Recommended Online Resources 202 SGML Resources 203 What You Need 203 Configuring the HTML Tools 6 6 6 cece ccc eee eee eens 203 Using the HTML Tools ieri eie nene i cc cee cette 204 Creating a New Document 205 e File Addressing 207 Checking Syntax 208 Previewing Pages 210 HTML Tool Descriptions nisn onis pdin i cece eee e eens 211 Tag Maker 211 Edit Tag 212 Close Current Tag 213 Balance Tags 213 Document Type 213 Character Set 213 CSS Submenu 214 Body Properties 221 Head Elements 221 Block Elements 222 e Lists 224 Tables 224 Forms 225 Inline Elements 227 Phrase Elements 230 Font Style Elements 231 Frames 232 e Check 232 Update 233 Includes 234 o Utilities 234 Misc 236 Preview 238 The HTML Tools Palette a cece cee eee eens 239 HTML Tools Palette Tips 240 e HTML Tools Palette 240 Other Palettes 241 HTME Translation amp 200 4 9 sis eben Fae Ree Foe ee Rete EREE 243 Remove Tags 243 Paragraphs 243 e HTML Entities 243 TOMA Plates isi ieni ar be gees hi She wg E RBG NEG Bi ome PSE aD
437. s To work around this longest match behavior you can modify your pattern to take advantage of non greedy quantifiers Quantifier Matches one or more zero or more 2 zero or one COUNT match exactly COUNT times MIN match at least MIN times MIN MAX match at least MIN times but no more than MAX 138 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Note Astute readers will note that these non greedy quantifiers correspond exactly to their normal greedy counterparts appended with a question mark Revisiting our problem of matching HTML tags for example we can search for lt gt This matches an opening bracket followed by one or more occurrences of any character other than a return followed by a closing bracket The non greedy quantifier achieves the results we want preventing BBEdit from overrunning the closing angle bracket and matching across several tags A slightly more complicated example how could you write a pattern that matches all text between lt B gt and lt B gt HTML tags Consider the sample text below lt B gt Welcome lt B gt to the home of lt B gt BBEdit lt B gt As before you might be tempted to write lt B gt lt B gt but for the same reasons as before this will match the entire line of text The solution is similar we will use the non greedy quantifier lt B gt lt B gt Writing Replacement Patterns Subpatterns Make Replace
438. s Margins determine how far each frame s content appears from its border or from the window edge No Frames HTML markup included between the lt NOFRAMES gt and lt NOFRAMES gt tags is displayed by browsers that do not support frames This is where you should include a link to a non frame or text only version of the site Although many current browsers support frames some users do not like the feature and intentionally disable it in their browser Check The Check submenu contains utilities for finding errors in your HTML markup and document links You can run syntax or link checks on the current document a specified folder or the current site as defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel You can also perform a Balance Tags operation on the current document Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools When you are checking a folder or a site using these tools a dialog like the one below appears Check Folder Syntax none selected 3 C Skip Folders vi Check Nested Folders The pop up menu to the right of the path box includes all of the web sites that you have specified in the HTML Web Sites preference panel choosing any of these selects its designated site root folder for checking The Other entry on the pop up menu displays an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any other desired folder You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box The Skip Folders checkbox specif
439. s open the Recent File amp Favorites folder and use the Finder s Get Info command to open an info window for each item alias you wish to lock then turn on the Locked option Locked items will be displayed at the bottom of the list below a separator line and are not counted against the specified item limit Recent Folders amp Favorites This folder contains aliases to folders that have recently been searched or compared in a Find Differences operation The items stored in this folder are used to create the folder search pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog and the folder lists in the Find Differences dialog To set the number of items shown in these lists use the Remember the most recently used items option on the Application panel of the Preferences window You may lock items in this folder to have them persist as Favorites To do this open the Recent Folder amp Favorites folder and use the Finder s Get Info command to open an info window for each item alias you wish to lock then turn on the Locked option Locked items will be displayed at the bottom of the list below a separator line and are not counted against the specified item limit Preference Files and Folders 17 18 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit CHAPTER Working with Files This chapter discusses how to use BBEdit to manipulate text files In this chapter Launching BBEdit 1 6 cece cee eet e eens 20 Startup Items 20 Creating and
440. s or an FTP SFTP Browser for each directory You will be prompted to enter passwords if necessary You can also pipe stdin to the bbedit tool and it will open in a new untitled window in BBEdit for example ls la bbedit If you just type bbedit with no parameters the tool will accept stdin from the terminal type Control D end of file to terminate and send it to BBEdit The complete command line syntax for the bbedit tool is bbedit bchlpsuvVw long_form_switches e lt encoding_name gt t lt string gt lt n gt file or lt S FTP URL gt See the bbedit tool s man page man bbedit for a complete description of the available switches and options Using File Groups If you frequently work with many related files you may want to create a file group for them A file group is a special kind of BBEdit file that contains references to other files and folders These files will usually be BBEdit text files but you can place any kind of file in a file group including aliases to a file and URL clippings Using BBEdit from the Command Line 37 38 File groups are persistent Once you have created one you can save it to disk using the Save command and then open it in a later BBEdit session to have instant access to the same set of files Creating a File Group To create a new file group pull down the File menu and choose File Group from the New submenu A new file group
441. s QuickTime movies for playback in a movie window or just opens them as text data in an editing window The default is to recognize QuickTime movies and display them with a player Changes to this preference take effect immediately Optional Application Services BBEdit Plug ins This option controls whether BBEdit will display the Tools menu in its menu bar which allows you to access BBEdit plug ins code modules that add functionality to BBEdit Third party plug ins are kept in BBEdit s application support folders See Chapter 2 to learn more about the organization of BBEdit s support folders or Chapter 15 for information about plug ins Changes to this option will take effect the next time you launch BBEdit Text Factories Menu This option controls whether BBEdit will display the Text Factories menu in its menu bar Changes to this option will take effect the next time you launch BBEdit Always Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu Mark this checkbox to always show the complete pathname of recently opened files rather than just their names in BBEdit s Open Recent submenu If a recent file is missing only its name will appear regardless of this setting Also if two or more files have identical filenames their complete pathnames will always be shown to prevent ambiguity regardless of this setting Application Preferences 165 166 Allow Menu Key Equivalents to Autorepeat Mark this checkbox to enable autorepeat when t
442. s appropriate Finally you can use Save a Copy to FIP SFTP Server to upload a copy of your current file to an FTP server while keeping your local file open This is especially useful when you maintain web site content on your local hard drive and only need to upload changes made in one or two files to the server Using FTP SFTP Browsers In addition to the Open from FTP SFTP Server command for opening individual files BBEdit offers FIP SFTP Browser windows FTP SFTP browsers keep a connection open to the server for as long as the browser window is open and also allow you to select and open multiple files or directories from the server e088 FTP Browser 1 Bookmarks Rendezvous B Server www barebones coml Disconnect v Vi Passive FTP User adam_s Password sssssses E www barebones com i a cgi bin a Go To 3 company L contact _ crafting_shirt shtml L css dberror php error shtml essay shtml essay_enter shtml _ essay_thanks shtml v O gt M Show Document Icons _ Show Files Starting with 9 To open a browser choose New FTP SFTP Browser from the New submenu of the File menu Enter your server address user name and password or choose a server from the Rendezvous pop up menu and if appropriate select the SFTP or Passive FTP options Then connect to the specified server by pressing the Connect button or while the Password field is active hit the Return key Alt
443. s bar Changes you make in the Text Options sheet affect only the active document or window To set options which will apply to all text windows you open use the Editor Defaults and Text Status Display preference panels Editing Options These options control the way BBEdit behaves as you type text in the active document window Changes you make here affect only that document To change the default editing options for documents that you will open in the future use the Editor Defaults preference panel Smart Quotes When this option is on BBEdit automatically replaces straight quotes with typographer s quotes If you need to type a straight quote when this option is selected or to type a typographer s quote when the option is not selected hold down the Control key as you type the or key Smart quote marks should not be used in HTML documents since they will not display correctly you must use straight quotes or entity codes instead We recommend leaving this option turned off if you are editing HTML content or program code Auto Expand Tabs When this option is selected BBEdit inserts an appropriate number of spaces when you press Tab rather than inserting a tab character Soft Wrap Text When this option is selected BBEdit soft wraps the text in the file to the right margin that you choose the Page Guide the window width or a specific number of characters The Page Guide is an arbitrary visual boun
444. s include a dictionary that tells AppleScript how to convert English like commands into the Apple Events actually expected by the application The Script Editor uses this same information to display a sort of vocabulary guide that helps you write your scripts We will naturally use BBEdit s dictionary shown below to illustrate how to read a dictionary e088 BBEdit asdictionary Required Suite Terms that every application wClasses print settings should support Y Commands open Class print settings print Properties quit copies integer r o the nur ent to be printed run collating boolean r o Sh Standard Suite generating job copy boolean aj rated gt Commands generating job log boolean r o Should a jot d YW Miscellaneous g log folder alias r o the folder in which the job log and copy should be Commands created Y BBEdit Suite starting page integer r o the first page of the document to be Classes printed ending page integer r o the l rinted pages across integer r o numbe physical page pages down integer r o number of logical pages sical page Compare Optic Compare Resu FTP Info FTP browser w down a Mark Options requested print time date r o the time at which the desktop printer Process Duplic should print the document Process Duplic queue placement hvqe r o or how the printed document should w Process Lines v be placed into th
445. s preference panel If there is no such entry the active glossary set is unchanged Chapter 10 Preferences HTML Colors Preferences The HTML Colors preferences let you choose the appearance of the Web Safe Colors palette Color Palette Layout You can choose from four layouts 36 x 6 a horizontal layout 6 x 36 a vertical layout and two different VisiBone layouts which organize the colors in a sort of circular layout that places similar colors close together VisiBone 2 is a newer more compact representation Color Swatch Size You can choose the size of the swatches to be displayed in the palette The default is Small Color Picker The Color Picker option allows you to choose whether the color swatch buttons in various HTML dialogs use BBEdit s Web safe pop up menu the factory default or whether clicking the swatch brings up the standard system color picker dialog Holding down the Option key on your keyboard while clicking the swatch reverses the sense of the preference HTML Markup Preferences The HTML Markup preferences let you choose the format of tags generated by BBEdit s HTML tools HTML Tags You can choose to generate uppercase or lowercase HTML tags or to obtain this setting from a Dreamweaver HTML Source Profile You can choose a Dreamweaver HTML Source Profile to use by clicking Choose and selecting an appropriate file in the dialog or by dragging amp dropping such a file into the path box Qu
446. s the active document property this is no longer necessary Instead if a text window is frontmost document 1 of application BBEdit document 1 of text window 1 of application BBEdit active document of text window 1 of application BBEdit now all refer to the same document The side effect of this change is that if you wish to access documents within a text window by index that index is a not related to the visual ordering of documents in the documents drawer and b documents indexes may change over time This situation is effectively no different than handling documents which are contained in individual text windows i e the index will change over time when you select different windows If your script needs to keep a permanent references to a particular document you should refer to that document by its id rather than its index BBEdit s Scripting Model 275 276 Common AppleScript Pitfalls Here are some things to watch out for when scripting BBEdit with AppleScript The Escape Issue AppleScript uses the backslash character as an escape character You can use r to indicate a carriage return or t to indicate a tab character More importantly you can use or to include a quote mark or apostrophe in a string that is delimited by quotes or apostrophes If you want to specify a real backslash you must write That s not all that confusing until you start writing AppleScripts that call on BBEdit s pow
447. s the contents of folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses The Search Invisible Folders checkbox allows you to process the contents of invisible folders v Search Nested Folders File Type C Skip Folders Text Files Only Search Invisible Folders een Des Use File Filter current criteria B Edit Filter If a File is Changed O Leave Open Save to Disk v Confirm Saves Cancel_ EB You can also choose to process only text files or to process all file types If you have graphics or other types of files in the target folders you should restrict processing to only text files This setting works in addition to any file filter see File Filters on page 117 and is in fact applied before the filter Chapter 5 Text Transformations Note The last group of options controls how BBEdit treats processed documents Choose Leave Open to have BBEdit leave all the documents open so that you can inspect the results of the operation Choose Save to Disk to have BBEdit automatically save changes to each file after processing it When the Confirm Saves setting is active you will have an opportunity to approve the changes before BBEdit saves them to disk You should not turn this off unless you are sure that the processing being applied is what you want Defining Actions Each action in a text factory contains the following elements e a popup menu from which you select the operation to apply Y
448. s to Glossary Items The Set Key button in the Glossary window lets you assign key equivalents for easy access to frequently used glossary items To assign a key to a glossary item 1 Select the item in the Glossary window 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog Set Key Keystroke for Bigger Font Clear no keystroke defined Cancel ox Inserting Glossary Items 247 248 Note 3 Type the key equivalent You can use any combination of the Command Shift Option and Control keys in the key equivalent provided that it must use at least the Command or Control key to be valid You can also use function keys with or without additional modifiers 4 Click OK If you try to assign a key equivalent that is already used elsewhere BBEdit warns you that there is a conflict and asks you whether you want to reassign that key equivalent to the new item To remove a key equivalent from a glossary item 1 Select the item in the Glossary window 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog 3 Click Reset then OK Glossary Substitution Placeholders When you insert a glossary item containing a placeholder into an editing window BBEdit replaces the placeholder with appropriate substitution text This is similar to the operation of BBEdit s HTML Templates and Update features The following table shows the placeholders you can use in a glossary item Placeholder Replaced by
449. sents a dialog in which you may select various options for reformatting the frontmost document s tag structure The available options are e Input is XML This option controls whether BBEdit should use the Tidy XML parser rather than the error correcting HTML parser e Indent Block Level Tags This option controls whether BBEdit should indent block level tags e Indent Attributes This option controls whether BBEdit should begin each attribute on a new line e Wrap ASP This option controls whether BBEdit should wrap text contained within ASP pseudo elements which look like lt gt HTML Tool Descriptions 237 238 e Wrap Attributes This option controls whether BBEdit should wrap attribute values for easier editing e Wrap JSTE This option controls whether BBEdit should wrap text contained within JSTE pseudo elements which look like lt gt e Wrap PHP This option controls whether BBEdit should line wrap text contained within PHP pseudo elements which look like lt php gt e Wrap Script Literals This option controls whether BBEdit should wrap string literals that appear in script attributes BBEdit will wrap long script string literals by inserting a backslash character before the line break e Wrap Sections This option controls whether BBEdit should line wrap text contained within lt gt section tags e Give Tidy Credit This option controls whether BBEdit should add a meta element t
450. sier for us to add new features to BBEdit since when we want to create a new kind of window half the work is already done However when scripting you may need to flip back and forth between two or more class definitions to find all the properties of the object you are working with This is technically speaking a limitation of Apple s Script Editor There is no reason the inherited properties could not automatically be included in a subclass listing by a smarter editor for example Script Debugger which does this Now that we have the class hierarchy under control let s look at the properties themselves more closely we will stick with the text window class at this point Properties of an object are referred to using the preposition of For example the following line of script returns the font of the frontmost text window tell application BBEdit to get display font of text window 1 In this specific example you can just write get display font of window 1 AppleScript will figure out that window 1 is more specifically a text window and therefore has a display font property even though the generic window class does not have any such property All the properties of the object are available even if you did not use its specific class name However in most cases you should specify exactly the object you want this distinction is especially important when dealing with text documents content versus text windows display elements
451. since it lies between the tags lt TITLE gt and lt TITLE gt Choose Balance Tags again and BBEdit selects everything between lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt the next set of enclosing tags outside the lt TITLE gt element Choosing the command once more will select everything between lt HTML gt and lt HTML gt Use this command to quickly select an element for editing or just to check to see whether all your nested elements are formed correctly If BBEdit sounds the system alert beep when you expect it to select text it cannot find a matching set of tags around the selected text Document Type Choosing Document Type brings up a dialog that allows you to select the desired document type DTD for the current document If the document already contains an SGML lt DOCTYPE gt declaration this will be used as the default You may choose any of BBEdit s supported document types or enter one of your own Character Set Choosing Character Set brings up a dialog that allows you to enter a character set specification for the current document To insert this specification check the Meta Tag box choose a character set from the pop up menu of supplied standard types or type in a character set name and click Apply To remove any existing character set specification deselect the Meta Tag box and click Apply You can choose which character sets appear in the pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Optionall
452. so take your time and try to do it right the first time Now switch back to the Script Editor and click the Stop button After a brief pause your script is compiled and ready for use Try clicking the Run button to see it work It might not work correctly If you recorded a search and replace operation changing every cat to dog you already changed the document while recording the script and of course the script will not do anything when you run it Finally save the script in the BBEdit Scripts folder so that it shows up in BBEdit s script menu Choose Save As from the File menu and then use the Script Editor s Save dialog to put the script in your BBEdit Scripts folder Now try selecting it from the script menu in BBEdit The Scripts Menu The Scripts menu left in BBEdit s menu bar contains several commands It also lists all AppleScripts present in the Scripts folder within BBEdit s application support folder providing a quick way to access frequently used scripts You can place scripts within subfolders up to 4 levels deep of the Scripts folder to organize them Scripts written for use in the menu should be saved as compiled script documents not script applications In addition to the list of available scripts the Scripts menu provides the following commands Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Open Script Editor Choose this item to switch to your preferred AppleScript editor as chosen in the Tools panel of t
453. splay in some reasonable fashion in a wide variety of Web browsers even those you have not tested the page in Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Syntax Checking Partial Documents BBEdit can check the syntax of either complete or partial HTML documents You may find the ability to check partial documents useful if you are preparing template sections for inclusion into other documents whether this is done locally or via a server side mechanism In order to check the syntax of a partial HTML document the document must contain a balanced portion of the content tree For example you can check a partial document which contains a set of paragraphs or a table you cannot check a partial document which contains an unclosed lt BODY gt or lt DIV gt Additionally for partial documents which do not contain a DOCTYPE you can specify one by means of a bbpragma doctype comment which specifies what the root or parent element of the partial page s content is For example if your partial document consists of lt BODY gt content lt bbpragma doctype W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN root_element body gt In this comment you must use either the public identifier text for the DOCTYPE you wish to check against see above or the display name for the document type used in the New HTML Document dialog Ignoring Sections of Documents You can mark sections of HTML documents to have BBEdit ignore these sections when perfo
454. ssertions is for each alternative to temporarily move the current position back by the fixed width and then try to match If there are insufficient characters before the current position the match is deemed to fail Lookbehinds in conjunction with non backtracking a k a once only subpatterns can be particularly useful for matching at the ends of strings an example is given in the section on once only subpatterns below Several assertions of any sort may occur in succession For example lt d 3 lt 999 foo matches foo preceded by three digits that are not 999 Notice that each of the assertions is applied independently at the same point in the subject string First there is a check that the previous three characters are all digits and then there is a check that the same three characters are not 999 This pattern does not match foo preceded by six characters the first of which are digits and the last three of which are not 999 For example it does not match 123abcfoo A pattern to do that is lt d 3 lt 999 00 This time the first assertion looks at the preceding six characters checking that the first three are digits and then the second assertion checks that the preceding three characters are not 999 Assertions can be nested in any combination For example lt lt foo bar baz matches an occurrence of baz that is preceded by bar which in
455. stallation e sans fog ies deed hid et dekh ete ee Oe System Requirements 9 Installing BBEdit 9 Updating an Existing Copy 10 Upgrading from a Previous Version 10 First Run Configuration 10 Activating the Demo 11 BBEdit s Application Support Folders Using the Global Application Support Folder 12 Using a Local Application Support Folder 12 Application Support Folder Contents 12 Glossary 13 HTML Templates 13 Language Modules 13 Menu Scripts 13 Plug Ins 14 Scripts 14 Shutdown Items 15 Startup Items 15 Stationery 15 Text Factories 16 Unix Support 16 Preference Files and Folders 0 0 0 0 0000 e ee eeee BBEdit Preferences File 16 BBEdit Preferences Folder 16 Roatan 2 vi Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Working with Files Launching BBEdit sioniste eia Konia etiaai ai ene na e A oea Startup Items 20 Creating and Saving Documents 0 ccc Saving a Copy of a File 23 File Saving Options 23 File State 24 Long File Names 24 Saving with Authentication 24 Opening Existing Documents 0 0c c cece eens Choosing the Encoding for a Document 25 Using the Open Command 27 Using the Open Hidden Command 28 Using the Open Recent Command 28 Using the Reopen using Encoding Command 29 Using the Open Selection Command 29 An International Text Primer
456. sting is available in the support section of the Bare Bones Software web site http www barebones com support plugins html Plug In Compatibility IMPORTANT You will not be able to use any third party plug ins which have not been specifically updated for Mac OS X compatibility or which do not support Unicode text If BBEdit encounters such a plug in it will not load that plug in and will log a message to the system console Contact the developers of your plug ins or visit the Bare Bones Software web site see above for more information on the availability of updated plug ins Developer Information In addition to a selection of third party plug ins the Bare Bones Software web site contains additional resources for developers who may wish to e provide an Edit in BBEdit command in their application e extend the capabilities of BBEdit TextWrangler and or Mailsmith with a plug in e implement a language module to support syntax coloring and or function navigation for a source code language not presently supported by BBEdit The developer information overview page is http www barebones com support develop index shtml Developer Information 307 308 Chapter 15 Language Modules amp Plug Ins APPENDIX Command Reference This appendix provides a quick reference for key assignments and a comprehensive list of the commands that are available from BBEdit s user interface In this appendix Keyboard Shortc
457. such as the Finder should open in the front text window or as separate text windows The Status Bar The status bar is a panel at the top of editing windows containing buttons and pop up menus that let you work with the text in the window You can toggle display of the status bar by using the control in the top right corner of the window or by choosing Hide Status Bar Show Status Bar in the View menu 090e index html CIENS 3 Last Saved 08 22 04 12 58 42 I f AE ks he File Path Users Shared index html Pio 4 L index html gt k DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C 0TD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN F http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd gt lt html gt 0 lt head gt lt title gt Welcome to Bare Bones Software lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and publishes best of cla lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mailsmith supergetinfo v ths no symbol selected B j gt Window Anatomy 49 50 If the window contains a document that has been saved to disk the status bar contains the full path to the file and the last time the file was changed If the file has not been saved to disk the status bar displays New Document instead of the file name Note Windows
458. surrounded by white space or punctuation characters special search characters called metacharacters are added to the search string you specified to indicate this What makes pattern searching counterintuitive at first is how you describe the pattern Consider the first example above where we want to search for text that begins with the letter C and ends with the letter 1 with any number of letters in between What exactly do you put between them that means any number of letters That is what this chapter is all about Grep is the name of a frequently used Unix command that searches using regular expressions the same type of search pattern used by BBEdit For this reason you will often see regular expressions called grep patterns as BBEdit does They re the same thing Recommended Books and Resources Mastering Regular Expressions 2nd Edition by Jeffrey E F Friedl O Reilly amp Associates 2002 ISBN 0 596 00289 0 Although it does not cover BBEdit s grep features specifically Mastering Regular Expressions is an outstanding resource for learning the how to of writing useful grep patterns and the new second edition is even better than the original BBEdit Talk The BBEdit Talk online mailing list covers a wide range of topics and questions about using BBEdit which frequently include searching and the use of grep patterns To subscribe to this list please visit the support section of our web site whi
459. t thus it is recommended that you leave this option on Use Affrus for Perl Debugging Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit use Affrus in preference to the command line Perl Debugger Affrus is an integrated Perl development environment from Late Night Software http www latenightsw com If you choose this option BBEdit will pass complete environment parameters and control to Affrus but will not attempt to retrieve output Windows Preferences The Windows preferences control the size and appearance of both newly created windows and windows that do not contain their own display state information See the State panel to tell BBEdit how to store state information in files Window Zooming Always Zoom Windows Mark this checkbox to always expand windows to their maximum size when opening them regardless of their saved window size state Move As Little As Possible When this option is selected BBEdit keeps windows as close to their original location as possible when you zoom them Maximum Width This pop up menu lets you specify the maximum width of a zoomed window The default setting is Classic Display Zoom Windows To On systems with multiple monitors this pop up menu lets you choose which screen BBEdit should use when zooming You can choose the main screen the one containing the menu bar the nearest screen the one containing most of the active window the largest screen or the smallest screen Window Menu Always
460. t common attributes used with the current tag The dialog shown is for a BODY tag dialogs for other tags will look different Body Properties Background File Addressing Full Root Relative M BGColor Text ii FFFFFF 000000 Clink M Ain ER O vink 0000FF 00FF00 FFOOFF Cancel C Apply 212 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Note Edit Tag also works with CSS Choose Edit Tag while the insertion point is within a selector s property or value and BBEdit will display an appropriate dialog for editing many common properties Close Current Tag The Close Current Tag command inserts a closing tag to match the nearest opening tag preceding it If the closing tag is placed on a new line it will use the same indent level as the opening tag For instance if the insertion point is preceded by a lt P gt Paragraph tag plus some text content Close Current Tag will insert a matching lt P gt tag to close the paragraph If you frequently work with HTML documents you may want to assign a key equivalent to this command using Set Menu Keys Balance Tags When Balance Tags is chosen BBEdit expands the selection to encompass the content of next outermost set of enclosing tags The easiest way to understand how this works is to see it in action Place the insertion point in an HTML document s lt TITLE gt element and choose Balance Tags The title will be selected
461. t will pad lines with spaces as necessary Increase and Decrease Quote Level This command inserts or deletes a standard Internet quote character gt from the selected hard wrapped text or for the current line if there is no selection Chapter 5 Text Transformations Strip Quotes This command removes all Internet style quoting from the selected hard wrapped text or from the current line if there is no selection Zap Gremlins This command displays a sheet which allows you to remove or replace various non printing characters often known as gremlins Use this command when you have a file that may contain extraneous control characters or any non ASCII characters which you wish to identify or remove Zap Zapped Characters M Non ASCll Characters O Delete v Control Characters Replace with Code vw Null ASCII 0 Characters O Replace with a Don t Zap Cancel Cz The checkboxes on the left hand side of the sheet determine which types of characters the Zap Gremlins command affects while the radio buttons on the right hand side determine what to do with gremlins that are found Zap Non ASCIl Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps all characters in the file that do not fall in the 7 bit or ASCID range Examples of such characters include special Macintosh characters such as bullets and typographer s quotes and and as well as all multi byte characters In
462. tcut Cmd Opt F Replace If there is a selection replaces the current selection with the replace string Otherwise finds the first occurrence of the text in the active window after the current insertion point and replaces it with the replace string Shortcut Cmd R Replace All Replaces every occurrence of the search string in the active window with the replace string Shortcut Cmd Opt R Don t Find Saves the settings of the Find amp Replace dialog without doing a search Shortcut Cmd D Cancel Does not do the search and restores the settings of the dialog box to their previous state Shortcut Cmd BBEdit closes the Find amp Replace dialog and then selects the search string in the active window if the search was successful Once BBEdit finds your text you can use the commands in the Search menu see Search Menu Reference later in this chapter The table below summarizes the most common commands you can use at this point This command Does this Find Again Finds the next occurrence of the search string without displaying the Find amp Replace dialog again To reverse the search direction hold down Shift Replace Replaces the selection with the replace text Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string with the replace string Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selection with the replace string and looks for the search string again Search Settings The checkbox
463. te space same as s upper upper case letters word word characters same as w xdigit hexadecimal digits For example digit is the same as d POSIX style character class names are case sensitive It is easy to forget that POSIX style character classes are only available inside regular character classes The pattern space without enclosing square brackets is just a UI MS MI M N character class consisting of the characters a c e p and s The names ascii and word are Perl extensions the others are defined by the POSIX standard Another Perl extension supported by BBEdit is negated POSIX style character classes which are indicated by a after the colon For example to match any run of non digit characters digit Non Capturing Parentheses As described in the preceding section Creating Subpatterns bare parentheses cluster and capture the subpatterns they contain The portion of the matching pattern contained within the first pair of parentheses is available in the backreference 1 the second in 2 and so on Opening parentheses are counted from left to right to determine the numbers of the captured subpatterns For example if the following grep pattern red white king queen Advanced Grep Topics 147 148 is matched against the text red king the backreferences will be set as follows 1l red king 2 red 3
464. ter inserting the item if multiple INSERTION placeholders are used the second and subsequent occurrences are replaced with a placeholder lt gt which can be used with Go to Next Previous Placeholder in the Search menu LOCALTIME XXX The current local time formatted according to the parameters XXX see Time Formats below NAME The long name of the active user account There is no intrinsic placeholder for the short name but you can use inline system whoami to obtain it SCRIPT filename Result of running the specified AppleScript SELECT Selected text SELSTART Mark a range within the inserted material to be selected and after the insertion You can use multiple pairs of these SELEND placeholders within a single glossary item SYSTEM Given the full path to a shell command or script BBEdit shell_script will run that command or script and insert the result TIME Current time formatted according to your Format settings in the International panel of the System Preferences UUID A 128 bit UUID universally unique identifier formed by combining a value unique to the computer on which it was generated usually the Ethernet hardware address with a value representing the number of 100 nanosecond intervals since October 15 1582 Placeholders are not case sensitive If you want to include a literal placeholder in a glossary item escape the first with a backslash as
465. ter you add an action to your workflow you can set options if any in the action s tile To expand or collapse an action tile click the triangle next to the action s name Add Line Numbers Add Prefix Add Suffix Change Case A Corver Spaces to Tabs E Coren Tabs to Spaces Comen to ASCH S Delete Lines Conta Educate Quotes Extract Lines Conai Normalize Une Breaks Remove Duplicate Li Remove Line Numbers Q QuickTime Frayer Remove Profix Safari Remove Suffix Seoviight Search and Replace X System Sort Lines oy TextEdit E Straighten Quotes Xcode 220 Gremins gt J Example Workflows Cet Contents of 88E My Workflows E New BBEGH Document Set Contents of BBE Starting at 1 incrementing by 1 F Keep Original Text justified gt Options Getting Started To view the actions for an application click the application To show all the actions click the Applications folder To find an action enter a word or phrase in the search field To add an action to the workflow drag it into the workflow To open a saved workflow from the library double click it The Automator actions which BBEdit offers allow you to make use of BBEdit s unique transformations in the context of a larger Automator workflow Please keep in mind that BBEdit currently does not include any actions which support working with files as it s expected that you will be applying BBEdit actions to wo
466. ternate Ports BBEdit allows you to open an FTP connection on ports other than the default port 21 To specify an alternate port place it on the end of the server name separated by a colon for example ftp example com 1111 Storing Passwords To store FIP passwords BBEdit takes advantage of the system Keychain As long as the Keychain is unlocked whenever you enter a server and user name pair for which there is a record the corresponding password will be filled in automatically This will happen regardless of whether the Remember Password option in the dialog is on or off If the Keychain is locked the Remember Password option will also be disabled and you will need to retype your password every time you use the FTP dialog You can click the key icon in the FTP dialog above the Password field to unlock the Keychain or to query it for a password if the Keychain is already unlocked In the Open from FTP SFTP Server dialog the Remember Password option applies only to the last FTP session that was initiated before dismissing the FTP dialog Also the Auto Connect setting in the FTP dialogs does not require that Remember Password be turned on This is useful if you have set up public key authentication for SSH in which case no password is required Saving Files to FTP SFTP Servers After you have edited a file opened from an FTP or SFTP server pressing Command S or choosing Save from the File menu saves the new version back to the s
467. th BBEdit IMPORTANT The Documents Drawer The documents drawer is a panel which BBEdit optionally displays at the side of a text window that lists all the documents current open in the window Click the drawer toggle control at the right hand edge of the status bar to show or hide the drawer or choose Show Documents Drawer Hide Documents Drawer in the View menu Click any document s name in the drawer to make that document frontmost in the text window e088 2 index html gt f M 1o Last Saved 08 22 04 I v Le a Le Lee Le File Path User ex ht gt index html Documents kk DOCTYPE HTML pueLIC AAGA Viie 4 01 Transi tional EN ab E index html http www w3 org TR html4 loose dtd gt R lt html gt 0 ica index shtml lt head gt lt titledWelcome to Bare Bones Software lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 gt ical update_ctags py lt meta http equiv content tupe content text html charset iso 8859 1 lt meta name description content Bare Bones Software develops and pub untitled text lt meta name description content bare bones software bbedit mai lsmi u v 1 1 no symbol selected OB j gt You can control whether BBEdit should display documents in the drawer by name or the order in which they were opened via the Sort Windows by option in the Windows preference panel
468. the baseline Superscript This command marks the selected characters as a superscript raised above the baseline Phrase Elements Phrase elements are HTML tags that mark sentences or phrases within a block element such as a paragraph with certain content related styles such as emphasis strong emphasis citation and so on Indirectly this determines the displayed format of the enclosed text although exactly what emphasis and so on mean is left up to the browser or the stylesheet Abbreviation The enclosed text is an abbreviation Acronym The enclosed text is an acronym Citation The enclosed text is a citation of another document Computer Code The enclosed text is computer source code Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Deleted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been deleted usually with a horizontal line through it that is struck out You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Defined Term The enclosed text is term defined in a glossary Emphasis The text should be displayed with visual emphasis most browsers interpret this as italic text Inserted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been inserted usually by underlining the text You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Input Text Kb
469. the Close Others command from the action menu or the contextual menu to close all documents except the selected document To open an existing file into a text window you can choose Open from the File menu or drag and drop the file from the Finder into the window s document drawer To create a new document you can choose New Text Document from the New submenu of the File menu or use the New command from the drawer s action menu Window Anatomy 53 54 Note To move a document into its own text window select it in the drawer and choose Open in Separate Window from the Action menu or Control click and choose this command from the contextual menu You can also select multiple documents and use Open in Separate Window to open each document into a separate text window or Open in New Window to create a new text window containing all the selected documents To move a document from one text window to another drag its name out of the first text window s documents drawer into the second text window s document drawer You can select and move multiple documents at once Dragging a document s name from the documents drawer has the same effect as dragging its proxy icon in the status bar The View Menu This menu contains commands which you can use to toggle the display of navigational elements in text windows to select documents and to get info on a document or file Hide Show Status Bar Choose this command to hide or show th
470. the File button If the Canto Cumulus image cataloging tool is running on your computer you can also click the Cumulus button to choose an image from Cumulus s catalog or you can use drag and drop HTML Tool Descriptions 227 228 After choosing an image file you can specify alternate text which will appear in browsers that do not support images or for users who are surfing with image loading turned off enter the Size of the image select the amount of horizontal and vertical Space for wrapping around the image and choose the thickness of the border and the image s alignment Image height and width should be specified whenever possible to speed layout of the page in the browser BBEdit will enter these values for you automatically when you choose an image file You can also mark the Is Map checkbox to use a server side image map or the Use Map checkbox to use a client side image map embedded in the HTML document Applet This command inserts the lt APPLET gt tag for specifying a Java applet You will need to specify the location the folder that contains your main Java class file the codebase as well as the name of the main class file If the file is in a ZIP or JAR archive you can specify its name here as well If you will control the applet via a client side script enter a name for it You should always enter the desired size for the applet s display area You can also specify alignment and white space around the applet along
471. the HTML Web Sites preference panel BBEdit displays a results browser after the operation so you can see what was changed For more details on the results browser format that BBEdit displays please refer to Chapter 9 Choose the Document Folder or Site command from the Update submenu to update all includes and placeholders in the selected set of file s Appendix C contains information regarding the use of placeholders HTML Tool Descriptions 233 234 Note Choose the Document Images Folder Images or Site Images command from the Update submenu to update the HEIGHT and WIDTH attributes of image tags and optionally to insert empty ALT attributes when missing in the selected set of file s When you are updating a folder or a site using either of these sets of tools a dialog like the one below appears Update Folder none selected B C Skip Folders vi Check Nested Folders The pop up menu to the right of the path box includes all of the web sites that you have specified in the HTML Web Sites preference panel choosing any of these selects its designated site root folder for updating The Other entry on the pop up menu displays an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any other desired folder You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box The Skip Folders checkbox specifies that subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses should not be updated Check Nested Fo
472. the same as clicking the default button e Typing Command period or pressing the Escape key is the same as clicking the Cancel button e You can use the Cut Copy Paste Clear and Select All commands either from the Edit menu or with their Command key equivalents in any text field Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit To see the other key equivalents for a particular dialog or sheet hold down the Command key After a brief delay labels appear next to any buttons or options which have key equivalents For example this is the Find amp Replace dialog without the Command key equivalents showing Find amp Replace Search For B v Use Grep Patterns fj Fin Find All Replace v Start at Top Search Selection Only R Replace All Wrap Around vi Extend Selection _ Search Backwards C Case Sensitive C Match Entire Words Replace With 3 t M Multi File Search Saved Search Sources B EE Only files matching the current filter criteria will be searched i nothing to search This is the Find amp Replace dialog with the Command key equivalents visible Find amp Replace Search For 3 Muse Grep G Patterns E Find 38F Find All Replace 3R Vv Start at Top 3T _ Search Selection Only 35S os J gt Replace All _ Wrap Around 38W V Extend Selection 3 l _ Search Backwards 3B Don t Find 3D C Case Sensitive 3N C Match Entire Words E Replace With B ra t M Multi File Search
473. the same manner as the equivalent option in the Find dialog Text Menu Commands 85 IMPORTANT For example suppose you are sorting a list of cities together with their two letter state abbreviations separated by a tab character The pattern and subpatterns shown in the figure will sort the results first by city name and second by state abbreviation Changing the contents of the Specific Sub Patterns field from 1 2 to 2 1 will instead sort the results by state first and by city second When you use a grep pattern with this command matches are not automatically anchored to line boundaries so ambiguous patterns may produce unpredictable results To avoid this problem you should use the line start and line end operators as necessary Also keep mind that the pattern will only be tested against a single line at a time So if the pattern matches one or more sets of multiple lines within in the document but does not match any individual lines BBEdit will not sort the contents of the document Process Duplicate Lines This command displays a sheet which allows you to locate duplicate lines within a body of text and operates on them in various ways Leaving One O Matching All C Numbers Match by Value J Duplicates to Clipboard Ignore Leading White Space _ Duplicates to New Document Delete Duplicate Lines _ Unique Lines to Clipboard _ Unique Lines to New Document v Match Using Pattern Searching Pattern f
474. ther server side technology such as Active Server Pages HTML Tool Descriptions 225 226 Form This tag defines a form The Method can be either GET encoding the form data in the URL or POST sending the form data separately after the HTTP transaction header The Action should be the URL of the CGI program or other server side script such as ASP Enctype and Accept Charset define the encoding type and character set for the transaction usually you will not need to use these fields Use the On Submit and On Reset fields to enter the names of JavaScript handlers to be used for the Submit and Reset buttons respectively The Target field sets the frame to be used for the page returned by the CGI Button This tag creates a form button Choose a type Submit Reset or Button specify a name and value for the form element and set optional attributes such as Disabled Tab Index the order in which the button will be reached by the Tab key and Access Key the key the user can press to activate the button in the browser The latter two options are HTML 4 features and may not work on all popular browsers You can also enter the names of JavaScript onFocus and onBlur handlers for the button Field Set Legend In HTML 4 you can group your form s fields and other controls into sets of related fields by using the FIELDSET container Within the FIELDSET container the LEGEND tag is used to define a title for the field set Browsers diffe
475. this document and other documents an email address style sheet or other information about the document enter the desired information in this field If you use a template to create the HTML document the template must include the META and LINK placeholders to indicate the location at which this information should be inserted into the generated document Web Site This pop up menu displays the web sites defined in your HTML Web Sites preference panel allowing you to switch between them for the purpose of choosing a template to base the new document on The initial selection on opening the dialog is the default site designated in the HTML Web Sites preferences Template This pop up menu displays the templates specified in the Templates amp Includes folder associated with the selected web site in the HTML Web Sites preferences The names of template files must end with tmpl to be displayed in this menu Selecting a template other than Default will use the specified template to create a new document potentially ignoring some or all of the settings specified in this dialog File Addressing Many of the HTML tools require you to specify the pathname or URL of a file or folder such as to identify a base address style sheet or hypertext link Typically tools will provide a File button you can click to locate the desired file via an Open dialog together with a text field for displaying the resulting URL Recent URLs 3
476. to clear the marker BBEdit also offers a Clear All Markers command which clears all the markers in the document in one fell swoop You can access this command by holding down the Option key and using the Mark pop up menu Using Grep to Set Markers You can use the Find amp Mark All command in the Mark pop up menu to mark text that matches a grep pattern To learn more about using grep patterns see Chapter 8 Searching with Grep To use a grep pattern to mark text 1 Choose the Find amp Mark All command from the Mark submenu BBEdit opens the Find amp Mark All sheet 0068 index html G i2 nd Search For Patterns i ee aoe lt img A gt src s s A 4 C 4 gt gt RER Mark with 0 lt tit crete IVLA2 E 3I gt lt mete ishes be E C Clear Existing Markers Don tMark Cancel Find amp Mark The Mark Submenu 71 72 Tip Tip 2 Type the pattern in the Search For field and the marker names in the Mark With field You can also choose stored patterns from the Patterns pop up menu 3 Click Find amp Mark to mark the matching text BBEdit searches the current document for text that matches the pattern and marks it the way you specified The Insert Submenu In addition to typing you can use the commands in the Insert submenu of the Edit menu to insert text into the active window These commands which are also available in the Insert pop up menu left i
477. to set up BBEdit to work with development environments BBEdit offers a arsenal of capabilities in support of development tasks beginning with syntax coloring and function browsing support for numerous languages as well as support for Exuberant Ctags You can use BBEdit as an external editor with Apple s Xcode or Metrowerks CodeWarrior BBEdit also offers direct integration with the native Mac OS X Perl and Python environments as well as other Unix scripting tools such as Ruby or shell scripts and with the CVS and Perforce source control systems Additionally you can invoke BBEdit from the command line via optional tools or employ shell worksheet windows to store and execute frequently used commands In this chapter Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments 278 Syntax Coloring 278 Exuberant Ctags 278 Switching Between Source and Header Files 281 Using Development Environments 281 BBEdit and the Unix Command Line 66 cece cece eee eens 281 Shell Worksheets 281 The bbedit Command Line Tool 283 The bbdiff Command Line Tool 284 Perl Python and Shell Scripting 6 6 cece cece ene ee 284 Using Unix Scripts 284 Language Resources 285 Line Endings and Unix Scripts 286 Configuring Perl 286 Configuring Python 286 Shebang Menu 286 Filters and Scripts 288 e Filters 288 Scripts 289 Additional Notes 289 Working w
478. tor Defaults preference panel You can choose the colors which BBEdit uses for various content elements such as keywords string constants etc in the Text Colors preference panel For HTML content you can turn on the Color Attributes Separately option to have BBEdit use different colors for HTML attribute names attribute values and processing instructions in addition to anchor image and other tags If this option is turned off BBEdit will color HTML attributes identically to their corresponding tags How to Change Colors The color bars show the colors that BBEdit uses to display different interface and language elements To change colors click the color box BBEdit will open the system Color Picker dialog box that you can use to select a new color To restore all the colors to their default settings click the Reset to Factory Colors button Highlight Insertion Point When this option is turned on BBEdit will highlight the line currently containing the insertion point using the indicated color The highlighting will be temporarily dismissed whenever a text selection is made Text Encodings Preferences When opening documents BBEdit can automatically recognize and appropriately handle files that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman including multi byte character sets The Text Encodings preferences panel presents an alphabetical list of every character set encoding available in Mac OS X and allows you to choose wh
479. trol the order in which glossary sets appear as described in the next section Manually Sorting the Glossary These selection rules are intended to provide maximum flexibility while automatically doing the right thing as often as possible Manually Sorting the Glossary By default the Set pop up menu displays glossary sets in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name for example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template The first three characters of such names are not displayed in the menu You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string You can use anything you want for the rest of the name to make it appear where you want it in the menu These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Chapter 12 Using the Glossary Note IMPORTANT Inserting Glossary Items Double clicking an item s name in the Glossary window inserts its contents at the insertion point or in place of the current selection Alternatively you can click the item s name once to select it and then click the Insert button or drag the item directly to the desired location in the document window If you hold down the Option key the Insert button changes to Edit allowing you to open the file corresponding to the sel
480. ts and then failing to match foo the normal action of the grep engine is to try again with only 5 digits matching the d item and then with 4 and so on before ultimately failing Once only subpatterns provide the means for specifying that once a portion of the pattern has matched it is not to be reevaluated in this way so the matcher would give up immediately on failing to match foo the first time The notation is another kind of special parenthesis starting with gt as in this example gt d bar This kind of parentheses locks up the part of the pattern it contains once it has matched and a failure further into the pattern is prevented from backtracking into it Backtracking past it to previous items however works as normal In most situations such as in the example above the time saved by using once only subpatterns is insignificant a few small fractions of a second at most With some complicated grep patterns or with humongous lines of text however you can save tremendous amounts of time using once only subpatterns Once only subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns Simple cases such as the above example can be thought of as a maximizing repeat that must swallow everything it can So while both d and d are prepared to adjust the number of digits they match in order to make the rest of the pattern match gt d can only match an entire sequence of digits Once only subpatterns can be
481. tton displays this same Web Site Settings dialog allowing you to modify the existing settings for that site the Remove button deletes the selected site from the list The list must always include at least one site the Remove button is disabled when only one site is listed preventing you from deleting that last site The check mark identifies one site in the list as the default site you can change this setting by selecting another site and clicking the Make Default button All of the HTML Tools commands that generate or operate on links such as Tag Maker and Check Links will recognize and take account of the presence of multiple sites in the HTML Web Sites preference panel see the descriptions of these tools in Chapter 11 for further details HTML Web Sites Preferences 181 182 The Web Site Settings dialog displayed by the Add and Change buttons is shown below Web Site Settings Site Name example site Web Server Name http www example com Site Path on Server Default Page Name index html Local Site Root Sites Look for Templates amp Includes in none selected wi Use Local Preview Server Preview Server URL http localhost admin Site Name Use this text field to enter the name by which the web site will be listed in the HTML Web Sites preference panel BBEdit also uses this name in the Web Site pop up menu of the New HTML Document dialog see Creating a
482. turn is not preceded by foo while lt d 3 999 f00 is another pattern which matches foo preceded by three digits and any three characters that are not 999 Assertion subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns and may not be repeated because it makes no sense to assert the same thing several times If any kind of assertion contains capturing subpatterns within it these are counted for the purposes of numbering the capturing subpatterns in the whole pattern However substring capturing is carried out only for positive assertions because it does not make sense for negative assertions Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Conditional Subpatterns Conditional subpatterns allow you to apply if then or if then else logic to pattern matching The if portion can either be an integer between 1 and 99 or an assertion The two forms of syntax are if then if then else condition yes pattern condition yes pattern no pattern If the condition evaluates as true the yes pattern portion attempts to match Otherwise the no pattern portion does if there is a no pattern If the condition text between the parentheses is an integer it corresponds to the backreferenced subpattern with the same number Do not precede the number with a backslash If the corresponding backreference has previously matched in the pattern the condition is satisfied Here s an example of
483. tute for knowing HTML Tag Maker Tag Maker is BBEdit s context sensitive HTML authoring tool When you choose it from the menu or the palette or invoke it by pressing Command M it provides a list of the tags that are valid in the current HTML context of the insertion point and then lets you insert and configure one For example if the insertion point is positioned inside the document s header section delineated by the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt tags Tag Maker displays the following list of tags Insert Tag a a abbr acronym address applet b basefont bdo big blockquote br button center uM Choosing for example BASE inserts a lt BASE gt tag at the insertion point Choosing TITLE inserts a lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt pair with the insertion point positioned between the two tags for easy entry of a title If you hold down the Option key while clicking the Insert button Tag Maker automatically displays a follow up dialog for editing the attributes of the new tag if the tag takes attributes and BBEdit has a tag editing dialog for it When there is only one tag permitted in the current context Tag Maker does not display the Insert Tag dialog but simply inserts the appropriate tag at the insertion point Choose Undo from the Edit menu if this tag is not what you expected If there are no valid tags in the current context Tag Maker sounds the system alert beep HTML Tool Descriptions 211
484. u Users of very old versions of BBEdit or BBEdit Lite will note that the Wrap while Typing option which hard wrapped text automatically by inserting a Return when you reach the right margin has been relegated to the dustbin of history It has been superseded by soft wrapping Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit IMPORTANT Soft Wrapping To turn on soft wrapping for the active window do one of the following e Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar e Select the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options sheet by choosing Text Options from the Edit menu To specify the wrapping margin use the Text Options command You can have text wrap at the Page Guide the edge of the window or a specific character position Soft wrapping and rectangular selection are mutually incompatible When soft wrapping is enabled dragging the mouse performs normal non rectangular selection even if the Option key is held down when there is a rectangular selection the Soft Wrap Text option is unavailable in the Text Options pop up menu and dialog box To make soft wrapping the default for new windows select the Soft Wrap Text option in the Editor Defaults panel of the Preferences window You can also use the settings in that panel to specify the default wrapping margin To freeze the current line endings and hard wrap the text at the current soft wrapping settings use the Add Line Breaks command to
485. u to select a suggested correction or to skip ignore or add the word to the dictionary The Spelling Panel In addition to allowing you to correct ignore or learn identified words the Spelling panel allows you to choose which spelling dictionary BBEdit will use and to forget learned spellings To use the Spelling panel 1 Choose the Show Spelling Panel command from the Text menu BBEdit opens the Spelling panel 000 Spelling Guess ignore Coddles Coddlers Code less _ FindNext Codeless Correct Dictionary English eH Forget Learn Options A Skip All Caps 2 Set spelling options Choose a dictionary to use by selecting it from the Dictionary pop up menu Select Skip All Caps to avoid checking words consisting of only capital letters Note that these settings persist across runs of the application 3 Click Find Next to begin checking BBEdit scans the document and stops at the first misspelled or unrecognized word This word is displayed in the text field to the left of the Correct button Possible corrections for the questioned word are listed in the Guess box above 4 If the questioned word is misspelled choose the correct spelling from the Guess list or type it yourself in the Correct field 5 Click one of the Spelling panel s action buttons to handle the questioned word Click Ignore to ignore further instances of the questioned word without adding it to the active dictionary Click Guess t
486. u can press Command Down Arrow to open the selection if e you have selected one item and it is a file or e you have selected multiple items regardless of type Hold down the Option key as you Open or double click on a file name to open the file with the application that created it instead of opening the file with BBEdit Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers The list pane of a disk browser displays disks files and folders When you are at the computer level the list shows all mounted volumes When you click a folder or disk BBEdit displays the names of all the files it can open in the text pane The names listed in the text pane cannot be double clicked to open them You can however select a name and use the Open Selection command to open that file When you click a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file in the text pane To open a folder or disk and display its contents in the file list pane do one of the following e double click it select it and click Open in the status bar select it and press Command Down Arrow To go up one level to the enclosing folder or disk do one of the following e choose the enclosing folder from the directory pop up menu e press Command Up Arrow When the list pane has input focus the browser window s AppleScript selection property will return a list of the files currently selected See Getting and Setting Properties on page 270 for further details Using the Text Pane i
487. u fill out this dialog as completely as possible The function of each field is described below Insert XML Declaration Choose this checkbox to have BBEdit insert an XML declaration If the DOCTYPE selected in the pop up menu below is not an XML based type that is is not an XHTML version this checkbox will be disabled Although an XML declaration is required for XML documents whose character set is not UTF 8 or ISO 8859 1 some currently shipping Web browsers including Internet Explorer for the Macintosh cannot handle documents with XML declarations Insert DOCTYPE Choose the type of this HTML document from the pop up menu to have BBEdit insert an SGML prolog containing the desired document type This information is largely ignored by browsers however HTML syntax checkers such as the one built into BBEdit use it to determine which constructs are legal according to the HTML standard you select Available DOCTYPEs include e HTML 3 2 e HTML 4 01 Transitional Frameset and Strict versions e XHTML 1 0 Transitional Frameset and Strict versions e XHTML 1 1 e Compact HTML CHTML 2 0 Although HTML 4 0 has been superseded by HTML 4 01 and most users will want to use the latter BBEdit s syntax checker continues to accept HTML 4 0 as well for historical reasons HTML Head and Body Every HTML document should contain lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tags Mark these checkboxes to have BBEdit insert these tags auto
488. ucts and perform a replace operation with the above patterns you will get ACME Magnets ACME Anvils and ACME TNT are all premium products Using Parts of the Matched Pattern While using the entire matched pattern in a replacement string is useful it is often more useful to use only a portion of the matched pattern and to rearrange the parts in the replacement string For example suppose a source file contains C style declarations of this type define Util_Menu 284 define Tool_Menu 295 and you want to convert them so they look like this Pascal style const int Util_Menu const int Tool_Menu 284 295 The pattern to find the original text is straightforward define t t d 0 9 This pattern matches the word define followed by one or more tabs or spaces followed by one or more characters of any type followed by one or more tabs or spaces followed by one or more digits followed by zero or more characters that are not digits to allow for comments followed by the end of the line The problem with this pattern is that it matches the entire line It does not provide a way to remember the individual parts of the found string If you use subpatterns to rewrite the above search pattern slightly you get this define t t d 0 9 The first set of parentheses defines a subpattern which remembers the name of the constant The second set remembers the value of the constant
489. ude Matches checkbox 7 Drag a folder to the search target area to search its contents or open the Sources drawer specify the set of files to search See Specifying the Search Set later in this chapter for more information 8 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box to begin the search 112 Chapter 7 Searching The table below tells you what each of the buttons does This button Does this Find Finds the first occurrence of the search string in the frontmost document Not available when the multi file search option is selected Find All Finds all occurrences of the search string in all the files in the search sources set BBEdit displays the results in a search results browser Replace Replaces the current selection in the frontmost document with the replace string Not available when the multi file search option is selected Replace All Finds all occurrences of the search string in all the files in the search set and replaces them with the replace string Don t Find Preserves the current search and replace strings and settings of the Find amp Replace dialog without performing a search Cancel Does not do the search and restores the search and replace strings and settings to their state prior to display of the Find amp Replace dialog Multi File Search Results When you perform a mullti file search BBEdit displays every occurrence of the search string in the
490. umber of window objects currently displayed by BBEdit After the plural form comes a list of properties Some objects do not have properties for example a string but many applications do An object s properties are merely a collection of data that describes that particular object For example as you look down the list of window properties you will see that every window has a name every window has a position every window has bounds the area of the screen it covers and so on 258 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit The first item on the list though is lt inheritance gt item This tells you that a window is a kind of item and that it therefore has all the properties of an item Take a quick look at item s class definition shown below BBEdit asdictionary differences_wind 4 disk browser wint document factory document factory window Class item an OSA object Properties properties record all of this object s properties ID integer r o object container reference r o object s container if any unique id file filter filter_term group document group window movie document movie window multifile_differen palette perl_reference_wi picture document picture window plugin_info_wind preferences_wind recent file recent folder M You will see three properties properties ID and container The first entry properties is a record containing all the object s properties In other words be
491. ument Window and or delete them from the current document Delete Duplicate Lines You can likewise specify how to handle the lines that are not duplicated by choosing Unique Lines to Clipboard and or Unique Lines to New Document Since each of these options is an independent checkbox you can select any combination of them that you wish For example selecting both Delete Duplicate Lines and Unique Lines ton Clipboard would delete the duplicate lines from the document and copy them to the clipboard for pasting elsewhere Process Lines Containing This command displays a sheet which allows you to search the active window for lines containing a specified search string and then removes those lines or copies them to the clipboard The options on the left side of the dialog box control how the search is performed and the options on the right side control what happens to the lines that are found Find Lines Containing Cs l Case Sensitive A Copy to Clipboard l Use Grep L Copy to New Document Patterns B _ Delete Matched Lines Report Results Don t Process Cancel Process To specify a search pattern enter it in the Find Lines Containing field If you do not want BBEdit to match text when the letters in the text differ from the letters in the search string only by case upper case versus lower case select Case Sensitive To search using a grep pattern select Use Grep and enter the pattern in the text field You
492. ument without displaying the print sheet choose the Print One Copy command from the File menu Text Printing Options You can access all of BBEdit s application specific printing options by choosing the Text Printing page on the pop up menu in the center of the print sheet Printer HP Laserjet 5Si iz Presets Standard BA Text Printing KJ C Print Selection Only Font Courier 10 C Use Document s Font Monaco 9 Page Options Page Headers C Frame Printing Area v Print Page Headers C Print Line Numbers C Print Full Pathname A 1 Inch Gutter ww Print Color Syntax _ Print Rubber Stamp Time Stamp O Date Last Saved Date of Printing Confidential Preview Save As PDF Fax Print Note You can set defaults for most printing options in the Text Printing preferences panel 42 Chapter 3 Working with Files Note Print Selection Only When this option is selected BBEdit prints only the selected text Font Button Click this button to open a dialog box that lets you set the font size style and tab settings to use while printing Use Document s Font When this option is selected BBEdit uses the document s font when printing Page Options Choose the Printing Options command in the Edit menu to drop a sheet which lets you specify various print formatting options for a document You can also access this sheet by clicking the Options butt
493. uments and email message content Auto Expand Tabs When this option is selected BBEdit inserts an appropriate number of spaces instead of a tab character every time you press the Tab key Chapter 10 Preferences Note Show Invisibles This option shows or hides non printing characters in the window Select this option when you want to see line breaks tabs and gremlins invisible characters BBEdit uses these symbols to represent non printing characters Symbol Meaning A tab 7 space non breaking space a line break q page break other non printing characters Show Spaces If this setting is selected and Show Invisibles is active BBEdit will display placeholder characters for spaces Deselect this option to suppress the display of spaces which will reduce clutter when you are displaying invisible characters Non breaking spaces typed by pressing Option space will not be displayed with a placeholder Syntax Coloring When this option is selected and the editing window contains a document in one of the languages that BBEdit knows how to parse BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color The languages that BBEdit knows about are those listed in the Languages panel of the Preferences window Remember that the document must be saved to a file and that the file must end with a suffix extension that maps to a language that BBEdit can parse You can select the colors that BBEdit
494. up Update Document Cmd Ctl X Markup Misc Index Site Cmd Ctl Y Markup Check Document Syntax Cmd Ctl Z Edit Clear Undo History Cmd Ctl Window Send To Back Cmd Opt B Markup Check Balance Tags Cmd Opt D File Reveal Selection Cmd Opt E Search Enter Replace String Cmd Opt F Search Quick Search Listing by Default Key Equivalent Key Command Cmd Opt Search Go to Line Cmd Opt L Edit Select Paragraph Cmd Opt M Markup Edit Tag Cmd Opt N File New Disk Browser Cmd Opt P File Print All Cmd Opt R CodeWarrior Run Cmd Opt S File Save All Cmd Opt T Markup Utilities Translate Cmd Opt W File Close All Windows Cmd Opt Text Rewrap Quoted Text Cmd Opt Edit Find All Misspelled Words Cmd Opt gt Text Exchange Words Cmd Opt View Previous Document Cmd Opt View Next Document Cmd Opt Zoom Window Full Screen Cmd Opt Search Replace All Cmd Opt Text Hard Wrap Cmd Opt down arrow Search Go to Next Error Cmd Opt up arrow Search Go to Previous Error Cmd Opt Shift E Search Enter Replace Pattern Cmd Opt Shift F Markup Utilities Format Cmd Opt Shift CodeWarrior Set Breakpoint amp Go Cmd Opt Shift N File New with Clipboard Cmd Opt Shift S File Save a Copy to FTP Server Cmd Opt Shift W File Close All Documents Cmd Shift A Edit Select None Cmd Shift C Edit Copy amp Append Cmd Shift E Sea
495. ur home folder and your Sites folder Sites before you can preview documents via Personal Web Sharing Your home folder should have permissions of at least drwx x x and your Sites directory should have permissions of at least drwxr xr x To set these permissions using the Terminal application you can issue the following commands usernames cd usernames cd username chmod 711 username usernames cd username chmod 755 Sites where the command text is shown in bold and username is the short form of your user account name You can also use any file utility which is capable of setting folder permissions such as Super Get Info to make these changes 210 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note HTML Tool Descriptions This section describes all of the HTML Tools as they appear in the hierarchical Markup menu For a description of the tools as they appear on the palette see the HTML Tool Palette Index which appears after the tool descriptions Tools that create tags insert the tag at the insertion point unless otherwise specified Such tools also place an end tag automatically where appropriate You should already be familiar with HTML before using BBEdit s HTML tools The dialogs BBEdit displays will help you associate correct attributes with each tag and provide shortcuts to help you enter information but they do not and cannot tell what the final results of your markup will be There is no substi
496. ured text technique to create markers for mail digests Assume that each digest is separated by the following lines From Sadie Burke lt sadie burke com gt Date Sun 16 Jul 1995 13 17 45 0700 Subject Fishing with the judge Suppose you want the marker text to list the subject and the sender You would use the following search string From t r rSubject t And mark the text with this replacement string 2 M Note that for the sequence r r in the middle of the search string the r before Subject is necessary because as previously discussed the special character does not match carriage returns At least not by default See Advanced Topics below for details on how to make dot match any character including carriage returns Rearranging Name Lists You can use grep patterns to transform a list of names in first name first form to last name first order for a later sorting for instance Assume that the names are in the form Junior X Potter Jill Safai Dylan Schuyler Goode Walter Wang Chapter 8 Searching with Grep If you use this search pattern And this replacement string 2 NI The transformed list becomes Potter Junior X Safai Jill Goode Dylan Schuyler Wang Walter Advanced Grep Topics BBEdit s new PCRE based grep engine offers unparalleled syntactical power The topics below cover areas that show how grep can effectively match very complicat
497. used for this or for any other kinds of strings that may be needed The escape values if matched within a string cause the character following not to be taken to have any special meaning and passed over If the End of line Ends Strings value is true the escape can be used to pass over the end of the line and allow the string to continue on the following line In any case the escape may also be used to skip over the leading or only character in the Close Strings value and allow that value to be included in the string 344 Appendix D Codeless Language Modules Index Symbols bbpragma 209 Home and End Keys 171 A A anchor tag 227 ABBR tag 230 Absoft Fortran 197 active windows 46 ActiveX controls 228 Add amp Compile command 301 Add command 301 ADDRESS tag 223 alternation 137 Anchor command 227 AppleScript 15 20 attaching scripts to menu items 266 in HTML documents 334 pitfalls 276 reading dictionary 270 recording 266 APPLET tag 228 Application Preferences 165 Application Services 165 Apply to New command 124 Apply to Old command 124 AREA tag 229 Arrange command 103 arranging windows 103 arrow keys 324 ASCII table 100 attaching scripts to menu items 266 Auto Complete Glossary command 247 Auto Indenting Remove Leading Whitespace 171 automatic backups 41 Automator 94 available actions 96 B bold tag 231 backgrounds in HTML documents 221 backups 40 automatic 41 manual 41 bac
498. used in conjunction with lookbehind assertions to specify efficient matching at the end of a line of text Consider a simple pattern such as abcd when applied to a long line of text which does not match in other words a long line of text that does not end with abcd Because matching proceeds from left to right the grep engine will look for each a in the subject and then see if what follows matches the rest of the pattern If the pattern is specified as abcds Chapter 8 Searching with Grep the initial matches the entire line at first but when this fails because there is no following a it backtracks to match all but the last character then all but the last two characters and so on Once again the search for a covers the entire string from right to left so we are no better off However if the pattern is written as 2 gt lt abcd there can be no backtracking for the item it can match only the entire line The subsequent lookbehind assertion does a single test on the last four characters If it fails the whole match fails immediately For long strings this approach makes a significant difference to the processing time When a pattern contains an unlimited repeat inside a subpattern that can itself be repeated an unlimited number of times the use of a once only subpattern is the only way to avoid some failing matches taking a very long time literally millions or even billions
499. ut such as Dvorak or a keyboard layout for a Roman language such as French However since the Roman script is suitable for several languages choosing one of these keyboard layouts still leaves you in the Roman script Chapter 3 Working with Files Note International Text in BBEdit As a text editor BBEdit supports only one font per document window though it can display all available characters in the active font including Unicode characters BBEdit supports editing in all languages which use left to right text input methods To start entering text in any supported language choose a suitable input method from the Input menu The icon for that method will appear in the menu bar in place of either the American flag for the U S English layout or the icon for your usual Roman keyboard layout If you have turned off the Try to match keyboard with text option in the Options dialog of the International section of the System Preferences you may also need to select a suitable display font via the Font panel We recommend leaving this option on so that BBEdit can automatically switch to the correct input method when you change document windows You can use international text throughout BBEdit for example in the Find amp Replace dialog in the HTML Tools and everywhere else you would use Roman text Likewise BBEdit will provide the necessary style information so that if you copy and paste or drag and drop international text
500. uts for Commands 0 c cece cece eee nee 309 Assigning Keys to Menu Commands 0 00 e cece cence ences 310 Available Key Combinations 310 Listing by Menu and Command Name 0 cece eee eee ees 311 Listing by Default Key Equivalent 6 ccc cee cece eee nee 318 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands Many of BBEdit s commands have pre defined keyboard shortcuts BBEdit also lets you reassign the shortcuts for any menu command glossary entry plug in or script to suit your own way of working To change the keyboard shortcut for any menu command you can use the Set Menu Keys command See Assigning Keys to Menu Commands on the following page Many other BBEdit features can have keyboard shortcuts assigned as well Here s how to set them Feature Set Keys in Menu commands Set Menu Keys on the BBEdit menu Plug ins Plug In Tools palette Glossary items Glossary palette Scripts Scripts palette Unix filters and scripts Unix Filters and Scripts palettes Stationery Stationery palette To display any of BBEdit s floating palette windows use the Palettes submenu in the Window menu 309 310 Assigning Keys to Menu Commands You can assign your own keyboard shortcuts key equivalents to any of BBEdit s menu commands as well as items on the Text Options Markers and Line Breaks status bar pop up menus by choosing Set Menu Keys from the BBEdit menu The Set Menu Keys
501. various scripting facilities while the following section covers BBEdit s scripting commands and other issues related to preparing scripts for use Recording Scripts in BBEdit Any language is easier to read than to write easier to understand than to speak AppleScript is no different That s because even though all the commands it uses are English words arranged in ways that more or less make grammatical sense you still have to know or find out from the application s dictionary exactly which words to use and what order they should go in But it is easy to get started making scripts by recording them First launch both BBEdit and the Script Editor Using AppleScripts in BBEdit 263 264 Note When you launch the Script Editor a new blank script window appears Click the Record button circled in the illustration below Untitled Run Compile Description _ Result Event Log Now switch to BBEdit and perform your task Remember that the Script Editor is recording everything you do in every recordable application you are running not just BBEdit If you do something in the Finder for instance that will get recorded too Since almost everything you do is recorded remember that if you make an error and then Undo it your recorded script will faithfully make the same mistake and undo it when you run it later It will be possible to fix minor errors later but things always go more smoothly if you do not make any mistakes
502. ve As new_page html fa Sm Gss B 5 Documents a Network Library a Movies HIE Desktop Music 8 duplo 2 Pictures 8 Public A Applications i Documents a Movies 6 Music fm Pictures LINIES C Save as Stationery New Folder Cancel gt E Save 2 Give the file a name 3 Change any desired options see below 4 Click Save to save the file 22 Chapter 3 Working with Files You can also create a new document from the selected text in any open window with BBEdit s contextual menu Simply Control click the selected text and choose New with selection or Save Selection from the menu that appears Depending on which command you choose BBEdit will either create a new editing window containing the selected text or display the Save dialog and allow you to create a new file containing the selected text The new file will use the same options see File Saving Options below as those of the original parent document If you want to save a copy of a file using the currently selected text as the file name hold down the Option key and choose Save As Selection from the File menu BBEdit displays the Save dialog with the selected text already entered as the file s name Saving a Copy of a File You can save a copy of a file with BBEdit s Save a Copy command in the File menu Just like the Save As command the Save a Copy command displays a Save dialog and lets you choose a name and loc
503. ves document states by means of the Save Document State option in the Text Files Saving panel of the Preferences window BBEdit no longer saves document state in the resource fork of the document s file and does not distinguish between the MPW and BBEdit state information created by older versions This change offers a number of advantages including no longer creating resource forks for files better compatibility with source control systems and easier personalization when working with shared files other users display options do not affect you Long File Names BBEdit fully supports the use of long and Unicode file names Such file names can be up to 255 characters long when stored on disks formatted as HFS Plus Saving with Authentication BBEdit supports saving files that require Administrator privileges if you possess the necessary user and password information to enable this For example you can edit and save files that are owned by and only readable by the root user Authenticated saving is particularly useful in conjunction with BBEdit s Open Hidden command which allows you to see and open files in hidden folders like bin and usr Chapter 3 Working with Files When you open a file for which you do not have write privileges BBEdit will display a slash through the pencil icon in the status bar To edit the file click the pencil icon BBEdit will prompt you to confirm whether you wish to unlock t
504. vice versa The dialog that appears gives you flexible options for translating Macintosh characters to HTML entities converting paragraphs to lt P gt tags and vice versa removing HTML tags entirely and so on You can choose to have the results displayed in a new document window and to convert only the selection rather than the whole document See HTML Translation later in this chapter for more information Remove Comments or Markup This command removes all HTML comments or HTML tags respectively from the selection Note that removing comments will not remove comment markers around client side scripts like JavaScript where they are required for proper functioning of the page on older browsers but will remove the comment markers used by placeholders and indexes making these items difficult to update in the future Comment Uncomment Comment adds comment markers lt gt around the selected text regardless of whether it already contains tags or not causing the browser to ignore that text It also converts any previously existing comment markers in the selection range to use in place of to prevent older browsers from misinterpreting the comment Uncomment removes all comment tags from the selection and converts any modified comments back to real HTML comments HTML Tool Descriptions 235 236 Normalize Tag Case Make Tags Upper or Lower Case These commands convert all HTML tags in the document to the desired case
505. whether BBEdit should attempt to automatically resize and reposition windows during a Find Differences operation The Hide Palettes option determines whether palettes will automatically be hidden during a Find Difference operation Documents Preferences The Documents preferences control how BBEdit handles opening text documents and creating text windows New amp Opened Documents You can specify whether newly created or opened documents always should be opened into the frontmost text window or whether each document should be opened into its own text window Documents Opened from Other Applications You can specify whether documents opened from other applications should be opened into the frontmost text window or whether each document should be opened into its own text window Examples of opening documents from another application include using the Edit in BBEdit command from an FIP client such as Interarchy and double clicking files in the Finder Warn Before Closing a Window Containing Multiple Documents Choose this option to have BBEdit warn you when you attempt to close a window with more than one document in it This warning will not occur if e BBEdit is quitting e Any of the documents in the window contain unsaved changes since BBEdit already asks for confirmation to save changes Chapter 10 Preferences Documents Drawer Preferences Open the Documents Drawer You can specify when a new text window will dis
506. window Tab Stops This option shows or hides tab stop indicators in the window Show Invisibles This option shows or hides non printing characters in the window Select this option when you want to see line breaks tabs and gremlins other invisible characters BBEdit uses these symbols Symbol Meaning A tab 0 space non breaking space line break q page break other non printing or special characters Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note IMPORTANT Note When the Show Invisibles option is selected the Show Spaces suboption is available allowing you to turn off display of the visually noisy space characters if desired Syntax Coloring When this option is selected and the editing window contains a document in a programming language BBEdit recognizes BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color BBEdit uses several methods to determine what language if any to use for a particular file The primary way to activate syntax coloring in a document is simply to save it with a file name extension that indicates what programming or markup language the file contains For example if you save your file with html at the end of the file name BBEdit will color your HTML tags and anchors Other common suffixes are tex for TeX files and c for C files For any file whose name does not have an extension or whose name has an extension that does not
507. with ALT text to be displayed if the applet cannot be used Object The lt OBJECT gt tag is a generic tag for including almost any type of data in a page including images and Java applets It can also be used to insert ActiveX controls and data intended to be used by plug ins However it is an HTML 4 tag and may not be supported in all popular browsers For this reason we suggest using lt IMG gt and lt APPLET gt for those types of objects and use lt OBJECT gt only for embedding other types of data such as that used by plug ins For an example of this see the Web Design Group s HTML Help reference page http www htmlhelp com reference htm140 special object html The lt OBJECT gt tag like the lt IMG gt and lt APPLET gt tags allows you to reserve screen space in the browser window recommend an amount of white space between the object and surrounding text align the object set its border specify alt text to be displayed if the object cannot be displayed and so forth You will also need to specify at least the codebase and class ID of the object for ActiveX controls and fill in the Data field for embedded objects such as Shockwave animations which will be handled by plug ins The Standby field can be used to tell browsers a text message to be displayed while the object is loading For more information on the lt OBJECT gt tag consult the HTML 4 specification Param To pass parameters to a Java applet ActiveX control o
508. wn and to the left straight down directly atop or down and to the right BBEdit stacks windows down and to the left by default Leave Room for Palettes When this option is on BBEdit leaves room for any open floating palettes when creating or rearranging windows if the palettes are stacked together such that at least one is against either the right hand or left hand edge of the screen This option is on by default Leave Room for DragThing Docks When this option is on BBEdit will also leave room for any visible DragThing docks when creating or rearranging windows Leave Room for Finder When these options are selected BBEdit leaves room at the right side and or the bottom of the screen so that you can see icons on the desktop These options are off by default Optional settings via defaults write In addition to the preference settings which can be made through the Preferences window BBEdit permits the following additional modifications to its behavior which you can make by issuing an appropriate defaults write command Optional settings via defaults write 199 200 Remove FTP SFTP Commands from Menus If you never use BBEdit s FTP SFTP related commands such as Open from FTP SFTP Server Save A Copy to FIP SFTP Server etc you can remove them from the menus by issuing the following command in the Terminal and then quitting and relaunching BBEdit defaults write com barebones bbedit FTP HideFTPMenuC
509. word List array see below BBLMScansFunctions Boolean This must have the value true for the text to be scanned to locate function definitions and for a popup menu of function names to be built that allows for quick navigation to those functions This requires the Identifier and Keyword Characters string described below to be properly specified BBLMIsCaseSensitive Boolean If this has the value false letters in keywords and other strings are matched against the text without regard to whether they are both upper or lower case The value true means that an x for example will only match another x and not an X BBLMKeywordList Array of String Whenever a string is found to match one of the strings in this array it is specially colored For this to happen the Identifier and Keyword Characters string described below must be properly specified also BBLMSuffixMap Array of Dictionaries Each dictionary entry in this array should contain some or all of the following key value pairs Appendix D Codeless Language Modules Key Value Type BBLMLanguageSuffix String Files with names that end with this string value are considered to be files of this module s language The first character in the suffix string is usually a dot period full stop whatever This string must be present and non empty or the entire dictionary entry will be ignored Bear in mind that if a suffix is given th
510. y if the current document is an XML document you can insert an XML Declaration either alone or in addition to the Meta Tag by checking the XML Declaration box and clicking Apply HTML Tool Descriptions 213 IMPORTANT CSS Submenu This submenu allows you to create edit and format Cascading Style Sheet markup BBEdit has built in support for CSS When you are editing stand alone CSS files or HTML files with embedded CSS syntax coloring is available and the Function pop up menu in the status bar lists CSS selectors as well as CSS files referenced by import directives and lt link gt tags Choose an external stylesheet from the Function pop up and BBEdit will open that stylesheet for editing BBEdit 8 supports all CSS 2 1 properties Although there are no explicit dialog editors for many such properties you can create or modify them using the Tag Maker command or by using Insert Property from the contextual menu The CSS function parser supports the following syntax for laying a mark in the function menu bbmark string to appear in the menu import The import directive instructs a Web browser to load an external style sheet This dialog box allows you to select a file or drag and drop one from the Finder and choose whether to use the optional url notation for specifying the location of the style sheet Remember that import must come before other CSS rules inside a lt style gt tag or ina stand alone CSS document
511. y Asked Questions FAQ Information and answers for commonly encountered questions and problems We strongly recommend you read the BBEdit FAQ before resorting to any other means of inquiry e Product Updates The latest maintenance versions of our products will always be available for download e Technical Support If you have a registered version of BBEdit or any other Bare Bones product and you can t find the information you need on our web site send email to lt support barebones com gt Support Services Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit CHAPTER IMPORTANT Installing BBEdit This chapter tells you how to install BBEdit on your Macintosh It also describes the files BBEdit creates where it puts them and how to install or remove optional components of BBEdit In this chapter Basic Installation sei aa iaa cece cee een etn n ene EE 9 System Requirements 9 Installing BBEdit 9 Updating an Existing Copy 10 Upgrading from a Previous Version 10 First Run Configuration 10 Activating the Demo 11 BBEdit s Application Support Folders 0 6 cece cece eens 12 Using the Global Application Support Folder 12 Using a Local Application Support Folder 12 Application Support Folder Contents 12 Glossary 13 HTML Templates 13 Language Modules 13 Menu Scripts 13 Plug Ins 14 Scripts 14 Shutdown Items 15 Startup Items 15 Stationery 15 Text
512. y Project Scripts MyDateScript An instance of a placeholder referencing the latter would be script Hard Drive My Project Scripts MyDateScript The script must return a text string or a value that can be coerced to a string This result string can itself contain additional glossary placeholders which will be interpreted before the item is inserted in the current document Note that this makes it possible for one script to invoke another Take care not to create a script execution loop which would hang your system Using Scripts with the Glossary 251 252 Chapter 12 Using the Glossary CHAPTER IMPORTANT Scripting BBEdit BBEdit offers access to nearly all of its features and commands via AppleScript This chapter provides a brief overview of AppleScript discusses BBEdit s scripting model and explains how you can use scripts within BBEdit An excellent way to learn how to script BBEdit is to look at the scripts others have written for it or to turn on recording in your script editor while you perform actions in BBEdit A number of example scripts are included in the standard distribution package The BBEdit Talk mailing list is also a good resource for learning more about scripting To subscribe to this list please visit the support section of our web site http www barebones com support lists html Regardless of whether you are new to scripting BBEdit or are familiar with scripting previous versions we stron
513. y other parameters you desire including whether to color syntax elements color a set of keywords honor case sensitivity and more You should save the file with a plist filename extension If a module fails to load BBEdit will write some diagnostic information to the system console 337 Starting from a Template The easiest way to begin creating a codeless language module is to start from a template or an existing module The template provided on the following page contains all required key value pairs plus a selection of additional parameters which you can fill out or remove as desired 338 Appendix D Codeless Language Modules CodelessLanguageModuleTemplate plist lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DOCTYPE plist PUBLIC Apple Computer DTD PLIST 1 0 EN http www apple com DTDs PropertyList 1 0 dtd gt lt plist version 1 0 gt lt dict gt key gt BBEditDocumentType lt key gt string gt CodelessLanguageModule lt string gt key gt BBLMColorsSyntax lt key gt lt true gt key gt BBLMIsCaseSensitive lt key gt lt true gt key gt BBLMKeywordList lt key gt array gt lt string gt lt string gt array gt key gt BBLMLanguageCode lt key gt string gt lt string gt key gt BBLMLanguageDisplayName lt key gt string gt lt string gt key gt BBLMScansFunctions lt key gt lt true gt key gt BBLMSuf fixMap lt key gt array gt lt dict gt lt key gt BBLMLanguageSuffix lt key gt lt
514. ypes of documents Lines and Display_lines The line element refers to a hard line that is a stream of characters that begins at the start of file or after a line break and which ends at the end of file or immediately before a line break This is consistent with the previous semantics of line in hard wrapped documents and these semantics now apply in soft wrapped documents as well The display_line element refers to a line of text as displayed on screen bounded by soft and or hard line breaks The startLine and endLine properties of a text object now always refer to the hard start and end of lines In other words if a text object crosses multiple soft wrapped lines the startLine and endLine properties will be the same Both startDisplayLine and endDisplayLine properties are now part of the text object class These serve the same purpose as the startLine and endLine semantics for soft wrapped views in older versions of BBEdit Getting and Setting Properties One significant improvement in BBEdit s new scripting framework is the ability to get and set multiple properties of an object with a single scripting command Every object has a property called properties This property returns a record which contains all of the properties which can be fetched for that object For example the script command properties of text window 1 will return a result like this one id
515. yping key equivalents This option is off by default According to the Macintosh Human Interface Guidelines menu commands should not autorepeat If you chose to enable this option you do so forewarned When Dragging Show These radio buttons control the way selected text is displayed while tracking mouse movements during a drag and drop operation choose Outline Only to have the selection displayed as an outline or Translucent Image to have the selection displayed as visible translucent text List Display Font This option controls the font and size used to display text in browser list panes including disk browser search results browsers etc To change this option click Set to bring up the standard Font panel and choose the desired font and size The default setting is 11 point Lucida Grande Verify Open Files After If you frequently make changes to files with another program while they are open in BBEdit or you often edit shared files that might be changed by someone else you may want to mark one or more of these checkboxes If the option for Activating BBEdit is checked for instance BBEdit will check the modification date of each open document every time you switch to BBEdit alerting you if any changes have been made to the file while BBEdit was not the frontmost application Similar functions are available to perform this check after running an AppleScript a BBEdit plug in or a Unix script or activating a text window The

BBEdit 8.2 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents